FREE ENGLISH INOVANCE SV660NT021I (01) PDF USER GUIDE
FREE ENGLISH INOVANCE SV660NT021I (01) PDF USER MANUAL
FREE ENGLISH INOVANCE SV660NT021I (01) PDF OWNER GUIDE
FREE ENGLISH INOVANCE SV660NT021I (01) PDF OWNER MANUAL
FREE ENGLISH INOVANCE SV660NT021I (01) PDF REFERENCE GUIDE
FREE ENGLISH INOVANCE SV660NT021I (01) PDF INSTRUCTION GUIDE
FREE ENGLISH INOVANCE SV660NT021I (01) PDF REFERENCE MANUAL
FREE ENGLISH INOVANCE SV660NT021I (01) PDF INSTRUCTION MANUAL
FREE ENGLISH INOVANCE SV660NT021I (01) PDF OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
CLICK HERE TO DOWNLOAD INOVANCE SV660NT021I (01) PDF MANUAL
If this is not the document you want for this product, click here to see if we have any other documents for this product.
What precautions should be taken when using the user guide for the SV660N series servo drive?
The drawings in the user guide are sometimes shown without covers or protective guards. Remember to install the covers or protective guards as specified first, and then perform operations in accordance with the instructions described in the user guide.
The drawings in the user guide are shown for descriptions only and may not match the product you purchased.
This user guide is subject to change without notice due to product upgrade, specification modifications as well as efforts to improve the accuracy and convenience of the user guide.
What items should be checked upon unpacking the SV660N series servo drive?
Check the following items upon unpacking:
| Items | Description |
|---|---|
| Check whether the delivered products comply with your order. | Check whether the delivered products comply with the model and specifications shown on the packing box. |
| Check whether the delivered product is intact. | Check whether the overall appearance of the product is intact. If there is any part missing or damaged, contact Inovance or your supplier immediately. |
What is the revision history of this user guide?
| Date | Version | Description |
|---|---|---|
| October 2020 | A00 | First release |
What standards do the SV660N series servo drives and MS1 series servo motors comply with?
SV660N series servo drives and MS1 series servo motors have passed CE certification and comply with the following standards:
| Name | Symbol | Directive | Standard | |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| CE certification | CE | EMC directive 2014/30/EU | Servo drive and servo motor | EN 61800-3 |
| EN55011 | EN61000-6-2 | |||
| EN61000-6-4 | ||||
| LVD directive 2014/35/EU | Servo drive | EN 61800-5-1 | ||
| Servo motor | EN 60034-1 | |||
| RoHS directive 2011/65/EU | EN 50581 |
NOTE:
The preceding certification and standards are complied with only when the EMC-related electrical installation requirements described in this user guide are observed.
The integrator who integrates this drive into other products and attaches the CE mark to the final assembly has the responsibility of ensuring compliance with CE standards and the European Directives.
For more information on product certification, contact our agents or sales representatives.
What general safety precautions must be followed before installing, using, and maintaining the SV660N equipment?
1) Before installing, using, and maintaining this equipment, read the safety information and precautions thoroughly, and comply with them during operations.
2) To ensure the safety of humans and equipment, follow the signs on the equipment and all the safety instructions in this user guide.
3) “CAUTION”, “WARNING”, and “DANGER” items in the user guide do not indicate all safety precautions that need to be followed; instead, they just supplement the safety precautions.
4) Use this equipment according to the designated environment requirements. Damage caused by improper usage is not covered by warranty.
5) Inovance shall take no responsibility for any personal injuries or property damage caused by improper usage.
How are safety levels defined in the user guide?
DANGER: Indicates that failure to comply with the notice will result in severe personal injuries or even death.
WARNING: Indicates that failure to comply with the notice may result in severe personal injuries or even death.
CAUTION: Indicates that failure to comply with the notice may result in minor or moderate personal injuries or equipment damage.
What should be checked during unpacking to ensure safety and product integrity?
CAUTION
Check whether the packing is intact and whether there is damage, water seepage, damp, and deformation.
Unpack the package by following the package sequence. Do not hit the package with force.
Check whether there are damage, rust, or injuries on the surface of the equipment or equipment accessories.
Check whether the number of packing materials is consistent with the packing list.
WARNING
Do not install the equipment if you find damage, rust, or indications of use on the equipment or accessories.
Do not install the equipment if you find water seepage, component missing or damage upon unpacking.
Do not install the equipment if you find the packing list does not conform to the equipment you received.
What are the safety instructions for storage and transportation of the equipment?
CAUTION
Store and transport this equipment based on the storage and transportation requirements for humidity and temperature.
Avoid transporting the equipment in environments such as water splashing, rain, direct sunlight, strong electric field, strong magnetic field, and strong vibration.
Avoid storing this equipment for more than three months. Long-term storage requires stricter protection and necessary inspections.
Pack the equipment strictly before transportation. Use a sealed box for long-distance transportation.
Never transport this equipment with other equipment or materials that may harm or have negative impacts on this equipment.
WARNING
Use professional loading and unloading equipment to carry large-scale or heavy equipment.
When carrying this equipment with bare hands, hold the equipment casing firmly with care to prevent parts falling. Failure to comply may result in personal injuries.
Handle the equipment with care during transportation and mind your step to prevent personal injuries or equipment damage.
Never stand or stay below the equipment when the equipment is lifted by hoisting equipment.
What are the safety instructions for installation of the equipment?
WARNING
Thoroughly read the safety instructions and user guide before installation.
Do not modify this equipment.
Do not rotate the equipment components or loosen fixed bolts (especially those marked in red) on equipment components.
Do not install this equipment in places with strong electric or magnetic fields.
When this equipment is installed in a cabinet or final equipment, protection measures such as a fireproof enclosure, electrical enclosure, or mechanical enclosure must be provided. The IP rating must meet IEC standards and local laws and regulations.
DANGER
Equipment installation, wiring, maintenance, inspection, or parts replacement must be performed only by professionals.
Installation, wiring, maintenance, inspection, or parts replacement must be performed only by experienced personnel who have been trained with necessary electrical information.
Installation personnel must be familiar with equipment installation requirements and relevant technical materials.
Before installing equipment with strong electromagnetic interference, such as a transformer, install an electromagnetic shielding device for this equipment to prevent malfunctions.
What are the safety instructions for wiring the equipment?
DANGER
Equipment installation, wiring, maintenance, inspection, or parts replacement must be performed only by professionals.
Never perform wiring at power-on. Failure to comply will result in an electric shock.
Before wiring, cut off all equipment power supplies. Wait at least 15 minutes before further operations because residual voltage exists after power-off.
Make sure that the equipment is well grounded. Failure to comply will result in an electric shock.
During wiring, follow the proper electrostatic discharge (ESD) procedures, and wear an antistatic wrist strap. Failure to comply will result in damage to internal equipment circuits.
WARNING
Never connect the power cable to output terminals of the equipment. Failure to comply may cause equipment damage or even a fire.
When connecting a drive with the motor, make sure that the phase sequences of the drive and motor terminals are consistent to prevent reverse motor rotation.
Wiring cables must meet cross sectional area and shielding requirements. The shielding layer of the shielded cable must be reliably grounded at one end.
After wiring, make sure that no screws are fallen and cables are exposed in the equipment.
What are the safety instructions for powering on the equipment?
DANGER
Before power-on, make sure that the equipment is installed properly with reliable wiring and the motor can be restarted.
Before power-on, make sure that the power supply meets equipment requirements to prevent equipment damage or even a fire.
At power-on, unexpected operations may be triggered on the equipment. Therefore, stay away from the equipment.
After power-on, do not open the cabinet door and protective cover of the equipment. Failure to comply will result in an electric shock.
Do not touch any wiring terminals at power-on. Failure to comply will result in an electric shock.
Do not remove any part of the equipment at power-on. Failure to comply will result in an electric shock.
What are the safety instructions for operating the equipment?
DANGER
Do not touch any wiring terminals during operation. Failure to comply will result in an electric shock.
Do not remove any part of the equipment during operation. Failure to comply will result in an electric shock.
Do not touch the equipment enclosure, fan, or resistor for temperature detection. Failure to comply will result in heat injuries.
Signal detection must be performed only by professionals during operation. Failure to comply will result in personal injuries or equipment damage.
WARNING
Prevent metal or other objects from falling into the device during operation. Failure to comply may result in equipment damage.
Do not start or stop the equipment using a contactor. Failure to comply may result in equipment damage.
What are the safety instructions for maintaining the equipment?
DANGER
Equipment installation, wiring, maintenance, inspection, or parts replacement must be performed only by professionals.
Do not maintain the equipment at power-on. Failure to comply will result in an electric shock.
Before maintenance, cut off all equipment power supplies and wait at least 15 minutes.
WARNING
Perform daily and periodic inspection and maintenance for the equipment according to maintenance requirements and keep a maintenance record.
What are the safety instructions for repairing the equipment?
DANGER
Equipment installation, wiring, maintenance, inspection, or parts replacement must be performed only by professionals.
Do not repair the equipment at power-on. Failure to comply will result in an electric shock.
Before inspection and repair, cut off all equipment power supplies and wait at least 15 minutes.
WARNING
Require for repair services according to the product warranty agreement.
When the equipment is faulty or damaged, require professionals to perform troubleshooting and repair by following repair instructions and keep a repair record.
Replace quick-wear parts of the equipment according to the replacement guide.
Do not operate damaged equipment. Failure to comply may result in worse damage.
After the equipment is replaced, perform wiring inspection and parameter settings again.
What are the safety instructions for disposing of the equipment?
WARNING
Dispose of retired equipment by following local regulations or standards. Failure to comply may result in property damage, personal injuries, or even death.
Recycle retired equipment by following industry waste disposal standards to avoid environmental pollution.
What do the safety signs in the user guide mean?
Read the user guide before installation and operation.
Reliably ground the system and equipment.
Danger!
High temperature!
Prevent personal injuries caused by machines.
High voltage!
Wait 15 minutes before further operations.
What do the safety signs on the equipment mean?
For safe equipment operation and maintenance, comply with safety signs on the equipment, and do not damage or remove the safety labels. The following table describes the safety signs:
| Safety Sign (Description) | Meaning |
|---|---|
| 危险 DANGER | Never fail to connect the Protective Earth (PE) terminal. Read the user guide and follow the safety instructions before use. |
| 高压注意 Hazardous Voltage | To prevent the risk of electric shock, do not touch terminals within 15 minutes after cutting off the power supply. |
| 高温注意 High Temperature | To prevent the risk of burning, do not touch the heatsink when the power supply is ON. |
How is the SV660N series servo drive model number structured?
The model number SV 660 N S 2R8 I – FH is structured as follows:
SV: Product Family – Servo
660: Product Series – 660 series
N: Product Type – Network type
S: Voltage Class
- S: 220 V
- T: 380 V
2R8: Rated output current
- 1R6: 1.6 A
- 2R8: 2.8 A
- 3R5: 3.5 A
- 5R4: 5.4 A
- 5R5: 5.5 A
- 7R6: 7.6 A
- 8R4: 8.4 A
- 012: 12 A
- 017: 17 A
- 021: 21 A
- 026: 26 A
I: Installation Mode – Baseplate installation (standard)
FH: Customized Function
- None: Standard
- FH: High protection
- FS: STO function
How is the serial number (S/N) of the SV660N servo drive encrypted?
The serial number, for example 010501934H700001, indicates the servo drive is manufactured in July 2017. The encryption is as follows:
01****: Internal part number
4: Manufacturer Code (Suzhou Inovance)
H: Year
- 9: 2009
- A: 2010
- B: 2011
- … (By analogy, letters I, L, O, or Q are not used)
7: Month
- 1: January
- 2: February
- 3: March
- …
- A: October
- B: November
- C: December
00001: Product No. (1st to 99999th in current month)
What are the components of the SV660N servo drive (Size A)?
| No. | Name | Description |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | CN6 and CN5 | CN6: Functional safety terminal mainly used for functional safety purpose, connected to the external functional safety signal. CN5: Software tool communication terminal. |
| 2 | LED display (5-digit) | Used to display servo drive operation states and parameter settings. |
| 3 | Buttons | MODE: Used to switch parameters in sequence. Δ: Used to increase the value of the blinking digit. ∇: Used to decrease the value of the blinking digit. <<: Used to shift the blinking digit leftwards. (Held down: Used to turn to the next page when the display value is comprised of more than five digits.) SET: Used to save modifications and enter the next menu. |
| 4 | CN3, CN4 (EtherCAT communication terminals) | CN3 (IN): Connected to the master or the last slave. CN4 (OUT): Connected to the next slave. |
| 5 | CN1 (control terminal) | Used by reference input signals and other I/O signals. |
| 6 | CN2 (terminal for connecting the encoder) | Connected to motor encoder terminals. |
| 7 | CHARGE (bus voltage indicator) | Used to indicate that the bus capacitor carries electric charge. When this indicator lights up, electric charge may be still present in the internal capacitor of the servo drive even if the main circuit power supply is cut off. To prevent electrical shock, do not touch the power terminals when this indicator lights up. |
| 8 | L1, L2 (power input terminals) | See the nameplate for the rated voltage of the power supply. |
| 8 | P, N (DC bus terminals) | Used as the common DC bus for multiple servo drives. |
| 9 | P, C (terminals for connecting external regenerative resistor) | When an external regenerative resistor is needed, connect it between terminals P and C. |
| 10 | U, V, W (terminals for connecting the servo motor) | Connected to U, V, and W phases of the servo motor. |
| 11 | PE (grounding terminal) | Connected to the power supply ground and the motor grounding terminal. |
| 12 | Battery location | Used to hold the battery box of the absolute encoder. |
What are the components of the SV660N servo drive (Size B)?
| No. | Name | Description |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | CN6, CN5 | CN6: Functional safety terminal mainly used for functional safety purpose and connected to external functional safety signal. CN5: Software tool communication terminal. |
| 2 | LED display (5-digit) | Used to display servo drive operation states and parameter settings. |
| 3 | Buttons | MODE: Used to switch the parameter No. in sequence. Δ: Used to increase the set value of the blinking digit. ∇: Used to decrease the set value of the blinking digit. <<: Used to shift the blinking digit leftwards. (Held down: Used to turn to the next page when the display value is comprised of more than five digits.) SET: Used to save modifications and enter the next level of menu. |
| 4 | CN3, CN4 (EtherCAT communication terminals) | CN3 (IN): Connected to the master or the last slave. CN4 (OUT): Connected to the next slave. |
| 5 | CN1 (control terminal) | Used for reference input signal and other I/O signals. |
| 6 | CN2 (terminal for connecting the encoder) | Connected to motor encoder terminals. |
| 7 | CHARGE (bus voltage indicator) | Used to indicate that the bus capacitor carries electric charge. When this indicator lights up, electric charge may be still present in the internal capacitor of the servo drive even if the main circuit power supply is cut off. To prevent electrical shock, do not touch the power terminals when this indicator lights up. |
| 8 | L1, L2, L3 (power input terminals) | See the nameplate for the rated voltage of the power supply. Note: S5R5 (750 W) servo drives: Single-phase 220 V input, with 220 V power supply connected to L1 and L2. |
| 8 | P, N (DC bus terminals) | Used as the common DC bus for multiple servo drives. |
| 9 | P, D, C (terminals for connecting external regenerative resistor) | Connect the regenerative resistor between terminals P and C as needed. Remove the jumper between terminals P and D before connecting the regenerative resistor. |
| 10 | U, V, W (terminals for connecting the servo motor) | Connected to U, V, and W phases of the servo motor. |
| 11 | PE (grounding terminal) | Connected to the power supply ground and motor grounding terminal. |
| 12 | Battery location | Used to hold the battery box of the absolute encoder. |
NOTE:
Built-in regenerative resistors or jumper bars are not included in S1R6 and S2R8 models. If an external regenerative resistor is needed, connect it between terminals P and C.
To connect an external regenerative resistor to S5R5 models, remove the jumper bar between terminals P and D first and connect the resistor between terminals P and C.
What are the components of the SV660N servo drive (Size C and Size D)?
| No. | Name | Description |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | LED display (5-digit) | Used to display servo drive operation states and parameter settings. |
| 2 | Buttons | MODE: Used to switch the parameter No. in sequence. Δ: Used to increase the set value of the blinking digit. ∇: Used to decrease the set value of the blinking digit. <<: Used to shift the blinking digit leftwards. (Held down: Used to turn to the next page when the display value is comprised of more than five digits.) SET: Used to save modifications and enter the next level of menu. |
| 3 | CHARGE (bus voltage indicator) | Used to indicate that the bus capacitor carries electric charge. When this indicator lights up, electric charge may be still present in the internal capacitor of the servo drive even if the main circuit power supply is cut off. To prevent electrical shock, do not touch the power terminals when this indicator lights up. |
| 4 | L1C, L2C (control circuit power input terminals) | See the nameplate for the rated voltage of the power supply. |
| 5 | R, S, T (main circuit power input terminals) | See the nameplate for the rated voltage of the power supply. |
| 6 | P, D, C (terminals for connecting external regenerative resistor) | Connect the regenerative resistor between P and C as needed. Remove the jumper between terminals P and D before connecting the regenerative resistor. |
| 6 | P, N (DC bus terminals) | Used as the common DC bus for multiple servo drives. |
| 7 | U, V, W (terminals for connecting the servo motor) | Connected to U, V, and W phases of the servo motor. |
| 8 | PE (Grounding terminal) | Connected to the power supply ground and motor grounding terminal. |
| 9 | Battery location | Used to hold the battery box of the absolute encoder. |
| 10 | CN3, CN4 (EtherCAT terminal) | CN3(IN): Connected to the master or the last slave. CN4(OUT): Connected to the next slave. |
| 11 | CN6 (STO terminal) | Used to connect the external functional safety signal. |
| 12 | CN5 | Used as the software tool communication terminal. |
| 13 | CN1 (control terminal) | Used by reference input signals and other I/O signals. |
| 14 | CN2 (terminal for connecting the encoder) | Connected to motor encoder terminal. |
What are the components of the SV660N servo drive (Size E)?
| No. | Name | Description |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | CHARGE (bus voltage indicator) | Used to indicate that the bus capacitor carries electric charge. When this indicator lights up, electric charge may be still present in the internal capacitor of the servo drive even if the main circuit power supply is cut off. To prevent electrical shock, do not touch the power terminals when this indicator lights up. |
| 2 | L1C, L2C (control circuit power input terminals) | See the nameplate for the rated voltage of the power supply. |
| 3 | R, S, T (main circuit power input terminals) | See the nameplate for the rated voltage of the power supply. |
| 4 | U, V, W (terminals for connecting the servo motor) | Connected to U, V, and W phases of the servo motor. |
| 5 | N2, N1 (terminals for connecting the external reactor) | Terminals N1 and N2 are jumpered by default. Remove the jumper before connecting the external DC reactor between N1 and N2. |
| 6 | P, D, C (terminals for connecting external regenerative resistor) | Connect the regenerative resistor between P and C as needed. Remove the jumper between terminals P and D before connecting the regenerative resistor. |
| 7 | Battery location | Used to hold the battery box of the absolute encoder. |
| 8 | LED display (5-digit) | Used to display servo drive operation states and parameter settings. |
| 9 | Buttons | MODE: Used to switch the parameter No. in sequence. Δ: Used to increase the set value of the blinking digit. ∇: Used to decrease the set value of the blinking digit. <<: Used to shift the blinking digit leftwards. (Held down: Used to turn to the next page when the display value is comprised of more than five digits.) SET: Used to save modifications and enter the next level of menu. |
| 10 | CN3, CN4 (communication terminal) | Connected in parallel internally. Connected to RS232 and RS485 devices. |
| 11 | CN6 (STO terminal) | Used to connect the external functional safety signal. |
| 12 | CN5 | Used as the software tool communication terminal. |
| 13 | CN1 (control terminal) | Used by reference input signals and other I/O signals. |
| 14 | CN2 (terminal for connecting the encoder) | Connected to the encoder terminal. |
What are the electrical specifications for single-phase 220 V SV660N servo drives?
| Item | Size A (S1R6) | Size A (S2R8) | Size B (S5R5) |
|---|---|---|---|
| Servo drive model: SV660N | S1R6 | S2R8 | S5R5 |
| Continuous output current (Arms) | 1.6 | 2.8 | 5.5 |
| Maximum output current (Arms) | 5.8 | 10.1 | 16.9 |
| Main circuit power supply | Single-phase 200 VAC to 240 VAC, -10% to +10%, 50/60 Hz | ||
| Control circuit power supply | Single-phase 200 VAC to 240 VAC, -10% to +10%, 50/60 Hz | ||
| Braking function | Servo drives in size A support external regenerative resistors only. | Servo drives in size B carries a built-in regenerative resistor as standard. | |
What are the electrical specifications for three-phase 220 V SV660N servo drives?
| Item | Size C (S7R6) | Size D (S012) |
|---|---|---|
| Servo drive model: SV660N | S7R6 | S012 |
| Continuous output current (Arms) | 7.6 | 11.6 |
| Maximum output current (Arms) | 23 | 32 |
| Main circuit power supply | Three-phase 200 VAC to 240 VAC, -10% to +10%, 50/60 Hz | |
| Control circuit power supply | Single-phase 200 VAC to 240 VAC, +10 to -10%, 50/60 Hz | |
| Braking function | A built-in regenerative resistor is included in the standard configuration. | |
NOTE: S7R6 and S012 models support single-phase 220 V power supply and derating is not required upon single-phase power input.
What are the electrical specifications for three-phase 380 V SV660N servo drives?
| Item | Size C (T3R5) | Size C (T5R4) | Size D (T8R4) | Size D (T012) | Size E (T017) | Size E (T021) | Size E (T026) |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Servo drive model: SV660N | T3R5 | T5R4 | T8R4 | T012 | T017 | T021 | T026 |
| Continuous output current (Arms) | 3.5 | 5.4 | 8.4 | 11.9 | 16.5 | 20.8 | 25.7 |
| Maximum output current (Arms) | 11 | 14 | 20 | 29.75 | 41.25 | 52.12 | 64.25 |
| Main circuit power supply | Three-phase 380 VAC to 440 VAC, -10% to +10%, 50/60 Hz | ||||||
| Control circuit power supply | Single-phase 380 VAC to 440 VAC, -10% to +10%, 50/60 Hz | ||||||
| Braking function | A built-in regenerative resistor is included in the standard configuration. | ||||||
What are the general specifications of the SV660N servo drive?
| Item | Description | ||
|---|---|---|---|
| Basic specifications | Control mode | IGBT PWM control, sine wave current drive mode. 220 V, 380 V: Single-phase/Three-phase full bridge rectification. | |
| Encoder feedback | 23-bit absolute (optional) encoder, which can be used as an incremental encoder in the absence of the battery. | ||
| Conditions for use | Ambient/Storage temperature [1] | 0°C to 55°C (If the ambient temperature exceeds 45°C, derate 10% for every additional 5°C.) / -20°C to +70°C | |
| Ambient/Storage humidity | Below 90% RH (without condensation) | ||
| Vibration/Impact resistance level | 4.9 m/s², 19.6 m/s² | ||
| IP rating | IP20 (Terminals are excluded, which have a rating of IP00.) | ||
| Pollution degree | PD2 | ||
| Altitude | Below 1000 m. Derating is required for altitudes between 1000 m and 2000 m. | ||
| Speed/ Torque control mode | Performance | Speed control range | 1:6000 (Under the rated torque load, the servo drive keeps running as long as the lower limit of the speed control range is not exceeded.) |
| Speed loop bandwidth | 3 kHz | ||
| Torque control accuracy (repeatability) | ±2% | ||
| Soft startup time | 0s to 65s (Acceleration and deceleration can be set separately.) | ||
| Input signals | Speed reference | Source of network-type references: EtherCAT communication. Local mode and local multi-speed supported. | |
| Torque reference | |||
| Position control mode | Performance | Positioning time | 1 ms to 10 ms |
| Input signal | Position reference | Source of network-type references: EtherCAT communication. Local mode supported. | |
| Digital input (DI) signal | Signal allocation change available. 5 DIs: P-OT (Positive limit switch), N-OT (Negative limit switch), HomeSwitch (Home switch), TouchProbe1 (Touch probe 1), TouchProbe2 (Touch probe 2). | ||
| Digital output (DO) signal | Signal allocation change available. 3 DOs. With-load capacity: 50 mA. Voltage range: 5 V to 30 V. S-RDY: Servo ready, TGON: Motor rotation output, Comparison output, brake output, EDM output. | ||
| Built-in functions | Overtravel (OT) prevention | Stopping immediately when P-OT and N-OT activated. | |
| Protective functions | Providing protections against overcurrent, overvoltage, undervoltage, overload, main circuit detection error, heatsink over-temperature, overspeed, encoder error, CPU error, and parameter error. | ||
| LED display and CHARGE indicator | CHARGE indicator for the main power supply, 5-digit LED display. | ||
| Vibration suppression | Four notches (including two adaptive notches), 50 Hz to 5000 Hz. | ||
| Communication functions | Connection protocol | RS232 | |
| Communication protocol | EtherCAT | ||
| Multi-station communication | Maximum number of slaves: 255 | ||
| Others | Axis address setting | No physical knob, set to 0…255 through software. | |
| Functions | Including status display, user parameter setting, monitoring information display, fault tracking display, jog and auto-tuning, and speed/torque reference signal observation. Gain auto-tuning, fault log, jog. | ||
[1] Install the servo drive in environments that meet the allowable ambient temperature range. When it is installed inside an electric control cabinet, the temperature inside the cabinet must also be within this range.
What are the technical specifications of EtherCAT communication for the SV660N servo drive?
| Item | Specification | |
|---|---|---|
| Basic performance of EtherCAT slaves | Communication protocol | EtherCAT protocol |
| Available services | CoE (PDO, SDO) | |
| Synchronization mode | DC – Distributed clock | |
| Physical layer | 100BASE-TX | |
| Baud rate | 100 Mbit/s (100Base-TX) | |
| Duplex mode | Full duplex | |
| Topological structure | Ring and linear | |
| Transmission medium | Shielded Cat 5e network cable or better | |
| Transmission distance | Less than 100 m between two nodes (with a proper environment and proper cables) | |
| Number of slaves | 65535 by protocol, equal to or less than 100 in actual use | |
| EtherCAT frame length | 44 bytes to 1498 bytes | |
| Process data | A maximum of 1486 bytes per Ethernet frame | |
| Synchronization jitter of two slaves | < 1 µs | |
| Refresh time | About 30 µs for 1000 DI/DOs. About 100 µs for 100 servo axes. Different refresh times for different interfaces. | |
| Communication code error rate | 10-10 Ethernet standard | |
| EtherCAT configuration units | Number of FMMU units | 8 |
| Number of storage synchronization management units | 8 | |
| Process data RAM | 8 KB | |
| Distributed clock | 64-bit | |
| EEPROM capacity | 32 kbit. Initialization data written through EtherCAT master. | |
What are the basic functions of the SV660N servo drive?
| Function | Description |
|---|---|
| Cyclic synchronous position mode | The host controller generates position references and sends the references cyclically through the bus. The servo drive performs the positioning control process. |
| Cyclic synchronous velocity mode | The host controller generates speed references and sends the references cyclically through the bus. The servo drive performs speed control. |
| Cyclic synchronous torque mode | The host controller generates torque references and sends the references cyclically through the bus. The servo drive performs torque control. |
| Profile position mode | The host controller sets parameters through the bus, and the servo drive generates position references and performs positioning control process. |
| Profile velocity mode | The host controller sets parameters through the bus, and the servo drive generates speed references and performs speed control. |
| Profile torque mode | The host controller sets parameters through the bus, and the servo drive generates torque references and performs torque control. |
| Homing mode | The host controller selects the homing mode through parameters, and the servo drive performs homing automatically with the position feedback set to the preset value. |
| Touch probe function | Latches the position information when an external DI signal or the motor phase-Z signal state changes. |
| High-resolution encoder | The encoder is of high performance with resolution up to 8388608 PPR. |
| Mechanical characteristics analysis | Analyzes the resonance frequency and mechanical system characteristics through a PC installed with Inovance software tool. |
| Gain auto-tuning | Generates gain parameters automatically to match present working condition through just one parameter. |
| Gain switchover | Different gains can be applied, stopped or switched through external terminals during running. |
| Torque disturbance observation | Automatically estimates the disturbance torque suffered by the system to perform compensation and reduce vibration. |
| Resonance suppression | Sets filter characteristics automatically to suppress mechanical system vibration after detecting the resonance point. |
| Torque reference filter | Suppresses the mechanical resonance generated during high-speed response of the servo drive. |
| Position first-order low-pass function | Enables smooth acceleration and deceleration. |
| Torque limit | Limits the output torque of the servo motor. |
| Speed limit | Limits the servo motor speed. |
| External regenerative resistor | Intends to be used in cases where the braking capacity of the built-in regenerative resistor is insufficient. |
| Input signal selection | Defines input functions such as emergency stop to corresponding pins. |
| Fault log | Contains the latest ten faults or used to clear the previous faults. |
| Status display | Displays the servo drive status through five LEDs. |
| External I/O display | Displays ON/OFF status of external I/O signals. |
| Forced output of output signals | Implements forced signal output not related to the servo drive status and detects the wiring of output signals. |
| Trial run mode | Runs the servo motor directly through the keypad, avoiding the need for a start signal. |
| Inovance software tool | Used to execute parameter settings, trial run and status display through a PC. |
| Warning code output | Outputs a four-bit warning code when a warning occurs. |
| High-speed position comparison output | Outputs a DO signal with designated width after the servo drive reaches the preset target position. |
| Black box function | Captures the data before and after the designated condition. By using the software tool, the data is read for further analysis. |
What are the specifications of the regenerative resistor for SV660N servo drives?
| Servo Drive Model Category | Servo Drive Model | Specifications of the Built-in Regenerative Resistor | Min. Allowable Resistance (Ω) | Max. Braking Energy Absorbed by the Capacitor (J) | |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Resistance (Ω) | Power (W) | ||||
| Single-phase 220 V | SV660NS1R6I | – | – | 50 | 13.15 |
| SV660NS2R8I | – | – | 45 | 26.29 | |
| SV660NS5R5I | 50 | 50 | 40 | 22.41 | |
| Single-phase/ Three-phase 220 V | SV660NS7R6I | 25 | 60 | 20 | 26.70 |
| SV660NS012I | 15 | 26.70 | |||
| Three-phase 380 V | SV660NT3R5I | 100 | 60 | 80 | 34.28 |
| SV660NT5R4I | 100 | 60 | 60 | 34.28 | |
| Three-phase 380 V | SV660NT8R4I | 50 | 75 | 45 | 50.41 |
| SV660NT012I | 40 | ||||
| SV660NT017I | 35 | 100 | 35 | 82.67 | |
| SV660NT021I | 25 | 100.82 | |||
| SV660NT026I | 100.82 | ||||
NOTE:
Select the external regenerative resistor according to actual operating conditions.
S7R6 and S012 models support single-phase 220 V power supply and derating is not required upon single-phase power input.
How is the MS1 series servo motor model number structured?
The model number MS1 H1 – 20B 30C B – A331 Z – S is structured as follows:
MS1: Product Family (M: Motor), Product Type (S: Servo), Product Generation (1: 1st generation)
H1: Type (H: Motor with max. speed > rated speed, V: Motor with max. speed = rated speed), Inertia/Capacity (1: Low inertia and small capacity, 2: Low inertia and medium capacity, 3: Medium inertia and medium capacity, 4: Medium inertia and small capacity)
20B: Rated Power (W) – Comprised of two digits and a letter (B: x10, C: x100). Example: 40B = 400W.
30C: Rated Speed (RPM) – Comprised of two digits and a letter (B: x10, C: x100). Example: 30C = 3000 RPM.
B: Voltage Class (B: 220V, D: 380V)
A331: Encoder Type – Comprised of a digit and a letter (A3: 23-bit multi-turn absolute encoder). Shaft Connection Mode (3: Solid, with key and threaded hole).
Z: Sub-series No. (Z: Terminal type, natural cooling; Z-S: Lead-wire type, natural cooling)
S: Brake, Reducer, Oil Seal (0: None, 1: Oil seal, 2: Brake, 4: Oil seal+Brake)
NOTE: SV660N series servo drives can work with a motor equipped with a 23-bit single-turn or multi-turn encoder.
What are the components of MS1 series terminal-type motors?
Components include:
Encoder connector
Power connector
Flange mounting face
Mounting screw through hole
Shaft extension (with key)
Cable outlet direction can be front or rear.
What are the components of MS1 series lead wire-type motors?
Components include:
Encoder connector
Power connector
(Other general motor components like flange, shaft etc.)
What are the components of MS1 series connector-type motors (flange sizes 100/130/180)?
Components include:
Encoder aviation connector
Power cable aviation connector
Mounting flange face
Mounting screw through hole
Shaft extension (with key)
Disassembly hole
What are the mechanical specifications of the MS1 series motor?
| Item | Description |
|---|---|
| Duty type | Continuous |
| Vibration level | V15 |
| Insulation resistance | 500 VDC, above 10 MΩ |
| Ambient temperature | 0°C to 40°C |
| Excitation mode | Permanent magnetic |
| Installation mode | Flange |
| Heat resistance level | Level F |
| Insulation voltage | 1500 VAC, 1 min (220 V) 1800 VAC, 1 min (380 V) |
| IP rating of the enclosure | IP67 (except the shaft opening) |
| Ambient humidity | 20% to 80% (without condensation) |
| Direction of rotation | Rotates counterclockwise (CCW) when viewed from the load side with a forward run command |
What are the motor ratings for MS1H1, MS1H2, MS1H3, and MS1H4 series motors?
Ratings of MS1H1 (Vn = 3000 RPM, Vmax = 6000 RPM) Series Motors
| Model | Rated Output (kW)[1] | Rated Torque (N·m) | Max. Torque (N·m) | Rated Current (Arms) | Max. Current (Arms) | Rated Speed (RPM) | Max. Speed (RPM) | Torque Specifications (N·m/Arms) | Rotor Moment of Inertia (10-4kg·m²) | Voltage (V) |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| MS1H1-05B30CB | 0.05 | 0.16 | 0.56 | 1.3 | 4.7 | 3000 | 6000 | 0.15 | 0.026 (0.028) | 220 |
| MS1H1-10B30CB | 0.1 | 0.32 | 1.12 | 1.3 | 4.7 | 0.26 | 0.041 (0.043) | |||
| MS1H1-20B30CB | 0.2 | 0.64 | 2.24 | 1.5 | 5.8 | 0.46 | 0.207 (0.220) | |||
| MS1H1-40B30CB | 0.4 | 1.27 | 4.46 | 2.8 | 10.1 | 0.53 | 0.376 (0.390) | |||
| MS1H1-55B30CB | 0.55 | 1.75 | 6.13 | 3.8 | 15.0 | 0.49 | 1.06 | |||
| MS1H1-75B30CB | 0.75 | 2.39 | 8.36 | 4.8 | 16.9 | 0.58 | 1.38 (1.43) | |||
| MS1H1-10C30CB | 1.0 | 3.18 | 11.1 | 7.6 | 28.0 | 0.46 | 1.75 |
Ratings of MS1H2 (Vn = 3000 RPM, Vmax = 6000/5000 RPM) Series Motors
| Model | Rated Output (kW)[1] | Rated Torque (N·m) | Max. Torque (N·m) | Rated Current (Arms) | Max. Current (Arms) | Rated Speed (RPM) | Max. Speed (RPM) | Torque Specifications (N·m/Arms) | Rotor Moment of Inertia (10-4kg·m²) | Voltage (V) |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| MS1H2-10C30CB | 1.0 | 3.18 | 9.54 | 7.5 | 23.00 | 3000 | 6000 | 0.47 | 1.87 (3.12) | 220 |
| MS1H2-15C30CB | 1.5 | 4.90 | 14.7 | 10.8 | 32.00 | 5000 | 0.54 | 2.46 (3.71) | ||
| MS1H2-10C30CD | 1.0 | 3.18 | 9.54 | 3.65 | 11.00 | 3000 | 6000 | 0.89 | 1.87 (3.12) | 380 |
| MS1H2-15C30CD | 1.5 | 4.90 | 14.7 | 4.50 | 14.00 | 5000 | 1.07 | 2.46 (3.71) | ||
| MS1H2-20C30CD | 2.0 | 6.36 | 19.1 | 5.89 | 20.00 | 1.14 | 3.06 (4.31) | |||
| MS1H2-25C30CD | 2.5 | 7.96 | 23.9 | 7.56 | 25.00 | 1.11 | 3.65 (4.90) | |||
| MS1H2-30C30CD | 3.0 | 9.8 | 29.4 | 10.00 | 30.00 | 1.16 | 7.72 (10.22) | |||
| MS1H2-40C30CD | 4.0 | 12.6 | 37.8 | 13.60 | 40.80 | 1.16 | 12.1 (14.6) | |||
| MS1H2-50C30CD | 5.0 | 15.8 | 47.6 | 16.00 | 48.00 | 1.16 | 15.4 (17.9) |
Ratings of MS1H3 (Vn = 1500 RPM, Vmax = 3000 RPM) Series Motors
| Model | Rated Output (kW)[1] | Rated Torque (N·m) | Max. Torque (N·m) | Rated Current (Arms) | Max. Current (Arms) | Rated Speed (RPM) | Max. Speed (RPM) | Torque Specifications (N·m/Arms) | Rotor Moment of Inertia (10-4kg·m²) | Voltage (V) |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| MS1H3-85B15CB | 0.85 | 5.39 | 13.5 | 6.60 | 16.50 | 1500 | 3000 | 0.95 | 13.3 (14) | 220 |
| MS1H3-13C15CB | 1.3 | 8.34 | 20.85 | 10.00 | 25.00 | 0.96 | 17.8 (18.5) | |||
| MS1H3-85B15CD | 0.85 | 5.39 | 13.5 | 3.30 | 8.25 | 1.87 | 13.3 (14) | 380 | ||
| MS1H3-13C15CD | 1.3 | 8.34 | 20.85 | 5.00 | 12.50 | 1.87 | 17.8 (18.5) | |||
| MS1H3-18C15CD | 1.8 | 11.5 | 28.75 | 6.60 | 16.50 | 1.87 | 25 (25.7) | |||
| MS1H3-29C15CD | 2.9 | 18.6 | 37.2 | 11.90 | 23.80 | 1.82 | 55 (57.2) | |||
| MS1H3-44C15CD | 4.4 | 28.4 | 71.1 | 16.50 | 40.50 | 1.90 | 88.9 (90.8) | |||
| MS1H3-55C15CD | 5.5 | 35.0 | 87.6 | 20.85 | 52.00 | 1.74 | 107 (109.5) | |||
| MS1H3-75C15CD | 7.5 | 48.0 | 119 | 25.70 | 65.00 | 1.99 | 141 (143.1) |
Ratings of MS1H4 (Vn = 3000 RPM, Vmax = 6000 RPM) Series Motors
| Model | Rated Output (kW)[1] | Rated Torque (N·m) | Max. Torque (N·m) | Rated Current (Arms) | Max. Current (Arms) | Rated Speed (RPM) | Max. Speed (RPM) | Torque Specifications (N·m/Arms) | Rotor Moment of Inertia (10-4kg·m²) | Voltage (V) |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| MS1H4-40B30CB | 0.4 | 1.27 | 4.46 | 2.80 | 10.10 | 3000 | 6000 | 0.53 | 0.657 (0.667) | 220 |
| MS1H4-75B30CB | 0.75 | 2.39 | 8.36 | 4.80 | 16.9 | 0.58 | 2 (2.012) |
[1] The motor with oil seal must be derated by 10% during use.
[2] Values inside parentheses “()” are for motors with brake.
NOTE: Values in the preceding table are obtained when motors equipped with the following heatsinks are working with Inovance servo drives under an armature coil temperature of 20° C.
MS1H1/MS1H4: 250 mm x 250 mm x 6 mm (aluminum)
MS1H2-10C to 25C: 300 mm x 300 mm x 12 mm (aluminum)
MS1H2-30C to 50C: 400 mm x 400 mm x 20 mm (aluminum)
MS1H3-85B to 18C: 400 mm x 400 mm x 20 mm (iron)
MS1H3-29C to 75C: 360 mm x 360 mm x 25 mm (double-layer aluminum plate)
What are the motor overload characteristics?
| Load Ratio (%) | Operating Time (s) |
|---|---|
| 120 | 230 |
| 130 | 80 |
| 140 | 40 |
| 150 | 30 |
| 160 | 20 |
| 170 | 17 |
| 180 | 15 |
| 190 | 12 |
| 200 | 10 |
| 210 | 8.5 |
| 220 | 7 |
| 230 | 6 |
| 240 | 5.5 |
| 250 | 5 |
| 300 | 3 |
| 350 | 2 |
NOTE:
The maximum torque of H1 and H4 models is 3.5 times the rated torque.
The maximum torque of H2 models is three times the rated torque.
The maximum torque of H3 models (2.9 kW models excluded) is 2.5 times the rated torque.
The maximum torque of 2.9 kW models is two times the rated torque.
What are the allowable radial and axial loads for MS1 series motors?
| Motor Model | Flange Size (mm) | LF (mm) | Allowable Radial Load (N) | Allowable Axial Load (N) |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| MS1H1-05B30CB | 40 | 20 | 78 | 54 |
| MS1H1-10B30CB | 40 | 20 | 78 | 54 |
| MS1H1-20B30CB | 60 | 25 | 245 | 74 |
| MS1H1-40B30CB | 60 | 25 | 245 | 74 |
| MS1H1-55B30CB | 80 | 35 | 392 | 147 |
| MS1H1-75B30CB | 80 | 35 | 392 | 147 |
| MS1H1-10C30CB | 80 | 35 | 392 | 147 |
| MS1H2-10C30CB | 100 | 45 | 686 | 196 |
| MS1H2-10C30CD | 100 | 45 | 686 | 196 |
| MS1H2-15C30CB | 100 | 45 | 686 | 196 |
| MS1H2-15C30CD | 100 | 45 | 686 | 196 |
| MS1H2-20C30CD | 100 | 45 | 686 | 196 |
| MS1H2-25C30CD | 100 | 45 | 686 | 196 |
| MS1H2-30C30CD | 130 | 63 | 980 | 392 |
| MS1H2-40C30CD | 130 | 63 | 1176 | 392 |
| MS1H2-50C30CD | 130 | 63 | 1176 | 392 |
| MS1H3-85B15CB | 130 | 45 | 686 | 196 |
| MS1H3-13C15CB | 130 | 45 | 686 | 196 |
| MS1H3-85B15CD | 130 | 45 | 686 | 196 |
| MS1H3-13C15CD | 130 | 45 | 686 | 196 |
| MS1H3-18C15CD | 130 | 45 | 686 | 196 |
| MS1H3-29C15CD | 180 | 79 | 1470 | 490 |
| MS1H3-44C15CD | 180 | 79 | 1470 | 490 |
| MS1H3-55C15CD | 180 | 113 | 1764 | 588 |
| MS1H3-75C15CD | 180 | 113 | 1764 | 588 |
| MS1H4-40B30CB | 60 | 25 | 245 | 74 |
| MS1H4-75B30CB | 80 | 35 | 392 | 147 |
What are the electrical specifications of the MS1 series motor with brake?
| Motor Model | Holding Torque (N·m) | Supply Voltage (VDC) ±10% | Rated Power (W) | Coil Resistance (Ω) (±7%) | Excitation Current (A) | Apply Time (ms) | Release Time (ms) | Backlash (°) |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| MS1H1-05B/10B | 0.32 | 24 | 6.1 | 94.4 | 0.25 | ≤ 40 | ≤ 20 | ≤ 1.5 |
| MS1H1-20B/40B, MS1H4-40B | 1.5 | 7.6 | 75.79 | 0.32 | ≤ 60 | ≤ 20 | ≤ 1.5 | |
| MS1H1/H4-75B | 3.2 | 10 | 57.6 | 0.42 | ≤ 60 | ≤ 40 | ≤ 1.0 | |
| MS1H3-85B/13C/18C | 12 | 19.4 | 29.7 | 0.81 | ≤ 120 | ≤ 60 | ≤ 0.5 | |
| MS1H2-10C/15C/20C/25C | 8 | 23 | 25 | 0.96 | ≤ 85 | ≤ 30 | ≤ 0.5 | |
| MS1H2-30C/40C/50C | 16 | 27 | 21.3 | 1.13 | ≤ 100 | ≤ 60 | ≤ 0.5 | |
| MS1H3-29C/44C/55C/75C | 50 | 40 | 14.4 | 1.67 | ≤ 200 | ≤ 100 | ≤ 0.5 |
NOTE:
The brake cannot share the same power supply with other electrical devices. This is to prevent malfunction of the brake due to voltage or current drop caused by other working devices.
It is recommended to use cables of 0.5 mm² and above.
What are the servo system configurations for 220V SV660N servo drives?
| Rated Speed (RPM) | Maximum Speed (RPM) | Capacity (W) | Servo Motor Model | Motor Flange Size | Servo Drive Model SV660N****I | Servo Drive Size | Servo Drive Code (H01-02) | |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Single-phase 220 VAC | Three-phase 220 VAC | |||||||
| 3000 | 6000 | 50 | MS1H1 05B30CB | 40 | S1R6 | – | A | 00002 |
| 100 | MS1H1 10B30CB | 40 | S1R6 | – | A | 00002 | ||
| 200 | MS1H1 20B30CB | 60 | S1R6 | – | A | 00002 | ||
| 400 | MS1H1 40B30CB (low inertia, small capacity) | 60 | S2R8 | – | A | 00003 | ||
| 550 | MS1H1 55B30CB | 80 | S5R5 | – | B | 00005 | ||
| 750 | MS1H1 75B30CB | 80 | S5R5 | – | B | 00005 | ||
| 1000 | MS1H1 10C30CB | 80 | S7R6 | C | 00006 | |||
| 5000 | 1000 | MS1H2 10C30CB (low inertia, medium capacity) | 100 | S7R6 | C | 00006 | ||
| 1500 | MS1H2 15C30CB | 100 | S012 | D | 00007 | |||
| 1500 | 3000 | 850 | MS1H3 85B15CB (medium inertia, medium capacity) | 130 | S7R6 | C | 00006 | |
| 1500 | 3000 | 1300 | MS1H3 13C15CB (medium inertia, medium capacity) | 130 | S012 | D | 00007 | |
| 3000 | 6000 | 400 | MS1H4 40B30CB (medium inertia, small capacity) | 60 | S2R8 | – | A | 00003 |
| 750 | MS1H4 75B30CB | 80 | S5R5 | – | A | 00005 | ||
NOTE: S7R6 and S012 models support single-phase 220 V power supply and derating is not required upon single-phase power input.
What are the servo system configurations for 380V SV660N servo drives?
| Rated Speed (RPM) | Maximum Speed (RPM) | Capacity (W) | Servo Motor Model | Motor Flange Size | Servo Drive Model SV660N****I (Three-phase 380 VAC) | Servo Drive Size | Servo Drive Code (H01-02) |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 3000 | 6000 | 1000 | MS1H2 10C30CD (low inertia, medium capacity) | 100 | T5R4 | C | 10002 |
| 1500 | MS1H2 15C30CD | 100 | T5R4 | C | 10002 | ||
| 5000 | 2000 | MS1H2 20C30CD | 100 | T8R4 | D | 10003 | |
| 2500 | MS1H2 25C30CD | 100 | T8R4 | D | 10003 | ||
| 3000 | MS1H2 30C30CD | 130 | T012 | D | 10004 | ||
| 4000 | MS1H2 40C30CD | 130 | T017 | E | 10005 | ||
| 5000 | MS1H2 50C30CD | 130 | T017 | E | 10005 | ||
| 1500 | 3000 | 850 | MS1H3 85B15CD (medium inertia, medium capacity) | 130 | T3R5 | C | 10001 |
| 1300 | MS1H3 13C15CD | 130 | T5R4 | C | 10002 | ||
| 1800 | MS1H3 18C15CD | 130 | T8R4 | C | 10003 | ||
| 2900 | MS1H3 29C15CD | 180 | T012 | D | 10004 | ||
| 4400 | MS1H3 44C15CD | 180 | T017 | E | 10005 | ||
| 5500 | MS1H3 55C15CD | 180 | T021 | E | 10006 | ||
| 7500 | MS1H3 75C15CD | 180 | T026 | E | 10007 |
What are the cable models for MS1H1/MS1H4 terminal-type (Z) motors with front cable outlet?
| Cable Type | Cable Length (m) – 3.0 | Cable Length (m) – 5.0 | Cable Length (m) – 10.0 |
|---|---|---|---|
| Power cable (without brake) | S6-L-M107-3.0 | S6-L-M107-5.0 | S6-L-M107-10.0 |
| Power cable (with brake) | S6-L-B107-3.0 | S6-L-B107-5.0 | S6-L-B107-10.0 |
| Multi-turn absolute encoder cable | S6-L-P124-3.0 | S6-L-P124-5.0 | S6-L-P124-10.0 |
| Single-turn absolute encoder cable | S6-L-P114-3.0 | S6-L-P114-5.0 | S6-L-P114-10.0 |
What are the cable models for MS1H1/MS1H4 terminal-type (Z) motors with rear cable outlet?
| Cable Type | Cable Length (m) – 3.0 | Cable Length (m) – 5.0 | Cable Length (m) – 10.0 |
|---|---|---|---|
| Power cable (without brake) | S6-L-M108-3.0 | S6-L-M108-5.0 | S6-L-M108-10.0 |
| Power cable (with brake) | S6-L-B108-3.0 | S6-L-B108-5.0 | S6-L-B108-10.0 |
| Multi-turn absolute encoder cable | S6-L-P125-3.0 | S6-L-P125-5.0 | S6-L-P125-10.0 |
| Single-turn absolute encoder cable | S6-L-P115-3.0 | S6-L-P115-5.0 | S6-L-P115-10.0 |
What are the cable models for MS1H1/MS1H4 lead wire-type (S) motors with front cable outlet?
| Cable Type | Cable Length (m) – 3.0 | Cable Length (m) – 5.0 | Cable Length (m) – 10.0 |
|---|---|---|---|
| Power cable (without brake) | S6-L-M100-3.0 | S6-L-M100-5.0 | S6-L-M100-10.0 |
| Power cable (with brake) | S6-L-B100-3.0 | S6-L-B100-5.0 | S6-L-B100-10.0 |
| Multi-turn absolute encoder cable | S6-L-P120-3.0 | S6-L-P120-5.0 | S6-L-P120-10.0 |
| Single-turn absolute encoder cable | S6-L-P110-3.0 | S6-L-P110-5.0 | S6-L-P110-10.0 |
What are the cable models for MS1H2 (below 3 kW) and MS1H3 (below 2.9 kW) motors?
| Cable Type | Cable Length (m) – 3.0 | Cable Length (m) – 5.0 | Cable Length (m) – 10.0 |
|---|---|---|---|
| Power cable (without brake) | S6-L-M111-3.0 | S6-L-M111-5.0 | S6-L-M111-10.0 |
| Power cable (with brake) | S6-L-B111-3.0 | S6-L-B111-5.0 | S6-L-B111-10.0 |
| Multi-turn absolute encoder cable | S6-L-P121-3.0 | S6-L-P121-5.0 | S6-L-P121-10.0 |
| Single-turn absolute encoder cable | S6-L-P111-3.0 | S6-L-P111-5.0 | S6-L-P111-10.0 |
What are the cable models for MS1H2 (4 kW/5 kW) motors?
| Cable Type | Cable Length (m) – 3.0 | Cable Length (m) – 5.0 | Cable Length (m) – 10.0 |
|---|---|---|---|
| Power cable (without brake) | S6-L-M111-3.0 | S6-L-M111-5.0 | S6-L-M111-10.0 |
| Power cable (with brake) | S6-L-B111-3.0 | S6-L-B111-5.0 | S6-L-B111-10.0 |
| Multi-turn absolute encoder cable | S6-L-P121-3.0 | S6-L-P121-5.0 | S6-L-P121-10.0 |
| Single-turn absolute encoder cable | S6-L-P111-3.0 | S6-L-P111-5.0 | S6-L-P111-10.0 |
What are the cable models for MS1H3 (below 2.9 kW) motors (distinct from the other MS1H3 table)?
This seems to be a duplicate entry or a typo in the PDF, as Table 1-6 (for MS1H3 below 2.9kW) and Table 1-4 (for MS1H3 below 2.9kW) show different cable models (M112/B112 vs M111/B111). Assuming Table 1-6 is specific:
| Cable Type | Cable Length (m) – 3.0 | Cable Length (m) – 5.0 | Cable Length (m) – 10.0 |
|---|---|---|---|
| Power cable (without brake) | S6-L-M112-3.0 | S6-L-M112-5.0 | S6-L-M112-10.0 |
| Power cable (with brake) | S6-L-B112-3.0 | S6-L-B112-5.0 | S6-L-B112-10.0 |
| Multi-turn absolute encoder cable | S6-L-P121-3.0 | S6-L-P121-5.0 | S6-L-P121-10.0 |
| Single-turn absolute encoder cable | S6-L-P111-3.0 | S6-L-P111-5.0 | S6-L-P111-10.0 |
What are the cable models for MS1H3 (2.9 kW) motors?
| Cable Type | Cable Length (m) – 3.0 | Cable Length (m) – 5.0 | Cable Length (m) – 10.0 |
|---|---|---|---|
| Power cable (without brake) | S6-L-M022-3.0 | S6-L-M022-5.0 | S6-L-M022-10.0 |
| Power cable (with brake) | S6-L-B022-3.0 | S6-L-B022-5.0 | S6-L-B022-10.0 |
| Multi-turn absolute encoder cable | S6-L-P121-3.0 | S6-L-P121-5.0 | S6-L-P121-10.0 |
| Single-turn absolute encoder cable | S6-L-P111-3.0 | S6-L-P111-5.0 | S6-L-P111-10.0 |
What are the cable models for MS1H3 (above 2.9 kW) motors?
| Cable Type | Cable Length (m) – 3.0 | Cable Length (m) – 5.0 | Cable Length (m) – 10.0 |
|---|---|---|---|
| Power cable (without brake) | S6-L-M022-3.0 | S6-L-M022-5.0 | S6-L-M022-10.0 |
| Power cable (with brake) | S6-L-B022-3.0 | S6-L-B022-5.0 | S6-L-B022-10.0 |
| Multi-turn absolute encoder cable | S6-L-P121-3.0 | S6-L-P121-5.0 | S6-L-P121-10.0 |
| Single-turn absolute encoder cable | S6-L-P111-3.0 | S6-L-P111-5.0 | S6-L-P111-10.0 |
NOTE: If highly flexible cables fit for cable carriers are needed, add a suffix “-T” to the end of the cable model.
What are the communication cable options for the SV660N servo drive?
| Model | Description |
|---|---|
| S6-L-T00-3.0 | Cable for communication between the servo drive and PC |
| S6-L-T04-0.3 | Cable for parallel communication of multiple servo drives |
| S6-L-T04-3.0 | Cable for communication between the servo drive and the host controller |
What connector kits are available for the SV660N servo drive?
| Connector Kit | Outline Description |
|---|---|
| S6-C6 | DB15C plug |
| S6-C26 | Includes 6-pin male base, 9-pin connector, pin base, insulated terminal, crimping terminal, heat shrink tube. |
| S6-C29 | Includes 6-pin male base, crimping terminal, aviation connector, heat shrink tube, insulation material. |
| S6-C39 | Includes 1394 male base, crimping terminal, aviation connector, heat shrink tube, insulation material. |
| S6-C4 | (Specific components not listed, but associated with a connector outline) |
What are the general wiring instructions for the SV660N servo system?
The servo drive is directly connected to an industrial power supply, with no isolation such as a transformer. To prevent damages in case of short circuit, install a fuse or a circuit breaker on the input power supply. The servo drive is not configured with the built-in earth fault protection circuit. For the sake of safety, install a residual current device (RCD) to provide protection against electrical shock and/or fire.
Do not run or stop the motor by using an electromagnetic contactor. As a high-inductance device, the motor may generate high voltage instantaneously, which may damage the contactor.
Pay attention to the power capacity when connecting an external control power supply or a 24 VDC power supply, especially when the power supply is used to power up multiple servo drives or brakes. Insufficient power supply will lead to insufficient supply current, resulting in failure of the servo drive or the brake. The brake must be powered by a 24 VDC power supply, and the brake power must match the motor model and meet the brake power requirements.
Key components in wiring diagrams often include:
CN5: Serial communication connector, connected to the software tool.
CN6: Functional safety terminal, connected to external functional safety signal.
Circuit breaker: Used to protect power cables by cutting off the circuit upon overcurrent.
Noise filter: Used to prevent external noise.
Electromagnetic contactor (for main power): Used to switch on/off the power supply of the servo drive. Install a surge protection device during use.
Regenerative resistor: Connected between P-C terminals when the bus capacitor is insufficient.
Brake power supply (24 VDC): Used when the servo motor is equipped with a brake.
Electromagnetic contactor (for brake): Brake control signal, used to turn on/off the brake power supply. Install a surge protection device. It is recommended to use an electromagnetic contactor controlled by the DO terminals of the servo drive.
System grounding is critical.
What are the safety precautions for installing the SV660N servo drive?
WARNING: Read through the safety instructions in “Safety Instructions”. Failure to comply may result in serious consequences.
CAUTION:
Follow the installation directions described in this chapter. Failure to comply may result in device faults or damage.
Do not run a damaged or defective device. Failure to comply will result in physical injuries.
Do not install the device in an environment exposed to water or corrosive objects. Failure to comply will result in device faults.
Do not install the device near flammable gases or combustible materials. Failure to comply will result in a fire or electric shock.
Install the device inside a fire-proof cabinet with electrical protections. Failure to comply may result in a fire.
Ensure the specified clearances are reserved among the servo drive, the interior surface of the electric cabinet, and other machines. Failure to comply will result in a fire or device faults.
Do not put heavy objects on the device. Failure to comply may result in physical injuries or device damage.
Do not exert large impact force on the device. Failure to comply may result in device damage.
Do not block the air inlet/outlet port of the servo drive or allow unwanted matters to fall into the device. Failure to comply may result in a fire or device faults.
Where should the SV660N servo drive be installed?
Install the servo drive into a cabinet free from sunlight and rain.
Install the servo drive in a place that meets the following requirements:
a) Free from corrosive and inflammable gases and combustible materials, such as the hydrogen sulfide, chlorine, ammonia, sulphur gas, chloridize gas, acid, soda and salt
b) Free from high temperature, humidity, dusts and metal powders
c) Free from vibration
d) Pollution degree: PD2
What are the environment conditions for installing the SV660N servo drive?
| Item | Description |
|---|---|
| Ambient temperature | 0°C to 55°C (The average load ratio cannot exceed 80% when the ambient temperature is between 45°C to 55°C.) |
| Ambient humidity | Below 90% RH (without condensation) |
| Storage temperature | -20°C to +70°C (non-freezing) |
| Storage humidity | Below 90% RH (without condensation) |
| Vibration | Below 4.9 m/s² |
| Shock | Below 19.6 m/s² |
| IP rating | IP20 (except the fan and terminals) |
| Altitude | Below 1000 m. Derating is required for altitudes above 1000 m. For altitudes above 2000 m, install an isolation transformer besides derating. Derating standard: Derate 1% for every additional 100 m. The maximum altitude is 3000 m. |
What are the outline dimensions for servo drive size C?
Models: SV660NS7R6I, SV660NT3R5I, SV660NT5R4I
Dimensions (Unit: mm):
– Height: 170
– Front width: 55±1
– Left view depth: 173±1
– Rear view width: 44 (between mounting holes)
– Rear view height: 160 (between mounting holes)
– Top view width: 44 (between mounting holes)
Mounting Holes: 2 x M4 screw through hole
Fixing screw: 2-M4
Recommended tightening torque: 1.2 N·m
What is the weight of a servo drive in size C?
The weight of a servo drive in size C is 1.3 kg.
What are the outline dimensions for servo drive size D?
Models: SV660NS012I, SV660NT8R4I, SV660NT012I
Dimensions (Unit: mm):
– Height: 170
– Front width: 80±1
– Left view depth: 183
– Rear view width: 71
– Rear view height: 160 (between mounting holes)
– Top view width: 71
Mounting Holes: 3 x M4 screw through hole (Ø5)
Fixing screw: 3-M4
Recommended tightening torque: 1.2 N·m
What is the weight of a servo drive in size D?
The weight of a servo drive in size D is 1.8 kg.
What are the outline dimensions for servo drive size E?
Models: SV660NT017I, SV660NT0211, SV660NT026I
Dimensions (Unit: mm):
– Height: 250
– Front width: 90
– Left view depth: 230
– Rear view width: 78
– Rear view height: 240.5 (between mounting holes)
– Top view width: 78
Mounting Holes: 4 x M4 screw through hole (4xØ5.0)
Fixing screw: 4-M4
Recommended tightening torque: 1.2 N·m
What is the weight of a servo drive in size E?
The weight of a servo drive in size E is 3.6 kg.
How should the servo drive be installed?
Ensure the servo drive is installed vertically to the wall, with its front side (actual mounting side) facing the operator. Fix the servo drive securely on the mounting surface through two to four mounting holes (number of mounting holes depends on the capacity of the servo drive).
What are the cooling requirements for the servo drive?
Cool the servo drive down with natural convection or a cooling fan. Reserve sufficient space around the servo drive to ensure proper cooling. Install the cooling fan to the upper part of the servo drive to avoid excessive regional temperature rise and maintain an even temperature inside the electric cabinet.
What clearances are required when installing multiple servo drives side by side (Regular Installation)?
For heat dissipation purpose, reserve a clearance of:
– At least 10 mm on the left and right sides of each servo drive.
– At least 50 mm above and below each servo drive.
(Additional minimum clearance of ≥ 20 mm may be indicated visually on diagrams for cabinet walls or other obstructions.)
What are the conditions for compact installation of servo drives size A and B?
For compact installation of servo drives in size A and size B, take the installation tolerance into account and reserve a clearance of at least 1 mm between every two drives. In this case, the rms load should be lower than or equal to 75%.
Can servo drives in size C, D, and E be installed side by side without clearance?
Yes, servo drives in size C, size D, and size E can be installed side by side without clearance, and derating is not required.
What is the grounding requirement for the servo drive?
The grounding terminal must be grounded properly. Failure to comply may cause electric shock or malfunction due to interference.
How should servo drive cables be routed?
Route the servo drive cable downwards to prevent liquids from flowing into the servo drive along the cable.
What is the purpose of the dust-proof cover for the CN5 port?
Insert the dust-proof cover into the unused CN5 port. This is to prevent unwanted objects (such as solids or liquids) from falling into the servo drive and causing faults.
Is the dust-proof cover included with the servo drive?
Yes, the dust-proof cover is included in the standard configuration and delivered along with the servo drive. Keep the dust-proof cover in a proper place. Such dust-proof covers can be purchased separately if required (model: NEX-02-N2B; manufacturer: PINGOOD).
Where should the servo motor be installed?
Install the servo motor in a place free from corrosive and inflammable gases and combustible materials, such as hydrogen sulfide, chlorine, ammonia, sulphur gas, chloridize gas, acid, soda and salt.
Install the servo motor away from heating sources such as a heating stove.
When should a servo motor with an oil seal be used?
Use the servo motor equipped with an oil seal when the motor is used in a place with grinding fluids, oil mists, iron powders or cuttings.
Should the servo motor be used in an enclosed environment?
Do not use the servo motor in an enclosed environment. Running in an enclosed environment may overheat the motor, shortening its service life.
What are the environmental requirements for servo motor installation?
| Item | Description |
|---|---|
| Operating temperature | 0°C to 40°C (non-freezing) |
| Operating humidity | 20% to 80% RH (without condensation) |
| Storage temperature | -20°C to +60°C (peak temperature: 80°C for 72 hours) |
| Storage humidity | 20% to 90% RH (without condensation) |
| Vibration | Below 49 m/s² |
| Shock | Below 490 m/s² |
| IP rating | IP67 (shaft opening excluded, with power cables and encoder connectors connected properly) |
| Altitude | Below 1000 m (derating required for altitudes above 1000 m) |
What are the rust-proof measures for servo motor installation?
Wipe up the anti-rust agent applied at the motor shaft extension before installing the servo motor, and then take rust-proof measures.
How should the shaft extension be handled during installation?
Do not strike the shaft extension during installation. Failure to comply will damage the encoder.
How should a pulley be mounted or removed from the servo motor shaft?
Mounting (with keyway):
– Use the screw hole at the shaft end.
– Insert a double-end screw into the screw hole of the shaft.
– Put a washer on the surface of the coupling end, and then use a nut to push the pulley in.
Mounting (without keyway):
– Use friction coupling or similar methods.
Removing:
– When removing the pulley, use a pulley remover to protect the shaft from suffering severe impact from the load.
How can safety be ensured for the rotary area of the pulley?
To ensure safety, install a protective cover or similar device on the rotary area such as the pulley mounted on the shaft.
How should the servo motor be aligned with the machine?
When connecting the servo motor to a machine, use a coupling and keep the motor shaft center and the machine shaft center in the same line.
What is the required alignment precision for the servo motor?
Make sure the servo motor fulfills the required alignment precision. Measure the distance at four different positions on the circumference. The difference between the maximum and the minimum measured values must be less than 0.03 mm. Failure to comply will result in vibration or damage the bearing and the encoder.
Can the servo motor be installed horizontally or vertically?
Yes, the servo motor can be installed horizontally or vertically.
What precautions should be taken if the servo motor application location is exposed to water drops or oil?
– Do not submerge the motor/cable in water or oil.
– Check the IP rating of the servo motor when the application location is exposed to water drops (except the shaft opening).
– Mount the motor with the cable connecting terminal facing downwards if the application location is exposed to liquid. This is to prevent the liquid from flowing into the motor along the cable.
– In environments where the shaft opening is exposed to oil drops, use a motor with oil sealing.
– Observe the following requirements when using a motor with oil sealing:
1) Make sure the oil level is lower than the oil sealing lip during use.
2) Avoid oil accumulation on the oil sealing lip when the motor is installed vertically upward.
How should cables connected to the servo motor be handled?
Do not bend or apply tension to the cables, especially the signal cables whose core wire is only 0.2 mm or 0.3 mm in thickness. Do not pull the cables too tight during wiring.
What precautions should be observed when handling connectors for the servo motor?
Observe the following requirements:
1) When connecting the connectors, make sure there is no waste or sheet metal inside the connector.
2) Connect the connector to the main circuit cable side of the servo motor first, and ensure the grounding cable of the main circuit is connected properly. If the connector is connected to the encoder cable side first, the encoder may become faulty due to the potential difference between PE terminals.
3) Ensure the pins are correctly arranged during wiring.
4) Do not strike the connector as they are made up of resins.
5) When moving a servo motor with cables connected, hold the servo motor by its main body instead of by the cable. Failure to comply may damage the connector or cable.
6) If flexible cables are used, do not apply stress on the connector during wiring. Failure to comply may damage the connector.
What is the tightening torque for terminal screws on flange size 40, 60 and 80 motors?
The tightening torque for terminal screws is 0.19 N·m to 0.21 N·m. Violation of this may damage the terminal.
Note: Dimensions in the tables are in millimeters. Values inside parentheses “()” are for the servo motor with a holding brake.
What general safety instructions should be followed for wiring?
Read through the safety instructions in “Safety Instructions”. Failure to comply may result in serious consequences.
What are the warnings related to feeding power to the servo drive?
– Feed the servo drive with power from grounded (TN/TT) systems. Failure to comply may result in electric shock.
– Connect an electromagnetic contactor between the input power supply and the main circuit power supply of the servo drive (L1 and L2 for single-phase servo drives; L1, L2, and L3 for three-phase servo drives) to form an architecture that allows independent power cutoff on the servo drive power side. This is to prevent fire accidents caused by continuous large current upon fault.
– Ensure the input power supply of the servo drive is within the specified voltage range. Otherwise, the servo drive may become faulty.
What warnings apply to the output terminals (U, V, W) of the servo drive?
– Do not connect output terminals U, V, and W of the servo drive to a three-phase power supply. Failure to comply may cause physical injuries or fire accidents.
– Do not connect the motor connecting terminals U, V, and W to a mains frequency power supply. Failure to comply may cause physical injuries or fire accidents.
How should the ALM (fault signal) be used?
Use the ALM (fault signal) to cut off the main circuit power supply. When the braking transistor is faulty, the regenerative resistor may be overheated, leading to a fire accident.
What are the grounding requirements for the servo drive during wiring?
– Connect the PE terminal of the servo drive to the PE terminal of the control cabinet. Failure to comply may cause electric shock.
– Ensure the entire system is grounded. Otherwise, malfunction may occur on the servo drive.
What precaution should be taken regarding residual voltage after powering off the servo drive?
After cutting off the power supply, wait for at least 15 minutes before further operations because residual voltage is still present in the internal capacitor after power-off. Failure to comply may result in electric shock.
What precautions should be taken when applying the servo drive on a vertical axis?
1) Set the safety device properly to prevent the workpiece from falling under such status as warning and overtravel.
2) Ensure the polarity of the 24 V power supply is correct. Otherwise, the shaft may fall and cause physical injuries or damage the servo drive.
What precautions should be followed when wiring the power supply and main circuit?
1) When the main circuit terminal is a connector, remove the connector from the servo drive before wiring.
2) Insert one cable to one terminal of the connector. Do not insert multiple cables to one cable terminal.
3) Insert the cable with enough care to prevent the conductor burrs from being short circuited to the neighboring cable.
4) Insulate the connecting part of the power terminals to prevent electric shock.
5) Do not connect a 220 V servo drive to a 380 V power supply directly.
6) Install safety devices such as a circuit breaker to prevent fire accidents caused by short-circuit in external circuits.
7) Cut off the main circuit power supply and switch from S-ON to S-OFF after a warning signal is detected.
Should an electromagnetic contactor be used between the servo drive and the motor during wiring?
Connect the servo drive to the motor directly. Do not use an electromagnetic contactor during wiring. Failure to comply may cause faults.
How should cables be handled during wiring?
Do not put heavy objects onto the cables or pull the cable with large force. Otherwise electric shock may occur due to cable damage.
What should be considered when connecting DO terminals to relays?
When connecting DO terminals to relays, ensure the polarity of the flywheel diode is connected correctly. Otherwise, the servo drive will be damaged and the signal output may be abnormal.
What clearance is required between main circuit cables and I/O signal/encoder cables?
Reserve a clearance of at least 30 cm between main circuit cables and I/O signal/encoder cables. Failure to comply may cause malfunction of the servo drive.
What type of cables should be used for I/O signals/encoders?
Use twisted pair cables or multi-core shielded twisted cables as the I/O signal/encoder cables. Failure to comply may cause malfunction of the servo drive.
What are the maximum wiring lengths for I/O signal and encoder cables?
The maximum wiring length of the I/O signal cable and the encoder cable is 3 m and 20 m respectively.
When should a noise filter be used?
Use a noise filter to reduce the electromagnetic interference on electronic devices surrounding the servo drive.
When should proper shielding measures be taken for the servo drive?
To prevent damage to the servo drive, take proper shielding measures when the servo drive is used in the following application locations:
1) Locations suffering from interferences caused by static electricity
2) Locations suffering from strong electric field or strong magnetic field
3) Locations with radioactive rays
What are the names and functions of the main circuit terminals for servo drives in size A?
| No. | Name | Description |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | L1, L2 (power input terminals) | See the nameplate for the rated voltage of the power supply. |
| 2 | P, N (DC bus terminals) | Used as the common DC bus for multiple servo drives. |
| P, C (terminals for connecting external regenerative resistor) | When an external regenerative resistor is needed, connect it between terminals P and C. | |
| 3 | U, V, W (terminals for connecting the servo motor) | Connected to U, V, and W phases of the servo motor. |
| 4 | PE (grounding terminal) | Connected to the power supply ground and the motor grounding terminal. |
What are the names and functions of the main circuit terminals for servo drives in size B?
| No. | Name | Description |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | L1, L2, L3 (Power input terminals) | See the nameplate for the rated voltage of the power supply. Note: S5R5 (750 W) servo drives: Single-phase 220 V power input, with 220 V power supply connected to L1 and L2 |
| 2 | P, N (DC bus terminals) | Used as the common DC bus for multiple servo drives. |
| P, D, C (Terminals for connecting external regenerative resistor) | When an external regenerative resistor is needed, connect it between terminals P and C. Servo drives in size B are equipped with a built-in regenerative resistor. In this case, terminals P and D are shorted by default. |
|
| 3 | U, V, W (Servo motor connecting terminals) | Connected to U, V, and W phases of the servo motor. |
| 4 | PE (Grounding terminal) | Connected to the power supply ground and the motor grounding terminal. |
What are the names and functions of the main circuit terminals for servo drives in size C and D?
| No. | Name | Description |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | L1C, L2C (control circuit power input terminals) | See the nameplate for the rated voltage of the power supply. |
| 2 | R, S, T (main circuit power input terminals) | See the nameplate for the rated voltage of the power supply. |
| 3 | P, N (DC bus terminals) | Used as the common bus terminal for multiple servo drives. |
| P, D, C (terminals for connecting external regenerative resistor) | When an external regenerative resistor is needed, connect it between terminals P and C. Servo drives in sizes C and D are equipped with a built-in regenerative resistor. In this case, terminals P and D are shorted by default. |
|
| 4 | U, V, W (terminals for connecting the servo motor) | Connected to the U, V and W phases of the servo motor. |
| 5 | PE (grounding terminal) | Connected to the power supply ground and the motor grounding terminal. |
What are the names and functions of the main circuit terminals for servo drives in size E?
| No. | Component Name | Description |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | L1C, L2C (control circuit power input terminals) | See the nameplate for the rated voltage of the power supply. |
| 2 | R, S, T (main circuit power input terminals) | See the nameplate for the rated voltage of the power supply. |
| 3 | U, V, W (terminals for connecting the servo motor) | Connected to the U, V and W phases of the servo motor. |
| 4 | N2, N1 (terminals for connecting external reactor) | Terminals N1 and N2 are jumpered by default. Remove the jumper first if you need to install an external DC reactor between N1 and N2. |
| 5 | P, D, C (terminals for connecting external regenerative resistor) | When an external regenerative resistor is needed, connect it between terminals P and C. Servo drives in size E are equipped with a built-in regenerative resistor. In this case, terminals P and D are shorted by default. |
How is an external regenerative resistor connected?
Connect the external regenerative resistor between terminals P and C of the servo drive main circuit terminal block.
What warnings should be observed when connecting an external regenerative resistor?
– Remove the jumper between P and D (if present, e.g., on Size B, C, D, E drives) before connecting the external regenerative resistor. Failure to comply will cause overcurrent and damage the braking transistor.
– Do not connect the external regenerative resistor to the positive/negative pole of the bus directly. Failure to comply will damage the servo drive and cause a fire.
– Do not select any resistor with a resistance lower than the minimum permissible value. Failure to comply will result in E201 (Overcurrent) or damage the servo drive.
– Make sure parameters H02-25 (Regenerative resistor setting), H02-26 (Power of external regenerative resistor) and H02-27 (Resistance of external regenerative resistor) are set properly before use.
– Install the external regenerative resistor on incombustible objects such as a metal.
What are the input/output current specifications for SV660N series servo drives?
| Servo Drive Model SV660N****I | Rated Input Current (A) | Rated Output Current (A) | Maximum Output Current (A) |
|---|---|---|---|
| Size A S1R6 | 2.3 | 1.6 | 5.8 |
| Size A S2R8 | 4.0 | 2.8 | 10.1 |
| Size B S5R5 | 7.9 (single-phase) | 5.5 | 16.9 |
| Size B S7R6 | 5.1 | 7.6 | 23 |
| Size C T3R5 | 2.4 | 3.5 | 11 |
| Size C T5R4 | 3.6 | 5.4 | 14 |
| Size C S012 | 8.0 | 11.6 | 32 |
| Size D T8R4 | 5.6 | 8.4 | 20 |
| Size D T012 | 8.0 | 11.9 | 29.75 |
| Size E T017 | 12.0 | 16.5 | 41.25 |
| Size E T021 | 16.0 | 20.8 | 52.12 |
| Size E T026 | 21.0 | 25.7 | 64.25 |
What are the recommended main circuit cables for SV660N servo drives?
| Servo Drive Model SV660N***** | L1C, L2C | R, S, T | P, C | U, V, W | PE | |||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| AWG | mm² | AWG | mm² | AWG | mm² | AWG | mm² | AWG | mm² | |
| Single-phase 220 V | ||||||||||
| Size A S1R6I | 18 | 2×0.75 | 18 | 2×0.75 | 18 | 2×0.75 | 20 | 3×0.5 | 20 | 0.5 |
| Size A S2R8I | 18 | 2×0.75 | 18 | 2×0.75 | 18 | 2×0.75 | 20 | 3×0.5 | 20 | 0.5 |
| Size B S5R5I | 18 | 2×0.75 | 18 | 2×0.75 | 18 | 2×0.75 | 20 | 3×0.5 | 20 | 0.5 |
| Size C S7R6I (Matching MS1H1-10C30CB motors) | 18 | 3×0.75 | 18 | 3×0.75 | 18 | 3×0.75 | 20 | 3×0.5 | 20 | 0.5 |
| Size C S7R6I (Matching MS1H2-10C30CB/MS1H3-85B15CB motors) | 18 | 3×0.75 | 18 | 3×0.75 | 18 | 3×0.75 | 16 | 3×1.5 | 16 | 1.5 |
| Size D S012I | 16 | 3×0.75 | 16 | 3×0.75 | 16 | 3×0.75 | 16 | 3×1.5 | 16 | 1.5 |
| Three-phase 220 V | ||||||||||
| Size C S7R6I (Matching MS1H1-10C30CB motors) | 18 | 2×0.75 | 18 | 3×0.75 | 18 | 2×0.75 | 20 | 3×0.5 | 20 | 0.5 |
| Size C S7R6I (Matching MS1H2-10C30CB/MS1H3-85B15CB motors) | 18 | 2×0.75 | 18 | 3×0.75 | 18 | 2×0.75 | 16 | 3×1.5 | 16 | 1.5 |
| Size D S012I | 18 | 2×0.75 | 16 | 3×1.5 | 16 | 2×1.5 | 16 | 3×1.5 | 16 | 1.5 |
| Three-phase 380 V | ||||||||||
| Size C T3R5I | 18 | 2×0.75 | 18 | 3×0.75 | 18 | 2×0.75 | 16 | 3×1.5 | 16 | 1.5 |
| Size C T5R4I | 18 | 2×0.75 | 18 | 3×0.75 | 18 | 2×0.75 | 16 | 3×1.5 | 16 | 1.5 |
| Size D T8R4I | 18 | 2×0.75 | 18 | 3×0.75 | 16 | 2×1.5 | 16 | 3×1.5 | 16 | 1.5 |
| Size D T012I | 18 | 2×0.75 | 16 | 3×1.5 | 16 | 2×1.5 | 16 | 3×1.5 | 16 | 1.5 |
| Size E T017I | 18 | 2×0.75 | 16 | 3×1.5 | 12 | 2×4.0 | 14 | 3×2.5 | 14 | 2.50 |
| Size E T021I | 18 | 2×0.75 | 14 | 3×2.5 | 12 | 2×4.0 | 12 | 3×4.0 | 12 | 4.00 |
| Size E T026I | 18 | 2×0.75 | 12 | 3×4.0 | 12 | 2×4.0 | 12 | 3×4.0 | 12 | 4.00 |
What are the recommended grounding cable lugs for SV660N servo drives?
| Servo Drive Model SV660N****I | PE |
|---|---|
| Size A SV660NS1R6I | TVR 2-4 |
| Size A SV660NS2R8I | TVR 2-4 |
| Size B SV660NS5R5I | TVR 2-4 |
| Size C SV660NS7R6I | TVR 2-4 |
| Size C SV660NT3R5I | TVR 2-4 |
| Size C SV660NT5R4I | TVR 2-4 |
| Size D SV660NS012I | TVR 2-4 |
| Size D SV660NT8R4I | TVR 2-4 |
| Size D SV660NT012I | TVR 2-4 |
| Size E SV660NT017I | TVR 2-4 |
| Size E SV660NT021I | TVR 2-4 |
| Size E SV660NT026I | TVR 2-4 |
Reference data for recommended cable lugs (Manufacturer: Suzhou Yuanli Metal Enterprise Co., Ltd)
What are the dimensions for the TVR 2-4 grounding cable lug?
| Cable Lug Model | D (mm) | d2 (mm) | B (mm) |
|---|---|---|---|
| TVR 2-4 | 4.5 | 4.3 | 8.5 |
What types of main circuit cables are recommended?
| Model | Name | Allowable Temperature (°C) |
|---|---|---|
| PVC | General PVC cable | – |
| IV | PVC cable with a rated voltage of 600 V | 60 |
| HIV | Special PVC cable with heat-resistance capacity | 75 |
What are the specifications (allowable current vs. temperature) for UVW cables based on AWG?
| AWG Specification | Nominal Cross Sectional Area (mm²) | Allowable Current in Different Ambient Temperatures (A) | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 30°C | 40°C | 50°C | ||
| 20 | 0.519 | 8 | 7 | 6 |
| 19 | 0.653 | 9 | 8 | 7 |
| 18 | 0.823 | 13 | 11 | 9 |
| 16 | 1.31 | 18 | 15 | 12 |
| 14 | 2.08 | 26 | 23 | 20 |
| 12 | 3.31 | 32 | 28 | 26 |
| 10 | 5.26 | 48 | 43 | 38 |
| 8 | 8.37 | 70 | 65 | 55 |
| 6 | 13.3 | 95 | 85 | 75 |
Note that the values listed in the table cannot be exceeded during use.
How should single-phase 220V SV660N models be wired for power supply and alarm output?
Connect Single-phase 220 VAC through a Noise Filter to terminals L1 and L2. Connect the motor phases to U, V, W. Connect the motor PE to PE. Connect the motor PG signals to CN2. Use an electromagnetic contactor (1KM) controlled by RUN/STOP buttons between the noise filter and L1/L2. Connect the DO alarm output (ALM+/ALM-) through a relay (1Ry) and flywheel diode (1D) to control external indicators or systems, powered by 24V/COM. SV660NS1R6 and SV660NS2R8 require an external regenerative resistor between P and C if needed.
Components: 1KM: Electromagnetic contactor; 1Ry: Relay; 1D: Flywheel diode.
Function: DO is set as alarm output (ALM+/-). When the servo drive alarms, the power supply will be cut off automatically via the contactor.
How should SV660NS7R6I and SV660NS012I models be wired for power supply and alarm output?
Connect Single-phase or Three-phase 220 VAC through a Noise Filter to terminals L1C, L2C (control power) and R, S, T (main power, connect L1/L2 from filter for single-phase). Connect the motor phases to U, V, W. Connect the motor PE to PE. Connect the motor PG signals to CN2. Use an electromagnetic contactor (1KM) controlled by RUN/STOP buttons between the noise filter and R, S, T. Connect the DO alarm output (ALM+/ALM-) through a relay (1Ry) and flywheel diode (1D) to control external indicators or systems, powered by 24V/COM.
Components: 1KM: Electromagnetic contactor; 1Ry: Relay; 1D: Flywheel diode.
Function: DO is set as alarm output (ALM+/-). When the servo drive alarms, the power supply will be cut off automatically via the contactor, and the alarm indicator will turn on.
How should three-phase 380V SV660N models be wired for power supply and alarm output?
Connect Three-phase 380 VAC through a Noise Filter to terminals L1C, L2C (control power) and R, S, T (main power). Connect the motor phases to U, V, W. Connect the motor PE to PE. Connect the motor PG signals to CN2. Use an electromagnetic contactor (1KM) controlled by RUN/STOP buttons between the noise filter and R, S, T. Connect the DO alarm output (ALM+/ALM-) through a relay (1Ry) and flywheel diode (1D) to control external indicators or systems, powered by 24V/COM.
Models: SV660NT3R5I, SV660NT5R4I, SV660NT8R4I, SV660NT012I, SV660NT0211, SV660NT0261
Components: 1KM: Electromagnetic contactor; 1Ry: Relay; 1D: Flywheel diode.
Function: DO is set as alarm output (ALM+/-). When the servo drive alarms, the power supply will be cut off automatically via the contactor, and the alarm indicator will be turned on.
What precautions should be taken for main circuit wiring?
– Do not connect the input power cables to the output terminals U, V, and W. Failure to comply will damage the servo drive.
– When cables are bundled in a duct, the cooling effect will be deteriorated. Take the reduction ratio of the allowable current into consideration.
– If the temperature inside the cabinet is higher than the cable’s limit, use a Teflon cable with a higher temperature limit. Insulate regular cables in low-temperature environments as their surface may harden and crack.
– The bending radius of a cable must be 10 times longer than its outer diameter to prevent internal conductor breakage.
– Use cables with a rated voltage above 600 VAC and rated temperature above 75° C.
– Under 30° C ambient temperature with normal cooling, the allowable current density is ≤ 8 A/mm² (total current < 50 A) or ≤ 5 A/mm² (total current > 50 A). Adjust based on the formula for high ambient temperatures or bundled cables: Allowable current density = 8 x Reduction coefficient of conductor current-carrying density x Current correction coefficient.
What is the reduction coefficient for current-carrying density based on the number of cables in a duct?
| Number of Cables in the Same Duct | Current Reduction Coefficient |
|---|---|
| Less than 3 | 0.7 |
| 4 | 0.63 |
| 5-6 | 0.56 |
| 7-15 | 0.49 |
What further precautions apply to main circuit wiring (Bundling, Voltage, Frequency, Grounding, Loose connections)?
– Do not bundle power cables and signal cables together or route them through the same duct. Separate them by at least 30 cm to prevent interference.
– High voltage may still be present for 5 minutes after power-off. Do not touch terminals within this time.
– Avoid frequent power ON/OFF (interval < 1s can cause faults E740, E136, E430). Frequent ON/OFF affects components due to high inrush current (0.2s). If required, ensure the ON/OFF interval is at least one minute.
– Use a grounding cable with the same cross-sectional area as the main circuit cable. If the main circuit cable area is < 1.6 mm², use a grounding cable of 2.0 mm².
– Ground the servo drive properly.
– Do not power on the servo drive if any screw of the terminal block or any cable is loose. Failure to comply may cause a fire.
What are the recommended circuit breakers and contactors for SV660N models?
| Main Circuit Power Supply | Servo Drive Model | Breaker | Contactor | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Current (A) | Schneider Model | Current (A) | Schneider Model | ||
| Single-phase 220 V | SV660NS1R6I | 4 | OSMC32N3C4 | 9 | LC1 D09 |
| SV660NS2R8I | 6 | OSMC32N3C6 | 9 | LC1 D09 | |
| SV660NS5R5I | 16 | OSMC32N3C16 | 9 | LC1 D09 | |
| SV660NS7R6I | 10 | OSMC32N3C10 | 9 | LC1 D09 | |
| SV660NS012I | 16 | OSMC32N3C16 | 9 | LC1 D09 | |
| Three-phase 220 V | SV660NS7R6I | 10 | OSMC32N3C10 | 9 | LC1 D09 |
| SV660NS012I | 16 | OSMC32N3C16 | 9 | LC1 D09 | |
| Single-phase (likely Three-phase) 380 V | SV660NT3R5I | 4 | OSMC32N3C4 | 9 | LC1 D09 |
| SV660NT5R4I | 6 | OSMC32N3C6 | 9 | LC1 D09 | |
| SV660NT8R4I | 10 | OSMC32N3C10 | 9 | LC1 D09 | |
| SV660NT012I | 16 | OSMC32N3C16 | 9 | LC1 D09 | |
| SV660NT017I | 20 | OSMC32N3C20 | 12 | LC1 D12 | |
| SV660NT021I | 25 | OSMC32N3C25 | 18 | LC1 D18 | |
| SV660NT026I | 32 | OSMC32N3C32 | 25 | LC1 D25 | |
What is the pinout and color code for the black 6-pin power cable connector on terminal-type motors (40, 60, 80 flange)?
| Pin No. | Signal Name | Color |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | PE | Yellow/Green |
| 2 | W | Red |
| 3 | V | Black |
| 4 | U | White |
| 5 | Brake Polarity | Brown |
| 6 | Brake insensitive | Blue |
Note: Power cable colors are subject to the colors of the actual product. Cable colors mentioned in this user guide refer to Inovance’s cable colors.
What is the pinout and color code for the black 6-pin power cable connector on lead-wire type motors (40, 60, 80 flange)?
| Pin No. | Signal Name | Color |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | U | White |
| 2 | V | Black |
| 4 | W | Red |
| 5 | PE | Yellow/Green |
| 3 | Brake (polarity insensitive) | N/A |
| 6 |
Recommendations:
– Plastic housing: MOLEX-50361736
– Terminal: MOLEX-39000061
Note: Power cable colors are subject to the colors of the actual product. Cable colors mentioned in this user guide refer to Inovance’s cable colors.
What is the pinout and color code for the MIL-DTL-5015 series 3108E20-18S aviation plug power connector (100, 130 flange)?
| Pin No. (New/Old) | Signal Name | Color |
|---|---|---|
| B | U | Blue |
| I | V | Black |
| F | W | Red |
| G | PE | Yellow/Green |
| C | Brake (polarity insensitive) | N/A |
| E |
Note: Power cable colors are subject to the colors of the actual product. Cable colors mentioned in this user guide refer to Inovance’s cable colors.
What is the pinout and color code for the MIL-DTL-5015 series 3108E20-22S aviation plug power connector (180 flange)?
| Pin No. (Y/Z Series) | Signal Name | Color |
|---|---|---|
| A | U | Blue |
| C | V | Black |
| E | W | Red |
| F | PE | Yellow/Green |
| B | Brake (polarity insensitive) | N/A |
| D |
What items are included in the S6-C4 absolute encoder battery box?
The S6-C4 battery box contains the following items:
– One plastic box
– One 3.6 V/2600 mAh battery
– Terminal block and crimping terminal
How is the absolute encoder battery box installed and removed?
Installing: Follow the visual guide (Figure 3-16) showing the assembly steps for connecting the battery, placing it in the box, and closing the cover.
Removing: Remove the battery box in steps reverse to those shown in the installation figure. Replace the battery every two years due to potential leakage.
Caution: When closing the battery box cover, do not pinch the connector cables.
What precautions should be taken when using the absolute encoder battery?
Improper use of the battery may result in battery leakage, corroding components, or causing battery explosion. Observe the following:
– Insert the battery with correct +/- polarity.
– Replace the battery regularly (recommended interval: every 2 years) to prevent liquid leakage from old or constantly used batteries. The electrolyte is corrosive and conductive.
– Do not disassemble the battery; internal electrolyte can cause physical injuries.
– Do not throw a battery into the fire or heat it up; it may cause an explosion.
– Do not short-circuit the battery or strip off the battery tube. Contact between terminals +/- and metal generates large current, deteriorating power and risking explosion from overheating.
– This battery is non-rechargeable.
– Dispose of the retired battery according to local regulations.
What are the specifications and ratings for the recommended absolute encoder battery (Jieshun LS14500)?
| Items | Ratings | Condition | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|
| Minimum Value | Typical Value | Maximum Value | ||
| External battery voltage (V) | 3.2 | 3.6 | 5 | In standby mode [2] |
| Circuit fault voltage (V) | – | 2.6 | – | In standby mode |
| Battery warning voltage (V) | 2.85 | 3 | 3.15 | – |
| Current consumed by circuit (μΑ) | – | 2 | – | In normal status [1] |
| – | 10 | – | In standby mode, shaft at a standstill | |
| – | 80 | – | In standby mode, shaft rotating | |
| Ambient temperature for operation (°C) | 0 | – | 40 | Same as that required by the motor |
| Ambient temperature for storage (°C) | -20 | – | 60 | |
Output: 3.6 V, 2600 mAh
Recommended manufacturer and model: Shenzhen Jieshun LS14500
Note: The preceding data is obtained under an ambient temperature of 20°C.
What are the notes regarding normal operation and standby mode for the absolute encoder?
[1] During normal operation, the absolute encoder supports single-turn or multi-turn data counting and data transceiving. A well-connected encoder will, upon switch-on of the servo drive, enter normal operation status and transmit/receive data after a delay of 5s. Switching from standby mode to normal operation mode upon power-on requires the motor to rotate at a speed less than 10 RPM. Otherwise, the servo drive reports E740 (Encoder fault), In this case, you need to power on the servo drive again.
[2] Standby mode means the servo drive is not powered on and the absolute encoder is powered up by an external battery to count the multi-turn data. In this case, data transceiving stops.
How is the design life of the absolute encoder battery calculated?
The calculation covers current consumed by the encoder. Suppose the servo drive works normally for T1 hours, the motor rotates for T2 hours after power-off, and stops rotating for T3 hours after power-off daily.
Example:
| Item | Working Time 1 | Working Time 2 |
|---|---|---|
| Days of working in different operating conditions in 1 year (day) | 313 | 52 |
| T1 (hour H) | 8 | 0 |
| T2 (hour H) | 0.1 | 0 |
| T3 (hour H) | 15.9 | 24 |
Capacity consumed in 1 year = (8 h x 2 μΑ + 0.1 h x 80 μΑ + 15.9 h x 10 μΑ) x 313 + (0 h x 2 μΑ + 0 h x 80 μΑ +24 h x 10 μΑ) x 52 ≈ 70 mAH
Design life = Battery capacity/Annual consumption = 2600 mAH/70 mAH = 37.1 years
How are the absolute encoder signals wired?
The wiring diagram of absolute encoder cables connects the encoder connector on the motor to the CN2 connector on the servo drive, with an inline battery box for absolute position retention. The wiring is similar to that of incremental encoders (without a battery box).
What are the lead wires for the absolute encoder battery box?
– Pin 1: Red, Power supply (+)
– Pin 2: Black, Power supply (-)
What precautions should be taken when storing the absolute encoder battery?
– Store the battery under an allowable temperature.
– Ensure reliable contact and sufficient battery power. Failure to comply may cause encoder data loss.
– Model of the battery box (battery included): S6-C4
What is the pinout for the encoder cable connector on terminal-type motors (40, 60, 80 flange)?
Servo Drive Side (6-pin male):
– Pin 1: +5V (Red, Twisted pair)
– Pin 2: GND (Orange, Twisted pair)
– Pin 5: PS+ (Blue, Twisted pair)
– Pin 6: PS- (Purple, Twisted pair)
– Enclosure: PE
Motor Side (7-pin):
– Pin 1: PS+ (Blue, Twisted pair)
– Pin 2: PS- (Purple, Twisted pair)
– Pin 3: DC+ (Brown, Twisted pair)
– Pin 4: DC- (Black, Twisted pair)
– Pin 5: +5V (Red, Twisted pair)
– Pin 6: OV (Orange, Twisted pair)
– Pin 7: PE
What is the pinout for the encoder cable connector on lead wire-type motors (40, 60, 80 flange)?
Servo Drive Side (9-pin connector, connected to CN2):
– Pin 1: Battery (+)
– Pin 4: Battery (-)
– Pin 3: PS+ (Twisted pair)
– Pin 6: PS- (Twisted pair)
– Pin 9: +5V
– Pin 8: GND
– Pin 7: Shield
Motor Side (Encoder lead wire, 9 signals):
– Pin 1: Battery (+) (Blue)
– Pin 4: Battery (-) (Blue and black)
– Pin 3: PS+ (Yellow, Twisted pair)
– Pin 6: PS- (Yellow and black, Twisted pair)
– Pin 9: +5V (Red)
– Pin 8: GND (Black)
– Pin 7: Shield
Recommendations:
– Plastic housing: AMP 172161-1
– Terminal: AMP 770835-1
What is the pinout for the absolute encoder cable connector (MIL-DTL-5015 series 3108E20-29S) for 100, 130, 180 flange motors?
Servo Drive Side (Connector of encoder lead wire, connected to CN2):
– Pin A: PS+ (Twisted pair)
– Pin B: PS- (Twisted pair)
– Pin E: Battery +
– Pin F: Battery –
– Pin G: +5V
– Pin H: GND
– Pin J: Shield
Motor Side (Encoder connector, 20-29 aviation plug):
– Pin A: PS+ (Yellow, Twisted pair)
– Pin B: PS- (Yellow and black, Twisted pair)
– Pin E: Battery+ (Blue)
– Pin F: Battery- (Blue and black)
– Pin G: +5V (Red)
– Pin H: GND (Black)
– Pin J: Shield
What is the pin layout of the Control Signal Terminal CN1?
CN1 is a 15-pin D-sub connector:
– Pin 1: DO1+ (S-RDY+)
– Pin 2: DO2- (ALM-)
– Pin 3: DO2+ (ALM+)
– Pin 4: DO3- (BK-)
– Pin 5: DO3+ (BK+)
– Pin 6: DO1- (S-RDY-)
– Pin 7: DI4 (TouchProbe2)
– Pin 8: DI3 (HomeSwitch)
– Pin 9: DI2 (N-OT)
– Pin 10: DI1 (P-OT)
– Pin 11: DI5 (TouchProbe1)
– Pin 12: Not Used
– Pin 13: COM+
– Pin 14: COM-
– Pin 15: +24V
What are the specifications for the CN1 terminal and recommended cable gauge?
– CN1 terminal: Plastic housing of the plug on the cable side: DB15P (SZTDK), black housing.
– Core: HDB15P (SZTDK), male.
– It is recommended to use cables of 24AWG to 26AWG.
What are the functions of the DI/DO signals on the CN1 terminal?
| Signal Name | Function | Pin No. | Function Description |
|---|---|---|---|
| DI1 | P-OT | 10 | Positive limit switch |
| DI2 | N-OT | 9 | Negative limit switch |
| DI3 | HomeSwitch | 8 | Home switch |
| DI4 | TouchProbe2 | 7 | Touch probe 2 |
| DI5 | TouchProbe1 | 11 | Touch probe 1 |
| +24V | 15 | Internal 24 V power supply, voltage range: 20 V to 28 V, maximum output current: 200 mA | |
| COM- | 14 | Power input terminal (12 V to 24 V) | |
| COM+ | 13 | ||
| DO1+ | S-RDY+ | 1 | Servo ready |
| DO1- | S-RDY- | 6 | |
| DO2+ | ALM+ | 3 | Fault |
| DO2- | ALM- | 2 | |
| DO3+ | BK+ | 5 | Brake |
| DO3- | BK- | 4 |
How is the DI circuit wired when using the internal 24V power supply of the servo drive (relay output)?
Connect the host controller’s relay contact between the DIx pin (e.g., Pin 10 for DI1) and the COM- pin (Pin 14). The internal 24V supply is provided between COM+ (Pin 13) and COM- (Pin 14) via the internal 4.7 kΩ pull-up resistor.
How is the DI circuit wired when using an external 24V power supply (relay output)?
Connect the external +24 VDC supply to the COM+ pin (Pin 13). Connect the relay contact between the DIx pin (e.g., Pin 10 for DI1) and the external 0 V (ground). Ensure the external 0 V is connected to the COM- pin (Pin 14).
Alternatively, connect the external +24 VDC supply to one side of the relay contact. Connect the other side of the relay contact to the DIx pin (e.g., Pin 10 for DI1). Connect COM+ (Pin 13) also to the external +24VDC. Connect the external 0 V to COM- (Pin 14).
Note: The PDF shows an ‘X’ mark indicating that using two separate power supplies (one internal, one external for the relay coil) might be problematic or incorrect wiring practice for this specific setup. Use a single external supply for consistency.
How is the DI circuit wired for an open-collector output using the internal 24V power supply?
For NPN open-collector output: Connect the NPN collector to the DIx pin (e.g., Pin 10 for DI1). Connect the NPN emitter to the COM- pin (Pin 14). The internal 24V supply (Pin 15) and pull-up resistor provide power via COM+ (Pin 13).
For PNP open-collector output: Connect the PNP collector to the DIx pin (e.g., Pin 10 for DI1). Connect the PNP emitter to the COM+ pin (Pin 13) which is connected to the internal +24V (Pin 15). Ensure the controller’s ground is connected to COM- (Pin 14).
How is the DI circuit wired for an open-collector output using an external 24V power supply?
For NPN open-collector output: Connect the external +24 VDC to COM+ (Pin 13). Connect the NPN collector to the DIx pin (e.g., Pin 10 for DI1). Connect the NPN emitter and the external 0V to COM- (Pin 14).
For PNP open-collector output: Connect the external +24 VDC to the PNP emitter and COM+ (Pin 13). Connect the PNP collector to the DIx pin (e.g., Pin 10 for DI1). Connect the external 0 V to COM- (Pin 14).
Note: PNP and NPN inputs cannot be mixed in the same servo drive.
How is the DO circuit connected to a relay-type device?
Connect the external 5-24 VDC supply positive terminal to one side of the relay coil. Connect the other side of the relay coil to the DOx+ pin (e.g., Pin 1 for DO1+). Connect the DOx- pin (e.g., Pin 6 for DO1-) to the external 0 V (ground). A flywheel diode must be installed in parallel with the relay coil (cathode to DOx+, anode to DOx-).
What consideration is needed when connecting the DO terminal to a relay-type device?
When the output terminal is connected to a relay-type device, a flywheel diode must be installed. Otherwise, the DO terminals may be damaged.
What happens if the flywheel diode is missing or connected incorrectly for a relay-type DO load?
If the flywheel diode is not connected, or if its polarity is wrong, the back EMF from the relay coil can damage the servo drive’s output circuit.
How is the DO circuit connected to an optocoupler-type device?
Connect the external 5-24 VDC supply positive terminal to the DOx+ pin (e.g., Pin 1 for DO1+). Connect the DOx- pin (e.g., Pin 6 for DO1-) to the anode of the external optocoupler’s input LED. Connect the cathode of the optocoupler’s input LED to the external 0 V (ground). A current limiting resistor is required in series with the optocoupler LED, typically placed between DOx- and the optocoupler anode.
What happens if the current limiting resistor is not connected for an optocoupler-type DO load?
Failure to connect a current limiting resistor can damage the optocoupler or the servo drive’s output circuit due to excessive current.
What are the maximum allowable voltage and current for the optocoupler output circuit inside the servo drive?
– Voltage: 30 VDC
– Current: DC 50 mA
What is the purpose of the brake in the servo motor?
The brake is used to prevent the servo motor shaft from rotating during non-operating status of the servo drive. This keeps the motor and mechanical load locked, preventing movement due to external forces or gravity when power is off.
What cautions should be observed when using the built-in brake?
– Use the built-in brake for position-lock in the stop state only.
– The brake coil has no polarity.
– Switch off the S-ON signal after the servo motor stops.
– When the servo motor with a built-in brake runs, the brake may generate a clattering sound. Such sound can be considered normal.
– When brake coils are energized (brake released), magnetic flux leakage may occur at the shaft end. Be cautious when using magnetic sensors around the servo motor.
How is the brake signal (BK) wired?
The brake input signal is connected without polarity differentiation. A 24 V external power supply is needed. Connect the +24V supply through a brake control relay contact (BK-RY) to one terminal of the brake coil (BK). Connect the other terminal of the brake coil to the 0V of the 24V supply. The servo drive DOx+/DOx- terminals (e.g., DO3+/DO3- assigned to BK+/BK-) control the BK-RY relay.
What are the specifications for the brakes used in Inovance servo motors?
| Motor Model | Holding Torque (N·m) | Supply Voltage (VDC) ±10% | Rated Power (W) | Coil Resistance (Ω) (±7%) | Excitation Current (A) | Apply Time (ms) | Release Time (ms) | Backlash (°) |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| MS1H1-05B/10B | 0.32 | 24 | 6.1 | 94.4 | 0.25 | ≤ 40 | ≤ 20 | ≤ 1.5 |
| MS1H1-20B/40B, MS1H4-40B | 1.5 | 7.6 | 75.79 | 0.32 | ≤ 60 | ≤ 20 | ≤ 1.5 | |
| MS1H1/H4-75B | 3.2 | 10 | 57.6 | 0.42 | ≤ 60 | ≤ 40 | ≤ 1.0 | |
| MS1H3-85B/13C/18C | 12 | 19.4 | 29.7 | 0.81 | ≤ 120 | ≤ 60 | ≤ 0.5 | |
| MS1H2-10C/15C/20C/25C | 8 | 23 | 25 | 0.96 | ≤ 85 | ≤ 30 | ≤ 0.5 | |
| MS1H2-30C/40C/50C | 16 | 27 | 21.3 | 1.13 | ≤ 100 | ≤ 60 | ≤ 0.5 | |
| MS1H3-29C/44C/55C/75C | 50 | 40 | 14.4 | 1.67 | ≤ 200 | ≤ 100 | ≤ 0.5 |
What precautions should be taken regarding the brake power supply and cable size?
– The brake cannot share the same power supply with other electrical devices. This is to prevent malfunction of the brake due to voltage or current drop caused by other working devices.
– It is recommended to use cables of 0.5 mm² and above.
– When deciding the length of the motor brake cable, take the voltage drop caused by cable resistance into consideration. The input voltage must be at least 21.6 V to enable the brake to work properly.
How are communication signals CN3/CN4 wired in a network topology?
CN3 and CN4 are EtherCAT interface connectors. CN3 (IN) connects to the master (e.g., AM600) or the previous slave device’s CN4 (OUT). CN4 (OUT) connects to the next slave device’s CN3 (IN) in a daisy-chain topology.
How are communication cables connected between the servo drive and a PLC or another servo drive?
Use standard EtherCAT communication cables. Connect the cable from the PLC (master) EtherCAT OUT port to the first servo drive’s EtherCAT IN port (CN3). Connect a cable from the first servo drive’s EtherCAT OUT port (CN4) to the second servo drive’s EtherCAT IN port (CN3), and so on.
What is the pin assignment for the EtherCAT communication signal connectors CN3 and CN4?
| Pin No. | Name | Description |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | TD+ | Data transmitting (+) |
| 2 | TD- | Data transmitting (-) |
| 3 | RD+ | Data receiving (+) |
| 4 and 5 | – | – |
| 6 | RD- | Data receiving (-) |
| 7 and 8 | – | – |
| 9 | TD+ (OUT only) | Data transmitting (+) |
| 10 | TD- (OUT only) | Data transmitting (-) |
| 11 | RD+ (OUT only) | Data receiving (+) |
| 12 and 13 | – | – |
| 14 | RD- (OUT only) | Data receiving (-) |
| 15 and 16 | – | – |
Note: Pins 9-16 correspond to the OUT port (CN4) signals internally linked or passed through from the IN port (CN3).
What is the principle for selecting communication cables (EtherCAT)?
Cable selection is subject to the cable supplier. See “Instructions for purchasing servo encoder cables/power cables” in the Inovance business system.
Suppliers include Inovance, Haituo, and others.
Pricing depends on length and order magnitude. For lengths above 10m, the price is typically based on the 10m price plus an increment for each additional meter.
What is the model structure for Inovance EtherCAT communication cables?
Example: S6-L-T04-3.0
– S6: Product Series (S6 series)
– L: Type (Line)
– T: Meaning (Communication cable)
– 04: Meaning (Multi-drive EtherCAT communication cable)
– 3.0: Cable Length (unit: m) (Available lengths: 0.2, 0.3, 0.5, 1.0, 2.0, 3.0, 5.0, 10.0 m)
What are the material codes and lengths for standard Inovance EtherCAT communication cables?
| Material Code | Cable Model | Length (m) |
|---|---|---|
| 15040261 | S6-L-T04-0.3 | 0.3 |
| 15040262 | S6-L-T04-3.0 | 3.0 |
| 15041960 | S6-L-T04-0.2 | 0.2 |
| 15041961 | S6-L-T04-0.5 | 0.5 |
| 15041962 | S6-L-T04-1.0 | 1.0 |
| 15041963 | S6-L-T04-2.0 | 2.0 |
| 15041964 | S6-L-T04-5.0 | 5.0 |
| 15041965 | S6-L-T04-10.0 | 10.0 |
Note: Cables need to be purchased from Haituo. Guide price is based on the 10.0m cable, with additions for longer lengths, related to order magnitude.
What is the recommended maximum thickness for the head of dual network ports?
The thickness of the head of dual network ports cannot be too large, otherwise, interference may occur. The recommended thickness is 2.4 mm, as shown in the diagram (thickness of network cable protection cover ≤ 2.4 mm).
What are the specifications for the Inovance EtherCAT communication cables (UL, Cat, Shield, Environment, EMC)?
| Item | Description |
|---|---|
| UL certification | UL-compliant |
| Cat 5e cable | Cat 5e cable |
| Double shield | Braided shield (coverage: 85%), aluminum foil shield (coverage: 100%) |
| Environment worthiness | Ambient temperature: -30°C to +60°C, resistant to industrial oil and corrosive acid and alkali |
| EMC test standard | GB/T 24808-2009 |
How is the servo drive connected to a PC using RS232 communication?
Connect the servo drive and the PC using the PC communication cable. It is recommended to use the common communication interface RS232. Connect the RJ45 end (A) of the cable to the servo drive’s RS232 port and the DB9 end (B) to the PC’s serial port.
What is the connection relationship between the servo drive RJ45 and PC DB9 for RS232 communication?
| RJ45 on Servo Drive Side (A) | DB9 on PC Side (B) | ||
|---|---|---|---|
| Signal Name | Pin No. | Signal Name | Pin No. |
| RS232-TXD | 6 | PC-RXD | 2 |
| RS232-RXD | 7 | PC-TXD | 3 |
| GND | 8 | GND | 5 |
| PE (shield) | Enclosure | PE (shield) | Enclosure |
What is the pin definition for the DB9 connector on the PC side for RS232 communication?
| Pin No. | Definition | Description |
|---|---|---|
| 2 | PC-RXD | PC receiving end |
| 3 | PC-TXD | PC transmitting end |
| 5 | GND | Ground |
| Enclosure | PE | Shield |
Pinout Diagram (Looking at Male Connector):
Top row: 1 2 3 4 5
Bottom row: 6 7 8 9
How can a connection be made if the host controller only has a USB interface?
If the host controller is not equipped with serial ports and offers a USB interface only, use a serial-to-USB converter. Connect the RJ45-to-DB9 cable to the servo drive and the converter, then plug the converter’s USB end into the PC.
What is the recommended serial-to-USB converter?
Recommendation:
– Manufacture: Z-TEK
– Model: ZE551A, equipped with a 0.8 m USB extension cable
– Chip model: FT232
What is the terminal layout for the STO functional safety function (CN6)?
CN6 is an input terminal with 4 pins:
– Pin 1: COM (STO reference ground)
– Pin 2: 24V (24 V power supply)
– Pin 3: STO1 (Control input for STO1)
– Pin 4: STO2 (Control input for STO2)
It features two isolated inputs (STO1, STO2) for dual-channel safety and an integrated +24V pin for convenience.
What is the pin assignment for the STO input connector CN6?
| Terminal | Pin No. | Name | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| CN6 | 1 | COM | 0 V | STO reference ground |
| 2 | 24V | 24 V | 24 V power supply | |
| 3 | STO1 | – | Control input for STO1 | |
| 4 | STO2 | – | Control input for STO2 |
How is the short-circuit jumper configured on CN6 when STO is needed versus not needed?
By default, a jumper typically connects Pin 2 (24V) to Pin 3 (STO1) and Pin 4 (STO2) for normal operation without STO. Remove the short-circuit jumper when the STO function is needed in actual applications.
When can the servo drive operate normally based on the STO1 and STO2 input status?
The servo drive can operate normally only if the input status of STO1 and STO2 are both “1” or “H” (High).
If the input status of either STO1 or STO2 (or both) is “0” or “L” (Low), the servo drive cannot run (Safe Torque Off is active).
What are the electrical characteristics of the safety request input signal (STO)?
| Items | Characteristics | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Voltage range | 24 VDC (±15%) | – |
| Input current | 4 mA (Typ.) | Value per channel |
| Standards of logic levels | “0” < 3 V, “1” > 15 V | – |
| Digital input impedance | 5.78 kΩ | – |
How is an external 24V connection made to the STO inputs (CN6)?
Connect the external +24V source to the safety switches/contacts for STO1 and STO2. Connect the output of the STO1 safety contact to CN6 Pin 3 (STO1). Connect the output of the STO2 safety contact to CN6 Pin 4 (STO2). Connect the external 0V (ground) reference of the 24V source to CN6 Pin 1 (STO_GND/COM).
How is the internal 24V connection made to the STO inputs (CN6)?
Use the internal +24V power supply available on CN6 Pin 2. Route this 24V through the safety switches/contacts for STO1 and STO2. Connect the output of the STO1 safety contact to CN6 Pin 3 (STO1). Connect the output of the STO2 safety contact to CN6 Pin 4 (STO2). CN6 Pin 1 (COM) serves as the reference ground.
What are the EMC requirements for STO wiring?
– To avoid short circuits between adjacent conductors, use a shielded cable with its shield connected to protective ground, or a flat cable with an earthed conductor between signal conductors.
– Double-shielded or single-shielded twisted multi-pair cables are strongly recommended.
– Fix and ground the cable shield using a piece of conductive metal (e.g., cable clamp). Remove paint from the mounting surface for good contact.
What is the maximum allowable cable length for STO signals?
The maximum allowable cable length between the drive STO inputs and the activation switch is 30 m.
What additional requirements apply to STO cables (protection, routing, type, size)?
– All cables must be well protected, routed, and clamped where practicable.
– Ensure there is no pulling or pinching on the cables during installation.
– For cabling the DIs of the STO, route the two channels through two separate routes, or the cable must be protected using a double shield to avoid common faults.
– Cable Type: Low voltage, double-shielded or single-shielded twisted multi-pair cable.
– Maximum size: 0.8 mm² (18 AWG)
– Minimum size: 0.3 mm² (28 AWG)
What anti-interference measures should be taken for electrical wiring (command/encoder cables, grounding)?
Take the following measures to suppress interference:
– Ensure the lengths of the command input cable and the encoder cable are below 3 m and 20 m respectively.
– Use a thick cable as the grounding cable (above 2.0 mm²).
What are the recommendations for wiring and grounding?
1) It is recommended to adopt D class (or higher) grounding (grounding resistance below 100 Ω).
2) Adopt single-point grounding.
Use a noise filter to prevent radio frequency interferences. In domestic applications or an unfavorable environment with strong power noise interference, install a noise filter on the input side of the power cable.
For the grounding cable connected to the enclosure, use a cable of at least 3.5 mm² (braided copper cables recommended).
What measures should be taken to prevent malfunction due to electromagnetic interference (EMI)?
To prevent malfunction due to electromagnetic interference, take the following measures:
1) Install the host controller and the noise filter near the servo drive.
2) Install a surge protection device on the relay, solenoid and electromagnetic contactor coils.
3) Separate the electrical circuit from the electronic circuit during wiring and keep a distance of at least 30 cm between them. Do not put these cables in the same duct or bundle them together.
4) Do not share the same power supply with an electric welder or electrical discharge machine. When the servo drive is placed near a high-frequency generator, install a noise filter on the input side of the power cable.
The servo drive uses high-speed switch elements in the main circuit. The switching noise may affect the normal operation of the system due to different peripheral wiring and grounding of the servo drive. Therefore, the servo drive must be properly wired and grounded. A noise filter can be added if necessary.
To prevent potential electromagnetic interferences, observe the following instructions during grounding:
1) Grounding the motor enclosure: Connect the grounding terminal of the servo motor to the PE terminal of the servo drive and ground the PE terminal properly to reduce potential electromagnetic interferences.
2) Grounding the encoder cable shield: Ground both ends of the encoder cable shield.
What are the instructions for using a noise filter?
To prevent interference from power cables and reduce impact of the servo drive to other sensitive devices, install a noise filter on the input side of the power supply according to the magnitude of the input current. In addition, install a noise filter on the power cable part of peripheral devices if necessary.
To ensure the filtering effect, observe the following requirements when installing and wiring the noise filter:
Do not put the input and output cables of the noise filer in the same duct or bundle them together. (See Figure 3-27 for illustration)
Do not lay the grounding cable and the power output cable of the noise filer in the same duct. (See Figure 3-28 for illustration)
Use a separate, thick grounding cable as short as possible for the noise filter. Do not share the same grounding cable with other grounding devices. Adopt single-point grounding. (See Figure 3-29 for illustration)
Ground the noise filter installed inside the control cabinet.
If the noise filter and the servo drive are installed in the same control cabinet, secure the noise filter and the servo drive on the same metal plate. Make sure the contact part is conductive and well bonded, and ground the metal plate properly. (See Figure 3-30 for illustration)
If a noise filter is used, observe the precautions described in “3.7 Definition and Connection of STO terminals”.
What are the precautions for using cables?
Do not bend or apply any tension to cables. The conductor of a signal cable is only 0.2 mm or 0.3 mm in diameter. Handle the cables carefully to prevent fracture.
Use flexible cables for cable carriers. Ordinary cables may be easily damaged after being bent for a long time. Cables suitable for small-power servo motors do not fit for cable carriers.
Ensure the following requirements are fulfilled for use of cable carriers:
The bending radius of the cable must be 10 times longer than its outer diameter.
Do not secure or bundle the cables inside the cable carrier. Cables can be bundled and secured only at the two fixed ends of the cable carrier.
Do not wind or twist the cables.
Ensure the space factor inside the cable carrier is below 60%.
Do not use cables with different sizes together. This is to prevent thin cables from being crushed by thick cables. If thick and thin cables need to be used together, use a spacer plate to separate them.
What are the functions of the keypad buttons?
The keypad on the SV660N servo drive consists of five LEDs and five buttons. The keypad is used for data display, parameter settings, password settings and general function executions. When the keypad is used for parameter settings, the functions of the buttons are described as follows:
| Name | Symbol | Description |
|---|---|---|
| MODE | MODE Button Image | Used to switch the mode and return to the previous menu. |
| UP | UP Arrow Button Image | Used to increase the value of the blinking digit. |
| DOWN | DOWN Arrow Button Image | Used to decrease the value of the blinking digit. |
| SHIFT | Left Arrow Button Image | Used to shift the blinking digit for viewing the high digits of a number consisting of more than 5 digits. |
| SET | SET Button Image | Used to enter the next menu and save parameter settings. |
What types of information does the keypad display?
The keypad displays the status, parameters, faults, and monitored values during operation.
Status display: Displays current servo drive status, such as servo ready or running.
Parameter display: Displays parameters and their setpoints.
Fault display: Displays faults and warnings that occur on the servo drive
Monitored value display: Displays present running parameters of the servo drive
How does the keypad display map to the object dictionary used by the host controller?
The mapping relation between the parameter (decimal) displayed by the keypad and the object dictionary operated by the host controller (hexadecimal, “Index” and “Sub-index”) is as follows:
Object dictionary index = 0x2000 + Parameter group number
Object dictionary sub-index = Hexadecimal offset within the parameter group + 1
Example:
| Display | Object Dictionary Operated by the Host Controller |
|---|---|
| H00-00 | 2000-01h |
| H00-01 | 2000-02h |
| … | … |
| H01-09 | 2001-0Ah |
| H01-10 | 2001-0Bh |
| … | … |
| H02-15 | 2002-10h |
NOTE: The displayed content and parameter settings on the keypad (decimal) side are different from those displayed on the software tool (hexadecimal). Make necessary conversions when performing operations through the software tool in the host controller.
How do I switch between the different display modes on the keypad?
After power-on, the keypad enters status display mode.
Press the MODE button to switch between different modes (Status display -> Parameter display -> Monitored value display (if H0B parameters set) -> Status display). (See Figure 4-2 for illustration).
In the status display mode, set H02-32 (Default keypad display) and select parameters to be monitored. When the motor rotates, the keypad automatically switches to the monitored value display mode. After the motor stops, the keypad automatically reverts to the status display mode.
In the parameter display mode, set parameters in group H0B to select the parameters to be pre-monitored. After setting, the keypad switches to the monitored value display mode.
Once a fault occurs, the keypad enters the fault display mode immediately, and all five LEDs blink. Press the SET button to stop the LEDs from blinking, and then press the MODE button to switch to the parameter display mode.
What do the different status displays on the keypad mean?
| Display Example | Name | Display Condition | Meaning |
|---|---|---|---|
| reset | reset (servo initialization) | Upon power-on | The servo drive is in the initialization or reset status. After initialization or reset is done, the servo drive automatically switches to other status. |
| nr | nr (servo not ready) | Initialization done, but servo drive not ready | As the main circuit is not powered on, the servo drive is not ready to run. See “10 Troubleshooting” for details. |
| ry | ry (servo ready) | Servo drive ready | The servo drive is ready to run and waits for the S-ON signal to be sent from the host controller. |
| rn | rn (servo running) | S-ON signal activated | The servo drive is running. |
| 1-A (Hexadecimal) | 1-A (control mode) | – | Displays present operation mode of the servo drive in hexadecimal digits. 1: Profile position control 3: Profile velocity mode 4: Profile torque mode 6: Homing mode 8: Cyclic synchronous position mode 9: Cyclic synchronous velocity mode A: Cyclic synchronous torque mode |
| 1-8 (Character) | 1-8 (communication status) | – | Displays the status of the slave EtherCAT state machine in the form of characters. 1: Initialization 2: Pre-operational 4: Safe operational 8: Operational |
| (Segment Status) | CN4 (connection indication) | EtherCAT output connected successfully | Solid OFF: No communication connection is detected in the physical layer. |
| (Segment Status) | CN3 (connection indication) | EtherCAT input connected successfully | Solid ON: Communication connection is detected in the physical layer. |
How are parameters displayed on the keypad?
SV660N servo drive parameters are divided into 14 groups based on parameter functions. A parameter can be located quickly based on the group it belongs to. See “12.2 List of Object Groups” to view the parameter list.
Display of the parameter group:
| Display | Name | Description |
|---|---|---|
| HXX.YY | Parameter group | XX: Parameter group No. (decimal) YY: Parameter No. within the group (hexadecimal) |
For example, H02-00 is displayed as “H02.00” (02: Parameter group No., 00: Parameter No. within the group).
Display of negative numbers and data of different lengths:
1) Signed number of 4 digits and below or unsigned number of 5 digits and below: Such numbers are displayed in a single page (five LEDs). For signed numbers, the highest bit “-” indicates the negative symbol. Examples: “-9999”, “65535”.
2) Signed number of more than 4 digits or unsigned number of more than 5 digits: Such numbers are displayed from low to high digits through several pages with each page displaying five digits. Hold down the SHIFT button for more than 2s to switch to the next page. The display shows the current page indicator and the value segment for that page. (See Figure 4-3 for “-1073741824” and Figure 4-4 for “1073741824” display examples).
Decimal point display: The segment “.” of the ones position indicates the decimal point, and this segment does not blink. Example: “100.0”.
What do the parameter setting displays on the keypad mean?
| Display Example | Name | Display Condition | Meaning |
|---|---|---|---|
| donE | Done (parameter setting done) | Parameter setting done | The parameter value is set and stored in the servo drive. The servo drive is ready to perform other operations. |
| F.Inlt | F.Inlt (parameter restored to default setting) | Parameter initialization in progress (H02-31 = 1) | The servo drive is in the process of parameter initialization. After parameter initialization is done, restart the control circuit power supply. |
| Error | Error (wrong password) | User password (H02-30) applied and wrong password entered | The password entered is wrong. Enter the password again. |
| TunE | TunE | One-button tuning enabled | The one-button tuning is in progress. |
| FAIL | FAIL | One-button tuning failed | The one-button tuning failed. |
How are faults and warnings displayed, and how can I view or clear them?
The keypad can display present or previous faults and warnings. For analysis and solutions to the faults and warnings, see “10 Troubleshooting”.
When an individual fault or warning occurs, the keypad displays the fault or warning code immediately. When multiple faults or warnings occur, the keypad displays the warning code of the highest level.
Set the fault to be viewed in H0B-33 (Fault log). View the fault code of the selected fault in H0B-34.
Set H02-31 (Parameter initialization) to 2 (Clear fault log) to clear the latest 10 faults or warnings saved in the servo drive.
For example, E941.0 is displayed as follows:
| Display Example | Name | Description |
|---|---|---|
| E941.0 | E941.0 | E: Fault or warning 941.0: Fault or warning code |
How can I monitor servo drive values using the keypad?
Group H0B displays parameters used to monitor the operating state of the servo drive.
Set H02-32 (Default keypad display). After the servo motor runs, the keypad switches from the status display mode to the parameter display mode and displays the parameter No. defined by H02-32 in group H0B.
For example, if H02-32 is set to 00, the keypad displays the value of H0B-00 when the motor speed is not 0 RPM.
See details of the monitored value display mode in the following table:
| Para. No. | Name | Unit | Meaning | Display Example |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| H0B-00 | Motor speed actual value | RPM | Displays the actual value of the motor speed after round-off, which is accurate to 1 RPM. | Display of 3000 RPM: 3000 Display of -3000 RPM: -3000 |
| H0B-01 | Speed reference | RPM | Displays present speed reference of the servo drive. | Display of 3000 RPM: 3000 Display of -3000 RPM: -3000 |
| H0B-02 | Internal torque reference | 0.1% | Displays the percentage of the actual motor output torque to the rated motor torque. | Display of 100.0%: 100.0 Display of -100.0%: -100.0 |
| H0B-03 | Monitored DI status | – | Displays the level status of DI1 to DI5: Upper LED segment ON: High level (indicated by “1”), Lower LED segment ON: Low level (indicated by “0”). The value read using the software tool is a decimal number. | Example: DI1 low, DI2-DI5 high (Binary 11110, Hex 0x001E). Display shows segments for DI5 to DI1 as High, High, High, High, Low. |
| H0B-05 | Monitored DO status | – | Displays the level status of DO1 to DO3: Upper LED segment ON: High level (indicated by “1”), Lower LED segment ON: Low level (indicated by “0”). The value read using the software tool is a decimal number. | Example: DO1 low, DO2-DO3 high (Binary 110, Hex 0x0006). Display shows segments for DO3, DO2, DO1 as High, High, Low. |
| H0B-07 | Absolute position counter (32-bit decimal value) | Reference unit | Displays the absolute position of the motor (reference unit). | Display of 1073741824: Multi-page display showing “1824”, “7374”, “10”. |
| H0B-09 | Mechanical angle | 0.1° | Displays the present mechanical angle of the motor. | Display of 360.0°: 360.0 |
| H0B-10 | Rotation angle (Electrical angle) | 0.1° | Displays the present electrical angle of the motor. | Display of 360.0°: 360.0 |
| H0B-11 | Speed information corresponding to the input position reference | RPM | Displays the speed corresponding to the position reference in an individual control cycle. | Display of 3000 RPM: 3000 Display of -3000 RPM: -3000 |
| H0B-12 | Average load rate | 0.1% | Displays the percentage of the average load torque to the rated torque of the motor. | Display of 100.0%: 100.0 |
| H0B-15 | Encoder position deviation counter (displayed in 32-bit decimal) | Encoder unit | Encoder position deviation = Sum of input position references (encoder unit) – Sum of pulses fed back by the encoder (encoder unit) | Display of 10000: Multi-page display “0000”, “0001”. |
| H0B-17 | Feedback pulse counter (displayed in 32-bit decimal) | Encoder unit | Counts and displays the number of servo motor encoder pulses (encoder unit). Note: For absolute motor, only shows low 32-bit value. View H0B-77/H0B-79 for actual position. | Display of 1073741824: Multi-page display “1824”, “7374”, “10”. |
| H0B-19 | Total power-on time (displayed in 32-bit decimal) | 0.1s | Counts and displays the total power-on time of the servo drive. | Display of 429496729.5s: Multi-page display “729.5”, “9496”, “42”. |
| H0B-24 | RMS value of phase current | 0.1 A | Displays the RMS value of the servo motor phase current. | Display of 4.60 A: 04.60 |
| H0B-26 | Bus voltage | 0.1 V | Displays the main circuit DC bus voltage between terminals P and -. | Display of 311.0 V (from 220 VAC): 0311.0 Display of 537.0 V (from 380 VAC): 0537.0 |
| H0B-27 | Power module temperature | °C | Displays the temperature of the power module inside the servo drive. | Display of 27°C: 027 |
| H0B-33 | Fault log | – | Displays the previous fault to be viewed. 0: Present fault, 1: Last fault, …, 9: 9th to last fault | 0-Display of present fault: 0 |
| H0B-34 | Fault code of the selected fault | – | Displays the fault code of the fault defined by H0B-33. When no fault occurs, H0B-34 displays “Er.000”. | If H0B-33=0, H0B-34=Er.941, the present fault code is 941. Display: Er.941 |
| H0B-35 | Time stamp of the selected fault | s | Displays the total operating time of the servo drive when the fault defined by H0B-33 occurs. When there is no fault, H0B-35 displays “0”. | If H0B-34=Er.941, and H0B-35=107374182.4, fault 941 occurred at 107374182.4s. Display: Multi-page “1824”, “7374”, “10”. |
| H0B-37 | Motor speed upon occurrence of the selected fault | RPM | Displays the servo motor speed when the fault defined by H0B-33 occurred. When there is no fault, H0B-37 displays “0”. | Display of 3000 RPM: 3000 Display of -3000 RPM: -3000 |
| H0B-38 | Motor phase U current upon occurrence of the selected fault | 0.1 A | Displays the RMS value of phase U winding current when the fault defined by H0B-33 occurred. When there is no fault, HOB-38 displays “0”. | Display of 4.60 A: 004.6 |
| H0B-39 | Motor phase V current upon occurrence of the selected fault | 0.1 A | Displays the RMS value of phase V winding current when the fault defined by H0B-33 occurred. When there is no fault, HOB-39 displays “0”. | Display of 4.60 A: 004.6 |
| H0B-40 | Bus voltage upon occurrence of the selected fault | V | Displays the DC bus voltage of the main circuit when the fault defined by HOB-33 occurred. When there is no fault, HOB-40 displays “0”. | Display of 311.0 V: 0311.0 Display of 537.0 V: 0537.0 |
| H0B-41 | Input terminal status upon occurrence of the selected fault | – | Displays the electrical status of the five DIs when the fault defined by H0B-33 occurred. Viewing method is the same as HOB-03. When there is no fault, all DIs are low level (Hex “0”). | Example: Value 0x0001 (DI1 high). Display: Segments for DI5-DI1 show Low, Low, Low, Low, High. |
| H0B-43 | Output terminal status upon occurrence of the selected fault | – | Displays the electrical status of the three DOs when the fault defined by H0B-33 occurred. Viewing method is the same as HOB-05. When there is no fault, all DOs are low level (Decimal “0”). | Example: Value 0x0003 (DO1, DO2 high). Display: Segments for DO3, DO2, DO1 show Low, High, High. |
| H0B-53 | Position deviation counter (displayed in 32-bit decimal) | Reference unit | Position deviation = Sum of input position references (reference unit) – Sum of pulses fed back by the encoder (reference unit) | Display of 10000: Multi-page “0000”, “0001”. |
| H0B-55 | Motor speed actual value | 0.1 RPM | Displays the actual value of the motor speed, which is accurate to 0.1 RPM. | Display of 3000.0 RPM: 000.0 -> 3 Display of -3000.0 RPM: 000.0 -> -3 |
| H0B-57 | Control circuit voltage | 0.1 V | Displays the DC voltage of the control circuit. | Display of 12.0 V: 12.0 |
| H0B-58 | Mechanical absolute position (low 32 bits) | Encoder unit | Displays the mechanical absolute position (low 32 bits) when an absolute encoder is used. | Display of 2147483647: Multi-page “3647”, “4748”, “21”. |
| H0B-60 | Mechanical absolute position (high 32 bits) | Encoder unit | Displays the mechanical absolute position (high 32 bits) when an absolute encoder is used. | Display of “-1”: -1 |
| H0B-70 | Number of absolute encoder revolutions | Rev | Displays the present number of revolutions of an absolute encoder. | Display of 32767: 32767 |
| H0B-71 | Single-turn position feedback of the absolute encoder | Encoder unit | Displays the single-turn position feedback of the absolute encoder. | Display of 8388607: Multi-page “8607”, “838”. |
| H0B-77 | Absolute encoder position (low 32 bits) | Encoder unit | Displays the absolute position (low 32 bits) of the motor when the absolute encoder is used. | Display of 2147483647: Multi-page “3647”, “4748”, “21”. |
| H0B-79 | Absolute encoder position (high 32 bits) | Encoder unit | Displays the absolute position (high 32 bits) of the motor when an absolute encoder is used. | Display of “-1”: -1 |
| H0B-81 | Single-turn position feedback of the load in rotation mode (low 32 bits) | Encoder unit | Displays the position feedback of the mechanical load (low 32 bits) when the absolute system works in the rotation mode. | Display of 2147483647: Multi-page “3647”, “4748”, “21”. |
| H0B-83 | Single-turn position feedback of the load in rotation mode (high 32 bits) | Encoder unit | Displays the position feedback of the mechanical load (high 32 bits) when the absolute system works in the rotation mode. | Display of 1: 1 |
| H0B-85 | Single-turn position of the load in rotation mode | Reference unit | Displays the absolute mechanical position when the absolute system works in the rotation mode. | Display of 1073741824: Multi-page “1824”, “7374”, “10”. |
How do I set parameters using the keypad?
Parameter settings can be performed through the keypad. For details on parameters, see “12.2 List of Object Groups”. The following procedure shows how to change from position control mode to speed control mode after the power supply is switched on (Example starting from “ry” status):
1. Press MODE to enter parameter group display (e.g., “H00”).
2. Use UP/DOWN buttons to navigate to the desired parameter group (e.g., “H02”). Press SET.
3. The display shows the parameter number within the group (e.g., “H02.00”). Use UP/DOWN buttons to navigate to the desired parameter (e.g., “H02.30” for user password, or another parameter like H00-01 for control mode change).
4. Press SET to view/edit the parameter value. The first digit will blink.
5. Use UP/DOWN buttons to change the blinking digit’s value.
6. Use SHIFT button to move the blinking digit to the left.
7. Repeat steps 5 and 6 until the desired value is set.
8. Press SET to save the new parameter value. The display shows “donE” briefly.
9. Press MODE to return to the parameter group display (e.g., “H02”). Press MODE again to return to the status display if needed.
Keypad Button Summary for Parameter Setting:
MODE: Used to switch the keypad display mode and return to the previous menu.
UP/DOWN: Used to increase or decrease the value of the blinking digit.
SHIFT: Used to shift the blinking digit.
SET: Used to save present setpoint or switch to the next menu.
After parameter setting is done, that is, “Done” is displayed on the keypad, press MODE to return to parameter group display.
How do I set, change, or cancel the user password?
After the user password (H02-30) is enabled, only the authorized user can perform parameter settings; other operators can only view the parameter.
Setting the user password (e.g., to “00001”):
1. Navigate to parameter H02-30 using the keypad.
2. Press SET. The current value (e.g., “00000”) is displayed with the last digit blinking (if no password is set or correct password entered).
3. Use UP/DOWN and SHIFT buttons to set the desired password (e.g., “00001”).
4. Press SET to save the password. The display shows “donE”. The password is now set.
NOTE: If the last digit does not blink when viewing H02-30, access to parameters is password protected. If the last digit blinks, no password is set or a correct password has been entered.
Changing the user password:
1. Navigate to parameter H02-30.
2. Press SET. The display shows “—–” because it’s password protected.
3. Press SET again.
4. Enter the current password using UP/DOWN and SHIFT buttons.
5. Press SET. If the password is correct, the value “donE” will appear briefly, then H02-30 value is displayed with the last digit blinking. If incorrect, “Error” is displayed.
6. If correct, use UP/DOWN and SHIFT to enter the new password.
7. Press SET to save the new password. The display shows “donE”.
Canceling user password:
1. Enter the currently set user password as described in the “Changing” steps to gain access.
2. Once H02-30 is displayed with the last digit blinking, set the value to “00000” using UP/DOWN and SHIFT buttons.
3. Press SET to save. The display shows “donE”. The user password is now canceled.
How do I perform a Jog operation using the keypad?
Users can perform trial running on the servo motor and the servo drive through jogging. CAUTION: The jog function requires the S-ON signal to be deactivated. Otherwise, jogging cannot be executed.
Operating process (Speed Jog using H0D-11):
1. Power on the servo drive.
2. Navigate to parameter H0D-11 using the keypad.
3. Press SET. The display shows the initial/current motor jogging speed (e.g., “0200”).
4. Use UP/DOWN buttons to set the desired motor jogging speed (e.g., “0300”).
5. Press SET. The keypad displays “JOG”, indicating the motor is energized and jog is available.
6. Press and hold the UP button to make the motor rotate forwardly (CCW). Release the button to stop.
7. Press and hold the DOWN button to make the motor rotate reversely (CW). Release the button to stop.
Note [1]: Press UP or DOWN to increase or decrease the motor jogging speed. After exiting from the jog mode, the motor reverts to the initial speed setpoint (or default).
Note [2]: Press UP or DOWN to make the servo motor rotate in forward or reverse direction. After you release the button, the servo motor stops immediately.
Exiting from jog:
Press MODE to exit from the jog status (“JOG”) and return to the previous menu (H0D-11 display).
Note: A similar procedure exists for Position Jog using H0D-08, where the display shows “JOG-P”.
What are the functions assignable to Digital Inputs (DI) and Digital Outputs (DO)?
Users can assign DI/DO functions and logics to parameters in group H03/H04 using the keypad (or host controller communication). The servo drive offers five DI signals and three DO signals on the CN1 terminal.
Functions of DI signals:
| Code | Name | Function | Description | Remarks |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 01 | S-ON | Servo ON | Inactive – Servo motor disabled in local mode Active – Servo motor enabled in local mode |
The S-ON function is active only in the non-bus control mode. The corresponding DI logic must be level-triggered. |
| 02 | ALM-RST | Fault reset | Active: Fault reset under local mode Inactive: Fault not reset under local mode |
This function is active only in the non-bus control mode. It is recommended the corresponding DI logic be level-triggered. |
| 14 | P-OT | Positive limit switch | Active – Forward drive inhibited Inactive – Forward drive permitted |
Overtravel prevention applies when the mechanical movement is beyond the movable range. It is recommended the corresponding DI logic be level-triggered. |
| 15 | N-OT | Negative limit switch | Active – Reverse drive inhibited Inactive – Reverse drive permitted |
Overtravel prevention applies when the mechanical movement is beyond the movable range. It is recommended the corresponding DI logic be level-triggered. |
| 31 | HomeSwitch | Home switch | Inactive – Mechanical load beyond the home switch range Active – Mechanical load within the home switch range |
The corresponding DI logic must be level-triggered. |
| 34 | EmergencyStop | Emergency stop | Active: Position locked after stopping at zero speed Inactive: Current running status not affected |
It is recommended the corresponding DI logic be level triggered. |
| 38 | TouchProbe1 | Touch probe 1 | Inactive – Probe not triggered Active – Probe can be triggered |
The probe logic is only related to the probe function (60B8h). |
| 39 | TouchProbe2 | Touch probe 2 | Inactive – Probe not triggered Active – Probe can be triggered |
The probe logic is only related to the probe function (60B8h). |
Functions of DO signals:
| Code | Name | Function | Description | Remarks |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 01 | S-RDY | Servo ready | Active – Servo ready Inactive – Servo not ready |
The servo drive is ready to run. |
| 02 | TGON | Motor rotating | Inactive – Absolute value of filtered motor speed smaller than the value of H06-16. Active – Absolute value of filtered motor speed reaching the value of H06-16. |
– |
| 09 | BRK | Brake output | Active: Brake signal outputted Inactive: Brake signal not outputted |
– |
| 10 | WARN | Warning | Active – Warning occurred on the servo drive Inactive – No warning occurred on the servo drive or the warning has been reset |
– |
| 11 | ALM | Fault | Active – Fault occurred on the servo drive Inactive – No fault occurred on the servo drive or the fault has been reset |
– |
| 25 | CMP | Position comparison | Active: Servo drive passing the target position comparison point Inactive: Servo drive not passing the target position comparison point |
– |
| 32 | EDM | Safety status | Active: STO function triggered Inactive: STO function not triggered |
The EDM outputs active signals only when the 24 V input voltages for STO1 and STO2 are disconnected simultaneously. |
How do I use the Forced DI function?
The forced DI function can be used to test the DI function of the servo drive without relying on external signals.
Operating process:
1. Set the desired DI functions and logic levels using parameters in group H03.
2. Set parameter H0D-17 (Forced DI/DO selection) to 1 (Forced DI enabled, forced DO disabled) or 3 (Forced DI and DO enabled).
3. Set parameter H0D-18 (Forced DI value) to define the high/low level of each DI signal. H0D-18 is a hexadecimal value. Convert it to binary; ‘1’ represents high level, ‘0’ represents low level for DI5 down to DI1.
4. Monitor the DI level status through H0B-03 (Monitored DI status) on the keypad. The display should match the binary representation set in H0D-18.
Example: To activate the function assigned to DI1 (assuming active low logic) and deactivate functions for DI2-DI5:
The desired binary state is “11110” (DI5=High, DI4=High, DI3=High, DI2=High, DI1=Low). This corresponds to hexadecimal “1E”.
Set H0D-17 to 1 or 3.
Set H0D-18 to “1E” using the keypad.
Check H0B-03; the keypad should display the segments corresponding to High, High, High, High, Low for DI5 to DI1.
Related parameter H0D-17 (200D-12h):
| Value | Meaning | Setting Condition | Effective Time | Default |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 0 | No operation | During running | Immediately | 0 |
| 1 | Forced DI enabled, forced DO disabled | |||
| 2 | Forced DO enabled, forced DI disabled | |||
| 3 | Forced DI and DO enabled | |||
| 4 | EtherCAT forced DO |
Exit: The forced DI function is not retentive upon power-off. Normal DIs apply after restart, or you can set H0D-17 to 0 (No operation) to return to the normal DI mode immediately.
How do I use the Forced DO function via keypad?
The forced DO function can be used to check the DO signal connection between the host controller and the servo drive. CAUTION: In cases where the servo motor is used in vertical motion, if the brake output signal (FunOUT.9: BK) is forced ON, the brake is released and the load may fall. Take protective measures.
Operating process:
1. Set the desired DO functions and logic levels using parameters in group H04.
2. Set parameter H0D-17 (Forced DI/DO selection) to 2 (Forced DO enabled, forced DI disabled) or 3 (Forced DI and DO enabled).
3. Set parameter H0D-19 (Forced DO value) to activate or deactivate the DO functions. H0D-19 is a hexadecimal value. Convert it to binary; ‘1’ usually represents the active state, ‘0’ the inactive state for DO3 down to DO1 (check H04 logic settings).
4. Monitor the DO level status through H0B-05 (Monitored DO signal) on the keypad and check the physical output state.
Example: To activate DO functions assigned to DO2 and DO3, and deactivate DO1 (assuming active high logic):
The desired binary state is “110” (DO3=Active, DO2=Active, DO1=Inactive). This corresponds to hexadecimal “6”.
Set H0D-17 to 2 or 3.
Set H0D-19 to “6” using the keypad.
Check H0B-05; the keypad should display segments corresponding to High, High, Low for DO3, DO2, DO1.
Exit: The forced DO function is not retentive upon power-off. Normal DOs apply after restart, or you can set H0D-17 to 0 (No operation) to return to the normal DO mode immediately.
How do I use the EtherCAT-controlled forced DO function?
After this function is enabled, all DO signal levels are controlled by EtherCAT object 60FE-01h (Physical output). CAUTION: In cases where the servo motor is used in vertical motion, if the brake output signal (FunOUT.9: BK) is forced ON via EtherCAT, the brake is released and the load may fall. Take protective measures.
Operating process:
1. Set parameter H0D-17 (200D-12h, Forced DI/DO selection) to 4 to enable bus forced DO function.
2. Use EtherCAT object 60FE-02h (Physical Output Enable) to select which DOs (DO1, DO2, DO3 corresponding to bits 16, 17, 18) are to be controlled via communication. Set the corresponding bit to 1 to enable control for that DO.
3. Use EtherCAT object 60FE-01h (Physical Output) to set the output level (ON/OFF) of the selected DOs. Set the corresponding bit (16, 17, 18) to 1 for ON or 0 for OFF.
4. Monitor the DO level status through H0B-05 (Monitored DO signal) on the keypad and check the physical output state.
Relationship Table:
| Bit | Related DO | Physical Output Enable: 60FE-02h | Physical Output: 60FE-01h |
|---|---|---|---|
| 16 | DO1 | 1: DO1 forced output enabled | DO1 forced output (0: OFF, 1: ON) |
| 17 | DO2 | 1: DO2 forced output enabled | DO2 forced output (0: OFF, 1: ON) |
| 18 | DO3 | 1: DO3 forced output enabled | DO3 forced output (0: OFF, 1: ON) |
Note: When 200D-12h is set to 4 and any bit among bit16 to bit18 of 60FE-02h is set to 1, the corresponding forced DO is initially OFF.
Example: To make DO1 output low level (OFF) and DO2/DO3 output high level (ON) via EtherCAT:
Set 200D-12h to 4.
Set 60FE-02h to 0x00070000 (enable control for DO1, DO2, DO3).
Set 60FE-01h to 0x00060000 (DO3=ON, DO2=ON, DO1=OFF).
Check H0B-05; keypad display should show High, High, Low for DO3, DO2, DO1.
Exit: The EtherCAT-controlled forced DO function is not retentive upon power-off. Normal DOs apply after restart, or you can set H0D-17 (Forced DI/DO selection) to 0 (No operation) to return to the normal DO mode.
What is the general flowchart for setting up and commissioning the servo drive?
The general process is as follows (See Figure 5-1):
1. Start
2. Pre-running check: Check cable connections. Check the ambient environment and the machine.
3. Power on: Switch on the power supply. Ensure the S-ON signal is switched off.
4. Start jogging: Start jogging using the keypad or Inovance software tool.
5. Parameter setting: Set common parameters. Set parameters related to each control mode.
6. Servo running: Run the servo drive at low speed during initial operation. Set related parameters to achieve desired performance. Perform commissioning on the servo drive.
7. Servo stop: Conditions causing stop include: The S-ON signal is switched off. A fault occurs. The limit switch signal is activated. Emergency stop is applied.
8. End
What checks should be performed before operating the servo drive (Pre-running Check)?
Check the following items before operating the servo drive and the servo motor:
| Category | No. | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Wiring | 1 | Power input terminals of the servo drive are connected properly. |
| 2 | The servo motor UVW cables are connected in the correct phase sequence at both ends. | |
| 3 | No short circuit exists in the power input terminals or the main circuit output terminals (U, V, W) of the servo drive. | |
| 4 | The control signal cables are connected properly. External signal cables such as brake and overtravel prevention signals are connected properly. | |
| 5 | The servo drive and the servo motor are grounded properly. | |
| 6 | The stress on cables is within the permissible range. | |
| 7 | The connecting terminals are well insulated. | |
| Environment and Mechanical Conditions | 1 | No unwanted objects (such as the cable end or metal filings) which may cause short circuit are present inside or near the servo drive. |
| 2 | The servo drive and the external regenerative resistor are placed on incombustible objects. | |
| 3 | The servo motor installation and the shaft and mechanical connections are reliable. | |
| 4 | The servo motor and the machine that the servo motor is connected to are ready to run. |
How do I power on the servo drive and check its status?
Switching on the input power supply:
The input terminals for single-phase 220 V power supplies are L1 and L2.
The input terminals for three-phase power supplies are L1/L2/L3 or L1C/L2C (control circuit power input terminals) and R/S/T (main circuit power input terminals)
After switching on the input power supply, if the bus voltage indicator is in normal status and the keypad displays “reset” -> “ry” in sequence, it indicates the servo drive is ready to run and waits for the S-ON signal to be sent from the host controller.
If the keypad keeps displaying “nr”, see “10 Troubleshooting” for solutions.
If the keypad displays the fault code, see “10 Troubleshooting” for solutions.
Deactivating the S-ON signal:
Before proceeding with jogging or parameter settings, ensure the S-ON signal is deactivated. Switch the servo state machine and deactivate the S-ON signal sent from the host controller. Deactivate the DI enable signal or the internal auxiliary function enable signal if applicable.
How do I perform Jogging for initial checks?
Perform jogging to check whether the servo motor rotates properly without unusual vibration or noise. Ensure the S-ON signal is OFF before starting.
NOTE: The acceleration/deceleration time constant for jogging can be set via H06-12 (2006-0Dh).
Using the keypad (jogging in the speed mode):
1. Enter jogging in the speed mode by setting H0D-11 through the keypad.
2. The keypad displays the default jogging speed, which can be modified by pressing UP/DOWN.
3. Press SET to enter the jogging status, and the keypad displays “JOG”.
4. Ensure the motor power is enabled if required by the system (this step implies S-ON is conceptually needed for power stage, but logically OFF for jog command).
5. Hold down UP or DOWN to switch between forward and reverse jogging as needed.
6. Press MODE to exit from the jogging mode.
Using Inovance software tool (jogging in the speed mode):
1. Open the “Speed JOG” interface in the software tool.
2. Set the jog speed.
3. After switching the servo status to ON (within the software context for jog), press the forward/reverse arrow displayed on the interface to switch between forward and reverse jog as needed.
Using the keypad (jogging in the position mode):
1. Enter jogging in the position mode by setting H0D-08 through the keypad.
2. The keypad displays the default jogging speed, which can be modified by pressing UP/DOWN.
3. Press SET to enter the jogging status, and the keypad displays “JOG-P”.
4. Ensure motor power is enabled.
5. Hold down UP or DOWN to switch between forward and reverse jogging as needed.
6. Press MODE to exit from the jogging mode.
Related Parameter H06-12 (2006-0Dh): Acceleration ramp time of jog speed
Unit: ms. Range: 0 to 65535. Default: 10. Sets the time constant for the servo motor to accelerate from 0 RPM to 1000 RPM during jog.
How do I change the motor’s direction of rotation?
Set parameter H02-02 (2002-03h) (Direction of rotation) to change the motor direction of rotation without changing the polarity of the input reference.
Related Parameter H02-02 (2002-03h): Direction of rotation
Value:
0: CCW as the forward direction (Default). Defines the CCW direction as the forward direction when a forward run command is received, indicating the motor rotates in the CCW direction when viewed from the motor shaft side.
1: CW as the forward direction. Defines the CW direction as the forward direction when a forward run command is received, indicating the motor rotates in the CW direction when viewed from motor shaft side.
Setting Condition: At stop & Effective Time: Next power-on.
Note: Changes in the setpoint of H02-02 do not affect the pulse output form or the positive/negative attribute of monitoring parameters. The “Forward drive” and direction of rotation in the overtravel prevention function are the same as the settings in H02-02.
How do I set up and wire the motor brake?
The brake is used to prevent the servo motor shaft from rotating when the servo drive is in the non-operating state, keeping the motor and load locked.
CAUTION:
Use the built-in brake for position-lock in the stop state only.
The brake coil has no polarity.
After the servo motor stops, switch off the S-ON signal.
When the servo motor with built-in brake runs, the brake may generate a clattering sound (normal).
When brake coils are energized (brake released), magnetic flux leakage may occur at the shaft end. Pay attention when using magnetic sensors nearby.
1. Wiring of the brake:
The motor brake input signal (BK terminals on motor) is connected without polarity differentiation. A 24 V DC power supply is needed.
Standard Wiring (See Figure 5-3):
Connect a dedicated 24V power supply.
Connect the +24V from the supply to one side of the brake control relay contact (BK-RY).
Connect the other side of the BK-RY contact to one of the motor’s BK terminals.
Connect the second motor BK terminal to the 0V (GND) of the 24V power supply.
Connect the servo drive’s assigned Brake DO output (e.g., DO3 by default: DOx+(BK+), DOx-(BK-)) to control the coil of the brake control relay (BK-RY).
Precautions: Consider voltage drop due to cable resistance. Input voltage at the brake must be at least 21.6 V. Use cables of 0.5 mm² or above. Do not share the brake power supply with other devices.
Brake Specifications (Table 5-2 Summary):
Refer to Table 5-2 for specific motor model details regarding Holding Torque, Supply Voltage (24 VDC ±10%), Rated Power, Coil Resistance, Excitation Current, Apply Time, Release Time, and Backlash.
2. Brake software setting:
Allocate DO function 9 (FunOUT.9: BK, brake output) to a specific DO terminal (DO3 is default) using H04 parameters.
Set the active logic for this DO (e.g., active high means DO ON = brake released).
Related DO Function FunOUT.9 (BK):
Inactive: Brake power supply is switched off, brake applies (motor locked).
Active: Brake power supply is switched on, brake is released (motor can rotate).
The working time sequence depends on the servo drive state (normal or fault).
What is the brake time sequence under normal operating conditions?
The sequence depends on whether the motor is standstill or rotating.
Motor at a standstill (Actual motor speed < 20 RPM):
(See Figure 5-4 for timing diagram)
If S-ON signal is OFF and speed < 20 RPM:
When S-ON turns ON: Brake output (BK) turns ON (brake released) after a delay [1]. After a further delay [2] (defined by H02-09 / 2002-0Ah), position/speed/torque commands can be accepted.
When S-ON turns OFF: Brake output (BK) turns OFF immediately [3] (brake applied). Motor remains energized for a delay [4] defined by H02-10 (2002-0Bh) before de-energizing to prevent load movement.
CAUTION: Do not input commands during delay [2]. Load may move slightly on vertical axes during delay [4].
Related Parameters:
H02-09 (2002-0Ah): Delay from brake output ON to command received (0-500 ms, Default 250). Defines delay [2].
H02-10 (2002-0Bh): Delay from brake output OFF to motor de-energized (50-1000 ms, Default 150). Defines delay [4].
Motor rotating (Actual motor speed >= 20 RPM):
(See Figure 5-5 for timing diagram)
If S-ON signal changes from ON to OFF while rotating:
Motor enters ramp-to-stop state (defined by 6085h).
Brake output (BK) turns OFF [3] only after one of these conditions is met:
1. Motor speed decelerates below threshold H02-11 (2002-0Ch), AND time delay H02-12 (2002-0Dh) has NOT been reached.
2. Time delay H02-12 (2002-0Dh) IS reached (even if speed is still above H02-11).
After Brake output (BK) turns OFF, the motor stays energized for delay H02-10 (2002-0Bh) [4] before de-energizing.
CAUTION: Do not input commands during brake release delay [2] when S-ON turns ON. Motor stays energized during delay [4] after BK turns OFF.
Related Parameters:
H02-11 (2002-0Ch): Motor speed threshold at brake output OFF in rotation state (20-3000 RPM, Default 30). Speed threshold for condition 1 above.
H02-12 (2002-0Dh): Delay from S-ON OFF to brake output OFF in the rotating state (1-1000 ms, Default 500). Time delay for condition 2 above.
H02-09, H02-10 also apply as in standstill case.
What is the brake time sequence under quick stop or fault conditions?
Brake time sequence in quick stop:
Depends on the stop mode (605Ah). For de-energized state (605Ah < 4), the brake output condition is the same as the sequence under normal state (motor rotating).
Brake time sequence under fault state:
Faults are classified as Level 1 (No. 1) and Level 2 (No. 2). See “10 Troubleshooting”.
1) No. 1 faults: If brake is used, stop mode is forced to “Dynamic braking stop, keeping dynamic braking state”. The brake output condition is the same as the brake time sequence under normal state (motor rotating). (See Figure 5-13 for timing).
2) No. 2 faults: If brake is used, stop mode is forced to “Ramp to stop, keeping dynamic braking state”. The brake output condition is the same as the brake time sequence under normal state (motor rotating). (See Figure 5-17 for timing).
NOTE: Recommended setpoint for 6085h (Stop deceleration) when brake is used: Deceleration time < H02-12 (2002-0Dh). If not met, deceleration is based on H02-12.
How do I select and configure a regenerative resistor?
When motor torque opposes rotation, energy returns to the drive, raising bus voltage. A regenerative resistor consumes this surplus energy above the braking threshold to prevent damage.
The resistor can be built-in or external. They cannot be used together. Some models (SV660NS1R6I, SV660NS2R8I) require an external resistor if needed.
Specifications (Table 5-3 Summary):
Refer to Table 5-3 for drive model specifications: Built-in Resistance (Ω), Built-in Power (Pr W), Processable Power (Pa W), Minimum Permissible External Resistance (Ω, set by H02-21).
Selection Process (See Figure 5-7 Flowchart):
1. Determine the reciprocating motion cycle time T (s).
2. Determine the maximum motor braking speed (RPM).
3. Determine the load to motor inertia ratio (N). (Use inertia auto-tuning if needed).
4. Calculate braking energy (E1): Find the energy generated at rated speed to standstill (Eo) from Tables (p36-37). Calculate E1 = (N + 1) * Eo.
5. Determine max energy absorbed by capacitor (Ec) from Tables (p36-37).
6. Compare E1 and Ec:
If E1 <= Ec: No regenerative resistor needed. Set 2002-1Ah to 3.
If E1 > Ec: Regenerative resistor is needed.
7. Calculate required resistor power (Pb): Pb = 2 * (E1 – Ec) / T (Watts).
8. Compare Pb with drive’s processable power (Pa) from Table 5-3:
If Pb <= Pa: Built-in resistor is sufficient (if available). Set H02-25 (Regenerative resistor type, old parameter?) or 2002-1Ah to 0 (if representing built-in).
If Pb > Pa: External resistor is required.
9. Select External Resistor: Recommended power = Pb / (1 – DeratingFactor). Use 70% derating (DeratingFactor=0.7), so Recommended Power = Pb / 0.3. Ensure the resistor’s resistance (Ω) is >= Minimum Permissible Resistance (H02-21 / 2002-16h). Use a resistor with an aluminum housing.
Example Calculation (H1 750W): T=2s, Speed=3000 RPM, N=4. From table, Eo=6.8J (approx), Ec=22.4J. E1=(4+1)*6.8 = 34J. E1 > Ec. Pb = 2*(34-22.4)/2 = 11.6W. Pa=25W (from Table 5-3). Since Pb < Pa, built-in is sufficient.
Example Calculation (H1 750W): T=2s, Speed=3000 RPM, N=10. E1=(10+1)*6.8 = 74.8J. E1 > Ec. Pb = 2*(74.8-22.4)/2 = 52.4W. Pa=25W. Since Pb > Pa, external is required. Recommended power = 52.4 / 0.3 = 175W. Resistance >= Minimum (check H02-21).
Connection and Setting (External Resistor):
Use resistor with 70% derating. Ensure resistance >= minimum permissible value.
Remove jumper between terminals P and D (if present).
Connect external resistor between terminals P and C. (See Figure 5-8).
Set 2002-1Ah (Regenerative resistor type) to 1 (natural ventilation) or 2 (forced air cooling).
Set related parameters:
2002h 16h: (Read-only) Minimum permissible resistance.
2002h 1Bh: Power of external regenerative resistor used (W). Set >= calculated Pb.
2002h 1Ch: Resistance of external regenerative resistor used (Ω). Set actual value, ensure >= 2002-16h.
2002h 19h: Resistor heat dissipation coefficient (%). Set based on cooling (<=30% natural, <=50% forced air).
CAUTION: Improper settings impact performance. Ensure resistance >= minimum. Resistor temperature can exceed 120°C; ensure safety (cooling, thermal switch).
Continuous Generating State:
If load is in continuous power-generating status (e.g., lowering a weight), common DC bus topology is recommended. If using resistor, calculate power based on continuous load torque and speed. Example: H1 750W, 60% rated torque @ 1500 RPM -> 225W back to drive. Required resistor power = 225 / 0.3 = 750W (with 50 Ω resistance).
Related Parameters:
| Parameter No. | Name | Value Range | Unit | Function | Setting Condition | Effective Time | Default |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 2002h 1A | Regenerative resistor type | 0- Reserved 1: External, natural ventilation 2: External, forced air cooling 3: No regenerative resistor needed |
– | Defines the mode of absorbing and releasing the braking energy. | At stop | Immediately | 3 |
| 2002h 16h | Minimum permissible resistance of regenerative resistor | Non-settable and model dependent | – | Displays the minimum permissible resistance of the external regenerative resistor. | At display | – | Model dependent |
| 2002h 1Bh | Power of external regenerative resistor | 1-65535 | W | Defines the power of the external regenerative resistor used. Note: Cannot be smaller than the calculated braking power (Pb). | At stop | Immediately | Model dependent |
| 2002h 1Ch | Resistance of external regenerative resistor | 1-1000 | Ω | Defines the resistance of the external regenerative resistor used. Note: Cannot be smaller than 2002-16h. Otherwise, Er.922.0 will occur. | At stop | Immediately | Model dependent |
| 2002h 19h | Resistor heat dissipation coefficient | 10-100 | % | Defines the heat dissipation coefficient when an external regenerative resistor is used. Cannot be higher than 30% (natural) or 50% (forced air). Larger value = better braking efficiency. | At stop | Immediately | 30 |
How do I start running the servo motor and what should I check?
1) Switch on the S-ON signal: When the servo drive is ready (“ry”), switch on the S-ON signal (via host controller or DI if configured). The keypad displays “rn”, indicating the drive is running. If no command input is given, the motor stays in a locked state without rotating.
2) Input command: After a command (position/speed/torque) is input, the servo motor starts rotating.
Checks during operation:
| No. | Instruction |
|---|---|
| 1 | At initial operation, set a proper reference to make the motor run at low speed and check whether the motor rotates properly. |
| 2 | Observe whether the motor rotates in the correct direction. If the direction of rotation is opposite to the desired direction, check the input reference and reference direction settings (H02-02). |
| 3 | If the direction of rotation is correct, observe the motor speed actual value (e.g., H0B-00/H0B-55) and the average load rate (e.g., H0B-12) through the keypad or Inovance software tool. |
| 4 | After checking the preceding operating conditions, set related parameters properly to adapt the motor to actual operating conditions. |
| 5 | Perform commissioning on the servo drive according to the instructions in Chapter 6. |
Power-on Timing Diagram (Figure 5-10): Shows typical timings for power supply setup, microprocessor initialization, servo ready output (ry), S-ON signal activation, dynamic brake release, motor energization, brake release (if applicable), and command acceptance.
What are the servo motor stopping behaviors under different fault or warning conditions?
The stopping behavior depends on the fault level (No. 1 or No. 2), whether a brake is used, and the specific warning.
Fault 1 (e.g., Overcurrent, Overvoltage):
Stop Mode: Default is H02-08 = 2 (Dynamic braking stop, keeping dynamic braking status). If brake is enabled, this mode is forced.
Without Brake:
Coast to stop, keeping de-energized status (H02-08=0): Motor de-energizes and coasts. (Fig 5-11)
Dynamic braking stop, keeping de-energized status (H02-08=1): Dynamic brake engages, motor de-energizes. (Fig 5-12)
Dynamic braking stop, keeping dynamic braking state (H02-08=2): Dynamic brake engages, motor stays in dynamic braking. (Fig 5-14)
With Brake (H02-08 forced to 2): Dynamic brake engages, motor stays in dynamic braking state, brake applies according to normal rotating sequence. (Fig 5-13)
Fault 2 (e.g., Encoder error, Overload):
Stop Mode: Default is H02-06 = 2 (Ramp to stop as defined by 6085, keeping de-energized status). If brake is enabled, mode is forced to -4 (Ramp to stop 6085h, keeping dynamic braking).
Without Brake:
Coast to stop, keeping de-energized status (H02-06=0): Motor de-energizes and coasts. (Fig 5-15)
Ramp to stop/Emergency torque stop, keeping de-energized/dynamic braking (H02-06 options): Motor stops per selected mode. (Fig 5-16)
With Brake (H02-06 forced to -4): Motor ramps to stop (6085h), keeps dynamic braking state, brake applies according to normal rotating sequence. (Fig 5-17)
Warnings that Cause Stop (Overtravel Er.950, Er.952):
Stop Mode: Stops at zero speed (as defined by 6085h) if brake function enabled, keeping position lock status. Stops at zero speed if brake function not enabled, keeping position lock status.
Timing: Motor decelerates, position lock engages. (Fig 5-18)
Warnings that Do Not Cause Stop (Other Warnings):
These warnings do not affect the operating status of the servo drive. The motor continues running normally. (Fig 5-19)
Fault Reset:
A fault reset signal (edge-triggered via DI or communication) clears the fault status. The drive returns to a ready state (Rdy) after about 3ms. Commands can be accepted after brake release delay if applicable. (Fig 5-20)
What are the different servo stop modes and stop statuses?
Comparison of stop modes (Table 5-5):
| Stop Mode | Description | Feature |
|---|---|---|
| Coast to stop | The servo motor is de-energized and decelerates to 0 RPM gradually. Deceleration time is affected by mechanical inertia and friction. | Features smooth deceleration and small mechanical impact, but the deceleration process is slow. |
| Stop at zero speed | The servo motor decelerates immediately to 0 RPM and stops. | Features quick deceleration, but the mechanical impact is large. |
| Ramp to stop | The servo motor decelerates to 0 RPM smoothly upon receiving position/speed/torque references (or internal ramp). | Features a smooth and controllable deceleration process with small mechanical impact. |
| Stop at emergency torque | The servo drive outputs a reverse braking torque to stop the motor. | Features quick deceleration, but the mechanical impact is large. |
| Dynamic braking stop | The servo motor is in the dynamic braking status. | Features quick deceleration, but the mechanical impact is large. |
Comparison of stop status (Table 5-6):
| Stop Status | Description |
|---|---|
| De-energized | The motor is de-energized after it stops rotating, and the motor shaft can be rotated freely. |
| Position lock | The motor shaft is locked and cannot be rotated freely after the motor stops rotating. |
| Dynamic braking | The motor is de-energized after it stops rotating, and the motor shaft cannot be rotated freely. (Applies while dynamic brake circuit is active). |
The servo drive stops under the following situations:
S-ON OFF: Switch off the S-ON signal through communication or DI. The servo drive stops according to the stop mode configured in H02-05 or 605Ch.
Stop at fault: The stop mode varies with the fault type (No. 1 or No. 2) and is configured in H02-08 and H02-06 respectively.
How do I configure the stop mode for S-ON OFF and Fault conditions?
Stop Mode at S-ON OFF:
Defined by parameter H02-05 (2002-06h) or 605Ch. If either value changes, the other changes accordingly.
Parameter: H02-05 (Stop mode at S-ON OFF), Int16, Effective Immediately.
Values for H02-05 / 605Ch:
| Value (H02-05 / 605Ch) | Stop Mode |
|---|---|
| -4 (605Ch only) | Ramp to stop as defined by 6085h, keeping dynamic braking status |
| -3 | Stop at zero speed, keeping dynamic braking status |
| -2 | Ramp to stop as defined by 6084/609A, keeping dynamic braking status |
| -1 | Dynamic braking stop, keeping dynamic braking status |
| 0 | Coast to stop, keeping de-energized status (Default for H02-05) |
| 1 | Ramp to stop as defined by 6084/609A, keeping de-energized status |
NOTE: If brake output function is enabled, stop mode at S-ON OFF is forcibly set to “Ramp to stop as defined by 6085h, keeping dynamic braking status” (Value -4 for 605Ch logic).
Stop Mode at No. 1 Fault:
Defined by parameter H02-08 (2002-09h).
Parameter: H02-08 (Stop mode at No. 1 fault), Uint16, Effective Immediately, Default 2.
Values for H02-08:
| Value | Stop Mode |
|---|---|
| 0 | Coast to stop, keeping de-energized status |
| 1 | Dynamic braking stop, keeping de-energized status |
| 2 | Dynamic braking stop, keeping dynamic braking status (Default) |
NOTE: If brake output function is enabled, stop mode at No. 1 fault is forcibly set to “Dynamic braking stop, keeping dynamic braking status” (Value 2).
Stop Mode at No. 2 Fault:
Defined by parameter H02-06 (2002-07h).
Parameter: H02-06 (Stop mode at No. 2 fault), Int16, Effective Immediately, Default 2.
Values for H02-06:
| Value | Stop Mode |
|---|---|
| -5 | Stop at zero speed, keeping dynamic braking status |
| -4 | Stop at emergency torque, keeping dynamic braking status |
| -3 | Ramp to stop as defined by 6085, keeping dynamic braking status |
| -2 | Ramp to stop as defined by 6084/609A, keeping dynamic braking status |
| -1 | Dynamic braking stop, keeping dynamic braking status |
| 0 | Coast to stop, keeping de-energized status |
| 1 | Ramp to stop as defined by 6084/609A, keeping de-energized status |
| 2 | Ramp to stop as defined by 6085, keeping de-energized status (Default) |
| 3 | Stop at emergency torque, keeping energized status |
NOTE: If brake output function is enabled, stop mode at No. 2 fault is forcibly set to “Ramp to stop as defined by 6085h, keeping dynamic braking status” (Value -3 logic).
How are the stop modes for a No. 2 fault defined by parameter 605Eh?
Parameter 605Eh (Fault reaction option code) defines the deceleration mode of the servo motor for stopping rotation and the servo motor state after stops at a No. 2 fault. The available stop modes are:
| Value | Stop Mode |
|---|---|
| -5 | Stop at zero speed, keeping dynamic braking status |
| -4 | Stop at emergency torque, keeping dynamic braking status |
| -3 | Ramp to stop as defined by 6085, keeping dynamic braking status |
| -2 | Ramp to stop as defined by 6084/609A, keeping dynamic braking status |
| -1 | Dynamic braking stop, keeping dynamic braking status |
| 0 | Coast to stop, keeping de-energized status |
| 1 | Ramp to stop as defined by 6084/609A, keeping de-energized status |
| 2 | Ramp to stop as defined by 6085, keeping de-energized status |
| 3 | Stop at emergency torque, keeping e-energized status |
Note: After the brake output function is enabled, the stop mode at No. 2 fault is forcibly set to “Ramp to stop as defined by 6085h, keeping dynamic braking status”.
How can the “Stop mode at No. 2 fault” be set?
The “Stop mode at No. 2 fault” can be set in parameter H02-06 or 605E. If the value of H02-06 or 605E changes, the value of the other parameter (605E or H02-06) also changes accordingly.
What is “Overtravel” and “Stop at overtravel”?
Definition of terms:
“Overtravel”: The distance of the mechanical movement exceeds the designed range of safe movement.
“Stop at overtravel”: When the motion part moves beyond the range of safe movement, the limit switch changes the signal level on the digital input, and the servo drive forces the motor to stop.
How are the stop modes for overtravel defined by parameter H02-07?
Parameter H02-07 (Stop mode at overtravel) defines the deceleration mode of the servo motor for stopping rotation and the servo motor state after stops due to overtravel. The settings are:
| Value | Stop mode |
|---|---|
| 0 | Coast to stop, keeping de-energized status |
| 1 | Stops at zero speed, keeping position lock status |
| 2 | Stop at zero speed, keeping de-energized status |
| 3 | Ramp to stop as defined by 6085h, keeping de-energized status |
| 4 | Ramp to stop as defined by 6085h, keeping position lock status |
| 5 | Dynamic braking stop, keeping de-energized status |
| 6 | Dynamic braking stop, keeping dynamic braking status |
| 7 | Not responding to overtravel |
For safety when the servo motor drives a vertical axis, set 2002-08h (H02-07) to 1 to make the motor shaft stay in the position lock status after overtravel occurs. If the servo motor enters the overtravel status when driving a vertical axis, the workpiece may fall. To prevent this risk, set 2002-08h to 1.
After the brake output function is enabled, the stop mode at overtravel is forcibly set to “Stop as defined by 6085h, keeping position lock status”.
How should limit switches be used for overtravel prevention?
When the workpiece moves linearly, install limit switches to prevent mechanical damage. To use limit switches for overtravel prevention:
1. Allocate FunIN.14 (P-OT, positive limit switch) and FunIN.15 (N-OT, negative limit switch) to two Digital Inputs (DIs) of the servo drive.
2. Set the active logic of these DIs.
This enables the servo drive to receive the level signals from the limit switches. The servo drive enables or cancels the stop-at-overtravel status based on the DI level status. In the overtravel status, you can input a reverse run command to make the motor (workpiece) run in the reverse direction.
The related DI functions are:
| Function No. | Name | Function | Description |
|---|---|---|---|
| FunIN.14 | P-OT | Positive limit switch | Overtravel prevention applies when the mechanical movement is beyond the movable range. Inactive: Forward drive permitted Active: Forward drive inhibited |
| FunIN.15 | N-OT | Negative limit switch | Overtravel prevention applies when the mechanical movement is beyond the movable range. Inactive: Reverse drive permitted Active: Reverse drive inhibited |
How can an Emergency Stop be implemented?
The emergency stop can be implemented using the following two methods:
1) FunIN.34: EmergencyStop DI function
2) 200D-06h (HOD-05): Emergency stop parameter
Related DI function:
| Function No. | Name | Function | Description |
|---|---|---|---|
| FunIN.34 | EmergencyStop | Braking | Inactive: The servo drive keeps the present operating status. Active: The servo drive stops according to the stop mode defined by 605Ah. |
Related parameter HOD-05 defines whether to enable emergency stop:
| Parameter | Name | Value | Description | Default |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| HOD-05 (200D-06h) | Emergency stop | 0 | No operation | 0 |
| 1 | Emergency stop enabled |
When HOD-05 is enabled (set to 1), the servo drive stops in the stop mode defined by 605Ch regardless of the operating state.
What is Quick Stop and how is it configured?
Quick stop applies when bit2 (Quick stop) in the control word 6040h is set to 0 (Valid). The quick stop mode is defined by parameter 605Ah (Quick stop option code).
Parameter 605Ah defines the deceleration mode of the servo motor for stopping rotation and the servo motor state after quick stop:
| Value | Stop mode |
|---|---|
| 0 | Coast to stop, keeping de-energized status |
| 1 | Ramp to stop as defined by 6084h/609Ah (HM), keeping de-energized status |
| 2 | Ramp to stop as defined by 6085h, keeping de-energized status |
| 3 | Stop at emergency torque, keeping de-energized status |
| 4 | N/A |
| 5 | Ramp to stop as defined by 6084h/609Ah (HM), keeping position lock status |
| 6 | Ramp to stop as defined by 6085h, keeping position lock status |
| 7 | Stop at emergency-stop torque, keeping position lock status |
Note: When the brake function is enabled and the setpoint of 605Ah is less than 4, the stop mode is forced to “Ramp to stop as defined by 6085h, keeping de-energized state”.
What is the Halt function and how is it configured?
The halt function applies when bit8 in the control word 6040h is set to 1 (Valid). The halt mode is defined by parameter 605Dh (Stop option code).
Parameter 605Dh defines the deceleration mode of the servo motor for stopping rotating and the servo motor state after halt:
PP/PV/HM mode:
| Setpoint | Stop mode |
|---|---|
| 1 | Ramp to stop as defined by 6084h/609Ah (HM), keeping position lock status |
| 2 | Ramp to stop as defined by 6085h, keeping position lock status |
| 3 | Stop at emergency-stop torque, keeping position lock status |
PT mode:
| Setpoint | Stop mode |
|---|---|
| 1/2/3 | Ramp to stop as defined by 6087h, keeping position lock statestatus |
Should acceleration/deceleration time be set to an excessively small value?
No. Do not set the acceleration/deceleration time to an excessively small value. An excessively small value will lead to an overlong stop distance, causing the risk of collision.
What is the purpose of HOA-72 (Maximum time for ramp-to-stop)?
When the stop mode is set to “Ramp to stop as defined by 6084h/609Ah (HM)” or “Ramp to stop as defined by 6085h”, the parameter HOA-72 (Maximum time for ramp-to-stop) should be set to prevent an overlong stop distance caused by an excessively small deceleration setpoint. If 6084h/609Ah (HM) or 6085h is set to an excessively small value, the stop deceleration is restricted by the setpoint of H0A-72.
HOA-72 defines the maximum time taken by the motor in decelerating from 6000 RPM to 0 RPM under these ramp-to-stop modes.
| Parameter | Name | Access | Mapping | Related Mode | Setting Condition & Effective Time | Data Range | Unit | Default | Data Type |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| HOA-72 (200A-49h) | Maximum time for ramp-to-stop | RW | – | ALL | At stop & Immediately | 0-65535 | ms | 10000 | Uint16 |
What is the Gear Ratio (Conversion Factor) and how is it calculated?
Gear ratio refers to the motor displacement (in encoder units) corresponding to the load shaft displacement of one reference unit. It determines the proportional relation between the load shaft displacement (in reference units) and the motor displacement (in encoder units).
Motor displacement = Load shaft displacement x Gear ratio
The gear ratio is comprised of the numerator 6091-01h and denominator 6091-02h. It is related to the mechanical reduction ratio, mechanical dimensions, and motor encoder resolution.
Calculation formula:
Gear ratio = (Motor encoder resolution) / (Load shaft resolution)
Related parameters define this proportional relation:
| Index | Name | Access | Mapping | Related Mode | Setting Condition & Effective Time | Data Type |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 6091h | Gear ratio | – | Yes | All | – | Uint32 (ARR) |
| Sub-index 0h | Number of gear ratio sub-indexes | RO | No | – | – | Uint8 (Default: 2) |
| Sub-index 1h | Motor revolutions | RW | RPDO | – | During running & Immediately | Uint32 (Default: Depending on encoder resolution) |
| Sub-index 2h | Shaft revolutions | RW | RPDO | – | During running & Immediately | Uint32 (Default: 1) |
Relations:
Motor position feedback = Load shaft position feedback x Gear ratio
Motor speed (RPM) = (Load shaft speed x Gear ratio 6091h / Encoder resolution) x 60
Motor acceleration (RPM/ms) = (Load shaft acceleration x Gear ratio 6091h / Encoder resolution) x (1000 / 60)
Can you provide an example calculation for the position factor (Gear Ratio components)?
Yes, take a ball screw example:
Minimum reference unit fc = 1 mm
Lead pB = 10 mm/r
Reduction ratio n = 5:1
Inovance 23-bit serial-type motor encoder resolution P = 8388608 (PPR)
The position factor is calculated as follows:
Position factor = (Encoder resolution P x n) / pB
Position factor = (8388608 x 5) / 10
Position factor = 41943040 / 10
Position factor = 4194304
Therefore, 6091-1h (Motor revolutions) = 4194304, and 6091-2h (Shaft revolutions) = 1. This means when the load shaft displacement is 1 mm, the motor displacement is 4194304 encoder units.
Reduce the values of 6091-1h and 6091-2h to a point where there is no common divisor, and take the final value.
What is the purpose of Gain Tuning?
The purpose of Gain Tuning is to set the gain parameters of the servo drive to proper values so that the servo drive can drive the motor as quickly and accurately as possible based on internal references or commands sent from the host controller. The gain is defined by a combination of multiple mutually-affected parameters (including position loop gain, speed loop gain, filter, and inertia ratio). Setting these parameters to proper values helps keep a balanced performance.
What is the general procedure for gain tuning?
The general procedure for gain tuning is as follows:
1. Start.
2. Perform a trial run through jogging to ensure the motor operates properly (NOTE).
3. Perform Inertia auto-tuning (Offline or Online). See section “Inertia Auto-tuning” for details.
4. Perform Gain auto-tuning (using ETune or STune). See relevant sections for details.
5. Check if performance is OK.
6. If OK, proceed to step 9 (End).
7. If not OK, perform Manual gain tuning. See section “Manual Gain Tuning” for details.
8. Check if performance is OK.
9. If OK, proceed to step 11 (End).
10. If not OK (vibration occurs), perform Vibration suppression. See section “Vibration Suppression” for details. Then proceed to step 11 (End).
11. End.
What are the different gain tuning procedures available?
The available gain tuning procedures are:
| Step | Gain Tuning Procedure | Sub-Type | Description | Reference Section |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | Inertia auto-tuning | Offline | The servo drive calculates the inertia ratio automatically. | 6.2.1 |
| Online | The host controller sends a command to make the motor rotate, and the servo drive calculates the inertia ratio in real time. | 6.2.2 | ||
| 2 | Gain auto-tuning | The servo drive automatically generates a set of gain values that match the inertia ratio (the inertia ratio must be set correctly). | 6.3/6.4 | |
| 3 | Manual gain tuning (If auto-tuning is insufficient) | Basic gain | Adjust the auto-tuned values manually. | 6.5.1 |
| Reference filter | Filters the position, speed, and torque references. | 6.5.3 | ||
| Feedforward gain | Improves the follow-up performance. | 6.5.4 | ||
| Pseudo differential regulator | Improves the anti-interference capacity in the low frequency range through adjusting the speed loop control mode. | 6.5.5 | ||
| Torque disturbance observer | Improves the capacity in resisting the torque disturbance. | 6.5.6 | ||
| 4 | Vibration suppression | Mechanical resonance | The mechanical resonance is suppressed through the notch. | 6.7.1 |
| Low-frequency resonance | The low-frequency resonance is suppressed through the filter. | 6.7.2 | ||
What is Inertia Auto-tuning and how is the ratio calculated?
Inertia Auto-tuning automatically calculates the load inertia ratio (parameter 2008-10h), which is a critical parameter for the servo system. A proper inertia ratio facilitates the commissioning process.
The load inertia ratio is calculated using the formula:
Load inertia ratio = (Total moment of inertia of the mechanical load) / (Moment of inertia of the motor)
The servo drive supports two inertia auto-tuning methods:
1) Offline inertia auto-tuning: Enabled via parameter 200D-03h and initiated using the keypad, without involving the host controller.
2) Online inertia auto-tuning: Initiated by a command from the host controller, involving the host controller.
What are the requirements for accurate Inertia Auto-tuning?
The following requirements must be met to ensure a correct calculation of the load inertia ratio:
1) The actual maximum motor speed is higher than 150 RPM.
2) The actual acceleration rate during acceleration/deceleration is higher than 3000 RPM/s.
3) The load torque is stable without dramatic changes.
4) The actual inertia ratio does not exceed 120.
Additional Notes:
If the actual inertia ratio is large but the gain is low, the motor may not reach the required speed and acceleration. Increase the speed loop gain (2008-01h) and perform auto-tuning again.
If vibration occurs during auto-tuning, stop inertia auto-tuning immediately and reduce the gain.
Inertia auto-tuning may fail if the backlash of the transmission mechanism is too large.
What is the procedure for Offline Inertia Auto-tuning?
1. Confirm pre-tuning requirements:
Ensure limit switches are installed and a travel distance of more than one revolution in either forward or reverse direction is available between the limit switches to prevent overtravel.
Ensure the required number of revolutions (H09-09) is fulfilled. Check H09-06 (Max speed), H09-07 (Accel time constant), and H09-09 (Revolutions) to ensure motor travel distance > H09-09 value. Adjust H09-06 or H09-07 if needed.
Increase stiffness level (H09-01) if necessary so the actual motor speed can reach the value defined by H09-06.
2. Enable Offline Inertia Auto-tuning:
In the parameter display mode, switch to parameter HOD-02 (Offline inertia auto-tuning).
Press SET to enable it (set HOD-02 = 1). The drive should be in “ry” status (S-ON signal OFF).
3. Execute Auto-tuning:
Press the Up/Down arrow key ( / ) to make the motor run in the forward/reverse direction. The operating direction at the start depends on the key pressed. For unidirectional motion applications, set H09-05 to 1.
Observe the displayed value on the keypad (which initially shows the current value of H08-15).
Wait until the displayed value stabilizes. The stabilized value is the auto-tuned inertia ratio.
To stop the servo drive during tuning, release the Up/Down key. To restart, press the key again.
4. Save the Result:
Hold the SET key down until the keypad displays “SAVE”. This saves the auto-tuned value into parameter H08-15 (Load moment of inertia ratio).
5. Finish:
Press the MODE key to exit the HOD-02 interface and finish inertia auto-tuning.
What are the related parameters for Offline Inertia Auto-tuning?
| Para. No. | Name | Value Range | Unit | Function | Setting Condition | Effective Time | Default |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| H08-15 | Load moment of inertia ratio | 0 to 120 | 1 | Defines the load moment of inertia ratio. | During running | Immediately | 3 |
| H09-05 | Offline inertia auto-tuning mode | 0: Bidirectional 1: Unidirectional |
– | Defines the offline inertia auto-tuning mode. | At stop | Immediately | 1 |
| H09-06 | Maximum speed of inertia auto-tuning | 100 to 1000 | RPM | Defines the maximum speed reference for offline inertia auto-tuning. | At stop | Immediately | 500 |
| H09-07 | Time constant for accelerating to the maximum speed during inertia auto-tuning | 20 to 800 | ms | Defines the time needed for the motor to accelerate from 0 RPM to 1000 RPM. | At stop | Immediately | 125 |
| H09-08 | Interval after an individual inertia auto-tuning | 50 to 10000 | ms | Defines the interval between two consecutive speed references. | At stop | Immediately | 800 |
| H09-09 | Number of motor revolutions per inertia auto-tuning | 0 to 100 | r | Defines the maximum number of revolutions. | – | – | 1 |
What is Online Inertia Auto-tuning and what are its prerequisites?
Online Inertia Auto-tuning allows the servo drive to calculate the load inertia ratio (H08-15) in real time based on commands from a host controller. The servo drive supports this method, and the following figure shows the procedure.
Prerequisites/Conditions for correct calculation:
Ensure the following conditions are fulfilled before performing online inertia auto-tuning:
The load inertia changes quickly.
The load torque changes quickly.
The motor is running at a speed lower than 120 r/min.
Acceleration/Deceleration is slow (lower than 1000 r/min per second).
The acceleration/deceleration torque is smaller than the unbalanced load/viscous friction torque.
Do not use online inertia auto-tuning in applications involving hitting against limit switches and press fitting.
What is the procedure for Online Inertia Auto-tuning?
1. Start with the S-ON signal off (servo drive ready, “ry” status).
2. Set parameter H09-03 (Online inertia auto-tuning mode) to a non-zero value (1, 2, or 3) to enable it.
3. Switch on the S-ON signal. The servo drive is now ready to receive commands.
4. Input a command through the host controller to make the motor rotate.
5. The servo drive calculates the average value of the load inertia ratio in real time and saves the auto-tuned values into H08-15 every 30 min.
6. End.
What is the function of parameter H09-03 (Online inertia auto-tuning mode)?
Parameter H09-03 defines the online inertia auto-tuning mode and sets the updating speed of the load inertia ratio (H08-15) in real time.
| Para. No. | Name | Value Range | Unit | Function | Setting Condition | Effective Time | Default |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| H09-03 | Online inertia auto-tuning mode | 0: Disabled | – | Defines the online inertia auto-tuning mode. | During running | Immediately | 0 |
| 1: Enabled, changing slowly (Applicable where inertia rarely changes, e.g., machine tools) | |||||||
| 2: Enabled, changing normally (Applicable where inertia changes slowly) | |||||||
| 3: Enabled, changing quickly (Applicable where inertia changes rapidly, e.g., manipulators) |
What is ETune?
ETune is a wizard-type function designed to guide users to perform auto-tuning by setting the motion profile and the desired response level. After these are set, the servo drive performs auto-tuning to obtain optimal gain parameters. These parameters can be saved and exported as a recipe for use in other devices of the same model. ETune is intended for applications featuring slight load inertia changes.
What is the operational flowchart for ETune?
1. Initialize the servo drive parameters.
2. Set the electronic gear ratio to a proper value.
3. Click “Usability adjustment” on the menu bar and click “ETUNE”.
4. Set the positive/negative limit position in the position setting interface.
5. Check if vibration occurs during jogging.
6. If Yes: Reduce the gain. Repeat step 5.
7. If No: Configure the mode and the motion profile.
8. Click “Next” to start.
9. Tuning process runs.
10. Check if tuning result is OK.
11. If No: Adjust the response level. Repeat step 9.
12. If Yes: Save parameters.
13. End.
What are the detailed steps for operating ETune?
1. Open ETune: Click “Usability adjustment” on the software tool, then click “ETune”. Select the ETune scenario (Small inertia change, Torque mode not supported).
2. Select Operation Mode: Choose one of the three modes based on the machine’s allowed operating direction:
Reciprocating po…: Motor reciprocates within positive and negative position limits.
One-way forward: Motor uses the difference between limits as max distance per action, running in the forward direction.
One-way reversal: Same as one-way forward, but in the opposite direction.
3. Set Position Limits: Enter appropriate positive and negative position limits for the motor (in position reference pulses before electronic gear ratio). The difference must be larger than 1/8 of one revolution. Larger limits improve adaptability but increase tuning time.
Method 1: Click “Enable ON”, use the arrow button to move the motor to the positive limit, click “Set to the posi…”. Repeat for the negative limit. Click “Enable OFF”.
Method 2: Enter the limit values directly.
4. Configure Parameters: Click “Next”.
Adjustment mode: Select “Positioning mode” or “Track mode”.
Inertia auto-tuning: Optional. If not chosen, set the correct inertia ratio manually.
Response level: Adjust based on required responsiveness.
Position filtering: Adjust based on position reference noise.
Motion profile: Set maximum speed, acceleration/deceleration time, and waiting time interval for auto-tuning.
5. Start Auto-Tuning: Click “Next”.
If inertia auto-tuning was chosen, it runs first, followed by gain tuning.
If not chosen, gain tuning starts directly.
6. Fine-Tune and Save: During gain tuning (“In tuning” status), you can modify the “Response fine-tuning coefficient (%)” and click “Update” to continue tuning with the new coefficient. After tuning is completed (“Tuning completed” status), click “DONE” to save the parameters to EEPROM and export them as a recipe file.
What precautions should be taken when using ETune?
The maximum speed and acceleration/deceleration time of the motion profile can be set as needed. You can also increase the acceleration/deceleration time properly to enable quick positioning after auto-tuning is done.
If the acceleration/deceleration time is set to a too small value, overload may occur. In this case, increase the acceleration/deceleration time properly.
For vertical axis applications, take anti-drop measures before execution and set the stop mode upon fault to “Stop at zero speed”.
For the ball screw applications, if the tuning time is too long, shorten the stroke length.
How to troubleshoot common ETune issues?
| Fault Symptom | Cause | Measure |
|---|---|---|
| Er661: Auto-tuned gain values too low | 1) The vibration cannot be suppressed. | 1) Enable vibration suppression manually to eliminate the vibration. |
| 2) The positioning overshoot is too large. | 2) Check whether the positioning threshold is too low. Increase the acceleration/deceleration time and reduce the response level. | |
| 3) The reference is disturbed by noise. | 3) Modify the electronic gear ratio to improve the reference resolution, or increase the reference filter time constant in the parameter configuration interface. | |
| 4) The current fluctuates. | 4) Check whether the current of the machine fluctuates regularly. | |
| Er600: Inertia auto-tuning failure | 1) The vibration cannot be suppressed. | 1) Enable vibration suppression manually to eliminate the vibration and perform ETune again. |
| 2) The auto-tuned values fluctuate dramatically. | 2) Increase the maximum operating speed and decrease the acceleration/deceleration time. In case of the ball screw, shorten the stroke length. | |
| 3) The load mechanical couplings are loose or the mechanism is eccentric. | 3) Rectify the mechanical fault. | |
| 4) Interruption occurs due to a fault that occurs during auto-tuning. | 4) Clear the fault and perform ETune again. | |
| 5) The position reference filter time is set to a too large value. | 5) Decrease the setpoints of H05-04…H05-06, and perform ETune again. |
What is STune?
STune performs gain auto-tuning based on the set stiffness level. It aims to fulfill the requirements of rapidity and stability. The STune function is enabled by default with H09-00 (Gain auto-tuning mode) being set to 4 (Normal mode+Inertia auto-tuning). The servo drive is turned off automatically 10 min after command input.
STune is intended for applications featuring slight load inertia changes. For applications featuring dramatic inertia changes or where inertia auto-tuning is unavailable (due to operating speed too low or acceleration rate too small), disable the STune function after initial power-on.
If H09-00 is set to 4 or 6, online inertia auto-tuning is required. Ensure conditions for online inertia auto-tuning are met (load inertia/torque changes quickly, speed < 120 r/min, accel < 1000 r/min/s, accel torque < friction torque). If conditions cannot be fulfilled, set the correct inertia ratio manually.
What is the operational flowchart for STune?
1. Start.
2. Click “Usability adjustment” on the menu bar, and click “STUNE”.
3. Set the gain tuning mode (H09-00).
4. Set the inertia ratio (Input directly or use Manual/Auto inertia tuning depending on H09-00 setting).
5. Switch on the S-ON signal and input the command (Enable servo drive and input command via host controller).
6. Adjust the stiffness level (H09-01) during motor rotation and observe the waveform/behavior (response time, positioning time, vibration).
7. Check if desired performance is achieved.
8. If Yes: End.
9. If No: Perform manual gain tuning / vibration suppression. See relevant sections for details.
10. End.
How is STune operated and configured in detail?
a) Select the Gain Auto-tuning Mode (H09-00): Set via keypad or software tool.
| Mode (H09-00) | Name | Applicable Occasion |
|---|---|---|
| 0 | Invalid | Manual gain tuning is needed. |
| 1 | Standard stiffness level mode | Gain auto-tuning is performed based on the set stiffness level. |
| 2 | Positioning mode | Gain auto-tuning is performed based on the set stiffness level. Applicable to occasions requiring quick positioning. |
| 3 | Interpolation mode+Inertia auto-tuning | Gain auto-tuning based on stiffness level. Inertia auto-tuning performed to suppress vibration. Applicable to multi-axis interpolation. |
| 4 | Normal mode+Inertia auto-tuning | Gain auto-tuning based on stiffness level. Inertia auto-tuning performed to suppress vibration. Applicable to trajectory tracking. |
| 6 | Fast positioning mode+Inertia auto-tuning | Gain auto-tuning based on stiffness level. Inertia auto-tuning performed to suppress vibration. Applicable to occasions requiring quick positioning. |
If H09-00 is 0, 1, or 2, set the inertia ratio first (perform manual inertia tuning if unknown). If H09-00 is 3, 4, or 6, inertia ratio needs no setting.
b) Adjust Stiffness Level (H09-01): Gradually adjust during load operation. Monitor the waveform until desired performance is achieved (modify by one level each time). The level is written automatically.
c) Exit STune Mode: For modes 4 and 6, H09-00 restores to 0 after running > 100 r/min for 5 min (or time set in H09-37). Set H09-00 to 0 manually to exit earlier if commissioning is done. Modify H09-37 (Vibration monitoring time) for different operating times.
d) Automatic Resonance Suppression (Modes 4 & 6): Applied automatically. If resonance persists, set H09-58 (STune resonance suppression reset) to 1 (Enable) to clear parameters, reduce stiffness, and perform STune again.
e) Multi-axis Trajectories:
Perform single-axis commissioning first.
Mode 4: Determine the minimum H08-02 (Position loop gain) among axes, set H09-00=0 for all, set H08-02 of each axis to this minimum value.
Mode 6: Determine the minimum H08-43 (Model gain) among axes, set H09-00=0 for all, set H08-43 of each axis to this minimum value.
What are the precautions and stiffness level recommendations for STune?
Stiffness Level (H09-01): Ranges from 0 (weakest) to 41 (strongest). Recommended levels:
| Recommended Stiffness Level | Type of Load Mechanism |
|---|---|
| Level 4 to level 8 | Large-scale machineries |
| Level 8 to level 15 | Applications with low stiffness such as a conveyor |
| Level 15 to level 20 | Applications with high stiffness such as a ball screw and direct-coupled motor |
Precautions:
Mode 4 Stability: To ensure stable operation in Mode 4 with default settings, gain parameters are adjusted with the inertia ratio if it’s higher than 13. This may cause different responses in multi-axis trajectories under the same stiffness level.
Modes 3, 4, 6 Operation: In these modes, the drive suppresses vibration via inertia auto-tuning automatically within 10 min (or H09-37 time) after power-on/stiffness setting, then exits inertia auto-tuning. It cannot be reactivated by setting H09-00 again. Do not use modes 3, 4, or 6 in applications with slow accel/decel, large vibration, or unstable couplings.
Inertia Setting (H09-03): In applications where inertia does not change, set H09-03 to 1 (Enabled, changing slowly). Where inertia changes quickly, set H09-03 to 3 (Enabled, changing quickly).
How are parameters updated in STune Standard Stiffness Level Mode (H09-00=1)?
In Standard Stiffness Level Mode (H09-00 = 1), the values of the 1st group of gain parameters are updated automatically according to the stiffness level defined by H09-01 and saved into the corresponding parameters.
| Para. No. | Name |
|---|---|
| H08-00 | Speed loop gain |
| H08-01 | Speed loop integral time constant |
| H08-02 | Position loop gain |
| H07-05 | Filter time constant of torque reference |
How are parameters updated and fixed in STune Positioning Mode (H09-00=2)?
In Positioning Mode (H09-00 = 2), in addition to the 1st group of gains (see Standard Stiffness Level Mode), the 2nd group of gain parameters are also updated automatically based on the stiffness level (H09-01). The stiffness level of the position loop gain (H08-05) in the 2nd group is higher than that in the 1st group (H08-02) by one level.
Updated 2nd Group Parameters:
| Para. No. | Name | Description |
|---|---|---|
| H08-03 | 2nd speed loop gain | – |
| H08-04 | 2nd speed loop integral time constant | If H08-04 is fixed to 512.00 ms, the 2nd speed loop integral action is invalid (P control only). |
| H08-05 | 2nd position loop gain | – |
| H07-06 | Filter time constant of the 2nd torque reference | – |
Fixed Parameters (Speed Feedforward):
| Para. No. | Name | Value |
|---|---|---|
| H08-19 | Speed feedforward gain | 30.0% |
| H08-18 | Speed feedforward filter time constant | 0.50 ms |
Fixed Parameters (Gain Switchover – Enabled Automatically):
| Para. No. | Name | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|---|
| H08-08 | 2nd gain mode | 1 | Switchover between 1st gain set (H08-00..02, H07-05) and 2nd gain set (H08-03..05, H07-06) is active. |
| H08-09 | Gain switchover condition | 10 | Gain switchover active only if H08-09 is 10. |
| H08-10 | Gain switchover delay | 5.0 ms | Positioning mode uses 5.0 ms delay. |
| H08-11 | Gain switchover level | 50 | Positioning mode uses level 50. |
| H08-12 | Gain switchover dead time | 30 | Positioning mode uses dead time 30. |
(In other modes, the original settings for these fixed parameters are used).
Can parameters updated automatically by STune or those with fixed setpoints be modified manually?
No. In the gain auto-tuning mode (STune, H09-00 = 1 to 6), parameters updated automatically along with H09-01 (stiffness) and those with fixed setpoints cannot be modified manually. If you need to modify these parameters, you must first set H09-00 to 0 to exit from the gain auto-tuning mode.
Which parameters are used for automatic resonance suppression in STune (Modes 3, 4, 6)?
When H09-00 is set to 3, 4, or 6, automatic resonance suppression is applied. If load changes or mechanical structure is re-installed, resonance frequency might change. Set H09-58 to “Enable” and turn on STune mode after clearing resonance suppression parameters to re-tune.
The following parameters are related to this automatic suppression (likely corresponding to the 3rd and 4th notches and medium frequency suppression):
| Para. No. | Name | Value Range | Unit | Function | Setting Condition | Effective Time | Default |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| H08-37 | Phase modulation of medium frequency suppression 2 | -90 to +90 | ° | Defines the phase of medium frequency suppression 2. | During running | Immediately | 0 |
| H08-38 | Frequency of medium frequency suppression 2 | 0 to 1000 | Hz | Defines the frequency of medium frequency suppression 2. | During running | Immediately | 0 |
| H08-39 | Compensation gain of medium frequency supression 2 | 0 to 300 | % | Defines the compensation gain of medium frequency suppression 2. | During running | Immediately | 0 |
| H09-18 | Frequency of the 3rd notch | 50 to 8000 | Hz | Defines the frequency of the 3rd notch. | During running | Immediately | 8000 |
| H09-19 | Width level of the 3rd notch | 0 to 20 | – | Defines the width level of the 3rd notch. | During running | Immediately | 2 |
| H09-20 | Depth level of the 3rd notch | 0 to 99 | – | Defines the attenuation level of the 3rd notch. | During running | Immediately | 0 |
| H09-21 | Frequency of the 4th notch | 50 to 8000 | Hz | Defines the frequency of the 4th notch. | During running | Immediately | 8000 |
| H09-22 | Width level of the 4th notch | 0 to 20 | – | Defines the width level of the 4th notch. | During running | Immediately | 2 |
| H09-23 | Depth level of the 4th notch | 0 to 99 | – | Defines the attenuation level of the 4th notch. | During running | Immediately | 0 |
| H09-58 | STune resonance suppression reset | 0 to 1 | – | 0: Disable 1: Enable. After H09-58 is enabled, H08-37…H08-39 and H09-18…H09-23 will be cleared automatically. |
During running | Immediately | 0 |
What causes the STune fault ER661 (Gain too low) and how can it be resolved?
ER661: Gain too low occurs when the torque ripple detected by the servo drive exceeds the setpoint of H09-11 (Gain switchover level in Positioning Mode) and becomes uncontrollable. The stiffness level is automatically reduced until reaching level 10, where ER661 is reported.
Solutions:
1. For uncontrollable vibration: Enable vibration suppression manually (using notch filters or other suppression methods).
2. For current fluctuation: Check if the current of the machine fluctuates regularly.
Related resonance/vibration parameters (potentially involved in manual suppression):
| Para. No. | Name | Value Range | Default | Unit | Length | Setting Condition | Effective Time |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| H08-37 | Phase modulation of medium frequency suppression 2 | -90 to +90 | 0 | ° | 16 bits | During running | Immediately |
| H08-38 | Frequency of medium frequency suppression 2 | 0 to 1000 | 0 | Hz | 16 bits | During running | Immediately |
| H08-39 | Compensation gain of medium frequency supression 2 | 0 to 300 | 0 | 1 | 16 bits | During running | Immediately |
| H09-58 | STune resonance suppression reset (0: Disable, 1: Enable) | 0 to 1 | 0 | 1 | 16 bits | During running | Immediately |
When is Manual Gain Tuning necessary and what are the basic control loops?
Manual gain tuning should be performed when gain auto-tuning (ETune or STune) cannot fulfill the application needs.
The servo system provides three control loops: position loop, speed loop, and current loop (from external to internal). The response level of the inner loop must be higher than that of the outer loop to prevent instability. The default gain of the current loop is typically set for the highest response and usually does not need adjustment.
How are the basic gain parameters adjusted manually?
The basic gain parameters are adjusted as follows:
| Step | Para. No. | Name | Description & Adjustment Method |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | H08-00 | Speed loop gain | Parameter function: Defines the maximum frequency of the speed loop in following variable speed references. If H08-15 (Inertia ratio) is set properly, max following frequency = H08-00. Adjustment method: Increase H08-00 without incurring noise or vibration to shorten positioning time and improve speed stability/follow-up. Decrease if noise occurs. Enable resonance suppression if mechanical vibration occurs. |
| 2 | H08-01 | Speed loop integral time constant | Parameter function: Eliminates speed loop deviation. Adjustment method: Select value based on 500 ≤ H08-00 x H08-01 ≤ 1000. (e.g., if H08-00=40Hz, then 12.50ms ≤ H08-01 ≤ 25.00ms). Decreasing H08-01 strengthens integral action, shortens positioning time, but too small may cause vibration. Too large may prevent clearing speed loop deviation. If set to 512.00 ms, integral action is deactivated. |
| 3 | H08-02 | Position loop gain | Parameter function: Defines the maximum frequency of the position loop in following variable position references. Max following frequency = H08-02. Adjustment method: Ensure speed loop max frequency is 3-5 times higher than position loop: 3 ≤ (2 * π * H8-00) / H08-02 ≤ 5. (e.g., if H08-00=40Hz, then 50.2Hz ≤ H08-02 ≤ 83.7Hz). Adjust based on positioning time. Increasing H08-02 shortens acceleration time, improves response to disturbances at standstill. Too large may cause instability/oscillation. |
| 4 | H07-05 | Filter time constant of torque reference | Parameter function: Eliminates high-frequency noise and suppresses mechanical resonance. Adjustment method: Ensure cutoff frequency is > 4 times the speed loop max frequency: (1000 / (2 * π * H07-05)) ≥ (H08-00) x 4. (e.g., if H08-00=40Hz, H07-05 ≤ 1.00ms). Adjust H07-05 to suppress vibration if it occurs when increasing H08-00. Too large weakens current loop responsiveness. To suppress vibration upon stop, increase H08-00 and decrease H07-05. Decrease H07-05 if strong vibration occurs upon motor stop. |
What are the related basic gain parameters for manual tuning?
| Para. No. | Name | Value Range | Unit | Function | Setting Condition | Effective Time | Default |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| H08-00 | Speed loop gain | 0.1 to 2000.0 | Hz | Defines the proportional gain of the speed loop. | During running | Immediately | 39.0 |
| H08-01 | Speed loop integral time constant | 0.15 to 512.00 | ms | Defines the integral time constant of the speed loop. | During running | Immediately | 20.51 |
| H08-02 | Position loop gain | 0.1 to 2000.0 | Hz | Defines the proportional gain of the position loop. | During running | Immediately | 55.7 |
| H07-05 | Filter time constant of torque reference | 0.00 to 30.00 | ms | Defines the filter time constant of the torque reference. | During running | Immediately | 0.2 |
What is Gain Switchover and what can it achieve?
Gain switchover is available only in position control and speed control modes. It can be triggered by the internal status of the servo drive or by an external Digital Input (DI).
The following operations can be achieved through gain switchover:
Switching to the lower gain when the motor is at a standstill (servo ON) to suppress vibration.
Switching to the higher gain when the motor is at a standstill to shorten the positioning time.
Switching to the higher gain when the motor is running to achieve better command tracking performance.
Switching between different gain settings through an external signal to fit different conditions of the load devices.
How does Gain Switchover function when H08-08 = 0?
When H08-08 is set to 0, only the first group of gain parameters (H08-00 to H08-02, H07-05) are used. However, within the speed loop, control can be switched between Proportional-Integral (PI) control and Proportional (P) control using DI function 3 (FunIN.3: GAIN_SEL, gain switchover). This is achieved by setting bit 26 of the status word 60FEh. If bit 26 is valid (typically logic active based on DI input), P control is used; otherwise, PI control is used.
How does Gain Switchover function when H08-08 = 1?
When H08-08 is set to 1, switchover between the 1st group of gain parameters (H08-00 to H08-02, H07-05) and the 2nd group of gain parameters (H08-03 to H08-05, H07-06) is activated. The specific condition triggering the switchover is determined by the setting of H08-09 (Gain switchover condition).
What are the conditions for Gain Switchover (when H08-08=1)?
The following table details the conditions defined by H08-09, triggering a switch from the 1st gain set to the 2nd gain set. The switch back occurs when the condition is no longer met, potentially with a delay (H08-10).
| H08-09 | Condition | Related Parameters | Delay (H08-10) | Level (H08-11) | Dead Time (H08-12) |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 0 | Fixed to the 1st gain set | – | Invalid | Invalid | Invalid |
| 1 | Switched by external DI (FunIN.3) | DI logic active? | Invalid | Invalid | Invalid |
| 2 | Torque reference too large | Torque ref > H08-11 (%) | Valid | Valid (%) | Valid (%) |
| 3 | Speed reference too large | |Speed ref| > H08-11 (RPM) | Valid | Valid (RPM) | Valid (RPM) |
| 4 | Speed reference change rate too large | |Speed ref change rate| > H08-11 (10 RPM/s) | Valid | Valid (10 RPM/s) | Valid (10 RPM/s) |
| 5 | Speed reference threshold | |Speed ref| > H08-11 (RPM) [with dead time H08-12] | Invalid | Valid (RPM) | Valid (RPM) |
| 6 | Position deviation too large | |Position deviation| > H08-11 (encoder unit) | Valid | Valid (encoder unit) | Valid (encoder unit) |
| 7 | Position reference available | Position reference input is active | Valid | Invalid | Invalid |
| 8 | Positioning completed | Positioning completed signal active | Valid | Invalid | Invalid |
| 9 | Actual speed too large | |Actual speed| > H08-11 (RPM) | Valid | Valid (RPM) | Valid (RPM) |
| 10 | Position reference + Actual speed | Details in Note below | Valid | Valid (RPM) | Valid (RPM) |
Note on Condition 10 & H08-10 Delay: The Gain switchover delay (H08-10) is valid only during switching from the 2nd gain set back to the 1st gain set. The logic involves comparing actual speed to the switchover level (H08-11) and potentially the switchover dead time (H08-12). If the motor is at standstill or moving slowly below the threshold (considering delay/dead time), it uses the 1st gain set. During operation above the threshold, it uses the 2nd gain set.
What are the related parameters for Gain Switchover?
| Para. No. | Name | Value Range | Unit | Function | Setting Condition | Effective Time | Default |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| H08-08 | 2nd gain set mode | 0: Fixed to 1st gain set, P/PI via DI 1: Switched between 1st/2nd via H08-09 |
– | Defines the mode of the 2nd gain set. | During running | Immediately | 1 |
| H08-09 | Gain switchover condition | 0 to 10 (See conditions table) | – | Defines the gain switchover condition. | During running | Immediately | 0 |
| H08-10 | Gain switchover delay | 0 to 10 | ms? (unit not specified, but context suggests ms) | Defines the gain switchover delay (2nd to 1st set). | During running | Immediately | 5.0 |
| H08-11 | Gain switchover level | 0 to 20000 | Based on H08-09 condition | Defines the gain switchover level. | During running | Immediately | 50 |
| H08-12 | Gain switchover dead time | 0 to 20000 | Based on H08-09 condition | Defines the gain switchover dead time. | During running | Immediately | 30 |
| H08-13 | Position gain switchover time | 0.0 to 100.0 | ms | Defines the gain switchover time of the position loop. | During running | Immediately | 3.0 |
What is the Position Reference Filter?
Function: Filters the position references (in encoder units) after division or multiplication by the electronic gear ratio. This smooths the running process of the motor and reduces the impact on the machine.
Applicable Occasion:
When the acceleration/deceleration process is not performed on the position references sent from the host controller.
When the pulse frequency is low.
When the electronic gear ratio is larger than 10.
Impact of Excessive Filter Time: The response delay is prolonged.
What is Speed Feedforward and how is it set up?
Speed feedforward can be applied in the position control mode to improve speed reference responsiveness and reduce position deviation during operation at a constant speed.
Operating Procedure:
1. Setting the speed feedforward signal source:
Set H05-19 to a non-zero value to enable the function and select the signal source.
| Para. No. | Name | Value Range | Description |
|---|---|---|---|
| H05-19 | Speed feedforward selection | 0: No speed feedforward | Defines the speed information corresponding to the position reference (in encoder unit) as the speed feedforward signal source. |
| 1: Internal speed feedforward |
2. Setting the speed feedforward parameters (H08-18 and H08-19):
| Para. No. | Name | Description & Adjustment Method |
|---|---|---|
| H08-18 | Speed feedforward filter time constant | Decreasing H08-18 suppresses speed overshoot during accel/decel. Increasing H08-18 suppresses noise (from long updates, drive periods, uneven pulses) and jitter of positioning completed signal. |
| H08-19 | Speed feedforward gain | Increasing H08-19 improves responsiveness but may cause speed overshoot during accel/decel. |
Adjustment Method: Set H08-18 to a fixed value first. Then, increase H08-19 gradually from 0 until the desired effect is reached. Adjust H08-18 and H08-19 repeatedly until a balanced performance is achieved.
What is Zero Phase Control and how is it configured?
Zero phase control is used to compensate for the position deviation generated upon delay of position reference startup, reducing the position deviation upon start/stop of the position control mode. It essentially applies speed feedforward calculation in advance.
Setting Parameters:
| Para. No. | Name | Description | Value Range | Default | Min. Unit | Width | Setting Condition | Effective Time |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| H05-19 | Speed feedforward selection | Set to 3 to enable zero phase compensation feedforward. (Normal speed feedforward applies if H08-17 is not involved). | 0-3 | 1 | 1 | 16 bits | At stop | Immediately |
| H08-17 | Zero phase delay | Indicates the speed feedforward calculation time in advance. | 0-4 | 0 | 1 ms | 16 bits | During running | Immediately |
| H05-04 | Zero phase low-pass filter time | Defines the low-pass filter time of position references (used in zero phase control). | 0-6553.5 | 0 | 0.1 ms | 16 bits | At stop | Immediately |
What is Torque Feedforward and how is it set up?
Torque feedforward can be applied in the position control mode to improve torque reference responsiveness and reduce position deviation during acceleration/deceleration at a constant speed. It can also be applied in the speed control mode to improve torque reference responsiveness and reduce speed deviation during operation at a constant speed.
Operating Procedure:
1. Setting the torque feedforward signal source:
Set H06-11 to 1 to enable the function and select the internal source.
| Para. No. | Name | Value Range | Description |
|---|---|---|---|
| H06-11 | Torque feedforward selection | 0: No torque feedforward | Defines the signal source. ‘Internal torque feedforward’ uses the speed reference. In position control mode, the speed reference is generated by the position controller. |
| 1: Internal torque feedforward |
2. Setting torque feedforward parameters (H08-20 and H08-21):
| Para. No. | Name | Description & Adjustment Method |
|---|---|---|
| H08-20 | Torque feedforward filter time constant | Decreasing H08-20 suppresses overshoot during accel/decel. Increasing H08-20 suppresses noise. |
| H08-21 | Torque feedforward gain | Increasing H08-21 improves responsiveness but may cause speed overshoot during accel/decel. |
Adjustment Method: Keep H08-20 at the default value. Increase H08-21 gradually from 0 until the desired effect is reached. Adjust H08-20 and H08-21 repeatedly until a balanced performance is achieved. For detailed gain adjustment, refer to section “6.5.4 Feedforward Gain”.
What is Pseudo Derivative Feedback and Feedforward (PDFF) Control?
In non-torque control modes, Pseudo Derivative Feedback and Feedforward (PDFF) control can be used to adjust the speed loop control method. By adjusting the PDFF control coefficient (H08-24), PDFF enhances the anti-disturbance capacity of the speed loop and improves performance in following speed references.
Parameter Function & Adjustment:
| Para. No. | Name | Description & Adjustment Method |
|---|---|---|
| H08-24 | PDFF control coefficient | Defines the control method of the speed loop in non-torque mode. Adjustment: Do not set too small, as speed loop responsiveness will be affected. If speed feedback overshoots, decrease H08-24 gradually from 100.0 until the desired effect is achieved. When H08-24 is 100.0, the method does not change (default proportional integral control is used). |
What is Disturbance Observer 1 used for?
Disturbance observer 1 is used in non-torque control mode to observe external disturbances. Disturbances within the frequency range defined by the cutoff frequency (H08-31) can be observed and suppressed using the compensation settings (H08-32, H08-33).
Parameter Overview:
| Para. No. | Name | Description |
|---|---|---|
| H08-31 | Disturbance observer cutoff frequency | The higher the cutoff frequency, the more easily vibration will occur. |
| H08-32 | Disturbance observer compensation coefficient | Defines the compensation percentage for observation. |
| H08-33 | Disturbance observer inertia correction coefficient | Set only if the inertia setpoint (H08-15) does not fit actual conditions. Effective inertia = H08-33 * H08-15. Default value (100) is recommended. |
What are the related parameters for Disturbance Observer 1?
| Para. No. | Name | Value Range | Unit | Function | Setting Condition | Effective Time | Default |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| H08-31 | Disturbance observer cutoff frequency | 10 to 4000 | 1 Hz | Defines the cutoff frequency of disturbance observer. | During running | Immediately | 600 |
| H08-32 | Disturbance observer compensation coefficient | 0 to 100 | 1% | Defines the compensation percentage of disturbance observer. | During running | Immediately | 0 |
| H08-33 | Disturbance observer inertia correction coefficient | 1 to 1600 | 1% | Defines the correction coefficient of the disturbance observer inertia. | During running | Immediately | 100 |
What is the Speed Observer and when is it used?
The speed observer is intended for applications with slight load/inertia changes. It facilitates quick positioning by improving responsiveness and filtering high frequencies, shortening positioning time, and improving gain without incurring high-frequency vibration.
Caution:
Before using the speed observer, set H08-15 (Load inertia ratio) to a proper value or perform inertia auto-tuning. A wrong inertia ratio will cause vibration.
Setting H08-27, H08-28, or H08-29 to a too small or too large value will cause motor vibration.
What is the commissioning procedure for the Speed Observer?
1. Restore default gain values. Cancel parameter auto-tuning, gain switchover, and feedforward.
2. Set the correct inertia ratio (H08-15) (manually or via auto-tuning).
3. Set the observer filter (H08-29 = 60 recommended starting point, though default is 0.8).
4. Turn on the speed observer (H08-40 = 1).
5. Increase the speed loop gain (H08-00) to a value not exceeding 600.
6. Check if the speed feedback is close to the speed reference.
7. If No: Repeat step 5 (adjust H08-00).
8. If Yes: Increase the position loop gain (H08-02) to a value not exceeding H08-00.
9. Check if positioning performance is OK.
10. If No: Repeat step 8 (adjust H08-02).
11. If Yes: End.
What are the related parameters for the Speed Observer?
| Para. No. | Name | Min. Unit | Value Range | Default | Setting Condition | Effective Time |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| H08-00 | Speed loop gain | Hz | 0.1 to 2000 | 39 | During running | Immediately |
| H08-27 | Speed observer cutoff frequency | 1 Hz | 50 to 600 | 170 | During running | Immediately |
| H08-28 | Speed observer inertia correction coefficient | 1% | 1 to 1600 | 100 | During running | Immediately |
| H08-29 | Speed observer filter time | 1 ms | 0 to 10 | 0.8 | During running | Immediately |
| H08-40 | Speed observer selection | 1 | 0 to 1 | 0 | During running | Immediately |
What is the Model Tracking Function and when is manual tuning needed?
The model tracking function, available only in position control mode, can be used to improve responsiveness and shorten positioning time. Parameters are normally set automatically via ITune or ETune along with gain parameters.
Manual tuning is needed in the following situations:
The auto-tuned values cannot fulfill the application needs.
Improving the responsiveness takes priority over the auto-tuned values.
Customized parameters for the gain or model tracking function are needed.
The parameters involved include: Kp (H08-02), Kv (H08-00), Ti (H08-01), Tf (H07-05), mKp (H08-43), mVFF (H08-46), mLPF (H08-51).
Caution: Ensure the inertia (H08-15) is set correctly. If the inertia deviates greatly from the actual condition, motor vibration will occur.
What is the commissioning procedure for the Model Tracking function?
1. Perform mechanical characteristic analysis and set the correct resonance point.
2. Set the correct inertia ratio (H08-15).
3. Improve the speed loop stiffness (H08-00 and H08-01) and reduce the torque filter (H07-05).
4. Check if speed feedback is close to the speed reference.
5. If No: Repeat step 3.
6. If Yes: Enable the model tracking function (H08-42 = 1).
7. Set H08-46 to 920. Set H08-51 to 100.
8. Set H08-02 to the same value as H08-00.
9. Set H08-43 to the same value as H08-02.
10. Check if excessive overshoot occurs.
11. If Yes: Increase the value of H09-30 or decrease the value of H08-43. Go to step 13.
12. If No: Check if positioning performance is OK.
13. If No: Increase H08-43 to a value not exceeding 6000. Go back to step 10.
14. If Yes: End.
What are the related parameters for the Model Tracking function?
| Para. No. | Name | Min. Unit | Value Range | Default | Setting Condition | Effective Time |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| H07-05 | Torque reference filter time constant | 1 ms | 0 to 30 | 0.2 | During running | Immediately |
| H08-00 | Speed loop gain | Hz | 0.1 to 2000 | 39 | During running | Immediately |
| H08-01 | Speed loop integral time constant | ms | 0.15 to 512 | 20.51 | During running | Immediately |
| H08-02 | Position loop gain | Hz | 0.1 to 2000 | 55.7 | During running | Immediately |
| H08-42 | Model control selection | 1 | 0 to 1 | 0 | At stop | Immediately |
| H08-43 | Model gain | 1 | 0.1 to 2000 | 40 | During running | Immediately |
| H08-46 | Model feedforward | 1 | 0 to 102.4 | 95 | During running | Immediately |
| H08-51 | Model filter time 2 | 0.01 ms | 0 to 2000 | 0 | During running | Immediately |
What is Friction Compensation and how does it work?
Friction compensation is used to reduce the impact of friction on the mechanical transmission. It uses different positive/negative compensation values according to the running direction. It is valid only in the position control mode.
Operation:
When the speed (defined by H09-36 source) is less than the speed threshold (H09-35), static friction applies.
When the speed exceeds the speed threshold, dynamic friction applies (using H09-33 for forward, H09-34 for reverse).
The compensation direction is determined by the direction of the actual position reference. Forward direction requires a positive compensation value (H09-33). Reverse direction requires a negative compensation value (H09-34).
Gravity compensation (H09-32) provides a constant compensation torque, typically for vertical loads.
Related Parameters:
| Para. No. | Para. Name | Value Range | Function |
|---|---|---|---|
| H09-32 | Gravity compensation | 0% to 100% | Defines the constant compensation torque of vertical gravity load. |
| H09-33 | Positive friction compensation | 0% to 100% | Defines the friction compensation for forward position references. |
| H09-34 | Negative friction compensation | -100% to 0% | Defines the friction compensation for reverse position references. |
| H09-35 | Friction compensation speed threshold | 0 RPM to 20RPM | Defines the speed value after friction is resisted. |
| H09-36 | Friction compensation speed selection | 0: Speed reference 1: Model speed (valid when model function activated) 2: Speed feedback |
Defines the source of the speed threshold comparison. |
What is the recommended sequence for parameter adjustment?
Perform parameter adjustment in the following sequence:
“Inertia auto-tuning” => “Gain auto-tuning” => “Manual gain tuning”.
How are parameters adjusted in the Position Control Mode?
1. Obtain the value of H08-15 (Load inertia ratio) through inertia auto-tuning.
2. Identify gain parameters. The position control mode uses two gain sets and common gains.
1st gain set:
| Para. No. | Name | Function | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| H07-05 | Torque reference filter time constant | Defines the filter time constant of the torque reference. | 0.2 ms |
| H08-00 | Speed loop gain | Defines the proportional gain of the speed loop. | 39.0 Hz |
| H08-01 | Speed loop integral time constant | Defines the integral time constant of the speed loop. | 20.51 ms |
| H08-02 | Position loop gain | Defines the proportional gain of the position loop. | 55.7 Hz |
2nd gain set (Used with gain switchover H08-08=1):
| Para. No. | Name | Function | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| H07-06 | 2nd torque reference filter time constant | Defines the filter time constant of the torque reference. | 0.27 ms |
| H08-03 | 2nd speed loop gain | Defines the proportional gain of the speed loop. | 75 Hz |
| H08-04 | 2nd speed loop integral time constant | Defines the integral time constant of the speed loop. | 10.61 ms |
| H08-05 | 2nd position loop gain | Defines the proportional gain of the position loop. | 120 ms? (Default value seems incorrect, likely Hz) |
| H08-08 | 2nd gain mode | Defines the mode of the 2nd gain set. | 1 |
| H08-09 | Gain switchover condition | Defines the gain switchover condition. | 0 |
| H08-10 | Gain switchover delay | Defines the gain switchover delay. | 5.0 ms |
| H08-11 | Gain switchover level | Defines the gain switchover level. | 50 |
| H08-12 | Gain switchover dead time | Defines the gain switchover dead time. | 30 |
| H08-13 | Position gain switchover time | Defines the gain switchover time of the position loop. | 3.0 ms |
Common gains:
| Para. No. | Name | Function | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| H08-18 | Speed feedforward filter time constant | Defines the filter time constant of the speed feedforward signal. | 0.50 ms |
| H08-19 | Speed feedforward gain | Defines the speed feedforward gain. | 0.0% |
| H08-20 | Torque feedforward filter time constant | Defines the filter time constant of the torque feedforward signal. | 0.50 ms |
| H08-21 | Torque feedforward gain | Defines the torque feedforward gain. | 0.0% |
| H08-22 | Speed feedback filter selection | Defines the speed feedback filter function. | 0 |
| H08-23 | Cutoff frequency of speed feedback low-pass filter | Defines the cutoff frequency of the first-order low-pass filter for speed feedback. | 8000 Hz |
| H08-24 | PDFF control coefficient | Defines the coefficient of the PDFF controller. | 100.0% |
| H09-30 | Torque disturbance compensation gain | Defines the gain of disturbance torque compensation. | 0.0% |
| H09-31 | Filter time constant of torque disturbance observer | Defines the filter time constant of the disturbance observer. | 0.5 ms |
| H09-04 | Suppression mode for low-frequency resonance | Defines the mode of suppressing low-frequency resonance. | 0 |
| H09-38 | Frequency of low-frequency resonance suppression | Defines the frequency of the filter used to suppress low-frequency resonance. | 100.0 Hz |
| H09-39 | Low-frequency resonance frequency filter setting | Used to set the low-frequency resonance suppression filter. | 2 |
| HOA-16 | Threshold of low-frequency resonance position deviation | Defines the position deviation threshold (in pulses) judged as low-frequency resonance. | 0.0005 Rev |
3. Perform gain auto-tuning (ETune/STune) to obtain initial values for the 1st (or 2nd) gain set and common gains.
4. Adjust the following gain parameters manually if needed:
H07-05: Filter time constant of torque reference
H08-00: Speed loop gain
H08-01: Speed loop integral time constant
H08-02: Position loop gain
H08-19: Speed feedforward gain
How are parameters adjusted in the Speed Control Mode?
Parameter adjustment in the speed control mode is the same as that in the position control mode, except for the position loop gains (H08-02 and H08-05 are not typically adjusted or used in pure speed control). Refer to the procedure for Position Control Mode for details on adjusting the relevant speed loop and common gain parameters.
How are parameters adjusted in the Torque Control Mode?
Parameter adjustment in the torque control mode depends on whether the speed limit is reached:
If the actual speed reaches the speed limit: The adjustment method is the same as that described for Speed Control Mode (section 6.6.2), adjusting relevant speed loop parameters.
If the actual speed does not reach the speed limit: The adjustment method is the same as that described for Speed Control Mode (section 6.6.2), except for the position/speed loop gain and speed loop integral time constant (as these loops might not be active or relevant in pure torque control).
What is Vibration Suppression and what parameters are involved?
Vibration suppression techniques are used to counteract vibrations in the system, particularly medium- and low-frequency vibrations. This is often handled by VIBSUP3 (Suppression of medium- and low-frequency vibration) and notch filters (NTF1-4) within the control loops.
Related parameters for medium- and low-frequency jitter suppression:
| Para. No. | Name | Default | Unit | Min. Value | Max. Value | Setting Condition | Effective Time |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| H08-53 | Medium- and low-frequency jitter suppression frequency 3 | 0 | Hz | 0 | 300 | During running | Immediately |
| H08-54 | Medium- and low-frequency jitter suppression compensation 3 | 0 | 1% | 0 | 200 | During running | Immediately |
| H08-56 | Medium- and low-frequency jitter suppression phase modulation 3 | 100 | 1% | 0 | 600 | During running | Immediately |
| H08-59 | Medium- and low-frequency jitter suppression frequency 4 | 0 | Hz | 0 | 300 | During running | Immediately |
| H08-60 | Medium- and low-frequency jitter suppression compensation 4 | 0 | 1% | 0 | 200 | During running | Immediately |
| H08-61 | Medium- and low-frequency jitter suppression phase modulation 4 | 100 | 1% | 0 | 600 | During running | Immediately |
Note on Jitter Suppression Parameters:
Phase modulation (H08-56, H08-61): Adjusts phase of compensation. Default recommended unless compensation phase deviates sharply from vibration phase.
Frequency (H08-53, H08-59): Defines the jitter frequency to be suppressed.
Compensation (H08-54, H08-60): Defines the magnitude for jitter suppression.
How can Mechanical Resonance be suppressed?
Mechanical resonance occurs near the system’s resonance frequency, especially when gain increases, and can disable further gain increases. It can be suppressed using two methods:
1. Torque reference filter (H07-05, H07-06):
Set the filter time constant (H07-05 for 1st gain set, H07-06 for 2nd) to attenuate the torque reference in the frequency range above the cutoff frequency.
Filter cutoff frequency fc (Hz) = 1 / [2 * π * H07-05 (ms) * 0.001]
2. Notch Filter:
Reduces gain at specific resonance frequencies. After vibration is suppressed by the notch, gain can be further increased. Four notches are available (1st/2nd manual, 3rd/4th manual or adaptive).
What are the parameters for the Notch Filters?
Each notch filter is defined by frequency, width level, and depth level.
| Item | 1st Notch (Manual) | 2nd Notch (Manual) | 3rd Notch (Manual/Adaptive) | 4th Notch (Manual/Adaptive) |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| Frequency | H09-12 | H09-15 | H09-18 | H09-21 |
| Width level | H09-13 | H09-16 | H09-19 | H09-22 |
| Depth level | H09-14 | H09-17 | H09-20 | H09-23 |
Note:
When the “frequency” parameter is the default value (8000 Hz, not 4000Hz as stated in the note), the notch is invalid.
The adaptive notch (using 3rd/4th notches) is preferred for resonance suppression. Manual notches can be used if adaptive cannot deliver desired performance.
What is the procedure for using Notch Filters?
1. Determine if an adaptive notch will be used.
2. If Yes (Adaptive):
Determine if there is one or two resonance frequencies.
One frequency: Set H09-02 to 1. The 3rd notch parameters (H09-18 to H09-20) will be updated automatically.
Two frequencies: Set H09-02 to 2. The 3rd and 4th notch parameters (H09-18 to H09-23) will be updated automatically.
Go to step 4.
3. If No (Manual):
Analyze the resonance frequency (using software tools or calculation).
Input the detected frequency and desired width/depth into the parameters for the chosen manual notch(es) (H09-12 to H09-17).
Go to step 4.
4. Check if resonance is suppressed.
5. If Yes:
If using adaptive notch (H09-02=1 or 2), set H09-02 to 0 after the operation is stabilized to fix the notch parameters.
End.
6. If No:
Switch off the S-ON signal.
Consider using manual notches or adjusting manual notch parameters. Re-analyze frequency if necessary.
Repeat analysis/input steps.
What is the procedure for using the Adaptive Notch?
1. Set H09-02 (Adaptive notch mode) to 1 (one frequency) or 2 (two frequencies) based on the number of resonance points.
2. If resonance occurs, first try H09-02 = 1. If new resonance appears after gain adjustment, set H09-02 = 2.
3. Parameters of the 3rd (and 4th if H09-02=2) notches are updated automatically during operation and saved every 30 minutes.
4. If resonance is suppressed, let the drive operate stably, then set H09-02 to 0 to fix the notch parameters and prevent incorrect updates.
5. If vibration persists, switch off the S-ON signal.
6. If more than two resonance frequencies exist, use both adaptive and manual notches, or use all four as manual notches (H09-02 = 0).
Note:
If S-OFF is activated within 30 min of applying adaptive notch, parameters won’t be saved.
Effectiveness may be degraded for resonance frequencies below 300 Hz.
What is the procedure for using the Manual Notch?
1. Step 1: Analyze the resonance frequency using:
a) “Mechanical characteristic analysis” function in Inovance software tool.
b) Calculation based on motor phase current displayed on the software oscilloscope.
c) Setting H09-02 (Adaptive notch mode) to 3. The drive detects the frequency and saves it in H09-24 automatically after start.
2. Step 2: Set the notch frequency parameter (e.g., H09-12 for 1st notch) to the value obtained in Step 1.
3. Step 3: Enter the width level (e.g., H09-13) and depth level (e.g., H09-14) for the selected notch.
4. If resonance is suppressed, the notch is functioning well. You can continue adjusting gain. If new resonance occurs, repeat steps 1 and 2 for another notch.
5. If vibration persists, switch off the S-ON signal and re-evaluate notch settings or consider other suppression methods.
What is the Notch Width Level?
The width level indicates the ratio of the notch width to the center frequency of the notch.
Notch width level = (fH – fL) / fr
Where:
fr: Center frequency of the notch (mechanical resonance frequency)
fH – fL: Notch width (frequency width where amplitude attenuation is -3 dB relative to the center frequency)
The default value 2 applies to general applications.
What is the Notch Depth Level?
The notch depth level indicates the ratio of the input to the output at the center frequency (fr).
Depth level = 0: Input is completely suppressed at fr (maximum depth).
Depth level = 100: Input is fully received at fr (no suppression depth).
Therefore, a smaller depth level means a larger notch depth and stronger suppression effect. Note that a too small depth level may lead to system oscillation.
Note: If the amplitude-frequency characteristic curve (from analysis tool) doesn’t show obvious spikes but vibration occurs, it might be due to reaching the gain limit, not mechanical resonance. This type of vibration is suppressed by reducing gains or the torque reference filter time, not by notches.
What are the related parameters for Notch Filters?
| Para. No. | Name | Value Range | Unit | Function | Setting Condition | Effective Time | Default |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| H09-02 | Adaptive notch mode | 0: Params not updated 1: One adaptive (3rd) 2: Two adaptive (3rd/4th) 3: Detect only (to H09-24) 4: Adaptive cleared, restore defaults |
– | Defines the working mode of the adaptive notch. | During running | Immediately | 3 |
| H09-12 | Frequency of the 1st notch | 50 to 8000 | Hz | Defines the frequency of the 1st notch. | During running | Immediately | 8000 |
| H09-13 | Width level of the 1st notch | 0 to 20 | – | Defines the width level of the 1st notch. | During running | Immediately | 2 |
| H09-14 | Depth level of the 1st notch | 0 to 99 | – | Defines the attenuation level of the 1st notch. | During running | Immediately | 0 |
| H09-15 | Frequency of the 2nd notch | 50 to 8000 | Hz | Defines the frequency of the 2nd notch. | During running | Immediately | 8000 |
| H09-16 | Width level of the 2nd notch | 0 to 20 | – | Defines the width level of the 2nd notch. | During running | Immediately | 2 |
| H09-17 | Depth level of the 2nd notch | 0 to 99 | – | Defines the attenuation level of the 2nd notch. | During running | Immediately | 0 |
| H09-18 | Frequency of the 3rd notch | 50 to 8000 | Hz | Defines the frequency of the 3rd notch. | During running | Immediately | 8000 |
| H09-19 | Width level of the 3rd notch | 0 to 20 | – | Defines the width level of the 3rd notch. | During running | Immediately | 2 |
| H09-20 | Depth level of the 3rd notch | 0 to 99 | – | Defines the attenuation level of the 3rd notch. | During running | Immediately | 0 |
| H09-21 | Frequency of the 4th notch | 50 to 8000 | Hz | Defines the frequency of the 4th notch. | During running | Immediately | 8000 |
| H09-22 | Width level of the 4th notch | 0 to 20 | – | Defines the width level of the 4th notch. | During running | Immediately | 2 |
| H09-23 | Depth level of the 4th notch | 0 to 99 | – | Defines the attenuation level of the 4th notch. | During running | Immediately | 0 |
| H09-24 | Auto-tuned resonance frequency | 0 to 5000 | Hz | Displays the resonance frequency detected when H09-02 is set to 3. | – | – | 0 |
What is Low Frequency Resonance Suppression at the Mechanical Load End?
If the mechanical load end is long and heavy, vibration (typically within 100 Hz) may easily occur on this part during emergency stops, affecting positioning. This is called low-frequency resonance, distinct from the higher frequency mechanical resonance suppressed by notches. A specific low-frequency resonance suppression filter function should be used to suppress this type of vibration.
How is the low frequency resonance suppression filter set?
1. Collect the position deviation waveform during motor positioning using the oscilloscope function in the Inovance software tool.
2. Calculate the position deviation fluctuation frequency, which is the low-frequency resonance frequency.
3. Input this frequency into H09-38 (Low-frequency resonance suppression frequency) or H09-44 (Frequency of low-frequency resonance suppression 2).
4. Input the desired suppression level into H09-39 (Low-frequency resonance suppression level) or response/width parameters for filter 2/3 (H09-45/47, H09-50/52).
5. Keep other related parameters at their default values initially.
6. Observe the suppression effect and adjust parameters as needed.
What are the related parameters for Low Frequency Resonance Suppression?
| Para. No. | Name | Value Range | Unit | Function | Setting Condition | Effective Time | Default |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| H09-38 | Low-frequency resonance suppression frequency | 1.0 to 100.0 | Hz | Defines the frequency for suppressing low-frequency resonance at the mechanical load end. | During running | Immediately | 100.0 |
| H09-39 | Low-frequency resonance suppression level | 0 to 3 | – | Defines the low-frequency resonance suppression level. | During running | Immediately | 2 |
| H09-44 | Frequency of low-frequency resonance suppression 2 at the mechanical load end | 0 to 200.0 | Hz | Defines the frequency for the 2nd group of low-frequency resonance suppression. If 0, function is invalid. | During running | Immediately | 0 |
| H09-45 | Response of low-frequency resonance suppression 2 at the mechanical load end | 0.01 to 10.00 | Hz | Defines the response of the 2nd group. Increasing reduces delay, improves responsiveness. Too large may cause vibration. | During running | Immediately | 1.00 |
| H09-47 | Width of low-frequency resonance suppression 2 at the mechanical load end | 0 to 2.00 | Hz | Defines the width of the 2nd group. Increase if vibration frequency changes during operation. | During running | Immediately | 1.00 |
| H09-49 | Frequency of low-frequency resonance suppression 3 at the mechanical load end | 0 Hz to 200.0 Hz | Hz | Defines the frequency of the 3rd group. If 0, function is invalid. | During running | Immediately | 0 |
| H09-50 | Response of low-frequency resonance suppression 3 at the mechanical load end | 0.01 to 10.00 | Hz | Defines the response of the 3rd group. Increasing reduces delay, improves responsiveness. Too large may cause vibration. | During running | Immediately | 1.00 |
| H09-52 | Width of low-frequency resonance suppression 3 at the mechanical load end | 0 to 2.00 | Hz | Defines the width of the 3rd group. Increase if vibration frequency changes during operation. | During running | Immediately | 1.00 |
What is Mechanical Characteristic Analysis?
Mechanical characteristic analysis is used to determine the mechanical resonance point and system bandwidth. It analyzes response characteristics up to 8 kHz and supports three modes: mechanical characteristics, speed open loop, and speed closed loop.
How do I perform a mechanical characteristic analysis?
Follow these steps based on the operating procedure flowchart:
1. Open the software tool and click “Mechanical characteristic analysis” on the menubar.
2. Perform tests (three modes are available).
3. Check if distortion occurs due to excessive vibration:
– If Yes: Reduce current excitation. If vibration persists, reduce the gains. Then, return to step 2.
– If No: Proceed to the next step.
4. Check if motor overtravel occurs:
– If Yes: Increase the smoothing factor. Then, return to step 2.
– If No: Proceed to the next step.
5. Check if excessive waveform noise occurs:
– If Yes: Increase the smoothing factor. Then, return to step 2.
– If No: The analysis is complete (End).
NOTE:
• To avoid strong vibration during the test, set the current excitation to 10% during initial execution.
• The analysis waveform may be distorted if the current excitation is too small.
• If vibration generated during the test cannot be eliminated by reducing the current excitation, possible causes and solutions are:
1) The gain is too high. Reduce the speed gain or set the notch based on the auto-tuned resonance point.
2) The inertia ratio is too large. Set the inertia ratio properly.
• In the mechanical characteristic test mode, waveforms before and after notch settings are consistent.
• In the speed closed loop and speed open loop modes, waveforms are attenuated after notch settings.
• Pay attention to safety during the test as the motor speed will change drastically. Perform the test with the servo drive turned off immediately if necessary.
What are the different control modes available in the servo system?
The servo drive supports four control modes:
Position control:
In the position control mode, the target position of a motor is determined by the sum of position references, and the motor speed is determined by the position reference frequency. The servo drive performs quick and accurate position and speed control through the feedback encoder installed on the motor or an external encoder (fully closed-loop control). The position control mode mainly applies to applications requiring positioning control, such as the manipulator, SMT machine, engraving and milling machine, and CNC machine tool.
Speed control:
In the speed control mode, the servo drive performs quick and accurate speed control through the speed reference sent through communication. The speed control mode mainly applies to applications requiring speed control or where a host controller is used for position control or the commands sent from the host controller are used as the speed references for the servo drive, such as the engraving and milling machine.
Torque control:
In the torque control mode, the motor current is in linear relation with the torque. Therefore, torque control is implemented through current control. The output torque of the motor is controlled by the torque reference sent through communication. The torque control mode mainly applies in applications requiring strict tension control. For example, in winding/unwinding devices, torque references are used to prevent the material from being affected by changes in the winding radius.
Compound control:
This mode involves a combination of position, speed, and torque control.
What are the different states of the servo drive according to the CiA402 state machine?
The CiA402 state machine defines the following states for the servo drive:
| State | Description |
|---|---|
| Initialization | Initialization of the servo drive and internal self-check are done. The servo drive parameters cannot be set. The driving functions cannot be executed. |
| No fault | No fault exists in the servo drive or the fault has been cleared. The servo drive parameters can be set. |
| Ready for S-ON | The servo drive is ready to run. The servo drive parameters can be set. |
| Wait for S-ON | The servo drive is waiting to be switched on. The servo drive parameters can be set. |
| Operating | The servo drive is operating properly and a certain operation mode has been enabled. The motor is energized and starts rotating when the speed reference is not 0. Only the parameter whose attribute is “Modifiable during running” can be set. |
| Quick stop | Quick stop is activated and the servo drive is in the process of quick stop. Only the parameter whose attribute is “Modifiable during running” can be set. |
| Stop upon fault | A fault occurs and the servo drive is in the process of stop upon fault. Only the parameter whose attribute is “Modifiable during running” can be set. |
| Fault | The stop process is done and all the driving functions are disabled. Parameters can be modified for troubleshooting. |
How does the servo drive status change based on the Control Word (6040h)?
The following table describes the switchover between the control commands (Control Word 6040h) and the servo drive status (represented by bit0 to bit9 of Status Word 6041h):
| CiA402 Status Switchover | Control Word 6040h | bit0 to bit9[1] of Status Word 6041h |
|---|---|---|
| 0 Power-on → Initialization | Natural transition, control command not required | 0x0000 |
| 1 Initialization → No fault | Natural transition, control command not required. If an error occurs during initialization, the servo drive directly goes to status 13. | 0x0250/0x270 |
| 2 No fault -> Ready for S-ON | 0x0006 | 0x0231 |
| 3 Ready for S-ON -> Wait for S-ON | 0x0007 | 0x0233 |
| 4 Wait for S-ON-> Operating | 0x000F | 0x0237 |
| 5 Operating -> Wait for S-ON | 0x0007 | 0x0233 |
| 6 Wait for S-ON -> Ready for S-ON | 0x0006 | 0x0231 |
| 7 Wait for S-ON -> No fault | 0x0000 | 0x0250 |
| 8 Operating -> Ready for S-ON | 0x0006 | 0x0231 |
| 9 Operating -> No fault | 0x0000 | 0x0250 |
| 10 Wait for S-ON -> No fault | 0x0000 | 0x0250 |
| 11 Operating -> Quick stop | 0x0002 | 0x0217 |
| 12 Quick stop -> No fault | Set 605A to a value between 0 to 3. Natural transition applies after stop and no control command is required. | 0x0250 |
| 13 -> Stop upon fault | Once a fault occurs in any status other than “fault”, the servo drive automatically switches to the stop-upon-fault state, requiring no control command. | 0x021F |
| 14 Stop upon fault -> Fault | Natural transition applies after stop and no control command is required. | 0x0218 |
| 15 Fault -> No fault | 0x80. Bit7 is rising edge-triggered. If the value of bit7 is 1, other control commands are invalid. | 0x0250 |
| 16 Quick stop -> Operating | Set 605A to a value between 5 to 7. 0x0F will be sent upon stop. | 0x0237 |
[1] bit10 to bit15 of 6041h are related to the operating status of the servo drive, and their values are represented as 0 in the preceding table. For details on the status of these bits, view the operating modes of the servo drive.
What is the structure and function of Control Word 6040h?
Control Word (Index 6040h) is used to set the control command for the servo drive. Its structure and function are as follows:
| Bit | Name | Description |
|---|---|---|
| 0 | Switch on | 1: Valid, 0: Invalid |
| 1 | Enable voltage | 1: Valid, 0: Invalid |
| 2 | Quick stop | 0: Valid, 1: Invalid |
| 3 | Enable operation | 1: Valid, 0: Invalid |
| 4 to 6 | Operation mode-specific | Related to the servo drive modes. |
| 7 | Fault reset | 0: Invalid 0 -> 1: Fault reset is implemented for faults and warnings that can be reset. 1: Other control commands are invalid. 1 -> 0: Invalid |
| 8 | Halt | 1: Valid, 0: Invalid |
| 9 | Operation mode-specific | Related to the servo drive operation modes. |
| 10 | Reserved | Undefined |
| 11 to 15 | Manufacturer-specific | Defined by the manufacturer. |
Note:
• All bits in the control word constitute a control command.
• The meaning of bit0 to bit3 and bit7 are the same in each mode of the servo drive. The servo drive switches to the preset status according to CiA402 state machine only when control words are sent in sequence. Each command corresponds to a certain status.
• The meanings of bit4 to bit6 vary with each mode. For details, see parameters related to each mode.
• The bit9 is not defined.
What is the structure and meaning of Status Word 6041h?
Status Word (Index 6041h) indicates the current status of the servo drive. Its structure and meaning are as follows:
| Bit | Name | Description |
|---|---|---|
| 0 | Ready to switch on | 1: Valid, 0: Invalid |
| 1 | Switch on | 1: Valid, 0: Invalid |
| 2 | Operation enabled | 1: Valid, 0: Invalid |
| 3 | Fault | 1: Valid, 0: Invalid |
| 4 | Voltage enabled | 1: Valid, 0: Invalid |
| 5 | Quick stop | 0: Valid, 1: Invalid |
| 6 | Switch on disabled | 1: Valid, 0: Invalid |
| 7 | Warning | 1: Valid, 0: Invalid |
| 8 | Manufacturer-specific | Undefined |
| 9 | Remote | 1: Valid, control word activated 0: Invalid |
| 10 | Target reached | 1: Valid, 0: Invalid |
| 11 | Internal limit active | 1: Valid, 0: Invalid |
| 12 to 13 | Operation mode specific | Related to the servo drive operation modes. |
| 14 | Manufacturer-specific | Undefined |
| 15 | Home found | 1: Valid, 0: Invalid |
Status Indication based on Binary Value (Lower Bits):
| Binary Value | Description |
|---|---|
| XXXX XXXX x0xx 0000 | Not ready to switch on |
| XXXX XXXX x1xx 0000 | Switch on disabled |
| XXXX XXXX x01x 0001 | Ready to switch on |
| XXXX XXXX x01x 0011 | Switched on |
| XXXX XXXX x01x 0111 | Operation enabled |
| xxxx xxxx x00x 0111 | Quick stop active |
| XXXX XXXX x0xx 1111 | Fault reaction active |
| XXXX XXXX x0xx 1000 | Fault |
Note:
• Meanings of bit0 to bit9 are the same in each mode of the servo drive. After control commands in 6040h are sent in sequence, the servo drive returns an acknowledged status.
• Meanings of bit12 to bit13 vary with the servo drive modes. For details, see parameters related to each mode.
• Meanings of bit10, bit11, and bit15 are the same in each mode of the servo drive and indicate the servo drive status after a certain control mode is implemented.
Which operation modes are supported by the SV660N servo drive (Object 6502h)?
Object 6502h shows the supported servo drive modes. The SV660N supports the following modes:
| Bit | Description | Supported or Not (0: No 1: Yes) |
|---|---|---|
| 0 | Profile position (PP) mode | 1 |
| 1 | Velocity (VL) mode | 0 |
| 2 | Profile velocity (PV) mode | 1 |
| 3 | Profile torque (PT) mode | 1 |
| 4 | N/A | 0 |
| 5 | Homing (HM) mode | 1 |
| 6 | Interpolated position (IP) mode | 0 |
| 7 | Cyclic synchronous position (CSP) mode | 1 |
| 8 | Cyclic synchronous velocity (CSV) mode | 1 |
| 9 | Cyclic synchronous torque (CST) mode | 1 |
| 10 to 31 | Defined by the manufacturer | Reserved |
If the device supports 6502h, you can get the supported servo drive modes through 6502h.
The pre-operating mode of the servo drive is set in 6060h. The present operating mode of the servo drive can be viewed in object dictionary 6061h.
How is the servo drive operation mode selected (Object 6060h)?
Object 6060h (Modes of operation) defines the mode of servo drive operation. You set this object to the value corresponding to the desired mode:
| Value | Modes of Operation | Details |
|---|---|---|
| 0 | N/A | Reserved |
| 1 | Profile position (PP) mode | See “7.6 Profile Position (PP) Mode” |
| 2 | N/A | Reserved |
| 3 | Profile velocity (PV) mode | See “7.7 Profile Velocity (PV) Mode” |
| 4 | Profile torque (PT) mode | See “7.8 Profile Torque (PT) Mode” |
| 5 | N/A | Reserved |
| 6 | Homing (HM) mode | See “7.9 Homing Mode (HM)” |
| 7 | Interpolated position (IP) mode | Not supported |
| 8 | Cyclic synchronous position (CSP) mode | See “7.3 Cyclic Synchronous Position (CSP) Mode” |
| 9 | Cyclic synchronous velocity (CSV) mode | See “7.4 Cyclic Synchronous Velocity (CSV) Mode” |
| 10 | Cyclic synchronous torque (CST) mode | See “7.5 Cyclic Synchronous Torque (CST) Mode” |
If an operation mode not supported is set through SDO, an SDO error will be returned. For details, see “12.2 List of Object Groups”.
If an operation mode not supported is set through PDO, this operation mode is invalid.
How can the current servo drive operation mode be viewed (Object 6061h)?
Object 6061h (Modes of operation display) displays the present operation mode of the servo drive. The value read from this object corresponds to the currently active mode:
| Value | Modes of Operation | Details |
|---|---|---|
| 0 | N/A | Reserved |
| 1 | Profile position (PP) mode | See “7.6 Profile Position (PP) Mode” |
| 2 | N/A | Reserved |
| 3 | Profile velocity (PV) mode | See “7.7 Profile Velocity (PV) Mode” |
| 4 | Profile torque (PT) mode | See “7.8 Profile Torque (PT) Mode” |
| 5 | N/A | Reserved |
| 6 | Homing (HM) mode | See “7.9 Homing Mode (HM)” |
| 7 | Interpolated position (IP) mode | Not supported |
| 8 | Cyclic synchronous position (CSP) mode | See “7.3 Cyclic Synchronous Position (CSP) Mode” |
| 9 | Cyclic synchronous velocity (CSV) mode | See “7.4 Cyclic Synchronous Velocity (CSV) Mode” |
| 10 | Cyclic synchronous torque (CST) mode | See “7.5 Cyclic Synchronous Torque (CST) Mode” |
Which objects are related to the Cyclic Synchronous Position (CSP) Mode?
The following objects are related to the CSP mode:
| Index (hex) | Sub-index (hex) | Name | Access | Data Type | Unit | Value Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 6040 | 00 | Control word | RW | Uint16 | – | 0 to 65535 | 0 |
| 6041 | 00 | Status word | RO | Uint16 | – | – | 0 |
| 6060 | 00 | Modes of operation | RW | Int8 | – | 0 to 10 | 0 |
| 6061 | 00 | Modes of operation display | RO | Int8 | – | – | 0 |
| 6064 | 00 | Position actual value | RO | Int32 | Reference unit | – | – |
| 606C | 00 | Velocity actual value | RO | Int32 | Reference unit/s | – | – |
| 607A | 00 | Target position | RW | Int32 | Reference unit | -231 to +(231 – 1) | 0 |
| 607E | 00 | Polarity | RW | Uint8 | – | 0 to 255 | 0 |
| 60B0 | 00 | Position offset | RW | Int32 | Reference unit | -231 to +(231 – 1) | 0 |
| 60B1 | 00 | Velocity offset | RW | Int32 | Reference unit/s | -231 to +(231 – 1) | 0 |
| 60B2 | 00 | Torque offset | RW | Int16 | 0.1% | -3000 to +3000 | 0 |
How is the position deviation monitored in CSP mode?
Position deviation monitoring uses two parameters:
1. Following error window (Index 6065h): Defines the threshold of excessive position deviation in reference units. If 6065h is set too large, the warning threshold defaults to 2147483647 encoder units.
2. Following error time out (Index 6066h): Defines the time lapse in milliseconds (ms) required to trigger the excessive position deviation warning (EB00.0).
If the actual position deviation exceeds the threshold set in 6065h, and this condition persists for the duration defined in 6066h, the warning EB00.0 (Excessive position deviation) will occur.
Parameter Details:
Object 6065h: Following error window
- Access: RW
- Mapping: RPDO
- Data Type: Uint32
- Value Range: 0 to (232-1) (reference unit)
- Default: 3145728
- Related Mode: PP/HM/CSP
Object 6066h: Following error time out
- Access: RW
- Mapping: RPDO
- Data Type: Uint16
- Value Range: 0 to 65535 (ms)
- Default: 0
- Related Mode: PP/HM/CSP
How can the position reference polarity be changed in CSP mode?
The polarity (direction) of the position reference can be changed using the Polarity object (Index 607Eh). Specifically, bit 7 controls the position polarity:
Object 607Eh: Polarity
- Access: RW
- Mapping: RPDO
- Data Type: Uint8
- Value Range: 0 to 255
- Default: 0
- Related Mode: All
Bit 7: Position polarity
- 0: Multiply by 1 (Default direction)
- 1: Multiply by -1 (Inverted direction)
- In PP mode: Inverts the target position (607Ah).
- In CSP mode: Inverts the combined position reference (Target position 607Ah + Position offset 60B0h).
Setting bit 7 to 1 inverts the direction of the position reference used in CSP mode.
What is the recommended PDO configuration for CSP mode?
The basic recommended PDO configuration for Cyclic Synchronous Position (CSP) mode is:
| PDO Type | Object | Name | Description |
|---|---|---|---|
| RPDO (Receive PDO – from Controller to Drive) | 6040h | Control word | Mandatory |
| 607Ah | Target position | Mandatory | |
| 6060h | Modes of operation | Optional | |
| TPDO (Transmit PDO – from Drive to Controller) | 6041h | Status word | Mandatory |
| 6064h | Position actual value | Mandatory | |
| 6061h | Modes of operation display | Optional |
What are the specific meanings of Control Word (6040h) bits in CSP mode?
In Cyclic Synchronous Position (CSP) mode, the general control bits of Control Word 6040h function as follows:
| Bit | Name | Description |
|---|---|---|
| 0 | Switch on | 1: Valid, 0: Invalid |
| 1 | Enable voltage | 1: Valid, 0: Invalid |
| 2 | Quick stop | 0: Valid, 1: Invalid |
| 3 | Enable operation | 1: Valid, 0: Invalid |
Note: The CSP mode only supports absolute position references.
What are the specific meanings of Status Word (6041h) bits in CSP mode?
In Cyclic Synchronous Position (CSP) mode, the Status Word 6041h bits indicate the following:
| Bit | Name | Description in CSP Mode |
|---|---|---|
| 0 | Ready to switch on | 1: Valid, 0: Invalid |
| 1 | Switch on | 1: Valid, 0: Invalid |
| 2 | Operation enabled | 1: Valid, 0: Invalid |
| 3 | Fault | 1: Valid, 0: Invalid |
| 4 | Voltage enabled | 1: Valid, 0: Invalid |
| 5 | Quick stop | 0: Valid, 1: Invalid |
| 6 | Switch on disabled | 1: Valid, 0: Invalid |
| 7 | Warning | 1: Valid, 0: Invalid |
| 8 | Manufacturer-specific | Undefined |
| 9 | Remote | 1: Valid, control word activated; 0: Invalid |
| 10 | Target reached | Not supported, always being 1 |
| 11 | Internal limit active | 0: Position reference within the limit; 1: Position reference beyond the limit |
| 12 | Drive follows the command value | Not supported, always being 1 |
| 13 | Following error | 0: EB00.0 (Excessive position deviation) not reported; 1: EB00.0 (Excessive position deviation) reported |
| 14 | Manufacturer-specific | Undefined |
| 15 | Home found | 0: Homing not completed; 1: Homing completed |
What is the function of Target Position (607Ah) in PP and CSP modes?
Target Position (Index 607Ah) defines the target position for the servo drive.
- In CSP mode, 607Ah represents the absolute target position sent cyclically by the host controller.
- In PP mode, 607Ah represents either the incremental position or the absolute position, as defined by bit 6 of the control word (6040h).
Parameter Details:
- Access: RW
- Mapping: RPDO
- Data Type: Int32
- Value Range: -231 to +(231-1) (reference unit)
- Default: 0
- Related Mode: PP/CSP
What is the function of Position Offset (60B0h) in CSP mode?
Position Offset (Index 60B0h) defines an offset added to the Target Position (607Ah) in CSP mode. The sum of these two values determines the final target position that the servo drive aims to achieve.
Target position = 607Ah + 60B0h
Parameter Details:
- Access: RW
- Mapping: RPDO
- Data Type: Int32
- Value Range: -231 to +(231-1) (reference unit)
- Default: 0
- Related Mode: CSP
What is the function of Velocity Offset (60B1h) in CSP and CSV modes?
Velocity Offset (Index 60B1h) has different functions depending on the mode:
- In CSP mode: It defines the external velocity feedforward signal via EtherCAT when parameter 2005-14h is set to 2. This can be used to reduce position deviation during positioning. After positioning is done, set the velocity offset back to 0 to avoid deviation between target and actual position feedback.
- In CSV mode: It acts as a velocity reference offset added to the Target Velocity (60FFh).
Parameter Details:
- Access: RW
- Mapping: RPDO
- Data Type: Int32
- Value Range: -231 to +(231 – 1) (reference unit/s)
- Default: 0
- Related Mode: CSP/CSV
What is the function of Torque Offset (60B2h) in CSP, CSV, and CST modes?
Torque Offset (Index 60B2h) has different functions depending on the mode:
- In CSP and CSV modes: It defines the external torque feedforward signal via EtherCAT when parameter 2006-0Ch is set to 2.
- In CST mode: It acts as a torque reference offset added to the Target Torque (6071h).
Parameter Details:
- Access: RW
- Mapping: RPDO
- Data Type: Int16
- Value Range: -3000 to +3000 (0.1% of rated torque)
- Default: 0
- Related Mode: CSP/CSV/CST
What does Position Actual Value (6064h) represent?
Position Actual Value (Index 6064h) shows the absolute position feedback in reference units.
In case an absolute encoder is used in rotary mode, 6064h reflects the single-turn position feedback (reference unit) of the mechanical load.
Parameter Details:
- Access: RO
- Mapping: TPDO
- Data Type: Int32
- Unit: Reference unit
- Default: 0
- Related Mode: All
What does Velocity Actual Value (606Ch) represent?
Velocity Actual Value (Index 606Ch) shows the actual speed feedback value in reference units per second (reference unit/s).
Parameter Details:
- Access: RO
- Mapping: TPDO
- Data Type: Int32
- Unit: reference unit/s
- Related Mode: All
What does Torque Actual Value (6077h) represent?
Torque Actual Value (Index 6077h) shows the internal torque feedback of the servo drive. The value is represented as a percentage of the rated torque of the motor, where 100.0% corresponds to the rated torque.
Parameter Details:
- Access: RO
- Mapping: TPDO
- Data Type: Int16
- Unit: 0.1%
- Related Mode: All
What does Following Error Actual Value (60F4h) represent?
Following Error Actual Value (Index 60F4h) shows the position deviation, which is the difference between the target position and the actual position, in reference units.
Parameter Details:
- Access: RO
- Mapping: TPDO
- Data Type: Int32
- Unit: reference unit
- Related Mode: PP/HM/CSP
Which objects are related to the Cyclic Synchronous Velocity (CSV) Mode?
The following objects are related to the CSV mode:
| Index (hex) | Sub-index (hex) | Name | Access | Data Type | Unit | Value Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 6040 | 00 | Control word | RW | Uint16 | – | 0 to 65535 | 0 |
| 6041 | 00 | Status word | RO | Uint16 | – | – | 0 |
| 6060 | 00 | Modes of operation | RW | Int8 | – | 0 to 10 | 0 |
| 6061 | 00 | Modes of operation display | RO | Int8 | – | – | 0 |
| 6064 | 00 | Position actual value | RO | Int32 | Reference unit | – | – |
| 606C | 00 | Velocity actual value | RO | Int32 | Reference unit/s | – | – |
| 60B1 | 00 | Velocity offset | RW | Int32 | Reference unit/s | -231 to +(231 – 1) | 0 |
| 60B2 | 00 | Torque offset | RW | Int16 | 0.1% | -3000 to +3000 | 0 |
| 60FF | 00 | Target velocity | RW | Int32 | Reference unit/s | -231 to +(231 – 1) | 0 |
How can the velocity reference polarity be changed in CSV mode?
The polarity (direction) of the velocity reference can be changed using the Polarity object (Index 607Eh). Specifically, bit 6 controls the velocity reference polarity:
Object 607Eh: Polarity
- Access: RW
- Mapping: RPDO
- Data Type: Uint8
- Value Range: 0 to 255
- Default: 0
- Related Mode: All
Bit 6: Velocity reference polarity
- 0: Multiply by 1 (Default direction)
- 1: Multiply by -1 (Inverted direction)
- In PV mode: Inverts the target torque (6071h). (Note: PDF seems to have a typo here, likely meant target velocity 60FFh for PV)
- In CSP mode: Inverts the velocity offset (60B1h).
- In CSV mode: Inverts the combined speed reference (Target velocity 60FFh + Velocity offset 60B1h).
Setting bit 6 to 1 inverts the direction of the speed reference used in CSV mode.
What is the recommended PDO configuration for CSV mode?
The basic recommended PDO configuration for Cyclic Synchronous Velocity (CSV) mode is:
| PDO Type | Object | Name | Description |
|---|---|---|---|
| RPDO (Receive PDO – from Controller to Drive) | 6040h | Control word | Mandatory |
| 60FFh | Target velocity | Mandatory | |
| 6060h | Modes of operation | Optional | |
| TPDO (Transmit PDO – from Drive to Controller) | 6041h | Status word | Mandatory |
| 6064h | Position actual value | Optional | |
| 606Ch | Velocity actual value | Optional | |
| 6061h | Modes of operation display | Optional |
What are the specific meanings of Control Word (6040h) bits in CSV mode?
In Cyclic Synchronous Velocity (CSV) mode, the general control bits of Control Word 6040h function as follows:
| Bit | Name | Description |
|---|---|---|
| 0 | Switch on | 1: Valid, 0: Invalid |
| 1 | Enable voltage | 1: Valid, 0: Invalid |
| 2 | Quick stop | 0: Valid, 1: Invalid |
| 3 | Enable operation | 1: Valid, 0: Invalid |
What are the specific meanings of Status Word (6041h) bits in CSV mode?
In Cyclic Synchronous Velocity (CSV) mode, the Status Word 6041h bits indicate the following:
| Bit | Name | Description in CSV Mode |
|---|---|---|
| 0 | Ready to switch on | 1: Valid, 0: Invalid |
| 1 | Switch on | 1: Valid, 0: Invalid |
| 2 | Operation enabled | 1: Valid, 0: Invalid |
| 3 | Fault | 1: Valid, 0: Invalid |
| 4 | Voltage enabled | 1: Valid, 0: Invalid |
| 5 | Quick stop | 0: Valid, 1: Invalid |
| 6 | Switch on disabled | 1: Valid, 0: Invalid |
| 7 | Warning | 1: Valid, 0: Invalid |
| 8 | Manufacturer-specific | Undefined |
| 9 | Remote | 1: Valid, control word activated; 0: Invalid |
| 10 | Target reached | Not supported, always being 1 |
| 11 | Internal limit active | 0: Position feedback within the limit; 1: Position feedback over the limit |
| 12 | Drive follow the command value | Not supported, always being 1 |
| 13 | Following error | Not supported, always being 0 |
| 14 | Manufacturer-specific | Undefined |
| 15 | Home found | 0: Homing not completed; 1: Homing completed |
What is the function of Velocity Offset (60B1h) in CSV mode?
In CSV mode, Velocity Offset (Index 60B1h) defines the speed reference offset. After setting the velocity offset, the final target speed is calculated as:
Target speed = Target Velocity (60FFh) + Velocity Offset (60B1h)
Parameter Details:
- Access: RW
- Mapping: RPDO
- Data Type: Int32
- Value Range: -231 to +(231-1) (reference unit/s)
- Default: 0
- Related Mode: CSP/CSV
What is the function of Torque Offset (60B2h) in CSV mode?
In CSV mode, Torque Offset (Index 60B2h) defines the external torque feedforward signal transmitted via EtherCAT when parameter 2006-0Ch is set to 2.
Parameter Details:
- Access: RW
- Mapping: RPDO
- Data Type: Int16
- Value Range: -3000 to +3000 (0.1% of rated torque)
- Default: 0
- Related Mode: CSP/CSV/CST
What is the function of Target Velocity (60FFh) in PV and CSV modes?
Target Velocity (Index 60FFh) defines the target speed for the servo drive in Profile Velocity (PV) and Cyclic Synchronous Velocity (CSV) modes.
The maximum operating speed of the motor in CSV mode (and PV mode) is determined by the maximum motor speed limit itself, meaning the value set in 60FFh cannot exceed this physical limit.
Parameter Details:
- Access: RW
- Mapping: Yes (RPDO)
- Data Type: Int32
- Value Range: -231 to +(231-1) (reference unit/s)
- Default: 0
- Related Mode: PV/CSV
Which objects are related to the Cyclic Synchronous Torque (CST) Mode?
The following objects are related to the CST mode:
| Index (hex) | Sub-index (hex) | Name | Access | Data Type | Unit | Value Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 6040 | 00 | Control word | RW | Uint16 | – | 0 to 65535 | 0 |
| 6041 | 00 | Status word | RO | Uint16 | – | – | 0 |
| 6060 | 00 | Modes of operation | RW | Int8 | – | 0 to 10 | 0 |
| 6061 | 00 | Modes of operation display | RO | Int8 | – | – | 0 |
| 6071 | 00 | Target torque | RW | Int16 | 0.1% | -3000 to +3000 | 0 |
| 6072 | 00 | Max torque | RW | Uint16 | 0.1% | 0 to 3000 | 3000 |
| 6074 | 00 | Torque demand value | RO | Int16 | 0.1% | -3000 to +3000 | 0 |
| 6077 | 00 | Torque actual value | RO | Int16 | 0.1% | -3000 to +3000 | 0 |
| 607F | 00 | Max profile velocity | RW | Uint32 | Reference unit/s | 0 to (232-1) | 104857600 |
| 60B2 | 00 | Torque offset | RW | Int16 | 0.1% | -3000 to +3000 | 0 |
| 60E0 | 00 | Positive torque limit value | RW | Uint16 | 0.1% | 0 to 3000 | 3000 |
| 60E1 | 00 | Negative torque limit value | RW | Uint16 | 0.1% | 0 to 3000 | 3000 |
How is the speed limited in CST (torque control) mode?
In the torque control mode (CST, also applies to PP, PV, PT, HM), the maximum speed in the forward and reverse directions can be limited using the Max profile velocity object (Index 607Fh).
This setting acts as a boundary for the motor’s speed. Note that the speed limit set by 607Fh cannot exceed the maximum operating speed allowed by the motor itself.
Parameter Details:
Object 607Fh: Max profile velocity
- Access: RW
- Mapping: RPDO
- Data Type: Uint32
- Value Range: 0 to (232-1) (reference unit/s)
- Default: 104857600
- Related Mode: PP/PV/PT/HM/CST
How can torque references be limited to protect mechanical devices?
To protect mechanical devices, you can limit the torque references of the servo drive in the position, speed, and torque control modes by setting the following objects:
1. Max torque (Index 6072h): Defines the maximum torque limit for the servo drive in both forward and reverse directions.
2. Positive torque limit value (Index 60E0h): Defines the maximum torque limit specifically for the forward direction.
3. Negative torque limit value (Index 60E1h): Defines the maximum torque limit specifically for the reverse direction (as a positive value representing the magnitude).
Note that the limits set by these parameters cannot exceed the maximum torque physically allowed by the motor.
Parameter Details:
Object 6072h: Max torque value
- Access: RW
- Mapping: RPDO
- Data Type: Uint16
- Value Range: 0 to 3000 (0.1%)
- Default: 3000
- Related Mode: All
Object 60E0h: Positive torque limit value
- Access: RW
- Mapping: RPDO
- Data Type: Uint16
- Value Range: 0 to 3000 (0.1%)
- Default: 3000
- Related Mode: All
Object 60E1h: Negative torque limit value
- Access: RW
- Mapping: RPDO
- Data Type: Uint16
- Value Range: 0 to 3000 (0.1%)
- Default: 3000
- Related Mode: All
How can the torque reference polarity be changed in CST mode?
The polarity (direction) of the torque reference can be changed using the Polarity object (Index 607Eh). Specifically, bit 5 controls the torque reference polarity:
Object 607Eh: Polarity
- Access: RW
- Mapping: RPDO
- Data Type: Uint8
- Value Range: 0 to 255
- Default: 0
- Related Mode: All
Bit 5: Torque reference polarity
- 0: Multiply by 1 (Default direction)
- 1: Multiply by -1 (Inverted direction)
- In PT mode: Inverts the target torque (6071h).
- In CSP/CSV modes: Inverts the torque offset (60B2h).
- In CST mode: Inverts the combined torque reference (Target torque 6071h + Torque offset 60B2h).
Setting bit 5 to 1 inverts the direction of the torque reference used in CST mode.
What is the recommended PDO configuration for CST mode?
The basic recommended PDO configuration for Cyclic Synchronous Torque (CST) mode is:
| PDO Type | Object | Name | Description |
|---|---|---|---|
| RPDO (Receive PDO – from Controller to Drive) | 6040h | Control word | Mandatory |
| 6071h | Target torque | Mandatory | |
| 6060h | Modes of operation | Optional | |
| TPDO (Transmit PDO – from Drive to Controller) | 6041h | Status word | Mandatory |
| 6064h | Position actual value | Optional | |
| 606Ch | Velocity actual value | Optional | |
| 6077h | Torque actual value | Optional | |
| 6061h | Modes of operation display | Optional |
What are the specific meanings of Control Word (6040h) bits in CST mode?
In Cyclic Synchronous Torque (CST) mode, the general control bits of Control Word 6040h function as follows:
| Bit | Name | Description |
|---|---|---|
| 0 | Switch on | 1: Valid, 0: Invalid |
| 1 | Enable voltage | 1: Valid, 0: Invalid |
| 2 | Quick stop | 0: Valid, 1: Invalid |
| 3 | Enable operation | 1: Valid, 0: Invalid |
What are the specific meanings of Status Word (6041h) bits in CST mode?
In Cyclic Synchronous Torque (CST) mode, the Status Word 6041h bits indicate the following:
| Bit | Name | Description in CST Mode |
|---|---|---|
| 0 | Ready to switch on | 1: Valid, 0: Invalid |
| 1 | Switch on | 1: Valid, 0: Invalid |
| 2 | Operation enabled | 1: Valid, 0: Invalid |
| 3 | Fault | 1: Valid, 0: Invalid |
| 4 | Voltage enabled | 1: Valid, 0: Invalid |
| 5 | Quick stop | 0: Valid, 1: Invalid |
| 6 | Switch on disabled | 1: Valid, 0: Invalid |
| 7 | Warning | 1: Valid, 0: Invalid |
| 8 | Manufacturer-specific | Undefined |
| 9 | Remote | 1: Valid, control word activated; 0: Invalid |
| 10 | Target reached | Not supported, always being 1 |
| 11 | Internal limit active | 0: Position feedback within the limit; 1: Position feedback over the limit |
| 12 | Drive follow the command value | Not supported, always being 1 |
| 13 | Following error | Not supported, always being 0 |
| 14 | Manufacturer-specific | Undefined |
| 15 | Home found | 0: Homing not completed; 1: Homing completed |
What is the function of Target Torque (6071h) in PT and CST modes?
Target Torque (Index 6071h) defines the target torque for the servo drive in Profile Torque (PT) and Cyclic Synchronous Torque (CST) modes.
The value is represented as a percentage of the rated torque of the motor, where a value of 1000 corresponds to 100.0% of the rated torque.
Parameter Details:
- Access: RW
- Mapping: RPDO
- Data Type: Int16
- Value Range: -3000 to +3000 (0.1%)
- Default: 0
- Related Mode: PT/CST
What does Torque Demand Value (6074h) represent?
Torque Demand Value (Index 6074h) shows the torque reference output value during operation.
The value is represented as a percentage of the rated torque of the motor, where a value of 1000 corresponds to 100.0% of the rated torque.
Parameter Details:
- Access: RO
- Mapping: TPDO
- Data Type: Int16
- Value Range: -3000 to +3000 (0.1%)
- Related Mode: All
What is the function of Torque Offset (60B2h) in CST mode?
In CST mode, Torque Offset (Index 60B2h) defines an offset added to the Target Torque (6071h). The final target torque command is calculated as:
Target torque = Target Torque (6071h) + Torque Offset (60B2h)
Parameter Details:
- Access: RW
- Mapping: RPDO
- Data Type: Int16
- Value Range: -3000 to +3000 (0.1% of rated torque)
- Default: 0
- Related Mode: CSP/CSV/CST
How is a new target position processed in Profile Position (PP) mode?
In Profile Position (PP) mode, the processing of a new target position involves a handshake mechanism using bits in the Control Word (6040h) and Status Word (6041h):
1. Controller Action: The controller sets the ‘New set-point’ bit (bit 4 of Control Word 6040h) to 1 to signal the servo drive that a new target position is available (written to 607Ah).
2. Servo Drive Action: Upon receiving the new target position, the servo drive sets the ‘Set-point acknowledge’ bit (bit 12 of Status Word 6041h) to 1.
3. Controller Action: After the drive acknowledges, the controller sets the ‘New set-point’ bit (bit 4 of 6040h) back to 0.
4. Servo Drive Action: If the servo drive is ready to receive the *next* new target position, it clears the ‘Set-point acknowledge’ bit (bit 12 of 6041h) to 0. If it’s not ready (e.g., still processing or cache is full in single-point mode), it keeps bit 12 set to 1.
This sequence ensures that the drive acknowledges the receipt of a new setpoint before the controller attempts to send another one.
What are the ‘Sequential’ and ‘Single-point’ modes for position references in PP mode?
The linkage mode for position references in Profile Position (PP) mode is determined by bit 5 (‘Change set immediately’) of the Control Word (6040h):
Sequential mode (Bit 5 = 1):
Sequential linkage applies between position references. When the servo drive is positioning towards the current target, if the controller sends a new target position (by setting bit 4 ‘New set-point’ to 1), the servo drive will immediately start positioning towards this new target, effectively linking the segments smoothly.
Single-point mode (Bit 5 = 0):
Linkage applies between position references only after the motor reaches zero speed. If a new target position is sent while the drive is executing the current positioning segment, the drive will complete the current segment first. Once the current segment is transmitted (position reached), it will then execute the new target position. This mode supports a cache for one target position.
What is the timing sequence for ‘Sequential mode’ in PP mode?
In sequential mode (Control Word 6040h, bit 5 = 1), the servo drive performs positioning based on a new target position as soon as it is received, even if the previous positioning segment is still in progress.
The time sequence involves the ‘New set-point’ bit (bit 4 of Control Word 6040h) and the ‘Set-point acknowledge’ bit (bit 12 of Status Word 6041h):
1. The controller sends the first target position reference (setpoint ①) and sets bit 4 to 1.
2. The drive acknowledges by setting bit 12 to 1.
3. The controller clears bit 4 to 0.
4. The drive clears bit 12 to 0 when ready for the next setpoint.
5. While the drive is moving towards setpoint ①, the controller can send a new target position (setpoint ②) by setting bit 4 to 1.
6. The drive acknowledges by setting bit 12 to 1.
7. The controller clears bit 4 to 0.
8. The drive immediately adjusts its trajectory to move towards setpoint ②, linking from the current position/velocity state. It clears bit 12 when ready for the next setpoint.
The ‘Position reached’ bit (bit 10 of Status Word 6041h) is set when the drive reaches the final target position (setpoint ② in this example).
Note: To modify the target position reference (setpoint) at any time, the ‘New set-point’ bit (bit 4) must be sent again (transition from 0 to 1).
Can you detail the timing sequence and cache behavior in ‘Single-point mode’ for PP mode?
In single-point mode (Control Word 6040h, bit 5 = 0), the servo drive executes positioning based on a new target position only *after* the current positioning segment is completed (transmitted). This mode supports a cache for one target position.
The time sequence and cache behavior are as follows:
1. Cache Empty (①): The controller sends the first setpoint (A) and sets ‘New setpoint’ (bit 4 of 6040h) to 1. Since the cache is empty, the drive immediately acknowledges (‘Setpoint acknowledge’, bit 12 of 6041h, goes to 1) and starts executing positioning towards A. The controller then clears ‘New setpoint’. The drive clears ‘Setpoint acknowledge’ when ready for a new value.
2. Executing, Cache Empty (②): While the drive is executing the move to A, the controller sends the next setpoint (B) and sets ‘New setpoint’ to 1. Since the drive is busy but the cache is empty, the drive acknowledges, stores B in the cache, and keeps ‘Setpoint acknowledge’ at 1 (indicating it’s busy processing A and has cached B). The controller clears ‘New setpoint’.
3. Execution Complete, Cache Used (③): Once the drive completes the move to A (‘Target reached’, bit 10 of 6041h, may pulse), it immediately starts executing the cached setpoint (B). Since it’s now executing B and the cache is empty again, it clears ‘Setpoint acknowledge’ to 0, signaling it can receive another setpoint.
4. Executing, Cache Full (④): While executing B, the controller sends a new setpoint (C) and sets ‘New setpoint’ to 1. The drive acknowledges, stores C in the cache, and sets ‘Setpoint acknowledge’ to 1. The controller clears ‘New setpoint’. Now the cache is full.
5. Executing, Cache Full, New Setpoint Attempt (⑤): While executing B with C in the cache, if the controller tries to send another setpoint (D) by setting ‘New setpoint’ to 1, the drive *cannot* receive it because the cache is full. ‘Setpoint acknowledge’ remains 1. The controller must wait until the drive finishes B, starts C, and clears ‘Setpoint acknowledge’ before sending D. Alternatively, the controller can set bit 5 (‘Change set immediately’) to 1 temporarily to force activation of the cached setpoint (C), though this changes the mode behavior.
Essentially, the drive processes one setpoint at a time. It can hold one additional setpoint in its cache while the current one is active. ‘Setpoint acknowledge’ indicates both receipt and readiness for the *next* input (0 means ready, 1 means received but busy or cache full).
Which objects are related to the Profile Position (PP) Mode?
The following objects are related to the PP mode:
| Index (hex) | Sub-index (hex) | Name | Access | Data Type | Unit | Value Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 6040 | 00 | Control word | RW | Uint16 | – | 0 to 65535 | 0 |
| 6041 | 00 | Status word | RO | Uint16 | – | – | 0 |
| 6060 | 00 | Modes of operation | RW | Int8 | – | 0 to 10 | 0 |
| 6061 | 00 | Modes of operation display | RO | Int8 | – | – | 0 |
| 6064 | 00 | Position actual value | RO | Int32 | Reference unit | – | – |
| 607A | 00 | Target position | RW | Int32 | Reference unit | -231 to (231-1) | 0 |
| 6081 | 00 | Profile velocity | RW | Uint32 | Reference unit/s | 0 to (232-1) | 1747627 |
| 6083 | 00 | Profile acceleration | RW | Uint32 | Reference unit/s² | 0 to (232-1) | 1747626667 |
| 6084 | 00 | Profile deceleration | RW | Uint32 | Reference unit/s² | 0 to (232-1) | 1747626667 |
| 607F | 00 | Max. profile velocity | RW | Uint32 | Reference unit/s | 0 to (232-1) | 104857600 |
How is the ‘Positioning completed’ status determined and signaled in PP mode?
The ‘Positioning completed’ status indicates that the positioning process is done because the position deviation has fulfilled a set condition. This is determined using two parameters:
1. Position window (Index 6067h): Defines the acceptable threshold (+/-) for the position deviation (difference between target and actual position) in reference units.
2. Position window time (Index 6068h): Defines the time duration (in milliseconds) for which the position deviation must remain within the position window.
When the actual position deviation is within the range defined by ±6067h, and this condition persists for the time specified in 6068h, the servo drive considers the position reached. It then sets bit 10 (‘Target reached’) of the Status Word (6041h) to 1. The host controller receives this signal and acknowledges that positioning is done.
This flag bit (bit 10 of 6041h) is valid only when the S-ON (Servo ON) signal is active in PP mode.
Parameter Details:
Object 6067h: Position window
- Access: RW
- Mapping: RPDO
- Data Type: Uint32
- Value Range: 0 to (232-1) (reference unit)
- Default: 734
- Related Mode: PP
Object 6068h: Position window time
- Access: RW
- Mapping: RPDO
- Data Type: Uint16
- Value Range: 0 to 65535 (ms)
- Default: 0
- Related Mode: PP
CAUTION: 6067h only reflects the value of the threshold of the absolute position deviation to activate the positioning completed signal (bit10). It is not related to the positioning accuracy itself.
How is the speed limited in Profile Position (PP) mode?
In Profile Position (PP) mode, speed is primarily defined by the Profile velocity (Object 6081h). However, the overall maximum speed can be limited by Max profile velocity (Object 607Fh).
- Profile velocity (6081h): This is the target operating speed for the positioning move defined in the profile.
- Max profile velocity (607Fh): This sets an upper boundary for speed in both forward and reverse directions. The actual operating speed, even if set higher by 6081h, will be clamped to the value set in 607Fh.
Additionally, the speed limit set by 607Fh cannot exceed the maximum operating speed physically allowed by the motor.
Parameter Details (Speed Limit):
Object 607Fh: Max profile velocity
- Access: RW
- Mapping: RPDO
- Data Type: Uint32
- Value Range: 0 to (232-1) (reference unit/s)
- Default: 104857600
- Related Mode: PP/PV/PT/HM/CST
How can acceleration and deceleration be limited in PP mode?
In Profile Position (PP) mode, the rate of change of position references (acceleration and deceleration) can be limited using dedicated limit parameters:
1. Max acceleration (Index 60C5h): Defines the maximum allowable acceleration value. If the value set in Profile Acceleration (6083h) exceeds this limit, the value of 60C5h will be used instead.
2. Max deceleration (Index 60C6h): Defines the maximum allowable deceleration value. If the value set in Profile Deceleration (6084h) exceeds this limit, the value of 60C6h will be used instead.
Note: For both 60C5h and 60C6h, if a setpoint of 0 is written, it will be forcibly changed to 1.
Parameter Details:
Object 60C5h: Max acceleration
- Access: RW
- Mapping: RPDO
- Data Type: Uint32
- Value Range: 0 to 4294967295 (reference unit/s²)
- Default: 2147483647
- Related Mode: All
Object 60C6h: Max deceleration
- Access: RW
- Mapping: RPDO
- Data Type: Uint16 (Note: PDF states Uint16, but range suggests Uint32 like 60C5h, verify in actual device)
- Value Range: 0 to 4294967295 (reference unit/s²)
- Default: 2147483647
- Related Mode: All
How can the position reference polarity be changed in PP mode?
The polarity (direction) of the position reference can be changed using the Polarity object (Index 607Eh). Specifically, bit 7 controls the position reference polarity:
Object 607Eh: Polarity
- Access: RW
- Mapping: RPDO
- Data Type: Uint8
- Value Range: 0 to 255
- Default: 0
- Related Mode: All
Bit 7: Position reference polarity
- 0: Multiply by 1 (Default direction)
- 1: Multiply by -1 (Inverted direction)
- In PP mode: Inverts the target position (607Ah).
Setting bit 7 to 1 inverts the direction of the target position used in PP mode.
What is the recommended PDO configuration for PP mode?
The basic recommended PDO configuration for Profile Position (PP) mode is:
| PDO Type | Object | Name | Description |
|---|---|---|---|
| RPDO (Receive PDO – from Controller to Drive) | 6040h | Control word | Mandatory |
| 607Ah | Target position | Mandatory | |
| 6081h | Profile velocity | Mandatory | |
| 6083h | Profile acceleration | Optional | |
| 6084h | Profile deceleration | Optional | |
| 6060h | Modes of operation | Optional | |
| TPDO (Transmit PDO – from Drive to Controller) | 6041h | Status word | Mandatory |
| 6064h | Position actual value | Mandatory | |
| 6061h | Modes of operation display | Optional |
What are the specific meanings of Control Word (6040h) bits in PP mode?
In Profile Position (PP) mode, the Control Word 6040h bits have the following specific meanings in addition to the general control bits:
| Bit | Name | Description in PP Mode |
|---|---|---|
| 0 | Switch on | 1: Valid, 0: Invalid |
| 1 | Enable voltage | 1: Valid, 0: Invalid |
| 2 | Quick stop | 0: Valid, 1: Invalid |
| 3 | Enable operation | 1: Valid, 0: Invalid |
| 4 | New set-point | 0 -> 1: Trigger new target position 1 -> 0: Clear bit12 of the status word |
| 5 | Change set immediately | 0: Target position cannot be updated immediately (Single-point mode) 1: Target position can be updated immediately (Sequential mode) |
| 6 | abs/rel | 0: Target position being absolute position reference 1: Target position being relative position reference |
| 8 | Halt | 0: Present operating state maintained 1: Halt (Stop motion using profile deceleration) |
What are the specific meanings of Status Word (6041h) bits in PP mode?
In Profile Position (PP) mode, the Status Word 6041h bits indicate the following:
| Bit | Name | Description in PP Mode |
|---|---|---|
| 0 | Ready to switch on | 1: Valid, 0: Invalid |
| 1 | Switch on | 1: Valid, 0: Invalid |
| 2 | Operation enabled | 1: Valid, 0: Invalid |
| 3 | Fault | 1: Valid, 0: Invalid |
| 4 | Voltage enabled | 1: Valid, 0: Invalid |
| 5 | Quick stop | 0: Valid, 1: Invalid |
| 6 | Switch on disabled | 1: Valid, 0: Invalid |
| 7 | Warning | 1: Valid, 0: Invalid |
| 8 | Manufacturer-specific | Undefined |
| 9 | Remote | 1: Valid, control word activated; 0: Invalid |
| 10 | Target reached | 0: Target position not reached; 1: Target position reached (See 6067h/6068h) |
| 11 | Internal limit active | 0: Position reference within the limit; 1: Position reference over the limit |
| 12 | Set-point acknowledge | 0: Set-point can be updated; 1: Set-point cannot be updated (acknowledges bit 4 of 6040h) |
| 13 | Following error | 0: EB00.0 (Excessive position deviation) not reported; 1: EB00.0 (Excessive position deviation) reported |
| 14 | Manufacturer-specific | Undefined |
| 15 | Home found | 0: Homing not completed; 1: Homing completed |
How is the target position defined in PP mode (Absolute vs Relative)?
In Profile Position (PP) mode, the Target Position (Index 607Ah) defines the destination for the positioning move. Whether this position is interpreted as an absolute coordinate or a relative distance depends on bit 6 (‘abs/rel’) of the Control Word (6040h):
- Bit 6 = 0 (Absolute): The value in 607Ah is treated as an absolute position target in the defined coordinate system. The drive moves from its current position to this specific coordinate.
- Bit 6 = 1 (Relative): The value in 607Ah is treated as a relative distance to move from the *current* position. The drive moves by the specified amount (positive or negative) from where it currently is.
Parameter Details:
Object 607Ah: Target position
- Access: RW
- Mapping: RPDO
- Data Type: Int32
- Value Range: -231 to +(231 – 1) (reference unit)
- Default: 0
- Related Mode: PP/CSP
What is the function of Profile Velocity (6081h) in PP mode?
Profile Velocity (Index 6081h) defines the constant operating speed that the servo drive will attempt to reach and maintain during the target position move in PP mode, between the acceleration and deceleration phases.
The motor speed in RPM can be calculated using the formula:
Motor speed (RPM) = (6081h * 6091h (Gear ratio)) / Encoder resolution * 60
Parameter Details:
- Access: RW
- Mapping: RPDO
- Data Type: Uint32
- Value Range: 0 to (232-1) (reference unit/s)
- Default: 174762
- Related Mode: PP
What is the function of Profile Acceleration (6083h) in PP mode?
Profile Acceleration (Index 6083h) defines the rate at which the servo drive increases its speed from the start or current speed up to the Profile Velocity (6081h) during a positioning move in PP mode.
If the value set in 6083h exceeds the limit defined in Max Acceleration (60C5h), the value of 60C5h will be used instead.
Note: For 6083h, a setpoint of 0 will be forcibly changed to 1.
Parameter Details:
- Access: RW
- Mapping: RPDO
- Data Type: Uint32
- Value Range: 0 to (232-1) (reference unit/s²)
- Default: 1747626667
- Related Mode: PP/PV
What is the function of Profile Deceleration (6084h) in PP mode?
Profile Deceleration (Index 6084h) defines the rate at which the servo drive decreases its speed from the Profile Velocity (6081h) down to zero (or the next segment’s velocity in sequential mode) as it approaches the target position in PP mode.
If the value set in 6084h exceeds the limit defined in Max Deceleration (60C6h), the value of 60C6h will be used instead.
Note: For 6084h, a setpoint of 0 will be forcibly changed to 1.
Parameter Details:
- Access: RW
- Mapping: RPDO
- Data Type: Uint32
- Value Range: 0 to (232-1) (reference unit/s²)
- Default: 1747626667
- Related Mode: PP/PV
Which objects are related to the Profile Velocity (PV) Mode?
The following objects are related to the PV mode:
| Index (hex) | Sub-index (hex) | Name | Access | Data Type | Unit | Value Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 6040 | 00 | Control word | RW | Uint16 | – | 0 to 65535 | 0 |
| 6041 | 00 | Status word | RO | Uint16 | – | – | 0 |
| 6060 | 00 | Modes of operation | RW | Int8 | – | 0 to 10 | 0 |
| 6061 | 00 | Modes of operation display | RO | Int8 | – | – | 0 |
| 606C | 00 | Velocity actual value | RO | Int32 | Reference unit/s | – | – |
| 606D | 00 | Velocity window | RW | Uint16 | RPM | 0 to 65535 | 10 |
| 606E | 00 | Velocity window time | RW | Uint16 | ms | 0 to 65535 | 0 |
| 606F | 00 | Velocity threshold | RW | Uint16 | RPM | 0 to 0xFFFF | 10 |
| 6070 | 00 | Velocity threshold time | RW | Uint16 | ms | 0 to 65535 | 0 |
| 607F | 00 | Max. profile velocity | RW | Uint32 | Reference unit/s | 0 to (232-1) | 104857600 |
| 6083 | 00 | Profile acceleration | RW | Uint32 | Reference unit/s² | 0 to (232-1) | 1747626667 |
| 6084 | 00 | Profile deceleration | RW | Uint32 | Reference unit/s² | 0 to (232-1) | 1747626667 |
| 60FF | 00 | Target velocity | RW | Int32 | Reference unit/s | -231 to +(231-1) | 0 |
How is the ‘Speed Reach’ status monitored and signaled in PV mode?
Speed reach monitoring checks if the actual motor speed feedback matches the speed reference within a defined tolerance for a specific duration. This is done using two parameters:
1. Velocity window (Index 606Dh): Defines the acceptable threshold (+/-) for the difference between the speed reference and the speed feedback, in RPM.
2. Velocity window time (Index 606Eh): Defines the time duration (in milliseconds) for which the speed difference must remain within the velocity window.
If the absolute difference between the speed reference and the speed feedback is within ±606Dh, and this condition persists for the time defined by 606Eh, the speed is considered reached. The servo drive then sets bit 10 (‘Target reached’) of the Status Word (6041h) to 1.
This flag bit (bit 10 of 6041h) is valid only when the servo drive is enabled (Servo ON) in PV mode.
Parameter Details:
Object 606Dh: Velocity window
- Access: RW
- Mapping: RPDO
- Data Type: Uint16
- Value Range: 0 to 65535 (RPM)
- Default: 10
- Related Mode: PV
Object 606Eh: Velocity window time
- Access: RW
- Mapping: RPDO
- Data Type: Uint16
- Value Range: 0 to 65535 (ms)
- Default: 0
- Related Mode: PV
How is ‘Zero Speed’ monitored and signaled in PV mode?
Zero speed monitoring checks if the absolute value of the motor speed feedback is less than a set threshold, indicating the motor is at or near a standstill. This uses two parameters:
1. Velocity threshold (Index 606Fh): Defines the speed threshold in RPM. If the absolute speed feedback is below this value, the motor is considered to be at zero speed.
2. Velocity threshold time (Index 6070h): Defines the time duration (in milliseconds) for which the speed feedback must remain below the velocity threshold.
When the absolute speed feedback is within ±606Fh (effectively, less than 606Fh) and this status persists for the time defined by 6070h, the servo drive sets bit 12 of the Status Word (6041h) to 1, indicating the motor speed is effectively zero (standstill).
This flag bit (bit 12 of 6041h) is valid only in PV mode.
Parameter Details:
Object 606Fh: Velocity threshold
- Access: RW
- Mapping: RPDO
- Data Type: Uint16
- Value Range: 0 to 0xFFFF (RPM)
- Default: 10
- Related Mode: PV
Object 6070h: Velocity threshold time
- Access: RW
- Mapping: RPDO
- Data Type: Uint16
- Value Range: 0 to 65535 (ms)
- Default: 0
- Related Mode: PV
How is the speed limited in Profile Velocity (PV) mode?
In Profile Velocity (PV) mode, the maximum speed in the forward and reverse directions can be limited using the Max profile velocity object (Index 607Fh).
This setting acts as an upper boundary for the target speed command (60FFh). Even if 60FFh is set to a higher value, the actual commanded speed will be clamped to the limit set by 607Fh.
Note that the speed limit set by 607Fh cannot exceed the maximum operating speed physically allowed by the motor itself.
Parameter Details:
Object 607Fh: Max profile velocity
- Access: RW
- Mapping: RPDO
- Data Type: Uint32
- Value Range: 0 to (232-1) (reference unit/s)
- Default: 104857600
- Related Mode: PP/PV/PT/HM/CST
How can acceleration and deceleration be limited in PV mode?
In Profile Velocity (PV) mode, the rate of change of speed references (used for accelerating to or decelerating from the target velocity 60FFh) can be limited using dedicated limit parameters:
1. Max acceleration (Index 60C5h): Defines the maximum allowable acceleration value. If the value set in Profile Acceleration (6083h) exceeds this limit, the value of 60C5h will be used instead.
2. Max deceleration (Index 60C6h): Defines the maximum allowable deceleration value. If the value set in Profile Deceleration (6084h) exceeds this limit, the value of 60C6h will be used instead.
Note: For both 60C5h and 60C6h, if a setpoint of 0 is written, it will be forcibly changed to 1.
Parameter Details:
Object 60C5h: Max acceleration
- Access: RW
- Mapping: RPDO
- Data Type: Uint32
- Value Range: 0 to 4294967295 (reference unit/s²)
- Default: 2147483647
- Related Mode: All
Object 60C6h: Max deceleration
- Access: RW
- Mapping: RPDO
- Data Type: Uint16 (Note: PDF states Uint16, but range suggests Uint32 like 60C5h, verify in actual device)
- Value Range: 0 to 4294967295 (reference unit/s²)
- Default: 2147483647
- Related Mode: All
How can the velocity reference polarity be changed in PV mode?
The polarity (direction) of the velocity reference can be changed using the Polarity object (Index 607Eh). Specifically, bit 6 controls the velocity reference polarity:
Object 607Eh: Polarity
- Access: RW
- Mapping: RPDO
- Data Type: Uint8
- Value Range: 0 to 255
- Default: 0
- Related Mode: All
Bit 6: Velocity reference polarity
- 0: Multiply by 1 (Default direction)
- 1: Multiply by -1 (Inverted direction)
- In PV mode: Inverts the target velocity (60FFh).
Setting bit 6 to 1 inverts the direction of the target velocity used in PV mode.
What is the recommended PDO configuration for PV mode?
The basic recommended PDO configuration for Profile Velocity (PV) mode is:
| PDO Type | Object | Name | Description |
|---|---|---|---|
| RPDO (Receive PDO – from Controller to Drive) | 6040h | Control word | Mandatory |
| 60FFh | Target Velocity | Mandatory | |
| 6083h | Profile acceleration | Optional | |
| 6084h | Profile deceleration | Optional | |
| 6060h | Modes of operation | Optional | |
| TPDO (Transmit PDO – from Drive to Controller) | 6041h | Status word | Mandatory |
| 6064h | Position actual value | Optional | |
| 606Ch | Velocity actual value | Optional | |
| 6061h | Modes of operation display | Optional |
What are the specific meanings of Control Word (6040h) bits in PV mode?
In Profile Velocity (PV) mode, the Control Word 6040h bits have the following specific meanings in addition to the general control bits:
| Bit | Name | Description in PV Mode |
|---|---|---|
| 0 | Switch on | 1: Valid, 0: Invalid |
| 1 | Enable voltage | 1: Valid, 0: Invalid |
| 2 | Quick stop | 0: Valid, 1: Invalid |
| 3 | Enable operation | 1: Valid, 0: Invalid |
| 8 | Halt | 0: Present operating state maintained 1: Halt (Stop motion using profile deceleration 6084h) |
What are the specific meanings of Status Word (6041h) bits in PV mode?
In Profile Velocity (PV) mode, the Status Word 6041h bits indicate the following:
| Bit | Name | Description in PV Mode |
|---|---|---|
| 0 | Ready to switch on | 1: Valid, 0: Invalid |
| 1 | Switch on | 1: Valid, 0: Invalid |
| 2 | Operation enabled | 1: Valid, 0: Invalid |
| 3 | Fault | 1: Valid, 0: Invalid |
| 4 | Voltage enabled | 1: Valid, 0: Invalid |
| 5 | Quick stop | 0: Valid, 1: Invalid |
| 6 | Switch on disabled | 1: Valid, 0: Invalid |
| 7 | Warning | 1: Valid, 0: Invalid |
| 8 | Manufacturer-specific | Undefined |
| 9 | Remote | 1: Valid, control word activated; 0: Invalid |
| 10 | Target reached | 0: Target velocity not reached; 1: Target velocity reached (See 606D/606E) |
| 11 | Internal limit active | 0: Position feedback within the limit; 1: Position feedback over the limit |
| 12 | Speed | 0: Speed not being 0; 1: Speed being 0 (See 606F/6070) |
| 13 | N/A | No meaning, always being 0 |
| 14 | Manufacturer-specific | Undefined |
| 15 | Home found | 0: Homing not completed; 1: Homing completed |
What is the function of Profile Acceleration (6083h) in PV mode?
Profile Acceleration (Index 6083h) defines the speed reference acceleration used in Profile Velocity (PV) mode (and also Profile Position (PP) mode).
In PV mode, it determines the rate at which the drive’s speed changes to reach the Target Velocity (60FFh).
If the value set in 6083h exceeds the limit defined in Max Acceleration (60C5h), the value of 60C5h will be used instead.
Note: For 6083h, a setpoint of 0 will be forcibly changed to 1.
Parameter Details:
- Access: RW
- Mapping: RPDO
- Data Type: Uint32
- Value Range: 0 to (232-1) (reference unit/s²)
- Default: 1747626667
- Related Mode: PP/PV
What is the function of Profile Deceleration (6084h) in PV mode?
Profile Deceleration (Index 6084h) defines the speed reference deceleration used in Profile Velocity (PV) mode (and also Profile Position (PP) mode).
In PV mode, it determines the rate at which the drive’s speed changes when commanded to stop (e.g., via Halt bit) or when changing to a lower target velocity.
If the value set in 6084h exceeds the limit defined in Max Deceleration (60C6h), the value of 60C6h will be used instead.
Note: For 6084h, a setpoint of 0 will be forcibly changed to 1.
Parameter Details:
- Access: RW
- Mapping: RPDO
- Data Type: Uint32
- Value Range: 0 to (232-1) (reference unit/s²)
- Default: 1747626667
- Related Mode: PP/PV
Which objects are related to the Profile Torque (PT) Mode?
The following objects are related to the PT mode:
| Index (hex) | Sub-index (hex) | Name | Access | Data Type | Unit | Value Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 6040 | 00 | Control word | RW | Uint16 | – | 0 to 65535 | 0 |
| 6041 | 00 | Status word | RO | Uint16 | – | – | 0 |
| 6060 | 00 | Modes of operation | RW | Int8 | – | – | 0 |
| 6061 | 00 | Modes of operation display | RO | Int8 | – | – | 0 |
| 6071 | 00 | Target torque | RW | Int16 | 0.1% | -3000 to +3000 | 0 |
| 6072 | 00 | Max. torque | RW | Uint16 | 0.1% | 0 to 3000 | 3000 |
| 6074 | 00 | Torque demand value | RO | Int16 | 0.1% | – | – |
| 6077 | 00 | Torque actual value | RO | Int16 | 0.1% | – | – |
| 6087 | 00 | Torque slope | RW | Uint32 | 0.1%/s | 0 to (232-1) | 232-1 |
| 607F | 00 | Max. profile velocity | RW | Uint32 | Reference unit/s | 0 to (232-1) | 104857600 |
| 60E0 | 00 | Positive torque limit value | RW | Uint16 | 0.1% | 0 to 3000 | 3000 |
| 60E1 | 00 | Negative torque limit value | RW | Uint16 | 0.1% | 0 to 3000 | 3000 |
How is the speed limited in Profile Torque (PT) mode?
In Profile Torque (PT) mode, which is a torque control mode, the maximum speed in the forward and reverse directions can still be limited using the Max profile velocity object (Index 607Fh).
This setting acts as a boundary for the motor’s speed, even when the primary control variable is torque. Note that the speed limit set by 607Fh cannot exceed the maximum operating speed allowed by the motor itself.
This limit applies to PP, PV, PT, HM and CST modes.
Parameter Details:
Object 607Fh: Max profile velocity
- Access: RW
- Mapping: RPDO
- Data Type: Uint32
- Value Range: 0 to (232-1) (reference unit/s)
- Default: 104857600
- Related Mode: PP/PV/PT/HM/CST
How can torque references be limited in PT mode?
To protect mechanical devices in Profile Torque (PT) mode (and other modes like position and speed control), you can limit the torque references using the following objects:
1. Max torque (Index 6072h): Defines the maximum torque limit for the servo drive in both forward and reverse directions.
2. Positive torque limit value (Index 60E0h): Defines the maximum torque limit specifically for the forward direction.
3. Negative torque limit value (Index 60E1h): Defines the maximum torque limit specifically for the reverse direction (as a positive value representing the magnitude).
The actual commanded torque will be clamped by these limits. Note that the limits set by these parameters cannot exceed the maximum torque physically allowed by the motor.
Parameter Details:
Object 6072h: Max torque value
- Access: RW
- Mapping: RPDO
- Data Type: Uint16
- Value Range: 0 to 3000 (0.1%)
- Default: 3000
- Related Mode: All
Object 60E0h: Positive torque limit value
- Access: RW
- Mapping: RPDO
- Data Type: Uint16
- Value Range: 0 to 3000 (0.1%)
- Default: 3000
- Related Mode: All
Object 60E1h: Negative torque limit value
- Access: RW
- Mapping: RPDO
- Data Type: Uint16
- Value Range: 0 to 3000 (0.1%)
- Default: 3000
- Related Mode: All
How can the torque reference polarity be changed in PT mode?
The polarity (direction) of the torque reference can be changed using the Polarity object (Index 607Eh). Specifically, bit 5 controls the torque reference polarity:
Object 607Eh: Polarity
- Access: RW
- Mapping: RPDO
- Data Type: Uint8
- Value Range: 0 to 255
- Default: 0
- Related Mode: All
Bit 5: Torque reference polarity
- 0: Multiply by 1 (Default direction)
- 1: Multiply by -1 (Inverted direction)
- In PT mode: Inverts the target torque (6071h).
- In CSP/CSV modes: Inverts the torque offset (60B2h).
- In CST mode: Inverts the combined torque reference (Target torque 6071h + Torque offset 60B2h).
Setting bit 5 to 1 inverts the direction of the target torque used in PT mode.
How is ‘Torque Reach’ monitored and signaled?
Torque reach monitoring checks whether the torque reference value reaches a set base value, indicating a certain torque level has been achieved. This uses three parameters (Note: These appear to be manufacturer-specific objects, typically found in the 2000h range):
1. Base value for torque reach (Index 2007h, Sub-index 16h): The target torque level to compare against.
2. Threshold of valid torque reach (Index 2007h, Sub-index 17h): A threshold value. If the absolute difference between the torque reference and the base value (2007-16h) is *larger* than this threshold, the torque reached signal is considered valid (ON).
3. Threshold of invalid torque reach (Index 2007h, Sub-index 18h): A threshold value. If the absolute difference between the torque reference and the base value (2007-16h) is *smaller* than this threshold, the torque reached signal is considered invalid (OFF).
If neither condition (larger than 17h or smaller than 18h) is met, the signal retains its previous state. A corresponding signal (e.g., a status bit or digital output) is generated to be output to the host controller.
Parameter Details:
Object 2007h-16h: Base value for torque reach
- Access: RW
- Mapping: –
- Data Type: Uint16
- Value Range: 0 to 300.0 (%)
- Default: 0
- Related Mode: PT
Object 2007h-17h: Threshold of valid torque reach
- Access: RW
- Mapping: –
- Data Type: Uint16
- Value Range: 0 to 300.0 (%)
- Default: 20.0
- Related Mode: PT
Object 2007h-18h: Threshold of invalid torque reach
- Access: RW
- Mapping: –
- Data Type: Uint16
- Value Range: 0 to 300.0 (%)
- Default: 10.0
- Related Mode: PT
What are the specific meanings of Control Word (6040h) bits in PT mode?
In Profile Torque (PT) mode, the Control Word 6040h bits have the following specific meanings in addition to the general control bits:
| Bit | Name | Description in PT Mode |
|---|---|---|
| 0 | Switch on | 1: Valid, 0: Invalid |
| 1 | Enable voltage | 1: Valid, 0: Invalid |
| 2 | Quick stop | 0: Valid, 1: Invalid |
| 3 | Enable operation | 1: Valid, 0: Invalid |
| 8 | Halt | 0: Present operating state maintained 1: Halt (Action depends on configuration, typically stops motion) |
What are the specific meanings of Status Word (6041h) bits in PT mode?
In Profile Torque (PT) mode, the Status Word 6041h bits indicate the following:
| Bit | Name | Description in PT Mode |
|---|---|---|
| 0 | Ready to switch on | 1: Valid, 0: Invalid |
| 1 | Switch on | 1: Valid, 0: Invalid |
| 2 | Operation enabled | 1: Valid, 0: Invalid |
| 3 | Fault | 1: Valid, 0: Invalid |
| 4 | Voltage enabled | 1: Valid, 0: Invalid |
| 5 | Quick stop | 0: Valid, 1: Invalid |
| 6 | Switch on disabled | 1: Valid, 0: Invalid |
| 7 | Warning | 1: Valid, 0: Invalid |
| 8 | Manufacturer-specific | Undefined |
| 9 | Remote | 1: Valid, control word activated; 0: Invalid |
| 10 | Target reached | 0: Target torque not reached; 1: Target torque reached |
| 11 | Internal limit active | 0: Position feedback within the limit; 1: Position feedback over the limit |
| 12 to 14 | N/A | No meaning, always being 0 |
| 15 | Home found | 0: Homing not completed; 1: Homing completed |
What is the function of Torque Slope (6087h) in PT mode?
Torque Slope (Index 6087h) defines the rate of change (increment per second) of the torque reference in Profile Torque (PT) mode. It essentially controls how quickly the torque ramps up or down towards the Target Torque (6071h).
Note: For 6087h, a setpoint of 0 will be forcibly changed to 1.
Parameter Details:
- Access: RW
- Mapping: RPDO
- Data Type: Uint32
- Value Range: 0 to (232-1) (Unit: 0.1%/s)
- Default: 232-1
- Related Mode: PT/CST
What is the recommended PDO configuration for PT mode?
The basic recommended PDO configuration for Profile Torque (PT) mode is:
| PDO Type | Object | Name | Description |
|---|---|---|---|
| RPDO (Receive PDO – from Controller to Drive) | 6040h | Control word | Mandatory |
| 6071h | Target torque | Mandatory | |
| 6087h | Torque slope | Optional | |
| 6060h | Modes of operation | Optional | |
| TPDO (Transmit PDO – from Drive to Controller) | 6041h | Status word | Mandatory |
| 6064h | Position actual value | Optional | |
| 606Ch | Velocity actual value | Optional | |
| 6077h | Torque actual value | Optional | |
| 6061h | Modes of operation display | Optional |
Which objects are related to the Homing Mode (HM)?
The following objects are related to the HM mode:
| Index (hex) | Sub-index (hex) | Name | Access | Data Type | Unit | Value Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 6040 | 00 | Control word | RW | Uint16 | – | 0 to 65535 | 0 |
| 6041 | 00 | Status word | RO | Uint16 | – | – | 0 |
| 6060 | 00 | Modes of operation | RW | Int8 | – | 0 to 10 | 0 |
| 6061 | 00 | Modes of operation display | RO | Int8 | – | 0 to 10 | 0 |
| 6064 | 00 | Position actual value | RO | Int32 | Reference unit | – | – |
| 6098 | 00 | Homing method | RW | Int8 | – | 1 to 35 | 1 |
| 6099 | 01 | Speed during search for switch | RW | Uint32 | Reference unit/s | 0 to (232-1) | 1747627 |
| 6099 | 02 | Speed during search for zero | RW | Uint32 | Reference unit/s | 10 to (232-1) | 174763 |
| 609A | 00 | Homing acceleration | RW | Uint32 | Reference unit/s² | 0 to (232-1) | 1747626667 |
| 607C | 00 | Home offset | RW | Int32 | Reference unit | -231 to +(231-1) | 0 |
| 2005 | 24 | Timeout | RW | Uint16 | 10 ms | 100 to 65535 | 50000 |
How is the homing process monitored for timeouts?
The homing process duration is monitored using the Homing time limit parameter (Index 2005h, Sub-index 24h).
If the time taken to complete the homing sequence exceeds the value set in this parameter, the servo drive reports error E601.0 (Homing timeout).
This timeout mechanism helps to determine if the configured homing speed (6099h), acceleration (609A), or the physical connections of deceleration point signals (like limit switches) and home signals (like Z pulse) are functioning properly.
Parameter Details:
Object 2005h-24h: Timeout (Homing time limit)
- Access: RW
- Mapping: RPDO
- Data Type: Uint16
- Value Range: 100 to 65535 (Unit: 10 ms)
- Default: 50000 (equivalent to 500 seconds)
- Related Mode: HM
How is the position calculated after homing?
After the homing procedure is successfully completed, the method for calculating the present mechanical position (reported in Position Actual Value, 6064h) is defined by the Actual position calculation method object (Index 60E6h).
There are two methods:
- Value 0: Absolute position homing
The Position Actual Value (6064h) is set directly to the value of the Home Offset (607Ch). Formula:
6064h = 607Ch - Value 1: Relative position homing
The Position Actual Value (6064h) is set to the sum of the present position feedback value (internal encoder count at the homing stop position) and the Home Offset (607Ch). Formula:
6064h = Present position feedback value + 607Ch
Note: The value of 60E6h cannot be edited after the homing process has been triggered.
Parameter Details:
Object 60E6h: Actual position calculation method
- Access: RW
- Mapping: NO
- Data Type: Uint8
- Value Range: 0 to 1
- Default: 0
- Related Mode: HM
What is the function of the Home Offset (607Ch)?
Home Offset (Index 607Ch) defines the physical distance (in reference units) between the ‘mechanical zero’ position of the machine and the ‘motor home’ position found during the homing procedure.
The relationship is: Mechanical home = Mechanical zero + 607Ch (Home offset).
It serves two main purposes:
1. Determining User Position: After homing is successfully completed (indicated by Status Word 6041h bit 15 = 1) and activated upon power-on, the Home Offset is used in conjunction with the selected Position Calculation Method (60E6h) to establish the value reported in Position Actual Value (6064h), effectively setting the user’s zero reference point.
2. Error Checking: If the value set in 607Ch is beyond the software position limits defined by object 607Dh, an error Er.D10 (Improper homing offset setting) will occur.
Parameter Details:
- Access: RW
- Mapping: RPDO
- Data Type: Int32
- Value Range: -231 to +(231-1) (reference unit)
- Default: 0
- Related Mode: HM
How can acceleration be limited in Homing Mode (HM)?
In Homing Mode (HM), the acceleration used during the homing movements can be limited by the Max acceleration parameter (Index 60C5h).
The primary acceleration for homing is set by Homing acceleration (Index 609A). However, if the value set in 609A exceeds the limit defined in 60C5h, the drive will use the value from 60C5h instead.
Note: For 60C5h, if a setpoint of 0 is written, it will be forcibly changed to 1.
Parameter Details:
Object 60C5h: Max acceleration
- Access: RW
- Mapping: RPDO
- Data Type: Uint32
- Value Range: 0 to 4294967295 (reference unit/s²)
- Default: 2147483647
- Related Mode: All
Object 609A: Homing acceleration
- Access: RW
- Data Type: Uint32
- Value Range: 0 to (232-1) (reference unit/s²)
- Default: 1747626667
How does Homing Method 1 (using Z signal and negative limit switch) work?
Homing Method 1 (set by setting Homing method object 6098h to 1) uses the motor’s Z signal (index pulse) as the mechanical home reference and the negative limit switch (N-OT) as the deceleration point.
The process is as follows (assuming the N-OT signal is inactive at the start):
1. The motor starts moving in the reverse direction at a high speed, defined by ‘Speed during search for switch’ (Index 6099h, Sub-index 01, denoted as “H”).
2. The motor continues until it reaches the rising edge of the N-OT signal (it activates the negative limit switch).
3. Upon detecting the N-OT signal’s rising edge, the motor decelerates using the ‘Homing acceleration’ (609Ah).
4. After decelerating (or potentially while still moving slowly), the motor changes direction and starts moving in the forward direction at a low speed, defined by ‘Speed during search for zero’ (Index 6099h, Sub-index 02, denoted as “L”).
5. The motor continues moving forward at low speed until it detects the falling edge of the N-OT signal (it moves off the limit switch).
6. After passing the falling edge of the N-OT signal, the motor stops at the *first* occurrence of the Z signal (index pulse) from the encoder.
This final stopping position becomes the mechanical home.
How does homing work when the N-OT signal is active at the start (6098h = 1, Home: Z signal, Deceleration point: negative limit switch (N-OT))?
The N-OT signal is active at start, and the motor starts homing in the forward direction at low speed. After reaching the falling edge of the N-OT signal, the motor stops at the first Z signal.
How does homing work when the P-OT signal is inactive at the start (6098h = 2, Home: Z signal, Deceleration point: positive limit switch (P-OT))?
The P-OT signal is inactive at start, and the motor starts homing in the forward direction at high speed. After reaching the rising edge of the P-OT signal, the motor decelerates and changes to run in the reverse direction at low speed until it stops at the first Z signal after reaching the falling edge of the P-OT signal.
How does homing work when the P-OT signal is active at the start (6098h = 2, Home: Z signal, Deceleration point: positive limit switch (P-OT))?
The P-OT signal is active at start, and the motor starts homing in the reverse direction at low speed. After reaching the falling edge of the P-OT signal, the motor stops at the first Z signal.
How does homing work when the HW signal is inactive at the start (6098h = 3, Home: Z signal, Deceleration point: home switch (HW))?
The HW signal is inactive at start, and the motor starts homing in the forward direction at high speed. After reaching the rising edge of the HW signal, the motor decelerates and changes to run in the reverse direction at low speed until it stops at the first Z signal after reaching the falling edge of the HW signal.
How does homing work when the HW signal is active at the start (6098h = 3, Home: Z signal, Deceleration point: home switch (HW))?
The HW signal is active at start, and the motor starts homing in the reverse direction at low speed. After reaching the falling edge of the HW signal, the motor stops at the first Z signal.
How does homing work when the HW signal is inactive at the start (6098h = 4, Home: Z signal, Deceleration point: home switch (HW))?
The HW signal is inactive at start, and the motor starts homing in the forward direction at high speed. After reaching the rising edge of the HW signal, the motor decelerates and changes to run in the reverse direction at low speed. Then, after reaching the falling edge of the HW signal, the motor decelerates and changes to run in the forward direction until it stops at the first Z signal after reaching the rising edge of the HW signal.
How does homing work when the HW signal is active at the start (6098h = 4, Home: Z signal, Deceleration point: home switch (HW))?
The HW signal is active at start, and the motor starts homing in the reverse direction at low speed. After reaching the falling edge of the HW signal, the motor decelerates and changes to run in the forward direction until it stops at the first Z signal after reaching the rising edge of the HW signal.
How does homing work when the HW signal is inactive at the start (6098h = 5, Home: Z signal, Deceleration point: home switch (HW))?
The HW signal is inactive at start, and the motor starts homing in the reverse direction at high speed. After reaching the rising edge of the HW signal, the motor decelerates and changes to run in the forward direction at low speed until it stops at the first Z signal after reaching the falling edge of the HW signal.
How does homing work when the HW signal is active at the start (6098h = 5, Home: Z signal, Deceleration point: home switch (HW))?
The HW signal is active at start, and the motor starts homing in the forward direction at low speed. After reaching the falling edge of the HW signal, the motor stops at the first Z signal.
How does homing work when the HW signal is inactive at the start (6098h = 6, Home: Z signal, Deceleration point: home switch (HW))?
The HW signal is inactive at start, and the motor starts homing in the reverse direction at high speed. After reaching the rising edge of the HW signal, the motor decelerates and changes to run in the forward direction at low speed. Then, after reaching the falling edge of the HW signal, the motor changes to run in the reverse direction at low speed until it stops at the first Z signal after reaching the rising edge of the HW signal.
How does homing work when the HW signal is active at the start (6098h = 6, Home: Z signal, Deceleration point: home switch (HW))?
The HW signal is active at start, and the motor starts homing in the forward direction at low speed. After reaching the falling edge of the HW signal, the motor decelerates and changes to run in the reverse direction at low speed until it stops at the first Z signal after reaching the rising edge of HW signal.
How does homing work when the HW signal is inactive at the start and the positive limit switch is not hit (6098h = 7, Home: Z signal, Deceleration point: home switch (HW))?
The HW signal is inactive at start, and the motor starts homing in the forward direction at high speed. If the axis does not hit the limit switch, it decelerates and changes to run in the reverse direction at low speed after reaching the rising edge of the HW signal. Then, after reaching the falling edge of the HW signal, the motor stops at the first Z signal.
How does homing work when the HW signal is inactive at the start and the positive limit switch is hit (6098h = 7, Home: Z signal, Deceleration point: home switch (HW))?
The HW signal is inactive at start, and the motor starts homing in the forward direction at high speed. If the axis hits the limit switch, it changes to run in the reverse direction at high speed. After reaching the rising edge of the HW signal, the motor decelerates and runs in the reverse direction at low speed. Then, after reaching the falling edge of the HW signal, the motor decelerates and changes to run in the forward direction at low speed until it reaches the rising edge of HW signal. After that it changes to run in the reverse direction at low speed. Finally, the motor stops at the first Z signal after reaching the falling edge of the HW signal.
How does homing work when the HW signal is active at the start (6098h = 8, Home: Z signal, Deceleration point: home switch (HW))?
The HW signal is active at start, and the motor starts homing in the reverse direction at low speed. After reaching the falling edge of the HW signal, the motor stops at the first Z signal.
How does homing work when the HW signal is inactive at the start and the positive limit switch is not hit (6098h = 8, Home: Z signal, Deceleration point: home switch (HW))?
The HW signal is inactive at start, and the motor starts homing in the forward direction at high speed. If the axis does not hit the limit switch, it decelerates and changes to run in the reverse direction at low speed after reaching the rising edge of the HW signal. Then, after reaching the falling edge of the HW signal, the motor changes to run in the forward direction at low speed until it stops at the first Z signal after reaching the rising edge of the HW signal.
How does homing work when the HW signal is inactive at the start and the positive limit switch is hit (6098h = 8, Home: Z signal, Deceleration point: home switch (HW))?
The HW signal is inactive at start, and the motor starts homing in the forward direction at high speed. If the axis hits the limit switch, it changes to run in the reverse direction at high speed. After reaching the rising edge of HW signal, the motor decelerates and continues running in the reverse direction at low speed. Then, after reaching the falling edge of the HW signal, the motor changes to run in the forward direction at low speed until it stops at the first Z signal after reaching the rising edge of the HW signal.
How does homing work when the HW signal is active at the start (6098h = 9, Home: Z signal, Deceleration point: home switch (HW))?
The HW signal is active at start, and the motor starts homing in the reverse direction at low speed. After reaching the falling edge of HW signal, the motor changes to run in the forward direction at low speed until it stops at the first Z signal after reaching the rising edge of HW signal.
How does homing work when the HW signal is inactive at the start and the positive limit switch is not hit (6098h = 9, Home: Z signal, Deceleration point: home switch (HW))?
The HW signal is inactive at start, and the motor starts homing in the forward direction at high speed. If the axis does not hit the limit switch, it decelerates and runs in the forward direction at low speed after reaching the rising edge of the HW signal. Then, after reaching the falling edge of the HW signal, the motor changes to run in the reverse direction at low speed until it stops at the first Z signal after reaching the rising edge of the HW signal.
How does homing work when the HW signal is inactive at the start and the positive limit switch is hit (6098h = 9, Home: Z signal, Deceleration point: home switch (HW))?
The HW signal is inactive at start, and the motor starts homing in the forward direction at high speed. If the axis hits the limit switch, it changes to run in the reverse direction. After reaching the rising edge of the HW signal, the motor decelerates and changes to run in the forward direction at low speed. Then after reaching the falling edge of the HW signal, the motor changes to run in the reverse direction at low speed. Finally, the motor stops at the first Z signal after reaching the rising edge of HW signal.
How does homing work when the HW signal is active at the start (6098h = 10, Home: Z signal, Deceleration point: home switch (HW))?
The HW signal is active at start, and the motor starts homing in the forward direction at low speed. After reaching the falling edge of the HW signal, the motor changes to run in the reverse direction until it stops at the first Z signal after reaching the rising edge of the HW signal.
How does homing work when the HW signal is inactive at the start and the positive limit switch is not hit (6098h = 10, Home: Z signal, Deceleration point: home switch (HW))?
The HW signal is inactive at start, and the motor starts homing in the forward direction at high speed. If the axis does not hit the limit switch, it decelerates and runs in the forward direction at low speed after reaching the rising edge of HW signal. After reaching the falling edge of the HW signal, the motor decelerates and changes to run in the reverse direction at low speed until it reaches the rising edge of the HW signal. After that, it changes to run in the forward direction at low speed. Finally, it stops at the first Z signal after reaching the falling edge of the HW signal.
How does homing work when the HW signal is inactive at the start and the positive limit switch is hit (6098h = 10, Home: Z signal, Deceleration point: home switch (HW))?
The HW signal is inactive at start, and the motor starts homing in the forward direction at high speed. If the axis hits the limit switch, it changes to run in the reverse direction. After reaching the rising edge of the HW signal, the motor decelerates and changes to run in the forward direction at low speed until it stops at the first Z signal after reaching the falling edge of the HW signal.
How does homing work when the HW signal is active at the start (6098h = 11, Home: Z signal, Deceleration point: home switch (HW))?
The HW signal is active at start, and the motor starts homing in the forward direction at low speed. After reaching the falling edge of HW signal, the motor stops at the first Z signal.
How does homing work when the HW signal is inactive at the start and the negative limit switch is not hit (6098h = 11, Home: Z signal, Deceleration point: home switch (HW))?
The HW signal is inactive at start, and the motor starts homing in the reverse direction at high speed. If the axis does not hit the limit switch, it decelerates and changes to run in the forward direction at low speed after reaching the rising edge of the HW signal. Then, after reaching the falling edge of the HW signal, the motor stops at the first Z signal.
How does homing work when the HW signal is inactive at the start and the negative limit switch is hit (6098h = 11, Home: Z signal, Deceleration point: home switch (HW))?
The HW signal is inactive at start, and the motor starts homing in the reverse direction at high speed. If the axis hits the limit switch, it changes to run in the forward direction. After reaching the rising edge of the HW signal, the motor decelerates and runs in the forward direction at low speed. Then, after reaching the falling edge of the HW signal, the motor decelerates and changes to run in the reverse direction at low speed until reaching the rising edge of the HW signal where it decelerates and changes to run in the forward direction at low speed. Finally, the motor stops at the first Z signal after reaching the falling edge of the HW signal.
How does homing work when the HW signal is active at the start (6098h = 12, Home: Z signal, Deceleration point: home switch (HW))?
The HW signal is active at start, and the motor starts homing in the forward direction at low speed. After reaching the falling edge of the HW signal, the motor stops at the first Z signal.
How does homing work when the HW signal is inactive at the start and the negative limit switch is not hit (6098h = 12, Home: Z signal, Deceleration point: home switch (HW))?
The HW signal is inactive at start, and the motor starts homing in the reverse direction at high speed. If the axis does not hit the limit switch, it decelerates and changes to run in the forward direction at low speed after reaching the rising edge of the HW signal. Then, after reaching the falling edge of HW signal, the motor changes to run in the reverse direction at low speed until it stops at the first Z signal after reaching the rising edge of the HW signal.
How does homing work when the HW signal is inactive at the start and the negative limit switch is hit (6098h = 12, Home: Z signal, Deceleration point: home switch (HW))?
The HW signal is inactive at start, and the motor starts homing in the reverse direction at high speed. If the axis hits the limit switch, it changes to run in the forward direction at high speed. After reaching the rising edge of HW signal, the motor decelerates and runs in the forward direction at low speed. Then, after reaching the falling edge of HW signal, the motor changes to run in the reverse direction at low speed until it stops at the first Z signal after reaching the rising edge of the HW signal.
How does homing work when the HW signal is active at the start (6098h = 13, Home: Z signal, Deceleration point: home switch (HW))?
The HW signal is active at start, and the motor starts homing in the forward direction at low speed. After reaching the falling edge of the HW signal, the motor changes to run in the reverse direction at low speed until it stops at the first Z signal after reaching the rising edge of the HW signal.
How does homing work when the HW signal is inactive at the start and the negative limit switch is not hit (6098h = 13, Home: Z signal, Deceleration point: home switch (HW))?
The HW signal is inactive at start, and the motor starts homing in the reverse direction at high speed. If the axis does not hit the limit switch, it decelerates and changes to run in the reverse direction at low speed after reaching the rising edge of the HW signal. Then, after reaching the falling edge of the HW signal, the motor changes to run in the forward direction at low speed until it stops at the first Z signal after reaching the rising edge of the HW signal.
How does homing work when the HW signal is inactive at the start and the negative limit switch is hit (6098h = 13, Home: Z signal, Deceleration point: home switch (HW))?
The HW signal is inactive at start, and the motor starts homing in the reverse direction at high speed. If the axis hits the limit switch, it changes to run in the forward direction at high speed. After reaching the rising edge of the HW signal, the motor decelerates and changes to run in the reverse direction at low speed. Then, after reaching the falling edge of the HW signal, the motor changes to run in the forward direction at low speed until it stops at the first Z signal after reaching the rising edge of the HW signal.
How does homing work when the HW signal is active at the start (6098h = 14, Home: Z signal, Deceleration point: home switch (HW))?
The HW signal is active at start, and the motor starts homing in the reverse direction at low speed. After reaching the falling edge of the HW signal, the motor changes to run in the forward direction at low speed until it stops at the first Z signal after reaching the rising edge of the HW signal.
How does homing work when the HW signal is inactive at the start and the negative limit switch is not hit (6098h = 14, Home: Z signal, Deceleration point: home switch (HW))?
The HW signal is inactive at start, and the motor starts homing in the reverse direction at high speed. If the axis does not hit the limit switch, it decelerates and runs in the reverse direction at low speed after reaching the rising edge of HW signal. Then, after reaching the falling edge of HW signal, the motor decelerates and changes to run in the forward direction at low speed until reaching the rising edge of the HW signal where it decelerates and changes to run in the reverse direction at low speed. Finally, the motor stops at the first Z signal after reaching the falling edge of the HW signal.
How does homing work when the HW signal is inactive at the start and the negative limit switch is hit (6098h = 14, Home: Z signal, Deceleration point: home switch (HW))?
The HW signal is inactive at start, and the motor starts homing in the reverse direction at high speed. If the axis hits the limit switch, it changes to run in the forward direction at high speed. After reaching the rising edge of the HW signal, the motor decelerates and changes to run in the reverse direction at low speed until it stops at the first Z signal after reaching the falling edge of the HW signal.
How does homing work when the HW signal is active at the start (6098h = 17, Home: negative limit switch, Deceleration point: negative limit switch (N-OT))?
The HW signal is active at start, and the motor starts homing in the reverse direction at low speed. After reaching the falling edge of the HW signal, the motor stops at the first Z signal.
How does homing work when the N-OT signal is inactive at the start (6098h = 17, Home: negative limit switch, Deceleration point: negative limit switch (N-OT))?
The N-OT signal is inactive at start, and the motor starts homing in the reverse direction at high speed. After reaching the rising edge of the N-OT signal, the motor decelerates and changes to run in the forward direction at low speed until it stops after reaching the falling edge of the N-OT signal.
How does homing work when the N-OT signal is active at the start (6098h = 18, Home: positive limit switch, Deceleration point: positive limit switch (P-OT))?
The N-OT signal is active at start, and the motor starts homing in the forward direction at low speed. After reaching the falling edge of the N-OT signal, the motor stops.
How does homing work when the P-OT signal is inactive at the start (6098h = 18, Home: positive limit switch, Deceleration point: positive limit switch (P-OT))?
The P-OT signal is inactive at start, and the motor starts homing in the forward direction at high speed. After reaching the rising edge of the P-OT signal, the motor decelerates and changes to run in the reverse direction at low speed until it stops after reaching the falling edge of the P-OT signal.
How does homing work when the P-OT signal is active at the start (6098h = 18, Home: positive limit switch, Deceleration point: positive limit switch (P-OT))?
The P-OT signal is active at start, and the motor starts homing in the reverse direction at low speed. After reaching the falling edge of the P-OT signal, the motor stops.
How does homing work when the HW signal is inactive at the start (6098h = 19, Home: home switch (HW), Deceleration point: home switch (HW))?
The HW signal is inactive at start, and the motor starts homing in the forward direction at high speed. After reaching the rising edge of the HW signal, the motor decelerates and changes to run in the reverse direction at low speed until it stops after reaching the falling edge of the HW signal.
How does homing work when the HW signal is active at the start (6098h = 19, Home: home switch (HW), Deceleration point: home switch (HW))?
The HW signal is active at start, and the motor starts homing in the reverse direction at low speed. After reaching the falling edge of the HW signal, the motor stops.
How does homing work when the HW signal is inactive at the start (6098h = 20, Home: home switch (HW), Deceleration point: home switch (HW))?
The HW signal is inactive at start, and the motor starts homing in the forward direction at high speed. After reaching the rising edge of the HW signal, the motor decelerates and changes to run in the reverse direction at low speed. Then, after reaching the falling edge of the HW signal, the motor decelerates and changes to run in the forward direction at low speed until it stops after reaching the rising edge of the HW signal.
How does homing work when the HW signal is active at the start (6098h = 20, Home: home switch (HW), Deceleration point: home switch (HW))?
The HW signal is active at start, and the motor starts homing in the reverse direction at low speed. After reaching the falling edge of the HW signal, the motor decelerates and changes to run in the forward direction at low speed until it stops after reaching the rising edge of the HW signal.
How does homing work when the HW signal is inactive at the start (6098h = 21, Home: home switch (HW), Deceleration point: home switch (HW))?
The HW signal is inactive at start, and the motor starts homing in the reverse direction at high speed. After reaching the rising edge of the HW signal, the motor decelerates and changes to run in the forward direction at low speed until it stops after reaching the falling edge of the HW signal.
How does homing work when the HW signal is active at the start (6098h = 21, Home: home switch (HW), Deceleration point: home switch (HW))?
The HW signal is active at start, and the motor starts homing in the forward direction at low speed. After reaching the falling edge of the HW signal, the motor stops.
How does homing work when the HW signal is inactive at the start (6098h = 22, Home: home switch (HW), Deceleration point: home switch (HW))?
The HW signal is inactive at start, and the motor starts homing in the reverse direction at high speed. After reaching the rising edge of the HW signal, the motor decelerates and changes to run in the forward direction at low speed. Then, after reaching the falling edge of the HW signal, the motor decelerates and changes to run in the reverse direction until it stops after reaching the rising edge of the HW signal.
How does homing work when the HW signal is active at the start (6098h = 22, Home: home switch (HW), Deceleration point: home switch (HW))?
The HW signal is active at start, and the motor starts homing in the forward direction at low speed. After reaching the falling edge of the HW signal, the motor decelerates and changes to run in the reverse direction at low speed until it stops after reaching the rising edge of the HW signal.
How does homing work when the HW signal is inactive at the start and the positive limit switch is not hit (6098h = 23, Home: home switch (HW), Deceleration point: home switch (HW))?
The HW signal is inactive at start, and the motor starts homing in the forward direction at high speed. If the axis does not hit the limit switch, it decelerates and changes to run in the reverse direction at low speed after reaching the rising edge of the HW signal. Then, after reaching the falling edge of the HW signal, the motor stops.
How does homing work when the HW signal is inactive at the start and the positive limit switch is hit (6098h = 23, Home: home switch (HW), Deceleration point: home switch (HW))?
The HW signal is inactive at start, and the motor starts homing in the forward direction at high speed. If the axis hits the limit switch, it changes to run in the reverse direction at high speed until it reaches the rising edge of the HW signal, where it decelerates to run in the reverse direction at low speed. Then, after reaching the falling edge of the HW signal, it decelerates and changes to run in the forward direction at low speed until it reaches the rising edge of the HW signal. After that, it decelerates and changes to run in the reverse direction at low speed. Finally, the motor stops after reaching the falling edge of the HW signal.
How does homing work when the HW signal is active at the start (6098h = 24, Home: home switch (HW), Deceleration point: home switch (HW))?
The HW signal is active at start, and the motor starts homing in the reverse direction at low speed until it stops after reaching the falling edge of the HW signal.
How does homing work when the HW signal is inactive at the start and the positive limit switch is not hit (6098h = 24, Home: home switch (HW), Deceleration point: home switch (HW))?
The HW signal is inactive at start, and the motor starts homing in the forward direction at high speed. If the axis does not hit the limit switch, it decelerates and changes to run in the reverse direction at low speed after reaching the rising edge of the HW signal. Then, after reaching the falling edge of the HW signal, the motor changes to run in the forward direction at low speed until it stops after reaching the rising edge of the HW signal.
How does homing work when the HW signal is inactive at the start and the positive limit switch is hit (6098h = 24, Home: home switch (HW), Deceleration point: home switch (HW))?
The HW signal is inactive at start, and the motor starts homing in the forward direction at high speed. If the axis hits the limit switch, it changes to run in the reverse direction at high speed until it decelerates after reaching the rising edge of the HW signal. Then, after reaching the falling edge of the HW signal, the motor changes to run in the forward direction at low speed. Finally, the motor stops after reaching the rising edge of the HW signal.
How does homing work when the HW signal is active at the start (6098h = 25, Home: home switch (HW), Deceleration point: home switch (HW))?
The HW signal is active at start, and the motor starts homing in the reverse direction at low speed. After reaching the falling edge of the HW signal, the motor changes to run in the forward direction at low speed until it stops after reaching the rising edge of the HW signal.
How does homing work when the HW signal is inactive at the start and the positive limit switch is not hit (6098h = 25, Home: home switch (HW), Deceleration point: home switch (HW))?
The HW signal is inactive at start, and the motor starts homing in the forward direction at high speed. If the axis does not hit the limit switch, it decelerates and runs in the forward direction at low speed after reaching the rising edge of the HW signal. Then, after reaching the falling edge of the HW signal, the motor changes to run in the reverse direction at low speed until it stops after reaching the rising edge of the HW signal.
How does homing work when the HW signal is inactive at the start and the positive limit switch is hit (6098h = 25, Home: home switch (HW), Deceleration point: home switch (HW))?
The HW signal is inactive at start, and the motor starts homing in the forward direction at high speed. If the axis hits the limit switch, it changes to run in the reverse direction at high speed. After reaching the rising edge of the HW signal, the motor decelerates and changes to run in the forward direction at low speed until reaching the falling edge of the HW signal where it changes to run in the reverse direction at low speed. Finally, the motor stops after reaching the rising edge of the HW signal.
How does homing work when the HW signal is active at the start (6098h = 26, Home: home switch (HW), Deceleration point: home switch (HW))?
The HW signal is active at start, and the motor starts homing in the forward direction at low speed. After reaching the falling edge of the HW signal, the motor changes to run in the reverse direction at low speed until it stops after reaching the rising edge of the HW signal.
How does homing work when the HW signal is inactive at the start and the positive limit switch is not hit (6098h = 26, Home: home switch (HW), Deceleration point: home switch (HW))?
The HW signal is inactive at start, and the motor starts homing in the forward direction at high speed. If the axis does not hit the limit switch, it decelerates and runs in the forward direction at low speed after reaching the rising edge of the HW signal. Then, after reaching the falling edge of the HW signal, the motor decelerates and changes to run in the reverse direction at low speed until reaching the rising edge of the HW signal where it decelerates and changes to run in the forward direction at low speed. Finally, the motor stops after reaching the falling edge of the HW signal.
How does homing work when the HW signal is inactive at the start and the positive limit switch is hit (6098h = 26, Home: home switch (HW), Deceleration point: home switch (HW))?
The HW signal is inactive at start, and the motor starts homing in the forward direction at high speed. If the axis hits the limit switch, it changes to run in the reverse direction at high speed. After reaching the rising edge of the HW signal, the motor decelerates and changes to run in the forward direction at low speed until it stops after reaching the falling edge of the HW signal.
How does homing work when the HW signal is active at the start (6098h = 27, Home: home switch (HW), Deceleration point: home switch (HW))?
The HW signal is active at start, and the motor starts homing in the forward direction at low speed. After reaching the falling edge of the HW signal, the motor stops.
How does homing work when the HW signal is inactive at the start and the negative limit switch is not hit (6098h = 27, Home: home switch (HW), Deceleration point: home switch (HW))?
The HW signal is inactive at start. The motor starts homing in the reverse direction at high speed. If the axis does not hit the limit switch, it decelerates and changes to run in the forward direction at low speed after reaching the rising edge of the HW signal. Then, the motor stops after reaching the falling edge of the HW signal.
How does homing work when the HW signal is inactive at the start and the negative limit switch is hit (6098h = 27, Home: home switch (HW), Deceleration point: home switch (HW))?
The HW signal is inactive at start, and the motor starts homing in the reverse direction at high speed. If the axis hits the limit switch, it changes to run in the forward direction at low speed. After reaching the rising edge of the HW signal, the motor decelerates and keeps running in the forward direction at low speed until reaching the falling edge of the HW signal where it decelerates and changes to run in the reverse direction at low speed. Then, after reaching the rising edge of the HW signal, the motor decelerates and changes to run in the forward direction at low speed until it stops after reaching the falling edge of the HW signal.
How does homing work when the HW signal is active at the start (6098h = 28, Home: home switch (HW), Deceleration point: home switch (HW))?
The HW signal is active at start, and the motor starts homing in the forward direction at low speed. After reaching the falling edge of the HW signal, the motor stops.
How does homing work when the HW signal is inactive at the start and the negative limit switch is not hit (6098h = 28, Home: home switch (HW), Deceleration point: home switch (HW))?
The HW signal is inactive at start, and the motor starts homing in the reverse direction at high speed. If the axis does not hit the limit switch, it decelerates and changes to run in the forward direction at low speed after reaching the rising edge of the HW signal. Then, after reaching the falling edge of the HW signal, the motor changes to run in the reverse direction at low speed until it stops after reaching the rising edge of the HW signal.
How does homing work when the HW signal is inactive at the start and the negative limit switch is hit (6098h = 28, Home: home switch (HW), Deceleration point: home switch (HW))?
The HW signal is inactive at start, and the motor starts homing in the reverse direction at high speed. If the axis hits the limit switch, it changes to run in the forward direction at high speed until it decelerates after reaching the rising edge of the HW signal. Then, after reaching the falling edge of HW signal, the motor decelerates and changes to run in the reverse direction at low speed. Finally, the motor stops after reaching the rising edge of the HW signal.
How does homing work when the HW signal is active at the start (6098h = 29, Home: home switch (HW), Deceleration point: home switch (HW))?
The HW signal is active at start, and the motor starts homing in the forward direction at low speed. After reaching the falling edge of the HW signal, the motor changes to run in the reverse direction at low speed until it stops after reaching the rising edge of the HW signal.
How does homing work when the HW signal is inactive at the start and the negative limit switch is not hit (6098h = 29, Home: home switch (HW), Deceleration point: home switch (HW))?
The HW signal is inactive at start, and the motor starts homing in the reverse direction at high speed. If the axis does not hit the limit switch, it decelerates and runs in the reverse direction at low speed after reaching the rising edge of the HW signal. Then, after reaching the falling edge of the HW signal, the motor changes to run in the forward direction at low speed until it stops after reaching the rising edge of the HW signal.
How does homing work when the HW signal is inactive at the start and the negative limit switch is hit (6098h = 29, Home: home switch (HW), Deceleration point: home switch (HW))?
The HW signal is inactive at start, and the motor starts homing in the reverse direction at high speed. If the axis hits the limit switch, it changes to run in the forward direction at high speed. After reaching the rising edge of the HW signal, the motor decelerates and changes to run in the reverse direction at low speed until it reaches the falling edge of the HW signal, where it changes to run in the forward direction at low speed. Finally, the motor stops after reaching the rising edge of the HW signal.
How does homing work when the HW signal is active at the start (6098h = 30, Home: home switch (HW), Deceleration point: home switch (HW))?
The HW signal is active at start, and the motor starts homing in the reverse direction at low speed. After reaching the falling edge of the HW signal, the motor changes to run in the forward direction at low speed until it stops after reaching the rising edge of the HW signal.
How does homing work when the HW signal is inactive at the start and the negative limit switch is not hit (6098h = 30, Home: home switch (HW), Deceleration point: home switch (HW))?
The HW signal is inactive at start, and the motor starts homing in the reverse direction at high speed. If the axis does not hit the limit switch, it decelerates and keeps running in the reverse direction at low speed after reaching the rising edge of the HW signal. Then, after reaching the falling edge of the HW signal, the motor decelerates and changes to run in the forward direction at low speed until reaching the rising edge of the HW signal where it changes to run in the reverse direction at low speed. Finally, the motor stops after reaching the falling edge of the HW signal.
How does homing work when the HW signal is inactive at the start and the negative limit switch is hit (6098h = 30, Home: home switch (HW), Deceleration point: home switch (HW))?
The HW signal is inactive at start, and the motor starts homing in the reverse direction at high speed. If the axis hits the limit switch, it changes to run in the forward direction at high speed. After reaching the rising edge of the HW signal, the motor decelerates and changes to run in the reverse direction at low speed until it stops after reaching the falling edge of the HW signal.
How does homing mode 33 (6098h = 33/34, Home: Z signal, Deceleration point: None) operate?
In homing mode 33, the motor runs in the reverse direction at low speed and stops at the first Z signal.
How does homing mode 34 (6098h = 33/34, Home: Z signal, Deceleration point: None) operate?
In homing mode 34, the motor runs in the forward direction at low speed and stops at the first Z signal.
How does homing mode 35 (6098h = 35) operate?
In homing mode 35, the present position is taken as the mechanical home after homing is triggered (control word 6040: 0x0F → 0x1F).
For Absolute homing (60E6h = 0): 6064h (Position actual value) is equal to 607Ch (Home offset) after homing is done.
For Relative homing (60E6h = 1): 6064h is the sum of the original value plus 607Ch (Home offset) after homing is done.
How does homing operate with 6098h = -1?
The servo motor runs in the reverse direction at high speed first. If the torque reaches the limit and the speed is near zero after the axis hits the mechanical limit, and such status persists, it indicates that the axis has reached the mechanical limit position. In this case, the motor runs in the forward direction at low speed and stops after reaching the rising edge of the Z signal for the first time.
How does homing operate with 6098h = -2?
The servo motor runs in the forward direction at high speed first. If the torque reaches the limit and the speed is near zero after the axis hits the mechanical limit, and such status persists, it indicates the motor reaches the mechanical limit position. In this case, the motor runs in the reverse direction at low speed and stops after reaching the rising edge of the Z signal for the first time.
What caution should be observed regarding limit switches and acceleration?
Keep sufficient clearance between the positive limit switch and negative limit switch and set a proper acceleration rate. Failure to comply may cause collision.
What are the control commands defined by Index 6040h?
The control commands defined by Index 6040h (Control word) are as follows:
| Bit | Name | Description |
|---|---|---|
| 0 | Switch on | 1: Valid, 0: Invalid |
| 1 | Enable voltage | 1: Valid, 0: Invalid |
| 2 | Quick stop | 0: Valid, 1: Invalid |
| 3 | Running | 1: Valid, 0: Invalid |
| 4 | New set-point | 0 -> 1: homing 1 -> 0: homing |
| 8 | Halt | 0: Present operating state maintained 1: Halt |
Access: RW, Mapping: RPDO, Related Mode: All, Data Structure: VAR, Data Type: Uint16, Value Range: 0 to 65535, Default: 0.
What does the servo drive status (Index 6041h) indicate?
Index 6041h (Status word) shows the servo drive status as follows:
| Bit | Name | Description |
|---|---|---|
| 0 | Ready to switch on | 1: Valid, 0: Invalid |
| 1 | Switch on | 1: Valid, 0: Invalid |
| 2 | Operation enabled | 1: Valid, 0: Invalid |
| 3 | Fault | 1: Valid, 0: Invalid |
| 4 | Voltage enabled | 1: Valid, 0: Invalid |
| 5 | Quick stop | 0: Valid, 1: Invalid |
| 6 | Switch on disabled | 1: Valid, 0: Invalid |
| 7 | Warning | 1: Valid, 0: Invalid |
| 8 | Manufacturer-specific | Undefined |
| 9 | Remote | 1: Valid, control word activated 0: Invalid |
| 10 | Target reached | 0: Home not located 1: Home located |
| 12 | Homing attained | 0: Home not found 1: Home found |
| 13 | Homing error | 0: No homing error 1: Homing error occurs |
| 15 | Home found | 0: Home not located 1: Home located |
Access: RO, Mapping: TPDO, Related Mode: All, Data Structure: VAR, Data Type: Uint16, Default: 0.
What are the descriptions for homing methods defined by Index 6098h (modes -2 to 10)?
The homing methods defined by Index 6098h are:
| Mode | Description |
|---|---|
| -2 | Forward homing: Home: Z signal Deceleration point: forward mechanical limit |
| -1 | Reverse homing: Home: Z signal Deceleration point: reverse limit position |
| 1 | Reverse homing: Home: Z signal Deceleration point: negative limit switch (N-OT) The falling edge of the N-OT signal must be reached before reaching the Z signal. |
| 2 | Forward homing: Home: Z signal Deceleration point: positive limit switch (P-OT) The falling edge of the P-OT signal must be reached before reaching the Z signal. |
| 3 | Forward homing: Home: Z signal Deceleration point: home switch (HW) The falling edge on the same side of the HW signal must be reached before reaching the Z signal. |
| 4 | Reverse homing: Home: Z signal Deceleration point: home switch (HW) The rising edge on the same side of the HW signal must be reached before reaching the Z signal. |
| 5 | Reverse homing: Home: Z signal Deceleration point: home switch (HW) The falling edge on the same side of the HW signal must be reached before reaching the Z signal. |
| 6 | Forward homing: Home: Z signal Deceleration point: home switch (HW) The rising edge of the HW signal on the same side must be reached before reaching the Z signal. |
| 7 | Forward homing: Home: Z signal Deceleration point: home switch (HW) The falling edge on the same side of the HW signal must be reached before reaching the Z signal. |
| 8 | Forward homing: Home: Z signal Deceleration point: home switch (HW) The rising edge on the same side of the HW signal must be reached before reaching the Z signal. |
| 9 | Forward homing: Home: Z signal Deceleration point: home switch (HW) The rising edge on the other side of the HW signal must be reached before reaching the Z signal. |
| 10 | Forward homing: Home: Z signal Deceleration point: home switch (HW) The falling edge on the other side of the HW signal must be reached before reaching the Z signal. |
Access: RW, Mapping: RPDO, Related Mode: HM, Data Structure: VAR, Data Type: Int8, Value Range: -2 to +35, Default: 0.
What are the descriptions for homing methods defined by Index 6098h (modes 11 to 35)?
The homing methods defined by Index 6098h continue as:
| Mode | Description |
|---|---|
| 11 | Reverse homing: Home: Z signal Deceleration point: home switch (HW) The falling edge on the same side of the HW signal must be reached before reaching the Z signal. |
| 12 | Reverse homing: Home: Z signal Deceleration point: home switch (HW) The rising edge on the same side of the HW signal must be reached before reaching the Z signal. |
| 13 | Reverse homing: Home: Z signal on the other side of the home switch Deceleration point: home switch (HW) The rising edge on the other side of the HW signal must be reached before reaching the Z signal. |
| 14 | Homing in the reverse direction: Home: Z signal on the other side of the home switch Deceleration point: home switch (HW) The falling edge of the HW signal on the other side must be reached before reaching the Z signal. |
| 15 to 16 | N/A |
| 17 to 32 | Similar to 1 to 14. However, the deceleration point overlaps with the home. |
| 33 | Reverse homing. The home is the Z signal. |
| 34 | Forward homing. The home is the Z signal. |
| 35 | The present position is used as the home. |
What are the homing speeds defined by Index 6099h and its sub-indexes?
Index 6099h (Homing speeds) defines two speed values used in the homing mode:
Speed during search for switch
Speed during search for zero
The sub-indexes are:
| Sub-index | Name | Access | Mapping | Related Mode | Value Range | Default | Data Type |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 0h | Number of homing speed sub-indexes | RO | NO | – | 2 | 2 | Uint8 |
Overall parameters for 6099h: Data Structure: ARR, Data Type: Uint32, Related Mode: HM, Value Range: OD data range, Default: OD default value.
What is defined by sub-index 1h of Homing Speeds (6099-01h)?
Sub-index 1h (6099-01h), Speed during search for switch, defines the speed during searching for the deceleration point signal. A large setpoint helps prevent E601.0 (Homing timeout) caused by a prolonged homing process.
Note: After finding the deceleration point, the slave decelerates and blocks the change of the home signal during deceleration. To prevent encountering the home signal during deceleration, set the switch position of the deceleration point signal properly to leave sufficient deceleration distance or increase the homing acceleration rate to shorten the deceleration time.
Parameters: Access: RW, Mapping: RPDO, Related Mode: HM, Value Range: 0 to (232-1) (reference unit/s), Default: 1747627, Data Type: Uint32.
What is defined by sub-index 2h of Homing Speeds (6099-02h)?
Sub-index 2h (6099-02h), Speed during search for zero, defines the speed during searching for the home signal. A small setpoint helps avoid overshoot during stop at high speed, preventing large deviation between the stop position and the preset mechanical home.
Parameters: Access: RW, Mapping: RPDO, Related Mode: HM, Value Range: 10 to (232-1) (reference unit/s), Default: 100, Data Type: Int32.
What is Homing acceleration (Index 609Ah) and how is it used?
Index 609Ah (Homing acceleration) defines the acceleration rate in the homing mode. The setpoint is effective after homing is started. In the homing mode, if 605Dh (Halt option code) is set to 2, the servo drive decelerates to stop as defined by 609Ah. For 609Ah, the setpoint 0 will be forcibly changed into 1.
Parameters: Access: RW, Mapping: RPDO, Related Mode: HM, Value Range: 0 to (232-1) (reference unit/s2), Default: 100, Data Type: DUint32.
What is the recommended basic configuration for the homing mode?
The basic configuration for the homing mode is shown in the following table:
| RPDO | TPDO | Description |
|---|---|---|
| 6040: Control word | 6041: Status word | Mandatory |
| 6098: Homing method | Optional | |
| 6099-01: Speed during search for switch | Optional | |
| 6099-02: Speed during search for zero | Optional | |
| 609A: Homing acceleration | Optional | |
| 6060: Modes of operation | 6064: Position actual value | Optional |
| 6061: Modes of operation display | Optional |
What auxiliary functions does the servo drive offer?
The servo drive offers the following auxiliary functions:
Motor protection
DI filter time setting
Touch probe function
EtherCAT forced DO function
What is the touch probe function and how many positions can be latched?
The touch probe function is used to latch the position actual value (reference unit) when an external latch input signal or the Z signal changes. The SV660N offers two touch probes to record the positions corresponding to the rising edge or falling edge of each touch probe signal, which means four positions can be latched.
What cautions should be observed when using the touch probe function with a DI?
No specific DI logic is required when a DI is used to trigger the touch probe function.
When a DI is used to trigger the touch probe function, you can set the filter window of the touch probe signal through 200A-14h and 200A-15h.
What are the related objects for the touch probe function?
| Index (HEX) | Sub-index (HEX) | Name | Access | Data Type | Unit | Value Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 2003 | 03 | DI1 function | RW | Uint16 | – | 0 to 65535 | 14 |
| … | |||||||
| 2003 | 0B | DI5 function | RW | Uint16 | – | 0 to 65535 | 39 |
| 60B8 | 00 | Touch probe function | RW | Uint16 | – | 0 to 65535 | 0 |
| 60B9 | 00 | Touch probe status | RO | Uint16 | – | – | 0 |
| 60BA | 00 | Touch probe 1 positive edge | RO | Int32 | Reference unit | – | 0 |
| 60BB | 00 | Touch probe 1 negative edge | RO | Int32 | Reference unit | – | 0 |
| 60BC | 00 | Touch probe 2 positive edge | RO | Int32 | Reference unit | – | 0 |
| 60BD | 00 | Touch probe 2 negative edge | RO | Int32 | Reference unit | – | 0 |
| 60D5 | 00 | Touch probe 1 positive edge counter | RO | Uint16 | – | – | 0 |
| 60D6 | 00 | Touch probe 1 negative edge counter | RO | Uint16 | – | – | 0 |
| 60D7 | 00 | Touch probe 2 positive edge counter | RO | Uint16 | – | – | 0 |
| 60D8 | 00 | Touch probe 2 negative edge counter | RO | Uint16 | – | – | 0 |
What is the operating procedure when using DI5 to trigger the touch probe function for touch probe 1 positive edge, continuous latching?
Observe the following procedure when using DI5 to trigger the touch probe function.
Requirement: touch probe 1 positive edge, continuous latching
1) Set 0x2003-0B (DI5 function) to 38.
2) Set the touch probe function in 0x60B8.
How are the bits of the Touch Probe Function (Index 60B8h) defined?
Index 60B8h defines the function of touch probe 1 and touch probe 2. Definitions of each bit of 60B8h are as follows:
| Bit | Description | Remarks |
|---|---|---|
| 0 | Touch probe 1 function selection 0: Switch off touch probe 1 1: Enable touch probe 1 |
Bit0 to Bit5: settings related to touch probe 1 When a DI is used to trigger the touch probe function, the DI source cannot be changed once the touch probe function is enabled. For an absolute encoder, Z signal refers to the zero point of the single-turn position feedback of the motor. |
| 1 | Touch probe 1 trigger mode 0: Single trigger mode (Latches the position at the first trigger event.) 1: Continuous trigger mode |
|
| 2 | Touch probe 1 trigger signal selection 0: DI signal 1: Z signal |
|
| 3 | N/A | |
| 4 | Touch probe 1 positive edge 0: Switch off latching at positive edge 1: Enable latching at positive edge |
|
| 5 | Touch probe 1 negative edge 0: Switch off latching at negative edge 1: Enable latching at negative edge |
|
| 6 to 7 | N/A | |
| 8 | Touch probe 2 function selection 0: Switch off touch probe 2 1: Enable touch probe 2 |
Bit8 to Bit13: settings related to touch probe 2 |
| 9 | Touch probe 2 trigger mode 0: Single trigger mode (Latches the position at the first trigger event.) 1: Continuous trigger mode |
|
| 10 | Touch probe 2 trigger signal selection 0: DI signal 1: Z signal |
|
| 11 | N/A | |
| 12 | Touch probe 2 positive edge 0: Switch off latching at positive edge 1: Enable latching at positive edge |
|
| 13 | Touch probe 2 negative edge 0: Switch off latching at negative edge 1: Enable latching at negative edge |
|
| 14 to 15 | N/A |
For absolute encoders, Z signal refers to the zero position of each revolution.
Parameters for 60B8h: Access: RW, Mapping: RPDO, Data Range: 0 to 65535, Default: 0, Data Type: Uint16.
How do you read the touch probe status and what do its bits indicate?
To read the touch probe status, use Index 0x60B9h. For example, if you set 0x60B8 to 0x0013.
3) Read the touch probe status in 0x60B9h.
The definition of each bit of the touch probe status (0x60B9h) is shown in the following table:
| Bit | Description | Remarks |
|---|---|---|
| 0 | Touch probe 1 function selection 0: Switch off touch probe 1 1: Enable touch probe 1 |
Bit0 to Bit7: status of touch probe 1 |
| 1 | Touch probe 1 positive edge value 0: No positive edge value latched 1: Positive edge value latched |
|
| 2 | Touch probe 1 negative edge value 0: No negative edge value latched 1: Negative edge value latched |
|
| 3 to 7 | N/A | |
| 8 | Touch probe 2 function selection 0: Switch off Touch probe 2 1: Enable touch probe 2 |
Bit8 to Bit15: status of touch probe 2 |
| 9 | Touch probe 2 positive edge value 0: No positive edge value latched 1: Positive edge value latched |
|
| 10 | Touch probe 2 negative edge value 0: No negative edge value latched 1: Negative edge value latched |
|
| 11 to 15 | N/A |
In this example, you can read bit1 of 0x60B9h to check whether the touch probe 1 positive edge value is latched.
4) Read the latch position of the touch probe.
The four position values of the touch probe are saved in 0x60BA to 0x60BD.
In this example, if the touch probe 1 positive edge value is latched, you can read the position value through 0x60BA (Touch probe 1 positive edge, reference unit). The latch times can be obtained through 0x60D5.
Parameters for 60B9h: Access: RO, Mapping: TPDO, Data Type: Uint16.
What are software position limits and how do they compare to hardware position limits?
Software position limits are defined by comparing the set limit value with the internal feedback value, instead of external sensor signals (hardware position limits).
Comparison between hardware position limit and software position limit:
| Hardware limit | Software limit | ||
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | Restricted to linear motion and single-turn rotational motion. | 1 | Applicable to linear motion and rotational motion. |
| 2 | External mechanical limit switches are required. | 2 | Removes the need for hardware wiring, preventing malfunction due to poor contact. |
| 3 | Suffered from the risk of mechanical slip. | 3 | Prevents malfunction due to mechanical slip through internal position comparison. |
| 4 | Unable to detect or alarm an overtravel event after power-off. |
How does the software position limit function work and how is it enabled for incremental position mode?
The software position limit works by comparing the set limit value with the internal feedback value. If the latter exceeds the former, a warning will be reported and the servo drive stops. This function is available in both absolute and incremental position modes. To use this function in the incremental position mode, set 200A-02h to 2 to make the servo drive perform homing after power-on before the software position limit applies.
What are the related objects for software position limit?
Object 200A-02h (HOA-01): Absolute position limit
This object determines whether the absolute position limit is activated and the conditions for activation.
| Value | Absolute Position Limit Selection |
|---|---|
| 0 | Disabled |
| 1 | Enabled |
| 2 | Enabled after homing |
Parameters: Access: RW, Related Mode: All, Value Range: 0 to 2, Default: 0, Data Type: Uint16.
If the absolute position limit is enabled, the servo drive stops as defined by 2002-08h (Stop mode at overtravel) when the absolute position feedback reaches the limit value.
Object 607D-01h: Min. position limit
Defines the minimum software position limit relative to the mechanical zero point.
Parameters: Access: RW, Mapping: RPDO, Related Mode: All, Value Range: -231 to +(231-1) (reference unit), Default: -231, Data Type: Int32.
Object 607D-02h: Max. position limit
Defines the maximum software position limit relative to the mechanical zero point.
Parameters: Access: RW, Mapping: RPDO, Related Mode: All, Value Range: -231 to +(231-1) (reference unit), Default: 231-1, Data Type: Int32.
What cautions should be observed when setting software position limits?
Ensure the value of 607D-01h is less than or equal to 607D-02h. If 607D-01h is set to a value larger than 607D-02h, the servo drive reports EE09.0 (Software position limit setting error).
In the absolute rotation mode or single-turn mode, ensure 607D-01 and 607D-02 are within the mechanical position limit. Otherwise, the servo drive reports EE09.0.
Ensure the value of 607Ch (Home offset) is within the software position limit. Otherwise, the servo drive reports EE09.0.
What is position comparison and how is it implemented?
In position comparison, the actual position of the axis is compared with the position values pre-stored in the data array and, once the comparison conditions are fulfilled, a DO signal with pulse width settable will be outputted for use in subsequent motion control. Such comparison is implemented through FPGA, removing the risk of software communication delay between different processors. Accurate comparison can also be performed on the motion axis rotating at high speed. For position comparison, you can select “active high” or “active low” for the DO terminal. When “active high” is selected, the corresponding DO is active when the actual position of the axis reaches a comparison point in the specified attribute. When “active low” is selected, the corresponding DO is not active when the actual position of the axis reaches a comparison point in the specified attribute. Three DOs are available in SV660N series servo drives.
Under what conditions is position comparison available?
Position comparison is available only when the following conditions are fulfilled:
| Conditions for Position Comparison | |
|---|---|
| Control mode | All the control modes |
| Others |
After EtherCAT communication is confirmed After homing is done Motor rotating normally with critical parameters (control parameters included) set properly |
What are the configurable DO logic functions related to position comparison?
The configurable DO logic functions are listed as follows:
0: No definition
1: Servo ready (SRDY)
2: Motor rotating
9: Brake
10: Warning (WARN)
11: Fault (ALRM)
25: Position Comparison (CMP)
32: STO EDM
When position comparison is enabled, you can allocate function 25 (Position comparison) to any one of the three DOs, and the DO you select will act as the position comparison output signal.
What are the parameters in Group H18 for position comparison output?
Group H18: Position comparison output
| Para. No. | Name | Description |
|---|---|---|
| H18-00 | Position comparison switch | 1: Enabled |
| H18-02 | Position comparison resolution | Defines the number of pulses per revolution. For example, if H18-02 is set to 2, the number of pulses per revolution is 222. 0: 24-bit 1: 23-bit 2: 22-bit 3: 21-bit 4: 20-bit 5: 19-bit 6: 18-bit 7: 17-bit |
What are the detailed descriptions for parameters H18-03 to H19-11 related to position comparison?
| Para. No. | Name | Description |
|---|---|---|
| H18-03 | Position comparison mode | 0: Individual comparison 1: Cyclic comparison |
| H18-04 | Present position as zero | 1: Enabled |
| H18-05 | Position comparison output pulse width | Defines the active pulse width of the DO when the comparison point is reached. The value range is 0 to 2047 (unit: 0.1 ms). |
| H18-07 | Start point of position comparison | Activated when H18-00 is set to 1 again. |
| H18-08 | End point of position comparison | Activated when H18-00 is set to 1 again. |
| H18-09 | Present status of position comparison | 0: No comparison n: Waiting for No. N comparison point |
| H18-10 | Real-time position feedback | Displays the present position value during position comparison. Value range: -231 to 231 – 1 |
| H18-12 | Zero offset of position comparison | Defines the offset value after the present position is taken as the zero point. Value range: -231 to +231 – 1 |
| H19-00 | Target value of position comparison 1 | Defines the target value of position comparison 1. Value range: -231 to 231 – 1 |
| H19-02 | Attribute value of position comparison 1 | Defines the attribute value of position comparison 1. 0: Skip this point 1: Output DO active signal if current position changes from “less than” to “more than” the comparison point 2: Output DO active signal if current position changes from “more than” to “less than” the comparison point 3: Output DO active signal in both situations |
| H19-03 | Target value of position comparison 2 | Defines the target value of position comparison 2. Value range: -231 to 231 – 1 |
| H19-05 | Attribute value of position comparison 2 | Defines the attribute value of position comparison 2. 0: Skip this point 1: Output DO active signal if current position changes from “less than” to “more than” the comparison point 2: Output DO active signal if current position changes from “more than” to “less than” the comparison point 3: Output DO active signal in both situations |
| H19-06 | Target value of position comparison 3 | Defines the target value of position comparison 3. Value range: -231 to 231-1 |
| H19-08 | Attribute value of position comparison 3 | Defines the attribute value of position comparison 3. 0: Skip this point 1: Output DO active signal if current position changes from “less than” to “more than” the comparison point 2: Output DO active signal if current position changes from “more than” to “less than” the comparison point 3: Output DO active signal in both situations |
| H19-09 | Target value of position comparison 4 | Defines the target value of position comparison 4. Value range: -231 to 231 – 1 |
| H19-11 | Attribute value of position comparison 4 | Defines the attribute value of position comparison 4. 0: Skip this point 1: Output DO active signal if current position changes from “less than” to “more than” the comparison point 2: Output DO active signal if current position changes from “more than” to “less than” the comparison point 3: Output DO active signal in both situations |
What are the detailed descriptions for parameters H19-12 to H19-23 related to position comparison?
| Para. No. | Name | Description |
|---|---|---|
| H19-12 | Target value of position comparison 5 | Defines the target value of position comparison 5. Value range: -231 to 231 – 1 |
| H19-14 | Attribute value of position comparison 5 | Defines the attribute value of position comparison 5. 0: Skip this point 1: Output DO active signal if current position changes from “less than” to “more than” the comparison point 2: Output DO active signal if current position changes from “more than” to “less than” the comparison point 3: Output DO active signal in both situations |
| H19-15 | Target value of position comparison 6 | Defines the target value of position comparison 6. Value range: -231 to 231 – 1 |
| H19-17 | Attribute value of position comparison 6 | Defines the attribute value of position comparison 6. 0: Skip this point 1: Output DO active signal if current position changes from “less than” to “more than” the comparison point 2: Output DO active signal if current position changes from “more than” to “less than” the comparison point 3: Output DO active signal in both situations |
| H19-18 | Target value of position comparison 7 | Defines the target value of position comparison 7. Value range: -231 to 231 – 1 |
| H19-20 | Attribute value of position comparison 7 | Defines the attribute value of position comparison 7. 0: Skip this point 1: Output DO active signal if current position changes from “less than” to “more than” the comparison point 2: Output DO active signal if current position changes from “more than” to “less than” the comparison point 3: Output DO active signal in both situations |
| H19-21 | Target value of position comparison 8 | Defines the target value of position comparison 8. Value range: -231 to 231 – 1 |
| H19-23 | Attribute value of position comparison 8 | Defines the attribute value of position comparison 8. 0: Skip this point 1: Output DO active signal if current position changes from “less than” to “more than” the comparison point 2: Output DO active signal if current position changes from “more than” to “less than” the comparison point 3: Output DO active signal in both situations |
How is the position comparison function run and what are the key parameters involved?
1) Description
Position comparison switch (H18-00): When the value of H18-00 changes from 0 to 1, position comparison starts and the value of H18-09 (Present status of position comparison) is updated to the position comparison start point number. When the value of H18-00 changes to 0, position comparison stops and the present comparison status is cleared.
Position comparison resolution (H18-02): The comparison resolution defines the number of pulses per revolution. Given the maximum and minimum limits of the position comparison points (defined by group H19), you can reset the comparison value resolution when data overflow occurs on the comparison value. For example: H18-02 = 7 (17-bit). The maximum value of the target position is 231–1, and the motor can move by 231–1/217 rotations. The target position in group H19 is only related to the set resolution.
What are the different modes and key parameters for running position comparison?
Individual comparison mode (H18-03 = 0): In the single comparison mode, when the comparison end point is reached, the comparison function is switched off automatically and the present comparison value is cleared to zero. The comparison function can be enabled again only when the position comparison is switched on again. The real-time position feedback in the single comparison mode is an absolute value, which means it is an accumulative value based on the preceding comparison point. Such value will not be cleared automatically.
Cyclic comparison mode (H18-03 = 1): In the cyclic comparison mode, the comparison function will not be switched off when the comparison end point is reached, and the start point for comparison will be set as the next comparison position value. In the cyclic comparison mode, the target position is a relative (incremental) value. Each time a comparison point is reached, the real-time position feedback is cleared and reset to zero to be compared with the new target point.
Position comparison output width (H18-05): When the position comparison conditions are fulfilled, the servo drive outputs DO active level signal. The width of the active signal can be set by H18-05 (value range: 1 to 2047 x 0.1 ms). When the DO output is active, the comparison logic is suspended and no comparison will be performed. In this case, ensure the operating time between two target points is larger than the DO output width.
Target value of position comparison: There are eight target values of position comparison. The target value is a 32-bit signed number. The target value and attribute value of position comparison must be updated to the related parameters in group H19 in advance.
Start point for comparison (H18-07): The start point indicates the position of the first comparison point. For example, if the start point is set to 5, the comparison starts from position comparison 5.
End point for comparison (H18-08): The end point indicates the position of the last comparison point. For example, if the end point is set to 7, the comparison stops or restarts from the start point after position comparison 7 is reached.
Zero offset of position comparison (H18-12): The value of H18-10 (Real-time position feedback) will be changed to the offset value defined by H18-12 (Zero offset of position comparison) at the rising edge (0 → 1) of H18-04 (Present position as zero).
2) Running
When the position feedback of the encoder passes the target position comparison values (H19-00 to H19-21), the DO outputs the time width pulse defined by H18-05 (Position comparison output width).
How does the Position Comparison Output behave based on the attribute setting?
The behavior depends on the attribute setting for the comparison point:
Attribute set to 1: The DO outputs the position comparison signal active when the current position changes from “less than” to “more than” the comparison point position.
Attribute set to 2: The DO outputs the position comparison signal active when the current position changes from “more than” to “less than” the comparison point position.
Attribute set to 3: The DO outputs the position comparison signal active when the axis position passes the comparison point position in either direction.
What determines the pulse output width for the position comparison output?
The pulse output width is determined by the direction the current position is changing when it crosses the comparison point:
One pulse width applies when the current position changes from less than to more than the comparison point.
Another pulse width applies when the current position changes from more than to less than the comparison point.
Under what condition might position comparison not be performed when the direction of rotation reverses?
When the direction of rotation reverses and multiple position comparison values are set, no comparison will be performed once the position comparison DO output is active if the pulse output width is larger than the operating time between two consecutive comparison points. Ensure the operating time between two comparison points is larger than the pulse output width.
What happens with the position comparison output when the stop position is the same as the target value?
Only one pulse will be output when the stop position is the same as the target value of position comparison.
How can the software tool assist in setting the target value for position comparison?
The software tool provides a division setting function:
In the single comparison mode: Set the total running distance and number of comparison points. Clicking the division setting updates target values based on “Distance x (Point Number) / (Total Number of comparison points)”. For example, comparison point 1 becomes “Distance x 1/Number of comparison points”, point 2 becomes “Distance x 2/Number of comparison points”, and so on up to point N.
In the cyclic comparison mode: Use the distance length setting for the operating distance between adjacent points and the comparison points setting for the number of points to compare cyclically. Clicking the division setting updates target values for comparison points 1 to N based on the distance length setting.
What are the two offline DO output options for EtherCAT force DO output in the non-operational (non-OP) status?
Two offline DO output options are available by default in the non-OP status (including network offline) for EtherCAT force DO output:
1) Status unchanged upon offline: The servo status switches to non-OP, but the forced DO status remains the same as the DO status before going offline.
2) Initialization status: There is no forced DO output when the servo drive is in the non-OP status.
How is the forced DO status determined when the network switches to operational (OP)?
When the network switches to operational (OP), the forced DO status is determined by the settings in parameters 60FE-1 and 60FE-2.
How can the EtherCAT forced DO function be assigned to DO terminals?
You can assign the EtherCAT forced DO function to the DO terminal by bits. This allows both local functions and EtherCAT forced DO function to be supported by the same DOs.
Is the value of HOD-17 retentive upon power-off for EtherCAT forced DO?
Yes, the value of HOD-17 is retentive upon power-off.
What are the steps to set up the EtherCAT Forced DO Function?
1. Assign the desired DO to be forcibly controlled by EtherCAT using function 31. Set the corresponding bit of parameter H04-23 as needed to select the forced DO status after offline.
2. Configure parameters 60FE-1 and 60FE-2 as RPDOs (Receive Process Data Objects). Use bit16, bit17, and bit18 within these RPDOs to control the assigned DO.
What does parameter H04-23 control?
Parameter H04-23 controls the EtherCAT forced DO offline output logic. It determines the state of the DOs (DO1, DO2, DO3) when the servo drive is in the non-operational (non-OP) status.
| Parameter | Name | Setting Condition & Effective Time | During running & Immediately | Data Structure | Data Type | Access | Mapping | Related Mode | Data Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| H04-23 (2004-18h) | EtherCAT forced DO offline output logic | Related Mode | Immediately | – | Uint16 | RW | – | – | 0~7 | 1 |
| Setpoint | DO Function Name |
|---|---|
| 0 | Status of DO1 to DO3 unchanged in the non-OP status |
| 1 | No output in DO1 and status of others unchanged in the non-OP status |
| 2 | No output in DO2 and status of others unchanged in the non-OP status |
| 3 | No output in DO1 or DO2 and status of others unchanged in the non-OP status |
| 4 | No output in DO3, status of others unchanged in the non-OP status |
| 5 | No output in DO1 or DO3, status of others unchanged in the non-OP status |
| 6 | No output in DO2 or DO3 and status of others unchanged in the non-OP status |
| 7 | No output in D01, DO2, or DO3. |
How does the absolute encoder system work?
The absolute encoder records both the single-turn position (up to 8,388,608 or 2^23 pulses resolution) and the number of revolutions (16-bit multi-turn data).
It functions in position, speed, and torque control modes.
When the servo drive is powered off, the encoder uses battery power to back up its data.
Upon power-on, the servo drive uses the backed-up encoder data to calculate the absolute mechanical position, eliminating the need for a homing procedure under normal circumstances.
What are the initial setup steps when using an absolute encoder?
1. Set parameter 2000-01h (Motor code) to 14101 (for Inovance 23-bit absolute encoder).
2. Set parameter 2002-02h (Absolute encoder system selection) based on your application’s requirements.
3. When the battery is connected for the first time, an error Er.731 (Encoder battery fault) will be reported. Reset this fault by setting parameter 200D-15h (Absolute encoder reset selection) to 1 (Reset the encoder fault).
4. After resetting the fault, perform the homing operation.
When is homing required for the absolute encoder system?
Homing is required under the following conditions:
After the initial setup and reset of the Er.731 fault.
If the value of parameter 2002-03h (Direction of rotation) is changed.
If the value of parameter 200D-15h (Absolute encoder reset selection) is changed.
If the mechanical gear ratio is changed.
After performing homing, the servo drive calculates the difference between the absolute mechanical position and the absolute position reported by the encoder and saves this difference to the EEPROM.
What are the motor codes (2000-01h) for Inovance motors with incremental and absolute encoders?
The motor codes defined in parameter 2000-01h (H00-00) are:
| Value | Motor SN | Description |
|---|---|---|
| 14000 | Inovance motor with incremental encoder | Encoder resolution: 1048576 (2^20) |
| 14101 | Inovance motor with absolute encoder | Encoder resolution: 8388608 (2^23) |
| Parameter | Name | Setting Condition & Effective Time | At stop & Next power-on | Data Structure | Data Type | Access | Mapping | Related Mode | Value Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 2000-01h (H00-00) | Motor code | Related Mode | Next power-on | – | Uint16 | RW | – | – | 0 to 65535 | 14101 |
What are the different Absolute system modes (2002-02h) and their characteristics?
Parameter 2002-02h (H02-01) defines the mode of the absolute system:
| Parameter | Name | Setting Condition & Effective Time | At stop & Next power-on | Data Structure | Data Type | Access | Mapping | Related Mode | Value Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 2002-02h (H02-01) | Absolute system mode | Related Mode | All | – | Uint16 | RW | – | All | 0 to 4 | 0 |
| Value | Absolute system mode | Description | Remarks |
|---|---|---|---|
| 0 | Incremental position mode | The encoder is used as a serial-type incremental encoder without power-off memory. | No battery needed, no battery fault or multi-turn fault |
| 1 | Absolute position linear mode | The encoder is used as an absolute encoder with power-off memory. This mode applies to applications with a fixed axis movement range and free from multi-turn data overflow. The multi-turn data range is -32768 to +32767. | Battery needed, indications of battery fault, multi-turn counting error and overflow fault available |
| 2 | Absolute position rotation mode | The encoder is used as an absolute encoder with power-off memory. This mode applies to the applications where the load movement range is unlimited and only single-turn position feedback is needed. | Battery needed, indication of battery fault available, indication of multi-turn overflow fault not available |
| 3 | Absolute position linear mode 2 | The encoder is used as an absolute encoder with power-off memory. This mode applies to applications where the multi-turn data overflow fault can be left untreated. | Battery needed, indication of battery fault available, indication of multi-turn overflow fault not available |
| 4 | Single-turn absolute mode | In this mode, only the single-turn position is recorded. | No battery needed, no battery fault or multi-turn fault |
How is the feedback data structured for an absolute encoder?
The feedback data from an absolute encoder is divided into two main parts:
1. Number of revolutions: Represents the count of full turns completed by the encoder (available in modes that support multi-turn data).
2. Position within one turn: Represents the encoder’s position within the current revolution.
In the incremental position mode (Mode 0), there is no feedback data concerning the number of revolutions.
What does parameter H0B-70 / 200B-47h represent?
Parameter H0B-70 / 200B-47h represents the number of revolutions of the absolute encoder.
| Parameter | Name | Setting Condition & Effective Time | Data Structure | Data Type | Access | Mapping | Related Mode | Value Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 200B-47h (H0B-70) | Number of revolutions of the absolute encoder | Related Mode | – | Uint16 | RO | TPDO | All | – | – |
What does parameter H0B-71 / 200B-48h represent and what is its range?
Parameter H0B-71 / 200B-48h represents the single-turn position feedback of the absolute encoder in encoder units. If the encoder resolution is RE (e.g., RE = 2^23), the range of this parameter is 0 to (RE – 1).
| Parameter | Name | Setting Condition & Effective Time | Data Structure | Data Type | Access | Mapping | Related Mode | Value Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 200B-48h (H0B-71) | Single-turn position feedback of the absolute encoder | Related Mode | – | Uint32 | RO | TPDO | All | (encoder unit) | – |
What do parameters H0B-77 / 200B-4Eh and H0B-79 / 200B-50h represent?
These parameters represent the absolute position feedback of the encoder as a 64-bit value (split into low and high 32-bit parts):
H0B-77 / 200B-4Eh: Absolute position (low 32 bits) of the absolute encoder (encoder unit).
H0B-79 / 200B-50h: Absolute position (high 32 bits) of the absolute encoder (encoder unit).
| Parameter | Name | Setting Condition & Effective Time | Data Structure | Data Type | Access | Mapping | Related Mode | Value Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 200B-4Eh (H0B-77) | Absolute position (low 32 bits) of absolute encoder | Related Mode | – | Uint32 | RO | TPDO | All | (encoder unit) | – |
| 200B-50h (H0B-79) | Absolute position (high 32 bits) of absolute encoder | Related Mode | – | Int32 | RO | TPDO | All | (encoder unit) | – |
When is the Absolute Position Linear Mode applicable?
This mode (selected by setting 2002-02h to 1) is applicable for applications where:
The axis movement range is fixed (like a linear stage with limits).
Multi-turn data overflow will not occur during normal operation within the fixed range.
What is the relationship between the absolute mechanical position (PM), encoder absolute position (PE), and position offset (Po) in linear mode?
The relationship is: PM = PE – PO
Where:
PM is the absolute mechanical position (represented by 200B-3Bh and 200B-3Dh).
PE is the encoder absolute position.
PO is the position offset in the absolute position linear mode (represented by 2005-2Fh and 2005-31h).
If the electronic gear ratio is B/A, the mechanical absolute position in reference units (200B-08h) is: 200B-08h = PM / (B/A).
What is the multi-turn data range in Absolute Position Linear Mode, and what happens if it overflows?
The multi-turn data range in the absolute position linear mode (Mode 1) is -32768 to +32767 revolutions.
If the number of forward revolutions exceeds 32767 or the number of reverse revolutions goes below -32768, an overflow occurs, and the error E735.0 (Encoder multi-turn counting overflow) will be reported.
How should an Encoder multi-turn counting overflow (E735.0) be handled in Absolute Position Linear Mode?
When E735.0 occurs:
1. Set parameter 200D-15h (Absolute encoder reset selection) to 2 (Reset the encoder fault and multi-turn data).
2. This resets the multi-turn data count.
3. Perform the homing operation again.
Alternatively, in special cases:
Set 200A-25h (Multi-turn overflow fault of absolute encoder) to 1 (Hide) to prevent E735.0 from being reported.
Use Absolute position linear mode 2 (set 2002-02h to 3), where the overflow fault is left untreated.
What does parameter 2005-2Fh / H05-46 represent?
Parameter 2005-2Fh / H05-46 represents the low 32 bits of the position offset in the absolute position linear mode, measured in encoder units.
| Parameter | Name | Setting Condition & Effective Time | At stop & Next power-on | Data Structure | Data Type | Access | Mapping | Related Mode | Value Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 2005-2Fh (H05-46) | Position offset in the absolute position linear mode (low 32 bits) | Related Mode | All | – | Uint32 | RW | – | All | -2^31 to +(2^31 – 1) (encoder unit) | 0 |
What does parameter 2005-31h / H05-48 represent?
Parameter 2005-31h / H05-48 represents the high 32 bits of the position offset in the absolute position linear mode, measured in encoder units.
| Parameter | Name | Setting Condition & Effective Time | At stop & Next power-on | Data Structure | Data Type | Access | Mapping | Related Mode | Value Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 2005-31h (H05-48) | Position offset in the absolute position linear mode (high 32 bits) | Related Mode | All | – | Int32 | RW | – | All | -2^31 to +(2^31 – 1) (in encoder unit) | 0 |
How is the position offset in the absolute position linear mode determined?
The position offset (parameters 2005-2Fh and 2005-31h) is 0 by default.
When a homing operation is performed in the absolute position linear mode (Mode 1), the servo drive automatically calculates the deviation between the encoder’s absolute position and the determined mechanical absolute position (home position).
This calculated deviation value is then assigned to parameters 2005-2Fh and 2005-31h, and stored in the EEPROM.
The formula is: Position offset = Encoder absolute position – Mechanical absolute position.
What does parameter 200B-08h / H0B-07 represent?
Parameter 200B-08h / H0B-07 represents the current mechanical absolute position, measured in reference units (often user-defined units like mm or degrees, after applying the electronic gear ratio).
| Parameter | Name | Setting Condition & Effective Time | At stop & Immediately | Data Structure | Data Type | Access | Mapping | Related Mode | Value Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 200B-08h (H0B-07) | Absolute position counter | Related Mode | Immediately | – | Int32 | RO | – | All | -2^31 to +2^31 (reference unit) | 0 |
What do parameters 200B-3Bh / H0B-58 and 200B-3Dh / H0B-60 represent?
These parameters represent the current mechanical absolute position measured in encoder units, split into low and high 32-bit parts:
200B-3Bh / H0B-58: Mechanical absolute position (low 32 bits) in encoder units.
200B-3Dh / H0B-60: Mechanical absolute position (high 32 bits) in encoder units.
| Parameter | Name | Setting Condition & Effective Time | Data Structure | Data Type | Access | Mapping | Related Mode | Value Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 200B-3Bh (H0B-58) | Mechanical absolute position (low 32 bits) | Related Mode | – | Uint32 | RO | – | All | (encoder unit) | – |
| 200B-3Dh (H0B-60) | Mechanical absolute position (high 32 bits) | Related Mode | – | Int32 | RO | – | All | (encoder unit) | – |
What does Index 6063h represent in absolute position mode?
Index 6063h (Position actual value*) represents the absolute position of the motor, measured in encoder units. In the absolute position linear mode, its value is equal to the mechanical absolute position (low 32 bits) in encoder units, which is parameter 200B-3Bh.
| Index | Name | Setting Condition & Effective Time | Data Structure | Data Type | Access | Mapping | Related Mode | Value Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 6063h | Position actual value* | Related Mode | VAR | Int32 | RO | TPDO | All | (encoder unit) | 0 |
What does Index 6064h represent and how does it relate to 6063h?
Index 6064h (Position actual value) represents the absolute position feedback in user-defined units (reference units).
The relationship between 6064h and 6063h is defined by the gear ratio (Index 6091h):
Position actual value (6064h) x Gear ratio (6091h) = Position actual value* (6063h)
| Index | Name | Setting Condition & Effective Time | Data Structure | Data Type | Access | Mapping | Related Mode | Value Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 6064h | Position actual value | Related Mode | VAR | Int32 | RO | TPDO | All | (reference unit) | 0 |
What is the purpose of parameter 200A-25h?
Parameter 200A-25h is used to control whether the E735.0 (Encoder multi-turn overflow fault) is reported or hidden when operating in the absolute position linear mode.
| Parameter | Name | Setting Condition & Effective Time | At stop & Immediately | Data Structure | Data Type | Access | Mapping | Related Mode | Value Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 200A-25h | Absolute encoder multi-turn overflow fault | Related Mode | Immediately | – | Uint16 | RW | No | All | 0 to 1 | 0 |
| Value | Description |
|---|---|
| 0 | Not hide (E735.0 is reported upon overflow) |
| 1 | Hide (E735.0 is not reported upon overflow) |
When is the Absolute Position Rotation Mode applicable?
This mode (selected by setting 2002-02h to 2) is mainly applicable for applications where:
The load movement range is unlimited (e.g., a rotating table or spindle).
Only single-turn position feedback is needed for the application.
The number of motor revolutions in one direction is expected to be less than 32767 in case of a power failure (although the multi-turn counter itself is unlimited in this mode).
What is the single-turn position range of the rotating load in Absolute Position Rotation Mode?
The single-turn position range of the rotating load is 0 to (RM – 1) encoder pulses.
RM represents the total number of encoder pulses per revolution of the rotating load axis, calculated based on the encoder resolution and the gear ratio settings (parameters 2005-33h, 2005-34h, 2005-35h, 2005-37h).
What is the setting range for the home offset in Absolute Position Rotation Mode when operating in HM mode?
When the motor operates in the Absolute Position Rotation Mode (Mode 2) and the servo drive is in the Homing Method (HM) mode, the setting range for the home offset is 0 to (RM – 1).
RM is the encoder pulses per revolution of the load axis.
If the home offset is set to a value outside this range, the servo drive will report error EE09.1 (Home setting error).
Is the multi-turn data range limited in Absolute Position Rotation Mode?
No, the multi-turn data range is unlimited in the Absolute Position Rotation Mode (Mode 2). Consequently, the E735.0 (Encoder multi-turn counting overflow) fault is automatically disabled in this mode.
What parameters define the ratio of feedback pulses per revolution of the load axis in Absolute Position Rotation Mode?
These parameters define the number of encoder pulses per revolution of the load axis (RM) when the absolute system is in rotation mode (2002-02 = 2):
Method 1 (Using Gear Ratio):
| Parameter | Name | Setting Condition & Effective Time | At stop & Immediately | Data Structure | Data Type | Access | Mapping | Related Mode | Value Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 2005-33h | Mechanical gear ratio in the absolute position rotation mode (numerator) | Related Mode | Immediately | – | Uint16 | RW | – | All | 1 to 65535 | 1 |
| 2005-34h | Mechanical gear ratio in the absolute position rotation mode (denominator) | Related Mode | Immediately | – | Uint16 | RW | – | All | 1 to 65535 | 1 |
Used when 2005-35h and 2005-37h are set to 0.
Method 2 (Using Direct Pulse Count):
| Parameter | Name | Setting Condition & Effective Time | At stop & Immediately | Data Structure | Data Type | Access | Mapping | Related Mode | Value Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 2005-35h | Pulses per revolution of the load axis in the absolute position rotation mode (low 32 bits) | Related Mode | Immediately | – | Uint32 | RW | – | All | 0 to (2^32-1) (encoder unit) | 0 |
| 2005-37h | Pulses per revolution of the load axis in the absolute position rotation mode (high 32 bits) | Related Mode | Immediately | – | Int32 | RW | – | All | 0 to 127 (in encoder unit) | 0 |
Used when 2005-35h or 2005-37h is not 0.
How are the encoder pulses per revolution (RM) calculated in Absolute Position Rotation Mode?
The calculation depends on the settings of parameters 2005-35h and 2005-37h:
Case 1: If both 2005-35h and 2005-37h are set to 0:
RM = RE x (2005-33h / 2005-34h)
Where RE is the encoder resolution (e.g., 2^23 for a 23-bit encoder).
Case 2: If either 2005-35h or 2005-37h is set to a value other than 0:
RM = (2005-37h x 2^32) + 2005-35h
Note: The servo drive prioritizes Case 2. It first calculates RM based on 2005-35h and 2005-37h. Only if both are 0 does it use 2005-33h and 2005-34h for calculation.
What parameters represent the single-turn position of the rotating load axis in encoder units in Absolute Position Rotation Mode, and what is the value range?
The single-turn position of the rotating load axis in encoder units is represented by:
200B-52h: Single-turn position (low 32 bits)
200B-54h: Single-turn position (high 32 bits)
The value range for the combined single-turn position is (-RM + 1) to (RM – 1), where RM is the encoder pulses per revolution of the load axis.
| Parameter | Name | Setting Condition & Effective Time | Data Structure | Data Type | Access | Mapping | Related Mode | Value Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 200B-52h | Single-turn position of the rotating load axis (low 32 bits) | Related Mode | – | Int32 | RO | TPDO | All | (encoder unit) | – |
| 200B-54h | Single-turn position of the rotating load axis (high 32 bits) | Related Mode | – | Uint32 | RO | TPDO | All | (encoder unit) | – |
What parameter represents the single-turn position of the rotating load axis in reference units in Absolute Position Rotation Mode?
Parameter 200B-56h represents the single-turn position of the rotating load axis in reference units.
| Parameter | Name | Setting Condition & Effective Time | Data Structure | Data Type | Access | Mapping | Related Mode | Value Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 200B-56h | Single-turn position of the rotating load axis | Related Mode | – | Int32 | RO | TPDO | All | (reference unit) | – |
What does Index 6063h represent in Absolute Position Rotation Mode?
In Absolute Position Rotation Mode, Index 6063h (Position actual value*) represents the absolute single-turn position of the rotating load axis, measured in encoder units. Its value is equal to 200B-52h.
| Index | Name | Setting Condition & Effective Time | Data Structure | Data Type | Access | Mapping | Related Mode | Value Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 6063h | Position actual value* | Related Mode | VAR | Int32 | RO | TPDO | All | (encoder unit) | 0 |
What does Index 6064h represent in Absolute Position Rotation Mode?
In Absolute Position Rotation Mode, Index 6064h (Position actual value) represents the single-turn absolute position feedback of the rotating load axis in real time, measured in reference units. Its value is equal to 200B-56h.
The relationship Position actual value (6064h) x Gear ratio (6091h) = Position actual value* (6063h) still holds.
| Index | Name | Setting Condition & Effective Time | Data Structure | Data Type | Access | Mapping | Related Mode | Value Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 6064h | Position actual value | Related Mode | VAR | Int32 | RO | TPDO | All | (reference unit) | 0 |
When is the Single-Turn Absolute Mode applicable?
This mode (selected by setting 2002-02h to 4) is mainly applicable for applications where:
The load axis movement range is entirely within the single-turn range of the encoder (e.g., less than 360 degrees of motor rotation for a direct drive).
In this mode, the absolute encoder only records the single-turn data, and therefore does not require a battery for multi-turn backup.
What is the target position input range in Single-Turn Absolute Mode using a 23-bit encoder via EtherCAT (CSP/PP mode, gear ratio 1:1)?
Assuming a 23-bit absolute encoder, CSP or PP mode, and an electronic gear ratio of 1:1:
If the Home offset (607Ch) is set to 0, the target position range is 0 to (2^23 – 1).
After homing is performed and a non-zero Home offset (607Ch) is established, the target position range becomes 607Ch to (2^23 – 1 + 607Ch).
If a target position is set outside this defined range, the error EB01.4 (Target position beyond upper/lower limit) will be reported.
What determines the motor movement range in Single-Turn Absolute Mode?
The motor movement range is determined by the motor’s position upon power-on. The range is derived from the single-turn data range relative to the power-on position. For a 23-bit encoder, this range effectively spans 2^23 counts starting from the power-on position.
How can the motor movement range be changed in Single-Turn Absolute Mode?
To change the motor movement range, you need to change the power-on position:
1. Turn off the power supply to the servo drive.
2. Manually move the motor to the desired new starting position for the range.
3. Turn the power supply back on.
The new movement range will now be based on this new power-on position.
What might happen if the power supply is switched on near the motor movement range limits in Single-Turn Absolute Mode?
If the power supply is switched on when the motor is positioned near the limits of its current movement range, the error EB01.4 (Target position beyond the limit) may easily occur soon after operation begins, as even small movements could exceed the defined single-turn range based on that power-on position.
How should the E731.0 (Encoder battery fault) be handled when connecting the battery for the first time?
When the battery is connected for the first time, E731.0 will be reported. To handle this:
1. Set parameter 200D-15h (Absolute encoder reset selection) to 1 (Reset the encoder fault).
2. This will reset the fault.
3. Perform the homing operation.
What should be done when Er.730 (Encoder battery warning) occurs?
Er.730 occurs when the detected battery voltage is less than 3.0 V. Replace the battery following these steps:
Step 1: Keep the servo drive powered on, but ensure it is in a non-operating state (e.g., Servo OFF).
Step 2: Replace the battery with a new one.
Step 3: The E730.0 warning should clear automatically. If no other warnings or faults occur, you can continue operating the servo drive.
What happens if the battery is replaced after the servo drive is powered off, and how should it be handled?
If you replace the battery while the servo drive is powered off, upon the next power-on, E731.0 (Encoder battery fault) will be reported, and the multi-turn data will change abruptly (data loss).
To handle this:
1. Set parameter 200D-15h (Absolute encoder reset selection) to 1 (Reset the encoder fault) to clear the E731.0 fault.
2. Perform the homing operation again to re-establish the absolute position.
What is the maximum motor speed allowed during the power-down state to ensure accurate encoder position recording?
When the servo drive is in the power-down state (running on battery backup), ensure the maximum motor speed does not exceed 6000 RPM. This ensures that the encoder position can be recorded accurately by the battery-powered circuitry.
What environmental conditions should be maintained for the battery box?
Keep the battery box in environments within the required ambient temperature range.
Ensure the battery is in reliable contact within the box.
Ensure the battery has sufficient power capacity.
Failure to meet these conditions may result in encoder data loss.
What does parameter 200D-15h control?
Parameter 200D-15h defines whether to reset the encoder fault (like E731.0) and potentially the multi-turn data count.
| Parameter | Name | Setting Condition & Effective Time | At stop & Immediately | Data Structure | Data Type | Access | Mapping | Related Mode | Value Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 200D-15h | Absolute encoder reset selection | Related Mode | Immediately | – | Uint16 | RW | – | All | 0 to 2 | 0 |
| Value | Description |
|---|---|
| 0 | No operation |
| 1 | Reset the encoder fault |
| 2 | Reset the encoder fault and multi-turn data |
What needs to be done after resetting the multi-turn data using 200D-15h?
Resetting the multi-turn data (by setting 200D-15h to 2) causes the absolute position of the encoder to change abruptly. After performing a multi-turn data reset, you must perform mechanical homing to re-establish the correct absolute position reference.
What is the structure of the object dictionary in the CANopen protocol used by the device?
The CANopen object dictionary is an ordered set of parameters and variables structured by a 16-bit index and an 8-bit sub-index. The structure is organized as follows:
| Index Range | Device / Area Description |
|---|---|
| 0000h | Not used |
| 0001h-001Fh | Static data type (standard data type, such as Boolean and Integer16) |
| 0020h-003Fh | Complex data type (predefined structure consisting of simple types, such as PDOCommPar and SDOParmeter) |
| 0040h-005Fh | Complex data type specified by the manufacturer |
| 0060h-007Fh | Static data type specified by the device profile |
| 0080h-009Fh | Complex data type specified by the device profile |
| 00A0h-0FFFh | Reserved |
| 1000h-1FFFh | Communication profile area (such as the device type, error register, and number of supported PDOs) – Saving common communication parameters |
| 2000h-5FFFh | Manufacturer-specific profile area (such as parameter mapping) – Corresponding to the parameters of Inovance servo drives |
| 6000h-9FFFh | Standard device profile area (for example, CiA-402 protocol) – Common area, those saved in this device are DSP402 profile parameters |
| A000h-FFFFh | Reserved |
What attributes do objects in the SV660N series servo drive object dictionary contain?
Objects contain the following attributes:
Index
Sub-index
Data Structure
Data Type
Access
Mapping
Setting Condition & Effective Time
Related Mode
Data Range
Default
How are the “Index” and “Sub-index” defined for the object dictionary?
Index: This field (in hexadecimal) specifies the position of a group of similar objects within the object dictionary. It is a 16-bit value.
Sub-index: This field specifies the offset of a specific object (or element within a structured object) under the same index. It is an 8-bit value.
What is the mapping relation between parameters (like H02-10) and the object dictionary index/sub-index?
The mapping follows these formulas:
Object dictionary index = 0x2000 + Parameter group number
Object dictionary sub-index = Hexadecimal offset within the parameter group + 1
For example, parameter H02-10 (Group H02, offset 10 decimal = 0A hex) maps to object dictionary index 0x2000 + 0x02 = 2002h, and sub-index 0Ah + 1 = 0Bh. So, H02-10 maps to object 2002-0Bh.
How are objects like 607Dh (software position limit) described using sub-indices?
Complex objects are described using sub-indices. For object 607Dh (software position limit):
| Index | Sub-index | Name | Meaning |
|---|---|---|---|
| 607Dh | 00h | Number of elements | Defines the number of the object data elements (exclusive of sub-index 00h). |
| 01h | Min. position limit | Defines the minimum position limit (absolute position mode). | |
| 02h | Max. position limit | Defines the maximum position limit (absolute position mode). |
What are the different “Data Structure” types used in the object dictionary?
| Type | Meaning | DS301 Value |
|---|---|---|
| VAR | Single simple value, including data types Int8, Uint16, and String | 7 |
| ARR | Data block of the same type | 8 |
| REC | Data block of different types | 9 |
What are the standard data types used in the object dictionary?
| Data Type | Value Range | Data Length | DS301 Value |
|---|---|---|---|
| Int8 | -128 to +127 | 1 byte | 0002 |
| Int16 | -32768 to +32767 | 2 bytes | 0003 |
| Int32 | -2147483648 to +2147483647 | 4 bytes | 0004 |
| Uint8 | 0 to 255 | 1 byte | 0005 |
| Uint16 | 0 to 65535 | 2 bytes | 0006 |
| Uint32 | 0 to 4294967295 | 4 bytes | 0007 |
| String | ASCII | Variable | 0009 |
What do the different “Access” attributes (RW, WO, RO, CONST) mean?
| Access | Description |
|---|---|
| RW | Read/Write |
| WO | Write-only |
| RO | Read-only |
| CONST | Constant, read-only |
What do the different “Mapping” attributes (No, RPDO, TPDO) indicate?
| Mapping | Description |
|---|---|
| No | Not mapped in PDO (Process Data Object) |
| RPDO | Can be mapped in a Receive PDO |
| TPDO | Can be mapped in a Transmit PDO |
How do “Setting Condition” and “Effective Time” affect parameter editing?
| Setting Condition | Description (Condition) | Effective Time | Description (Effect) |
|---|---|---|---|
| At stop | The parameter can be edited only when the servo drive is not in the operational state. | Immediately | Parameter editing takes effect immediately. |
| At stop | Parameter editing takes effect after the servo drive is not in the operational state (e.g., after toggling enable). | ||
| During running | The parameter can be edited when the servo drive is in any state. | Next power-on | Parameter editing takes effect after the servo drive is powered off and on again. Note: The servo drive reports Er.941 after such parameters are modified. |
What does the “Related Mode” attribute specify?
| Related Mode | Description |
|---|---|
| – | The parameter is not related to the control mode. |
| All | The parameter is related to all the control modes. |
| PP/PV/PT/HM/CSP/CSV/CST | The parameter is related to specific control modes (listed). |
What does the “Data Range” field specify, and what happens if a modified value exceeds this range via SDO?
The “Data Range” field specifies the upper and lower limits for parameters that have Write-Only (WO) or Read/Write (RW) access attributes.
If the value of a parameter modified through SDO (Service Data Object) communication exceeds the specified data range, the servo drive will return an SDO transmission abort code, and the modification will be deactivated (the parameter value will not be changed).
Does the servo drive detect if a parameter value modified through PDO exceeds the setpoint range?
No, if the value of a parameter is modified through PDO (Process Data Object), the servo drive does not detect whether the setpoint exceeds the data range.
What does the “Default” field specify for a parameter?
The “Default” field specifies the default value of the parameter as set by the manufacturer.
How is the 1st Receive PDO (RPDO1) mapped using Index 1600h?
Index 1600h defines the mapping for the first Receive PDO (RPDO1). It contains sub-indices to specify the number of objects mapped and the specific objects included.
| Index | Name | Data Structure | Data Type | Access | Mapping | Related Mode | Data Range | OD Data Range | Default | OD Default Value |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1600h | 1st receive PDO mapping (RPDO1) | REC | Uint32 | RW | No | – | – | – | – | – |
| Sub-index | Name | Data Structure | Data Type | Access | Mapping | Related Mode | Data Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 00h | Number of mapped objects in RPDO1 | – | Uint8 | RW | No | – | 0 to 10 | 3 |
| 01h | 1st mapped object | – | Uint32 | RW | No | – | 0 to 4294967295 | 60400010 |
| 02h | 2nd mapped object | – | Uint32 | RW | No | – | 0 to 4294967295 | 607A0020 |
| 03h | 3rd mapped object | – | Uint32 | RW | No | – | 0 to 4294967295 | 60B80010 |
| 04h to 0Ah | 4th to 10th mapped object | – | Uint32 | RW | No | All | 0 to 4294967295 | – |
This defines the mapping object of RPDO1. Sub-index 00h indicates how many objects are mapped (default 3), and sub-indices 01h onwards specify the object dictionary addresses (Index & Sub-index combined) of the mapped objects.
What procedure should be followed to configure the assigned RPDO for Sync Manager 2 if not using twinCAT host controller software?
Observe the following procedure:
1. Perform configuration only when the EtherCAT state machine is in the pre-operational (“P” displayed on the keypad) state.
2. If the object assigned to RPDO is selected using twinCAT host controller software, 1C12h needs no setting. If other methods are used, configure PDOs based on the following steps:
Step 1: Write 0 to 1C12-00h (Number of assigned RPDOs).
Step 2: Write the index of the desired pre-used RPDO (e.g., 1600h or one from 1701h–1705h) to 1C12-01h (Index of RPDO assignment).
Step 3: If an index among 1701h…1705h is used as RPDO and the mapped object cannot be modified, jump to step 5. If 1600h is used as RPDO, write the value 0 to the sub-index 00h of RPDOx (1600h), and write the desired mapped objects to sub-indices 01h…0Ah. Then, go to step 4.
Step 4: After writing mapped objects in 1600h, write the correct number of mapped objects in 1600-00h.
Step 5: Write the value 1 back to 1C12-00h (Number of assigned RPDOs).
How is the TPDO object assigned to Sync Manager 2 defined?
Index 1C13h defines the TPDO assignment for Sync Manager 2. It specifies which TPDO index will be used by Sync Manager 2.
| Index | Name | Data Structure | Data Type | Access | Mapping | Related Mode | Data Range | OD Data Range | Default | OD Default Value |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1C13h | Sync Manager 2_TPDO assignment | ARR | Uint16 | RW | No | – | – | – | – | – |
| Sub-index | Name | Data Structure | Data Type | Access | Mapping | Related Mode | Data Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 00h | Sync Manager 2_Number of assigned TPDOs | – | Uint8 | RW | No | – | 0 to 1 | 1 |
| 01h | Index of TPDO assignment | – | Uint16 | RW | Yes | – | 0 to 65535 | 6913 (0x1B01) |
Sub-index 00h should typically be 1, and sub-index 01h contains the index of the TPDO object (e.g., 1A00h, 1B01h to 1B04h) to be used.
What procedure should be followed to configure the assigned TPDO for Sync Manager 2 if not using twinCAT host controller software?
Observe the following procedure:
1. Perform configuration only when the EtherCAT state machine is in the pre-operational (“P” displayed on the keypad) state.
2. If the object assigned to TPDO is selected using twinCAT host controller software, 1C13h needs no setting. If other methods are used, configure PDOs based on the following steps:
Step 1: Write 0 to 1C13-00h (Number of assigned TPDOs).
Step 2: Write the index of the desired pre-used TPDO (e.g., 1A00h or one from 1B01h to 1B04h) to 1C13-01h (Index of TPDO assignment).
Step 3: If an index among 1B01h…1B04h is used as TPDO and the mapped object cannot be modified, jump to step 5. If 1A00h is used as TPDO, write the value 0 to the sub-index 00h of 1A00h, and write the desired mapped objects to sub-indices 01h…0Ah. Then, go to step 4.
Step 4: After writing mapped objects in 1A00h, write the correct number of mapped objects in 1A00-00h.
Step 5: Write the value 1 back to 1C13-00h (Number of assigned TPDOs).
What parameters describe the Sync Manager 2 Output and Synchronization?
Index 1C32h and its sub-indices describe the output parameters and synchronization details related to Sync Manager 2, particularly when using Distributed Clocks (DC).
| Index | Name | Data Structure | Data Type | Access | Mapping | Related Mode | Data Range | OD Data Range | Default | OD Default Value |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1C32h | Sync Manager 2_Output parameters | REC | Uint16 | RO | No | – | – | – | – | – |
| Sub-index | Name | Data Structure | Data Type | Access | Mapping | Related Mode | Data Range | Default | Description |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 00h | Sync Manager 2_Number of synchronization parameters | – | Uint8 | RO | No | – | – | 32 | Number of parameters following |
| 01h | Synchronization type | – | Uint16 | RO | No | – | – | 2 | “0x0002”: DC SYNC mode 0 |
| 02h | Cycle time (ns) | – | Uint32 | RO | No | – | – | 0 | Cycle time of DC SYNC 0 |
| 04h | Synchronization types supported | – | Uint16 | RO | No | – | – | 4 | “0x0004”: Supports DC SYNC mode 0 |
| 05h | Minimum cycle time (ns) | – | Uint32 | RO | No | – | – | 125000 | Minimum cycle time supported by slave |
| 06h | Calculation and copy time (ns) | – | Uint32 | RO | No | – | – | – | Time for microprocessor copy data |
| 09h | Delay time (ns) | – | Uint32 | RO | No | – | – | – | Delay time measurement |
What is the minimum cycle time supported by the SV660N, and what happens if the actual cycle time is less than this?
The minimum cycle time supported by the SV660N is 125,000 ns (125 µs), as indicated by parameter 1C32h, sub-index 05h.
If the actual network cycle time set by the master is less than 125,000 ns, the network cannot enter the Operational (OP) state.
What does sub-index 20h of 1C32h indicate?
Sub-index 20h of 1C32h (Sync error) indicates whether there is a synchronization error related to Sync Manager 2 and the Distributed Clock.
| Sub-index | Name | Data Structure | Data Type | Access | Mapping | Related Mode | Data Range | Default | Description |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 20h | Sync error | – | BOOL | RO | No | – | – | – | True: sync active & no error; False: sync inactive or error occurred |
What parameters describe the Sync Manager 2 Input and Synchronization?
Index 1C33h and its sub-indices describe the input parameters and synchronization details related to Sync Manager 2, primarily mirroring the output parameters for consistency and master configuration.
| Index | Name | Data Structure | Data Type | Access | Mapping | Related Mode | Data Range | OD Data Range | Default | OD Default Value |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1C33h | Sync Manager 2_Input parameters | REC | OD data type | RO | No | – | – | – | – | – |
| Sub-index | Name | Data Structure | Data Type | Access | Mapping | Related Mode | Data Range | Default | Description |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 00h | Sync Manager 2_Number of synchronization parameters | – | Uint8 | RO | No | – | – | 32 | Number of parameters following |
| 01h | Synchronization type | – | Uint16 | RO | No | – | – | 2 | “0x0002”: DC SYNC mode 0 |
| 02h | Cycle time (ns) | – | Uint32 | RO | No | – | – | 0 | Synchronization cycle time |
| 04h | Synchronization types supported | – | Uint16 | RO | No | – | – | 4 | “0x0004”: Supports DC SYNC mode 0 |
| 05h | Minimum cycle time | – | Uint32 | RO | No | – | – | 125000 | Minimum cycle time supported (ns) |
Note: The minimum cycle time supported by SV660N is 125000 ns. The network cannot enter the OP state if the actual cycle time is less than 125000 ns.
What do sub-indices 06h, 09h, and 20h of 1C33h indicate?
These sub-indices of 1C33h (Sync Manager 2 Input Parameters) provide information related to timing and synchronization status:
| Sub-index | Name | Data Structure | Data Type | Access | Mapping | Related Mode | Data Range | Default | Description |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 06h | Calculation and copy time (ns) | – | Uint32 | RO | No | – | – | – | Indicates time for microprocessor data copy |
| 09h | Delay time (ns) | – | Uint32 | RO | No | – | – | – | Indicates measured delay time |
| 20h | Sync error | – | BOOL | RO | No | – | – | – | True: sync active & no error; False: sync inactive or error occurred |
What is contained in Group 2000h?
Group 2000h contains manufacturer-specific parameters related to the Servo Motor.
| Index | Name | Setting Condition & Effective Time | Data Structure | Data Type | Access | Mapping | Related Mode | Data Range | OD Data Range | Default | OD Default Value |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 2000h | Servo motor parameters | Related Mode | ARR | Uint16 | – | Yes | – | – | – | – | – |
| Sub-index | Name | Setting Condition & Effective Time | Data Structure | Data Type | Access | Mapping | Related Mode | Data Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 00h | Number of entries | Related Mode | – | Uint8 | RO | No | – | – | 6 |
This group defines servo motor parameters like motor code, encoder version, etc.
What does motor code parameter 2000-01h define, and what are the codes for standard Inovance motors?
Parameter 2000-01h (Sub-index 1h of Index 2000h) defines the code of the connected servo motor.
| Sub-index | Name | Setting Condition & Effective Time | At stop & Next power-on | Data Structure | Data Type | Access | Mapping | Related Mode | Data Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1h | Motor code | Related Mode | Next power-on | – | Uint16 | RW | – | – | 0 to 65535 | 14101 |
| Setpoint | Motor code | Remarks |
|---|---|---|
| 14000 | Inovance motor equipped with a 20-bit encoder | – |
| 14101 | Inovance motor equipped with a 23-bit absolute encoder | For operating procedure of the absolute encoder, see “7.11 Absolute Encoder System” in the PDF. |
Setting the motor code to a wrong value will result in E120.1 (Unknown motor model). The SV660N series is intended for use with MS1 series motors (fixed to “14XXX”).
What does parameter 2000-03h represent?
Parameter 2000-03h displays the customized motor code software version in hexadecimal format (XXX.YY).
XXX: Fixed number of customized software
YY: Upgrade record number of customized software
| Sub-index | Name | Setting Condition & Effective Time | Data Structure | Data Type | Access | Mapping | Related Mode | Data Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 03h | Customized motor code | Related Mode | – | Uint16 | RO | – | – | 0 to 65535 | 0H |
What does parameter 2000-05h represent?
Parameter 2000-05h displays the encoder software version in the format 2XXX.Y, with one decimal place.
| Sub-index | Name | Setting Condition & Effective Time | Data Structure | Data Type | Access | Mapping | Related Mode | Data Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 05h | Encoder version | Related Mode | – | Uint16 | RO | – | – | 0 to 65535 | 0 |
What does parameter 2000-06h represent?
Parameter 2000-06h displays the code of the serial-type motor. This code is determined by the motor model and is unmodifiable.
| Sub-index | Name | Setting Condition & Effective Time | Data Structure | Data Type | Access | Mapping | Related Mode | Data Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 06h | Serial-type motor code | Related Mode | – | Uint16 | RO | – | – | 0 to 65535 | 0 |
What is contained in Group 2001h?
Group 2001h contains manufacturer-specific parameters related to the Servo Drive itself.
| Index | Name | Setting Condition & Effective Time | Data Structure | Data Type | Access | Mapping | Related Mode | Data Range | OD Data Range | Default | OD Default Value |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 2001h | Servo drive parameters | Related Mode | ARR | Uint16 | – | Yes | – | – | – | – | – |
This group defines servo drive parameters like software versions and the drive code.
What does parameter 2001-00h represent?
Parameter 2001-00h indicates the number of entries (parameters) within the Servo Drive Parameters group (Index 2001h).
| Sub-index | Name | Setting Condition & Effective Time | Data Structure | Data Type | Access | Mapping | Related Mode | Data Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 00h | Number of entries | Related Mode | – | Uint8 | RO | No | – | – | 32 |
What do parameters 2001-01h and 2001-02h represent?
These parameters display the software versions of the servo drive’s components:
2001-01h: Displays the MCU (Microcontroller Unit) software version in the format XXXX.Y (one decimal place).
2001-02h: Displays the FPGA (Field-Programmable Gate Array) software version in the format XXXX.Y (one decimal place).
| Sub-index | Name | Setting Condition & Effective Time | Data Structure | Data Type | Access | Mapping | Related Mode | Data Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 01h | MCU software version | Related Mode | – | Uint16 | RO | – | – | 0 to 65535 | 0 |
| 02h | FPGA software version | Related Mode | – | Uint16 | RO | – | – | 0 to 65535 | 0 |
What does parameter 2001-0Bh define, and what are the codes for SV660N series servo drives?
Parameter 2001-0Bh defines the code of the specific servo drive model.
| Sub-index | Name | Setting Condition & Effective Time | At stop & Next power-on | Data Structure | Data Type | Access | Mapping | Related Mode | Data Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 0Bh | Servo drive code | Related Mode | Next power-on | – | Uint16 | RW | – | – | 0 to 65535 | 0 |
The codes for SV660N series servo drives are:
| Setpoint | Servo drive code | Remarks |
|---|---|---|
| 2 | S1R6 | Rated power: 0.2 kW; Main circuit supply: Single-phase 220 V |
| 3 | S2R8 | Rated power: 0.4 kW; Main circuit supply: Single-phase 220 V |
| 5 | S5R5 | Rated power: 0.75 kW; Main circuit supply: Single-phase 220 V |
| 6 | S7R6 | Rated power: 1.0 kW; Main circuit supply: Single-phase/Three-phase 220 V [1] |
| 7 | S012 | Rated power: 1.5 kW; Main circuit supply: Single-phase/Three-phase 220 V [1] |
| 10001 | T3R5 | Rated power: 1.0 kW; Main circuit supply: three-phase 380 V |
| 10002 | T5R4 | Rated power: 1.5 kW; Main circuit supply: three-phase 380 V |
| 10003 | T8R4 | Rated power: 2.0 kW; Main circuit supply: three-phase 380 V |
| 10004 | T012 | Rated power: 3.0 kW; Main circuit supply: three-phase 380 V |
| 10005 | T017 | Rated power: 5.0 kW; Main circuit supply: three-phase 380 V |
| 10006 | T021 | Rated power: 6.0 kW; Main circuit supply: three-phase 380 V |
| 10007 | T026 | Rated power: 7.5 kW; Main circuit supply: three-phase 380 V |
[1]: The main circuit of these servo drives supports single-phase 220 V power supplies without derating.
If the voltage input does not comply, E420.0 (Main circuit phase loss) may occur.
What is contained in Group 2002h?
Group 2002h contains manufacturer-specific Basic Control Parameters.
| Index | Name | Setting Condition & Effective Time | Data Structure | Data Type | Access | Mapping | Related Mode | Data Range | OD Data Range | Default | OD Default Value |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 2002h | Basic control parameters | Related Mode | ARR | Uint16 | – | Yes | – | – | – | – | – |
| Sub-index | Name | Setting Condition & Effective Time | Data Structure | Data Type | Access | Mapping | Related Mode | Data Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 00h | Number of entries | Related Mode | – | Uint8 | RO | No | – | – | 36 |
This group includes parameters for control mode, absolute encoder settings, direction, stop modes, brake control, regenerative resistor settings, and initialization.
What does parameter 2002-01h define?
Parameter 2002-01h defines the active control mode of the servo drive.
| Sub-index | Name | Setting Condition & Effective Time | At stop & Immediately | Data Structure | Data Type | Access | Mapping | Related Mode | Data Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 01h | Control mode | Related Mode | Immediately | – | Uint16 | RO | – | – | 0 to 9 | 9: EtherCAT |
When the servo drive is in the EtherCAT bus control mode, bit 9 of the status word (6041h) is set to 1. Refer to “7 Control Modes” in the PDF for details on operation modes.
What does parameter 2002-02h define, and what are the available modes?
Parameter 2002-02h defines the mode for using the absolute encoder system.
| Sub-index | Name | Setting Condition & Effective Time | At stop & Next power-on | Data Structure | Data Type | Access | Mapping | Related Mode | Data Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 02h | Absolute encoder system selection | Related Mode | Next power-on | – | Uint16 | RW | – | All | 0 to 4 | 0 |
| Value | Absolute encoder system selection | Remarks |
|---|---|---|
| 0 | Incremental position mode | The encoder is used as a bus incremental encoder without power-off memory. |
| 1 | Absolute position linear mode | The encoder is used as an absolute encoder with power-off memory. Applies where load movement range is fixed and multi-turn overflow will not occur. |
| 2 | Absolute position rotation mode | The encoder is used as an absolute encoder with power-off memory. Applies where load movement range is not limited and the number of single-direction revolutions is smaller than 32767. |
| 3 | Absolute position linear mode 2 | Encoder overflow will not be detected in this mode. |
| 4 | Absolute position single-turn mode | Only single-turn data is used. |
Note: In absolute position modes (1-4), the system checks if an absolute encoder is used (based on motor code). If not, E122.0 (Multi-turn absolute encoder setting error) will be reported. Refer to “7.11 Absolute Encoder System” in the PDF for instructions.
How is the forward direction of rotation defined using parameter 2002-03h?
Parameter 2002-03h defines the motor’s forward direction of rotation when viewed from the motor shaft side.
| Sub-index | Name | Setting Condition & Effective Time | At stop & Next power-on | Data Structure | Data Type | Access | Mapping | Related Mode | Data Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 03h | Direction of rotation | Related Mode | Next power-on | – | Uint16 | RW | – | All | 0 to 1 | 0 |
| Setpoint | Direction of rotation | Remarks |
|---|---|---|
| 0 | CCW as forward direction | The motor rotates counterclockwise (CCW) upon a forward run command. |
| 1 | CW direction as forward direction | The motor rotates clockwise (CW) upon a forward run command. |
What does parameter 2002-06h define, and what are the available stop modes at S-ON OFF?
Parameter 2002-06h defines the deceleration mode and final state of the servo motor when it stops rotating due to the S-ON (Servo On) signal becoming inactive (S-OFF).
| Sub-index | Name | Setting Condition & Effective Time | At stop & Immediately | Data Structure | Data Type | Access | Mapping | Related Mode | Data Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 06h | Stop mode at S-ON OFF | Related Mode | Immediately | – | Uint16 | RW | – | All | -3 to 1 | 0 |
| Value | Stop Mode |
|---|---|
| -3 | Stop at zero speed, keeping dynamic braking status |
| -2 | Ramp to stop as defined by 6084h/609Ah, keeping dynamic braking status |
| -1 | Dynamic braking stop, keeping dynamic braking status |
| 0 | Coast to stop, keeping de-energized status |
| 1 | Ramp to stop as defined by 6084h/609Ah, keeping de-energized status |
Set a proper stop mode based on mechanical conditions. After the brake output function is enabled, this stop mode is forcibly set to “Ramp to stop as defined by 6085h, keeping dynamic braking status” (Value -2, but using 6085h ramp).
What does parameter 2002-07h define, and what are the available stop modes for a No. 2 fault?
Parameter 2002-07h defines the deceleration mode and final state of the servo motor upon the occurrence of a No. 2 fault.
| Sub-index | Name | Setting Condition & Effective Time | At stop & Immediately | Data Structure | Data Type | Access | Mapping | Related Mode | Data Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 07h | Stop mode at No. 2 fault | Related Mode | Immediately | – | Int16 | RW | – | All | -5 to 3 | 2 |
| Value | Stop Mode |
|---|---|
| -5 | Stop at zero speed, keeping dynamic braking status |
| -4 | Stop at emergency torque, keeping dynamic braking status |
| -3 | Ramp to stop as defined by 6085h, keeping dynamic braking status |
| -2 | Ramp to stop as defined by 6084h/609Ah, keeping dynamic braking status |
| -1 | Dynamic braking stop, keeping dynamic braking status |
| 0 | Coast to stop, keeping de-energized status |
| 1 | Ramp to stop as defined by 6084h/609Ah, keeping de-energized status |
| 2 | Ramp to stop as defined by 6085h, keeping de-energized status |
| 3 | Stop at emergency torque, keeping de-energized status |
After the brake output function is enabled, the stop mode at No. 2 fault is forcibly set to “Ramp to stop as defined by 6085h, keeping dynamic braking status” (Value -3).
What does parameter 2002-08h define, and what are the available stop modes for overtravel?
Parameter 2002-08h defines the deceleration mode and final state of the servo motor upon detecting an overtravel condition (e.g., hitting a limit switch assigned to Positive/Negative Limit Switch function).
| Sub-index | Name | Setting Condition & Effective Time | At stop & Immediately | Data Structure | Data Type | Access | Mapping | Related Mode | Data Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 08h | Stop mode at overtravel | Related Mode | Immediately | – | Uint16 | RW | – | All | 0 to 7 | 1 |
| Value | Stop Mode |
|---|---|
| 0 | Coast to stop, keeping de-energized status |
| 1 | Stop at zero speed, keeping position lock status |
| 2 | Stop at zero speed, keeping de-energized state |
| 3 | Ramp to stop as defined by 6085h, keeping de-energized status |
| 4 | Ramp to stop as defined by 6085h, keeping position lock status |
| 5 | Dynamic braking stop, keeping de-energized status |
| 6 | Dynamic braking stop, keeping dynamic braking status |
| 7 | Not responding to overtravel |
For vertical axes, set 2002-08h to 1 or 4 to keep the motor shaft locked. After the brake output function is enabled, this stop mode is forcibly set to “Ramp to stop as defined by 6085h, keeping position lock status” (Value 4).
What does parameter 2002-09h define, and what are the available stop modes for a No. 1 fault?
Parameter 2002-09h defines the deceleration mode and final state of the servo motor upon the occurrence of a No. 1 fault.
| Sub-index | Name | Setting Condition & Effective Time | At stop & Immediately | Data Structure | Data Type | Access | Mapping | Related Mode | Data Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 09h | Stop mode at No. 1 fault | Related Mode | Immediately | – | Uint16 | RW | – | All | 0 to 2 | 2 |
| Value | Stop Mode |
|---|---|
| 0 | Coast to stop, keeping de-energized state |
| 1 | Dynamic braking stop, keeping de-energized status |
| 2 | Dynamic braking stop, keeping dynamic braking status |
After the brake output function is enabled, the stop mode at No. 1 fault is forcibly set to “Dynamic braking stop, keeping de-energized status” (Value 1).
What does parameter 2002-0Ah define?
Parameter 2002-0Ah defines the delay time (in milliseconds) from the moment the brake output signal (BK) turns ON to the moment the servo drive starts accepting input commands (position/speed/torque references) after power-on or enabling.
| Sub-index | Name | Setting Condition & Effective Time | During running & Immediately | Data Structure | Data Type | Access | Mapping | Related Mode | Data Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 0Ah | Delay from brake output ON to command received | Related Mode | Immediately | – | Uint16 | RW | – | All | 0 to 500 (ms) | 250 |
This ensures the mechanical brake has released before motion commands are processed. Refer to “5.4.2 Brake Settings” in the PDF for the time sequence.
What does parameter 2002-0Bh define?
Parameter 2002-0Bh defines the delay time (in milliseconds) from the moment the brake output signal (BK) turns OFF (brake engages) to the moment the motor enters the de-energized state when the motor is at a standstill.
| Sub-index | Name | Setting Condition & Effective Time | During running & Immediately | Data Structure | Data Type | Access | Mapping | Related Mode | Data Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 0Bh | Delay from brake output off to motor de-energized in the standstill state | Related Mode | Immediately | – | Uint16 | RW | – | All | 50 to 1000 (ms) | 150 |
This ensures the mechanical brake has engaged before the motor holding torque is removed. Refer to “5.4.2 Brake Settings” in the PDF for the time sequence.
What does parameter 2002-0Ch define?
Parameter 2002-0Ch defines the motor speed threshold (in RPM) used in the brake control logic when the motor is rotating. When the motor speed drops below this threshold during deceleration, the brake output (BK) signal turns OFF (brake engages).
| Sub-index | Name | Setting Condition & Effective Time | During running & Immediately | Data Structure | Data Type | Access | Mapping | Related Mode | Data Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 0Ch | Motor speed threshold at brake output OFF in the rotation state | Related Mode | Immediately | – | Uint16 | RW | – | All | 20 to 3000 (RPM) | 30 |
Refer to “5.4.2 Brake Settings” in the PDF for the time sequence.
What does parameter 2002-0Dh define?
Parameter 2002-0Dh defines the delay time (in milliseconds) from the moment the S-ON (Servo On) signal becomes inactive (S-OFF) to the moment the brake output (BK) signal turns OFF (brake engages) when the motor is rotating.
| Sub-index | Name | Setting Condition & Effective Time | During running & Immediately | Data Structure | Data Type | Access | Mapping | Related Mode | Data Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 0Dh | Delay from S-OFF to brake output OFF in the rotational state | Related Mode | Immediately | – | Uint16 | RW | – | All | 1 to 1000 (ms) | 500 |
Refer to “5.4.2 Brake Settings” in the PDF for the time sequence.
What does parameter 2002-10h control?
Parameter 2002-10h defines whether the keypad automatically switches to display the fault code when a No. 3 warning/fault occurs.
| Sub-index | Name | Setting Condition & Effective Time | At stop & Immediately | Data Structure | Data Type | Access | Mapping | Related Mode | Data Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 10h | Warning display on the keypad | Related Mode | Immediately | – | Uint16 | RW | – | – | 0 to 1 | 0 |
Refer to “10 Troubleshooting” in the PDF for details on No. 3 warnings/faults.
What does parameter 2002-16h represent?
Parameter 2002-16h displays the minimum permissible resistance (in Ohms) for a regenerative resistor connected to the drive. This value is read-only and depends on the servo drive model.
| Sub-index | Name | Setting Condition & Effective Time | Data Structure | Data Type | Access | Mapping | Related Mode | Data Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 16h | Minimum permissible resistance of regenerative resistor | Related Mode | – | Uint16 | RO | – | – | 1 to 1000 | – |
What does parameter 2002-17h represent?
Parameter 2002-17h displays the power rating (in Watts) of the built-in regenerative resistor. This value is read-only and unmodifiable, depending on the servo drive model.
| Sub-index | Name | Setting Condition & Effective Time | Data Structure | Data Type | Access | Mapping | Related Mode | Data Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 17h | Power of built-in regenerative resistor | Related Mode | – | Uint16 | RO | – | – | 1 to 65535 | – |
What does parameter 2002-18h represent, and what are the specifications for the built-in resistor?
Parameter 2002-18h displays the resistance value (in Ohms) of the built-in regenerative resistor. This value is read-only and unmodifiable, depending on the servo drive model.
| Sub-index | Name | Setting Condition & Effective Time | Data Structure | Data Type | Access | Mapping | Related Mode | Data Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 18h | Resistance of built-in regenerative resistor | Related Mode | – | Uint16 | RO | – | – | 1 to 1000 | – |
When using the built-in resistor, connect a jumper bar between terminals P and D. The built-in resistor is not available if the Servo drive code (2001-0Bh) is set to 2 (S1R6) or 3 (S2R8).
Specifications:
| Servo Drive Model | Resistance (Ω) | Power (W) |
|---|---|---|
| SV660NS1R61 | – | – |
| SV660NS2R81 | – | – |
| SV660NS5R51 | 50 | 50 |
| SV660NS7R61 | 25 | 80 |
| SV660NS0121 | ||
| SV660NT3R51 | 100 | 80 |
| SV660NT5R41 | ||
| SV660NT8R41 | 50 | 80 |
| SV660NT0121 | ||
| SV660NT0171 | 35 | 100 |
| SV660NT0211 | ||
| SV660NT0261 |
What does parameter 2002-19h define, and what are the recommendations?
Parameter 2002-19h defines the heat dissipation coefficient (as a percentage) of the regenerative resistor, applicable to both internal and external resistors. It reflects the cooling conditions.
| Sub-index | Name | Setting Condition & Effective Time | At stop & Immediately | Data Structure | Data Type | Access | Mapping | Related Mode | Data Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 19h | Resistor heat dissipation coefficient | Related Mode | Immediately | – | Uint16 | RW | – | – | 10 to 100 (%) | 30 |
Recommendations:
Set to 30% or lower for natural ventilation.
Set to 50% or lower for forced-air cooling.
What does parameter 2002-1Ah define?
Parameter 2002-1Ah defines the type of regenerative resistor being used (internal, external) and the mode of absorbing and releasing braking energy.
| Sub-index | Name | Setting Condition & Effective Time | At stop & Immediately | Data Structure | Data Type | Access | Mapping | Related Mode | Data Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1Ah | Regenerative resistor setting | Related Mode | Immediately | – | Uint16 | RW | – | – | 0 to 3 | 0 |
Refer to “5.4.3 Regenerative Resistor Settings” in the PDF to select the proper setting.
What does parameter 2002-1Bh define?
Parameter 2002-1Bh defines the power rating (in Watts) of the external regenerative resistor connected to the drive.
| Sub-index | Name | Setting Condition & Effective Time | At stop & Immediately | Data Structure | Data Type | Access | Mapping | Related Mode | Data Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1Bh | Power of external regenerative resistor | Related Mode | Immediately | – | Uint16 | RW | – | – | 1 to 65535 (Unit: W) | 40 |
Note: The value set in 2002-1Bh cannot be lower than the calculated braking power required by the application.
What does parameter 2002-1Ch define, and what are the precautions for setting its value?
Parameter 2002-1Ch defines the resistance value (in Ohms) of the external regenerative resistor connected to the drive.
| Sub-index | Name | Setting Condition & Effective Time | At stop & Immediately | Data Structure | Data Type | Access | Mapping | Related Mode | Data Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1Ch | Resistance of external regenerative resistor | Related Mode | Immediately | – | Uint16 | RW | – | – | 15 to 1000 (Ω) | 50 |
Precautions:
An external resistor is needed if the calculated braking energy/power exceeds the capacity of the internal capacitor/resistor.
Setting a value that is too large may cause E400.0 (Main circuit overvoltage) if energy isn’t absorbed quickly enough.
Setting a value lower than the minimum permissible resistance (2002-16h) leads to E922.0 (Resistance of external regenerative resistor too small), potentially causing E201.4 (Phase-N overcurrent) if ignored.
Use either an external resistor OR the built-in one, never both. Remove the jumper between P and D when using an external resistor, and connect the external resistor between terminals P and C.
How can system parameters be initialized using 2002-20h?
Parameter 2002-20h is used to restore default parameter values or clear fault records.
| Sub-index | Name | Setting Condition & Effective Time | At stop & Immediately | Data Structure | Data Type | Access | Mapping | Related Mode | Data Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 20h | System parameter initialization | Related Mode | Immediately | – | Uint16 | RW | – | – | 0 to 2 | 0 |
| Setpoint | Description | Remarks |
|---|---|---|
| 0 | No operation | – |
| 1 | Restore default setting | Restores default values except for parameters in groups 2000h (Motor) and 2001h (Drive). |
| 2 | Clear fault records | Clears the latest 10 faults and warnings from the history. |
If necessary, use the Inovance software tool to back up parameters (except those in groups 2000h and 2001h).
What does parameter 2002-21h control?
Parameter 2002-21h sets the default parameter offset within group 200Bh (monitored parameters) that the keypad will display when switched to the monitored parameter display mode.
| Sub-index | Name | Setting Condition & Effective Time | During running & Immediately | Data Structure | Data Type | Access | Mapping | Related Mode | Data Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 21h | Default keypad display | Related Mode | Immediately | – | Uint16 | RW | – | – | 0 to 99 | 50 |
If a parameter offset is set that does not exist in group 200Bh, the keypad will not switch to the monitored parameter display mode.
What does parameter 2002-24h control?
Parameter 2002-24h controls the refresh frequency of the data displayed on the keypad.
| Sub-index | Name | Setting Condition & Effective Time | During running & Immediately | Data Structure | Data Type | Access | Mapping | Related Mode | Data Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 24h | Keypad data refresh frequency | Related Mode | Immediately | – | Uint16 | RW | – | – | 0 to 20 | 0 |
What is contained in Group 2003h?
Group 2003h contains manufacturer-specific parameters related to the Terminal Inputs (DIs).
| Index | Name | Setting Condition & Effective Time | Data Structure | Data Type | Access | Mapping | Related Mode | Data Range | OD Data Range | Default | OD Default Value |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 2003h | Terminal input parameters | Related Mode | ARR | Uint16 | – | Yes | – | – | – | – | – |
| Sub-index | Name | Setting Condition & Effective Time | Data Structure | Data Type | Access | Mapping | Related Mode | Data Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 00h | Number of entries | Related Mode | – | Uint8 | RO | No | – | – | 65 |
This group includes parameters for assigning functions to DIs, setting their logic levels, and configuring filter times.
How is the function of DI1 defined using 2003-03h, and what are the available functions?
Parameter 2003-03h assigns a specific function to Digital Input 1 (DI1).
| Sub-index | Name | Setting Condition & Effective Time | During running & At stop | Data Structure | Data Type | Access | Mapping | Related Mode | Data Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 03h | DI1 function | Related Mode | At stop | – | Uint16 | RW | – | – | 0 to 40 | 14 |
Available functions (setpoints):
| Value | DI Function |
|---|---|
| 0 | No function assigned |
| 2 | Fault reset |
| 14 | Positive limit switch |
| 15 | Negative limit switch |
| 31 | Home switch |
| 34 | Emergency stop |
| 38 | Touch probe 1 |
| 39 | Touch probe 2 |
Notes:
Setting a value not listed results in E122.1.
Do not assign the same function to different DIs (causes E122.1).
Assigned functions remain active even if the parameter setting is later changed to unassign it (cycle power or reassign function to clear).
DI1-DI4 require input signal width > 1 ms. DI5 requires > 0.25 ms.
When touch probe function is enabled, DI5 defaults to probe 1, DI4 defaults to probe 2.
How is the level logic for DI1 set using 2003-04h?
Parameter 2003-04h sets the active logic level for DI1 when its assigned function is active.
| Sub-index | Name | Setting Condition & Effective Time | During running & At stop | Data Structure | Data Type | Access | Mapping | Related Mode | Data Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 04h | DI1 logic | Related Mode | At stop | – | Uint16 | RW | – | – | 0 to 1 | 0 |
| Setpoint | DI Logic Upon Active DI Function | Remarks |
|---|---|---|
| 0 | Low level | Low level must remain active for more than 1 ms. |
| 1 | High level | High level must remain active for more than 1 ms. |
Set the logic based on the host controller and peripheral circuits. DI1-DI4 require >1ms active signal width.
How is the function of DI2 defined using 2003-05h?
Parameter 2003-05h assigns a specific function to Digital Input 2 (DI2). It uses the same function codes as DI1 (see 2003-03h table).
| Sub-index | Name | Setting Condition & Effective Time | During running & At stop | Data Structure | Data Type | Access | Mapping | Related Mode | Data Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 05h | DI2 function | Related Mode | At stop | – | Uint16 | RW | – | – | 0 to 40 | 15 |
How is the level logic for DI2 set using 2003-06h?
Parameter 2003-06h sets the active logic level for DI2 (0 for Low level, 1 for High level) when its assigned function is active.
| Sub-index | Name | Setting Condition & Effective Time | During running & At stop | Data Structure | Data Type | Access | Mapping | Related Mode | Data Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 06h | DI2 logic | Related Mode | At stop | – | Uint16 | RW | – | – | 0 to 1 | 0 |
What does parameter 2003-3Fh define?
Parameter 2003-3Fh defines the filter time for Digital Input 3 (DI3).
| Sub-index | Name | Setting Condition & Effective Time | During running & At stop | Data Structure | Data Type | Access | Mapping | Related Mode | Data Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 3Fh | DI3 filter time | Related Mode | At stop | – | Uint16 | RW | – | – | 0 to 50000 | 50 |
What does parameter 2003-40h define?
Parameter 2003-40h defines the filter time for Digital Input 4 (DI4).
| Sub-index | Name | Setting Condition & Effective Time | During running & At stop | Data Structure | Data Type | Access | Mapping | Related Mode | Data Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 40h | DI4 filter time | Related Mode | At stop | – | Uint16 | RW | – | – | 0 to 50000 | 50 |
What does parameter 2003-41h define?
Parameter 2003-41h defines the filter time for Digital Input 5 (DI5).
| Sub-index | Name | Setting Condition & Effective Time | During running & At stop | Data Structure | Data Type | Access | Mapping | Related Mode | Data Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 41h | DI5 filter time | Related Mode | At stop | – | Uint16 | RW | – | – | 0 to 50000 | 50 |
What is contained in Group 2004h?
Group 2004h contains manufacturer-specific parameters related to the Terminal Output Terminals (DOs).
| Index | Name | Setting Condition & Effective Time | Data Structure | Data Type | Access | Mapping | Related Mode | Data Range | OD Data Range | Default | OD Default Value |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 2004h | Terminal output parameters | Related Mode | ARR | Uint16 | – | Yes | – | – | – | – | – |
| Sub-index | Name | Setting Condition & Effective Time | Data Structure | Data Type | Access | Mapping | Related Mode | Data Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 00h | Number of entries | Related Mode | – | Uint8 | RO | No | – | – | 6 |
This group includes parameters for assigning functions to DOs and setting their logic levels.
How is the function of DO1 defined using 2004-01h, and what are the available functions?
Parameter 2004-01h assigns a specific function to Digital Output 1 (DO1).
| Sub-index | Name | Setting Condition & Effective Time | During running & Immediately | Data Structure | Data Type | Access | Mapping | Related Mode | Data Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 01h | DO1 function | Related Mode | Immediately | – | Uint16 | RW | – | – | 0 to 32 | 1 |
| Value | Function |
|---|---|
| 0 | No function assigned |
| 1 | Servo ready |
| 2 | Motor rotating |
| 9 | Brake |
| 10 | Warning |
| 11 | Fault |
| 25 | Comparison output |
| 31 | Forced EtherCAT output |
| 32 | EDM safety state output |
Different VDOs (Virtual Digital Outputs) can be assigned with the same function.
How is the level logic for DO1 set using 2004-02h, and what is the minimum signal width?
Parameter 2004-02h defines the active logic level for DO1 when its assigned function is active.
| Sub-index | Name | Setting Condition & Effective Time | During running & Immediately | Data Structure | Data Type | Access | Mapping | Related Mode | Data Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 02h | DO1 logic | Related Mode | Immediately | – | Uint16 | RW | – | – | 0 to 1 | 0 |
| Setpoint | DO1 Logic Upon Active DO Function | Transistor Status | Minimum Signal Width |
|---|---|---|---|
| 0 | Low level | ON | 1 ms (The active level must persist for at least 1 ms) |
| 1 | High level | OFF |
DO1 to DO3 are normal DOs requiring a minimum output signal width of 1 ms. Ensure the host controller can receive valid DO logic changes. Before relying on this logic, check the setting of 200D-12h (Forced DI/DO selection) to see if the DO level is determined by actual status or forced DO commands.
How is the function of DO2 defined using 2004-03h?
Parameter 2004-03h assigns a specific function to Digital Output 2 (DO2). It uses the same function codes as DO1 (see 2004-01h table).
| Sub-index | Name | Setting Condition & Effective Time | During running & Immediately | Data Structure | Data Type | Access | Mapping | Related Mode | Data Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 03h | DO2 function | Related Mode | Immediately | – | Uint16 | RW | – | – | 0 to 32 | 11 |
How is the level logic for DO2 set using 2004-04h?
Parameter 2004-04h sets the active logic level for DO2 (0 for Low level = ON, 1 for High level = OFF) when its assigned function is active.
| Sub-index | Name | Setting Condition & Effective Time | During running & Immediately | Data Structure | Data Type | Access | Mapping | Related Mode | Data Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 04h | DO2 logic | Related Mode | Immediately | – | Uint16 | RW | – | – | 0 to 1 | 0 |
How is the function of DO3 defined using 2004-05h?
Parameter 2004-05h assigns a specific function to Digital Output 3 (DO3). It uses the same function codes as DO1 (see 2004-01h table).
| Sub-index | Name | Setting Condition & Effective Time | During running & Immediately | Data Structure | Data Type | Access | Mapping | Related Mode | Data Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 05h | DO3 function | Related Mode | Immediately | – | Uint16 | RW | – | – | 0 to 32 | 9 |
How is the level logic for DO3 set using 2004-06h?
Parameter 2004-06h sets the active logic level for DO3 (0 for Low level = ON, 1 for High level = OFF) when its assigned function is active.
| Sub-index | Name | Setting Condition & Effective Time | During running & Immediately | Data Structure | Data Type | Access | Mapping | Related Mode | Data Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 06h | DO3 logic | Related Mode | Immediately | – | Uint16 | RW | – | – | 0 to 1 | 0 |
What does parameter 2004-18h define?
Parameter 2004-18h defines the behavior of the forced EtherCAT digital outputs (DO1, DO2, DO3) when the EtherCAT network state is non-operational (non-OP).
| Sub-index | Name | Setting Condition & Effective Time | During running & Immediately | Data Structure | Data Type | Access | Mapping | Related Mode | Data Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 18h | EtherCAT forced DO output logic in non-OP status | Related Mode | Immediately | – | Uint16 | RW | – | – | 0 to 7 | 1 |
| Value | Function |
|---|---|
| 0 | Status of DO1 to DO3 unchanged in the non-OP status |
| 1 | No output in DO1 and status of others unchanged in the non-OP status |
| 2 | No output in DO2 and status of others unchanged in the non-OP status |
| 3 | No output in DO1 or DO2 and status of others unchanged in the non-OP status |
| 4 | No output in DO3, status of others unchanged in the non-OP status |
| 5 | No output in DO1 or DO3, status of others unchanged in the non-OP status |
| 6 | No output in DO2 or DO3 and status of others unchanged in the non-OP status |
| 7 | No output in D01, DO2, or DO3. |
(Note: This is the same parameter as H04-23).
What is contained in Group 2005h?
Group 2005h contains manufacturer-specific parameters related to Position Control.
| Index | Name | Setting Condition & Effective Time | Data Structure | Data Type | Access | Mapping | Related Mode | Data Range | OD Data Range | Default | OD Default Value |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 2005h | Position control parameters | Related Mode | ARR | Uint16 | – | Yes | – | – | – | – | – |
| Sub-index | Name | Setting Condition & Effective Time | Data Structure | Data Type | Access | Mapping | Related Mode | Data Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 00h | Number of entries | Related Mode | – | Uint8 | RO | No | – | – | 55 |
This group includes parameters for filters, gear ratios, feedforward control, homing, and absolute position offsets.
What does parameter 2005-05h define?
Parameter 2005-05h defines the time constant for the first-order low-pass filter applied to the position command input.
| Sub-index | Name | Setting Condition & Effective Time | At stop & Immediately | Data Structure | Data Type | Access | Mapping | Related Mode | Data Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 05h | First-order low-pass filter time constant | Related Mode | Immediately | – | Uint16 | RW | Yes | PP/HM/CSP | 0-65535 (unit: 0.1 ms) | 0 |
What does parameter 2005-06h define?
Parameter 2005-06h defines the time constant for the first moving average filter applied to the position command input.
| Sub-index | Name | Setting Condition & Effective Time | At stop & Immediately | Data Structure | Data Type | Access | Mapping | Related Mode | Data Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 06h | Moving average filter time constant 1 | Related Mode | Immediately | – | Uint16 | RW | Yes | PP/HM/CSP | 0-10000 (unit: 0.1 ms) | 0 |
What does parameter 2005-07h define?
Parameter 2005-07h defines the time constant for the second moving average filter applied to the position command input.
| Sub-index | Name | Setting Condition & Effective Time | At stop & Immediately | Data Structure | Data Type | Access | Mapping | Related Mode | Data Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 07h | Moving average filter time constant 2 | Related Mode | Immediately | – | Uint16 | RW | Yes | PP/HM/CSP | 0-1280 (unit: 0.1 ms) | 0 |
What does parameter 2005-08h define?
Parameter 2005-08h defines the numerator of the electronic gear ratio.
| Sub-index | Name | Setting Condition & Effective Time | At stop & Immediately | Data Structure | Data Type | Access | Mapping | Related Mode | Data Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 08h | Numerator of electronic gear ratio | Related Mode | Immediately | – | Uint16 | RW | Yes | PP/HM/CSP/CSV/PV | 0-4294967295 | 1 |
What does parameter 2005-0Ah define?
Parameter 2005-0Ah defines the denominator of the electronic gear ratio.
| Sub-index | Name | Setting Condition & Effective Time | At stop & Immediately | Data Structure | Data Type | Access | Mapping | Related Mode | Data Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 0Ah | Denominator of electronic gear ratio | Related Mode | Immediately | – | Uint16 | RW | Yes | PP/HM/CSP/CSV/PV | 0-4294967295 | 1 |
What does parameter 2005-14h define, and what are the speed feedforward sources?
Parameter 2005-14h defines the source of the speed loop feedforward signal used in position control mode to improve position reference responsiveness.
| Sub-index | Name | Setting Condition & Effective Time | At stop & Immediately | Data Structure | Data Type | Access | Mapping | Related Mode | Data Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 14h | Speed feedforward control | Related Mode | Immediately | – | Uint16 | RW | Yes | PP/HM/CSP | 0 to 3 | 1 |
| Setpoint | Speed feedforward source | Remarks |
|---|---|---|
| 0 | No speed feedforward | – |
| 1 | Internal speed feedforward | Uses the speed information corresponding to the position reference (encoder unit) as the feedforward source. |
| 2 | 60B1h used as speed offset | Object 60B1h (Velocity offset) is used as the source of external speed offset signal in CSP mode. Polarity is set by bit6 of 607Eh. |
| 3 | Zero phase control | Can be used with H08-17 (zero phase delay) to reduce position follow-up deviation during startup. |
Speed feedforward control also uses parameters 2008-13h (Speed feedforward filter time constant) and 2008-14h (Speed feedforward gain).
What is parameter 2005-1Fh used for and under what condition?
Parameter 2005-1Fh is used to execute a local homing procedure.
| Sub-index | Name | Setting Condition & Effective Time | At stop & Immediately | Data Structure | Data Type | Access | Mapping | Related Mode | Data Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1Fh | Local homing | Related Mode | Immediately | – | Uint16 | RW | Yes | Any | 0, 6 | 0 |
This function should only be used when the standard homing method in the CiA402 profile (using bit 4 of the control word) cannot be called by the host controller.
Note: Use this function only in the S-OFF (Servo OFF) state. Using it otherwise may cause motor malfunction due to abrupt changes in position feedback. After homing is done successfully, the present position feedback will be cleared (set to the home offset value).
What does parameter 2005-24h define?
Parameter 2005-24h defines the maximum allowed time (in 0.1s units) for the homing procedure to complete.
| Sub-index | Name | Setting Condition & Effective Time | During running & Immediately | Data Structure | Data Type | Access | Mapping | Related Mode | Data Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 24h | Homing time limit | Related Mode | Immediately | – | Uint16 | RW | – | HM | 0 to 65535 (unit: 0.1s) | 50000 |
If the homing procedure does not complete within this time limit, or if the value is set too small, error E601.0 (Homing timeout) will occur.
What does parameter 2005-25h define?
Parameter 2005-25h defines the local home offset value. This value is used in conjunction with the Local Homing function (2005-1Fh). After local homing is successfully completed, the present position feedback is set to the value of this parameter.
| Sub-index | Name | Setting Condition & Effective Time | During running & Immediately | Data Structure | Data Type | Access | Mapping | Related Mode | Data Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 25h | Local home offset | Related Mode | Immediately | – | Int32 | RW | – | HM | -1073741824 to +1073741824 | 0 |
How is Torque Feedforward Control (Sub-index 0Ch) configured and used?
This parameter defines whether to enable internal torque feedforward in non-torque control modes. Torque feedforward improves torque reference responsiveness and reduces position deviation during acceleration/deceleration at constant speed.
Configuration:
| Value | Torque feedforward control | Remarks |
|---|---|---|
| 0 | / | – |
| 1 (Default) | Internal torque feedforward | The torque feedforward signal source is the speed reference, coming from the position controller output (position modes) or user-set speed references (speed control mode). |
| 2 | 60B2h as external torque feedforward | 60B2h is used as the external torque offset signal source in CSP and CSV modes. The polarity is set by bit5 of 607Eh. |
Note: When value 2 (60B2h) is used, you can adjust its operating effect using 2008-16h (Torque feedforward gain) and 2008-15h (Torque feedforward filter time constant).
Related Parameters: 2008-15h (Torque feedforward filter time constant – typo in PDF, should be filter time constant), 2008-16h (Torque feedforward gain). Refer to section “6.5.4 Feedforward Gain” for details.
What does the Acceleration/Deceleration ramp time constant of jog speed reference (Sub-index 0Dh) define?
This parameter defines the acceleration/deceleration time (in milliseconds, ms) for jog speed references when using the jog mode set through HOD-11 or the software tool. The default value is 10 ms, and the range is 0 to 65535 ms.
What is the Speed feedforward filter time constant (Sub-index 0Eh)?
This parameter defines the speed feedforward filter time constant in microseconds (us). It helps smooth the speed feedforward signal. The default value is 0 us, and the range is 0 to 2000 us.
What are Torque Control Parameters (Group 2007h)?
Group 2007h parameters are used to configure settings related to torque control.
Parameters include:
00h: Number of entries (Read Only, Default 40)
04h: Torque reference value set through keypad (Range -4000 to +4000, unit 0.1%, Default 0)
06h: Torque reference filter time constant 1 (Range 0 to 3000, unit 0.01 ms, Default 79)
07h: Torque reference filter time constant 2 (Range 0 to 3000, unit 0.01 ms, Default 79)
0Ah: Positive internal torque limit (Range 0 to 4000, unit 0.1%, Default 3500)
0Bh: Negative internal torque limit (Range 0 to 4000, unit 0.1%, Default 3500)
10h: Emergency stop torque (Range 0 to 4000, unit 0.1%, Default 1000)
14h: Positive internal speed limit in torque control (Range 0 to 6000 RPM, Default 3000)
15h: Negative internal torque limit in torque control (Range 0 to 6000 RPM, Default 3000)
16h: Base value for torque reached (Range 0 to 4000, unit 0.1%, Default 0)
17h: Threshold for valid torque reach (Range 0 to 4000, unit 0.1%, Default 200)
18h: Threshold for invalid torque reach (Range 0 to 4000, unit 0.1%, Default 100)
19h: Field-weakening depth (Range 60 to 115, unit 100%, Default 115)
1Ah: Max. permissible demagnetizing current (Range 1 to 100, unit 100%, Default 100)
1Bh: Field-weakening selection (0: Disable, 1: Enable, Default 0)
1Ch: Field-weakening gain (Range 1 to 1000, Default 30)
25h: Time constant of low-pass filter 2 (Range 0-1000, unit 0.01 ms, Default 0)
26h: Torque reference filter selection (0: First-order, 1: Biquad, Default 0)
27h: Biquad filter attenuation ratio (Range 0 to 50, Default 16)
How do Torque reference filter time constants (2007-06h, 2007-07h) affect operation?
These parameters define the time constants for two low-pass filters applied to the torque reference. Low-pass filtering helps smooth torque references and reduce vibration.
Effect:
Increasing the time constant (larger setpoint) enhances smoothing but delays responsiveness.
Decreasing the time constant improves responsiveness but may allow more vibration.
Note:
Filter 1 (2007-06h) is used by default.
Filter 2 (2007-07h) can be switched to under certain conditions using the gain switchover function (see “6.5.2 Gain Switchover”).
Pay attention to responsiveness when setting these values.
What are the Internal Torque Limits (2007-0Ah, 2007-0Bh) and Speed Limits (2007-14h, 2007-15h) in Local Torque Mode?
These parameters set limits specifically when operating in the local torque mode (H02-00 = 2).
2007-0Ah (Positive internal torque limit): Sets the maximum positive torque allowed (Unit: 0.1%, Default: 3500).
2007-0Bh (Negative internal torque limit): Sets the maximum negative torque allowed (Unit: 0.1%, Default: 3500).
2007-14h (Positive internal speed limit): Sets the maximum positive speed allowed (Unit: RPM, Default: 3000).
2007-15h (Negative internal speed limit): Sets the maximum negative speed allowed (Unit: RPM, Default: 3000).
Notes:
These limits are only valid in local torque mode.
For torque limits in EtherCAT mode, use objects 60E0h, 60E1h, or 6072h.
For speed limits in EtherCAT, CST, and PT modes, use object 607Fh.
Use torque limits with caution; too small a value can cause insufficient motor torque.
If the setpoint exceeds the drive/motor’s maximum torque, the actual torque will be limited to that maximum.
How does the Torque Reach function work (2007-16h, 2007-17h, 2007-18h)?
The torque reach function judges if the actual torque reference (A, viewed in 200B-03h) has reached a defined range based on a base value and thresholds.
2007-16h (Base value for torque reached): Base value B (Unit: 0.1%, Default: 0).
2007-17h (Threshold for valid torque reach): Offset C for activation (Unit: 0.1%, Default: 200).
2007-18h (Threshold for invalid torque reach): Offset D for deactivation (Unit: 0.1%, Default: 100).
Operation:
The “Torque Reached” signal (bit10 of status word 6041h) is activated when: |A| ≥ B + C
The “Torque Reached” signal is deactivated when: |A| < B + D
This function outputs a flag to the host controller when the actual torque is within the valid range.
What are Gain Parameters (Group 2008h)?
Group 2008h parameters are used to configure the control loop gains and related functions like feedforward and gain switching.
Parameters include:
00h: Number of entries (Read Only, Default 65)
01h: Speed loop gain (Range 1 to 20000, unit 0.1 Hz, Default 400)
02h: Speed loop integral time constant (Range 15 to 51200, unit 0.01 ms, Default 1989)
03h: Position loop gain (Range 1 to 20000, unit 0.1 Hz, Default 640)
04h: 2nd speed loop gain (Range 1 to 20000, unit 0.1 Hz, Default 750)
05h: 2nd speed loop integral time constant (Range 15 to 51200, unit 0.01 ms, Default 1061)
06h: 2nd position loop gain (Range 1 to 20000, unit 0.1 Hz, Default 1200)
09h: 2nd gain mode setting (Range 0 to 1, Default 1)
0Ah: Gain switchover condition (Range 0 to 10, Default 0)
0Bh: Gain switchover delay (Range 0 to 10000, unit 0.1 ms, Default 50)
0Ch: Gain switchover level (Range 0 to 20000, Default 50)
0Dh: Gain switchover dead time (Range 0 to 20000, Default 30)
0Eh: Position gain switchover time (Range 0 to 10000, unit 0.1 ms, Default 30)
10h: Load moment of inertia ratio (Range 0 to 12000, unit 1%, Default 100)
12h: Zero phase delay (Range 0 to 40, unit 0.1 ms, Default 0)
13h: Speed feedforward filter time constant (Range 0 to 6400, unit 0.01 ms, Default 50)
14h: Speed feedforward gain (Range 0 to 1000, unit 0.1%, Default 0)
15h: Torque feedforward filter time constant (Range 0 to 6400, unit 0.01 ms, Default 50)
16h: Torque feedforward gain (Range 0 to 3000, unit 0.1%, Default 0)
17h: Speed feedback filtering option (Range 0 to 4, Default 0)
18h: Cutoff frequency of speed feedback low-pass filter (Range 0 to 8000 Hz, Default 8000)
19h: Pseudo derivative feedback and feedforward control coefficient (Range 0 to 2000, unit 0.1%, Default 1000)
How do Speed Loop Gain (2008-01h) and Integral Time Constant (2008-02h) affect performance?
Speed Loop Gain (2008-01h): Defines the proportional gain of the speed loop. It determines the responsiveness.
Larger setpoint = quicker responsiveness.
Too large setpoint may cause vibration.
If position loop gain is increased, increase speed loop gain as well.
Speed Loop Integral Time Constant (2008-02h): Defines the integral time constant of the speed loop.
Smaller setpoint = better integral action, quicker reduction of deviation to zero.
Setting to 512.00 ms disables integral action.
How does Position Loop Gain (2008-03h) affect performance?
This parameter defines the proportional gain of the position loop. It determines responsiveness in position control modes.
Larger setpoint = shorter positioning time (quicker responsiveness).
Too large setpoint may cause vibration.
How is the 2nd Gain Set configured and used (2008-04h, 05h, 06h, 09h)?
The servo drive supports two sets of gains. The second gain set allows for different control loop tuning under specific conditions.
2008-04h: 2nd speed loop gain.
2008-05h: 2nd speed loop integral time constant.
2008-06h: 2nd position loop gain.
2008-09h (2nd gain mode setting): Defines how the switchover between the 1st and 2nd gain sets occurs.
Setpoint Mode 0 Fixed to the 1st gain set, switched between P and PI through bit26 of external 60FE (switched to P when bit26 of 60FE is set to 1). 1 (Default) Switched between the 1st gain set (2008-01h to 2008-03h, 2007-06h) and the 2nd gain set (2008-04h to 2008-06h, 2007-07h) as defined by 2008-0Ah (Gain switchover condition).
The first gain set includes parameters 2008-01h, 2008-02h, 2008-03h, and 2007-06h (Torque reference filter time constant 1 – Note: PDF incorrectly lists 2007-07h here, but gain switchover table references 06h). The second gain set includes 2008-04h, 2008-05h, 2008-06h, and 2007-07h (Torque reference filter time constant 2).
For details on gain switchover conditions, see parameter 2008-0Ah and section “6.5.2 Gain Switchover”.
What are the conditions for Gain Switchover (2008-0Ah)?
Parameter 2008-0Ah defines the condition used to switch between the 1st and 2nd gain sets when 2008-09h is set to 1.
| Value | Gain switchover condition | Remarks |
|---|---|---|
| 0 (Default) | Fixed to the 1st gain set | The 1st gain set always applies. |
| 1 | Switched through external DI | Gains are switched through bit26 signal of 60FE. bit26 invalid: 1st gain set. bit26 valid: 2nd gain set. (If bit26 cannot be assigned, 1st gain set applies). |
| 2 | Torque reference too large | Switch to 2nd set if |Torque ref| > (Level + Dead time) [%]. Return to 1st set if |Torque ref| < (Level - Dead time) [%] for delay (2008-0Bh). |
| 3 | Speed reference too large | Switch to 2nd set if |Speed ref| > (Level + Dead time) [RPM]. Return to 1st set if |Speed ref| < (Level - Dead time) [RPM] for delay (2008-0Bh). (Valid only in non-speed control mode). |
| 4 | Speed reference too large (Rate of change) | Switch to 2nd set if |Rate of change Speed ref| > (Level + Dead time) [10 RPM/s]. Return to 1st set if |Rate of change Speed ref| < (Level - Dead time) [10 RPM/s] for delay (2008-0Bh). (In speed control mode, 1st gain set always applies). |
| 5 | Speed reference high-speed/low-speed threshold | Gradual switch to 2nd set starts if |Speed ref| > (Level – Dead time) [RPM], completes when |Speed ref| reaches (Level + Dead time) [RPM]. Gradual return to 1st set starts if |Speed ref| < (Level + Dead time) [RPM], completes when |Speed ref| reaches (Level - Dead time) [RPM]. |
| 6 | Position deviation too large | Switch to 2nd set if |Pos deviation| > (Level + Hysteresis) [encoder unit]. Return to 1st set if |Pos deviation| < (Level - Hysteresis) [encoder unit] for delay (2008-0Bh). (Valid only in position control mode). |
| 7 | Position reference available | Switch to 2nd set if Pos ref is not 0. Return to 1st set if Pos ref is 0 for delay (2008-0Bh). (Valid only in position control mode). |
| 8 | Positioning completed | Switch to 2nd set if positioning is not done. Return to 1st set if positioning is not done within delay (2008-0Bh). (Valid only in position control mode). |
| 9 | Actual speed too large | Switch to 2nd set if |Actual speed| > (Level + Dead time) [RPM]. Return to 1st set if |Actual speed| < (Level - Dead time) [RPM] for delay (2008-0Bh). (Valid only in position control mode). |
| 10 | Position reference + Actual speed | Switch to 2nd set if Pos ref is not 0. Return to 1st set if Pos ref is 0 for delay (2008-0Bh) AND |Actual speed| < (Level) [RPM]. If |Actual speed| remains < (Level - Dead time) [RPM] after delay, return fully to 1st set (except speed integral time constant remains 2008-05h). (Valid only in position control mode). |
Level and Dead Time/Hysteresis values are set by 2008-0Ch and 2008-0Dh respectively. The delay for returning to the 1st gain set is defined by 2008-0Bh.
How are Gain Switchover Delay (2008-0Bh), Level (2008-0Ch), and Dead Time (2008-0Dh) used?
2008-0Bh (Gain switchover delay): Defines the delay time (unit: 0.1 ms) before the servo drive returns from the 2nd gain set to the 1st gain set, after the return condition is met (as specified in 2008-0Ah).
2008-0Ch (Gain switchover level): Defines the threshold level used in the gain switchover condition (2008-0Ah). The unit varies depending on the condition (e.g., %, RPM, encoder units).
2008-0Dh (Gain switchover dead time): Defines the dead time or hysteresis value used with the level (2008-0Ch) in the gain switchover condition (2008-0Ah). The unit varies depending on the condition.
Note: Switchover is affected by both level and dead time. The unit depends on the selected condition in 2008-0Ah. Set 2008-0Ch (Level) higher than 2008-0Dh (Dead Time); otherwise, 2008-0Ch will be automatically set equal to 2008-0Dh.
What is the Load Moment of Inertia Ratio (2008-10h) and how is it set?
This parameter defines the ratio of the mechanical load inertia relative to the motor’s moment of inertia (Unit: 1%).
Setpoint 0: Indicates the motor is disconnected from the load.
Setpoint 100 (1.00): Indicates the load inertia equals the motor inertia.
Setting:
Can be set manually.
If online inertia auto-tuning (2009-04h ≠ 0) is active, the drive sets this value automatically, and manual setting is disabled.
Manual setting is allowed only when online inertia auto-tuning is off (2009-04h = 0).
Note: When this value matches the actual inertia ratio, the speed loop gain (2008-01h/2008-04h) indicates the actual maximum follow-up frequency of the speed loop.
How are Speed Feedforward Gain (2008-14h) and Filter (2008-13h) adjusted?
Speed feedforward, used in position control mode, improves responsiveness and reduces position deviation at constant speed. It’s calculated as 2008-14h multiplied by the speed feedforward signal (part of the speed reference).
2008-13h (Speed feedforward filter time constant): Defines the filter time constant (unit: 0.01 ms). Default 50.
2008-14h (Speed feedforward gain): Defines the gain (unit: 0.1%). Default 0.
Adjustment Procedure:
Set 2008-13h (Filter) to a fixed value first.
Gradually increase 2008-14h (Gain) from 0 until the desired effect is achieved.
Adjust both 2008-13h and 2008-14h repeatedly to achieve a balanced setting.
Note: For the speed feedforward function and signal selection, refer to parameter 2005-14h.
How are Torque Feedforward Gain (2008-16h) and Filter (2008-15h) adjusted?
Torque feedforward, used in non-torque control modes, improves responsiveness to speed/position references and reduces position deviation at constant speed. It’s calculated as 2008-16h multiplied by the torque feedforward signal (part of the torque reference).
2008-15h (Torque feedforward filter time constant): Defines the filter time constant (unit: 0.01 ms). Default 50.
2008-16h (Torque feedforward gain): Defines the gain (unit: 0.1%). Default 0.
Adjustment Procedure:
Use the default value for 2008-15h (Filter).
Gradually increase 2008-16h (Gain) to enhance the effect.
If speed overshoot occurs, keep 2008-16h unchanged and increase 2008-20h (related parameter, not shown here).
Adjust both 2008-15h and 2008-16h repeatedly until a balanced setting is achieved.
Note: For the torque feedforward function and signal selection, refer to parameter 2006-0Ch.
How does Speed Feedback Filtering (2008-17h, 2008-18h) work?
2008-17h (Speed feedback filtering option): Defines the number of moving average filtering times for speed feedback (Range 0-4, Default 0).
Larger setpoint = smaller speed feedback fluctuation, but larger feedback delay.
2008-18h (Cutoff frequency of speed feedback low-pass filter): Defines the cutoff frequency (Hz) for the first-order low-pass filter (Range 0-8000 Hz, Default 8000).
Smaller setpoint = smaller speed feedback fluctuation, but larger feedback delay.
Setting to 8000 Hz effectively negates the filtering effect.
Note: When 2008-17h > 0 (moving average is active), the low-pass filter defined by 2008-18h is invalid.
What does the Pseudo Derivative Feedback and Feedforward Control Coefficient (2008-19h) do?
This parameter defines the control mode of the speed loop.
Setpoint 200.0 (Value 2000, Unit 0.1%): PI control (default mode) is applied, featuring fast dynamic response.
Setpoint 0.0 (Value 0): Speed loop integral action is enhanced. This filters low-frequency interferences but slows down dynamic response.
By adjusting 2008-19h, you can balance good speed loop responsiveness with improved anti-interference capacity in low-frequency bands, while keeping speed feedback overshoot stable.
What are Gain Auto-tuning Parameters (Group 2009h)?
Group 2009h parameters are used to configure gain auto-tuning functions and related settings like notch filters.
Parameters include:
00h: Number of entries (Read Only, Default 60)
01h: Gain auto-tuning mode (Range 0 to 7, Default 4)
02h: Stiffness level of the 1st gain set (Range 0 to 41, Default 15)
03h: Adaptive notch mode (Range 0 to 4, Default 3)
04h: Online inertia auto-tuning mode (Range 0 to 3, Default 2)
06h: Offline inertia auto-tuning mode (Range 0 to 1, Default 1)
07h: Maximum speed in inertia auto-tuning (Range 100 to 1000 RPM, Default 500)
08h: Time constant for accelerating to max speed during inertia auto-tuning (Range 20 to 800 ms, Default 125)
09h: Waiting time after an individual inertia auto-tuning (Range 50 to 10000 ms, Default 800)
0Ah: Number of motor revolutions per inertia auto-tuning (Read Only, Range 0 to 10000, unit 0.01 r, Default 100)
0Ch: Vibration threshold (Range 0 to 1000, unit 0.1%, Default 50)
0Dh: Frequency of the 1st notch (Range 50 to 8000 Hz, Default 8000)
0Eh: Width level of the 1st notch (Range 0 to 20, Default 2)
0Fh: Depth level of the 1st notch (Range 0 to 99, Default 0)
10h: Frequency of the 2nd notch (Range 50 to 8000 Hz, Default 8000)
11h: Width level of the 2nd notch (Range 0 to 20, Default 2)
12h: Depth level of the 2nd notch (Range 0 to 99, Default 0)
13h: Frequency of the 3rd notch (Range 50 to 8000 Hz, Default 8000)
14h: Width level of the 3rd notch (Range 0 to 20, Default 2)
15h: Depth level of the 3rd notch (Range 0 to 99, Default 0)
16h: Frequency of the 4th notch (Range 50 to 8000 Hz, Default 8000)
17h: Width level of the 4th notch (Range 0 to 20, Default 2)
18h: Depth level of the 4th notch (Range 0 to 99, Default 0)
19h: Auto-tuned resonance frequency (Read Only, Range 0 to 5000 Hz, Default 0)
What is the Stiffness Level (2009-02h)?
This parameter defines the stiffness level of the servo system for the 1st gain set.
Higher stiffness level = stronger gains and quicker response.
Excessively high stiffness can cause vibration.
Range: 0 (weakest) to 41 (strongest). Default: 15.
How does Offline Inertia Auto-tuning work (2009-06h, 07h, 08h, 09h, 0Ah)?
Offline inertia auto-tuning automatically determines the load inertia ratio (2008-10h).
2009-06h (Offline inertia auto-tuning mode): Defines the tuning mode (e.g., 0: Bidirectional, 1: Unidirectional – check default). Can be enabled via keypad using 200D-03h. Refer to “6.2 Inertia Auto-tuning” for details.
2009-07h (Maximum speed): Defines the target speed (RPM) during tuning. Higher speed yields more accurate results. Use default (500 RPM) generally.
2009-08h (Acceleration time): Defines the time (ms) to accelerate from 0 RPM to the maximum speed (2009-07h).
2009-09h (Waiting time): Defines the interval (ms) between speed references when using bidirectional tuning (2009-06h = 0).
2009-0Ah (Motor revolutions): Defines the number of revolutions (unit 0.01 r) for a single tuning cycle when using bidirectional tuning (2009-06h = 0).
Note for bidirectional tuning: Ensure the motor’s movable distance at the stop position is larger than the setpoint of 2009-0Ah. If not, decrease 2009-07h (max speed) or 2009-08h (acceleration time) until it is.
How do Notch Filters work (2009-0Ch to 18h)?
Notch filters are used to suppress mechanical resonance at specific frequencies.
Parameters for each notch (1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th):
Frequency (0Dh, 10h, 13h, 16h): Defines the center frequency (Hz) of the notch, corresponding to the resonance frequency. Setting to 8000 Hz deactivates the notch (also deactivated in torque control mode if set to 8000).
Width Level (0Eh, 11h, 14h, 17h): Defines the width of the notch relative to its center frequency (ratio). Use the default value (2) generally.
Depth Level (0Fh, 12h, 15h, 18h): Defines the depth (attenuation) of the notch at its center frequency (ratio between input and output). Higher setpoint = smaller depth (weaker suppression). An excessively high setpoint can cause instability. Default is 0.
Activation:
The notch activates when current feedback exceeds the vibration threshold defined by 2009-0Ch.
Adaptive Notch:
The 3rd and 4th notches can be configured as adaptive notches (if 2009-03h = 1 or 2).
In adaptive mode, the notch parameters are updated automatically by the servo drive and cannot be modified manually.
Refer to “6.7 Vibration Suppression” for more details.
What are Fault and Protection Parameters (Group 200Ah)?
Group 200Ah parameters configure fault detection, protection mechanisms, and related settings.
Parameters include:
00h: Number of entries (Read Only, Default 60)
01h: Power input phase loss protection (0: Report E420.0, 1: Hide E420.0, Default 0)
02h: Absolute position limit (0: Inactive, 1: Active, 2: Active after homing, Default 0)
05h: Motor overload protection gain (Range 50 to 300%, Default 100)
09h: Overspeed threshold (Range 0 to 20000 RPM, Default 0)
0Bh: Threshold of excessive local position following deviation (Range 0 to 2^32-1, Default 25185824)
0Dh: Runaway protection (0: Disable, 1: Enable, Default 1)
13h: Power module over-temperature threshold (Range 120 to 175 °C, Default 135)
14h: Filter time constant of touch probe 1 (Range 0 to 630, unit 0.01 us, Default 200)
15h: Filter time constant of touch probe 2 (Range 0 to 630, unit 0.01 us, Default 200)
16h: STO function display (0: Display status “sto_”, 1: Display failure E150.0, Default 0)
1Ah: Filter time constant of speed feedback display value (Range 0 to 5000 ms, Default 50)
1Bh: Motor overload warning/fault selection (0: Disable detection, 1: Enable detection, Default 0)
1Ch: Speed DO filter time constant (Range 0 to 5000 ms, Default 50)
21h: Motor stall over-temperature protection time window (Range 10 to 65535 ms, Default 200)
22h: Motor stall over-temperature protection (0: Disable E630.0, 1: Enable E630.0, Default 1)
25h: Absolute encoder multi-turn overflow fault selection (0: Show E735.0, 1: Hide E735.0, Default 1)
29h: Overtravel compensation selection (0: Enabled, 1: Disabled, Default 0)
32h: Regenerative resistor over-temperature threshold (Range 100 to 175 °C, Default 115)
33h: Encoder communication fault tolerance threshold (Range 0 to 31, Default 3)
34h: Phase loss detection filter times (Range 3 to 36, Default 20)
35h: Encoder temperature protection threshold (0: Disable, 1: Enable, Default 0)
38h: Runaway current threshold (Range 1000 to 4000, unit 0.1%, Default 2000)
39h: Reset delay (Range 0 to 60000 ms, Default 10000)
3Ah: Runaway speed threshold (Range 1 to 1000 RPM, Default 50)
3Bh: Runaway speed filter time (Range 1 to 1000, unit 0.1 ms, Default 20)
3Ch: Runaway protection detection time (Range 10 to 1000 ms, Default 30)
4Ah: STO disconnection filter time (Range 0 to 5 ms, Default 5)
4Bh: STO fault tolerance filter time (Range 0 to 10 ms, Default 10)
4Ch: STO servo off filter time (Range 0 to 25 ms, Default 20)
49h: Maximum time of ramp-to-stop (Range 0 to 65535 ms, Default 10000)
How does Power Input Phase Loss Protection (200A-01h) work?
This parameter configures the behavior when voltage fluctuation or phase loss occurs on the power supply for SV660N drives.
0 (Default): The servo drive reports fault E420.0 (Phase loss fault).
1: E420.0 is hidden (not reported).
Notes:
If H01-10 is set to 60005 (850 W) and 200A-01h is 1, derate the drive by 80% during use.
Three-phase 220 V drives (S7R6, S012) do not need derating for single-phase power input.
Three-phase 380 V drives enter NRD (Not Ready) status on phase loss; hiding the fault will not allow operation.
How does the Absolute Position Limit (200A-02h) function?
This parameter defines if and when the absolute position limit (defined by software limits in 607Dh) is active.
0 (Default): Limit inactive.
1: Limit active always.
2: Limit active only after homing is completed successfully.
Behavior when enabled:
Position Control Mode: If the target position reference exceeds the limit, the drive uses the limit as the target and stops upon reaching it.
Non-Position Control Modes: If the absolute position feedback reaches the limit, the drive reports an overtravel fault and stops according to the mode defined in 2002-08h (Stop mode at overtravel).
How is Motor Overload Protection Gain (200A-05h) used?
This parameter adjusts the duration before a motor overload fault (E620.0) is reported, based on the motor’s temperature rise condition.
Range: 50 to 300%.
Setpoint 100% (Default): Standard overload duration.
Setpoint 50%: Time to trigger overload is halved.
Setpoint 150%: Time to trigger overload is increased by 50%.
Set this value based on the motor’s thermal characteristics. Use caution during setting.
How are Touch Probe Filters (200A-14h, 200A-15h) used?
Touch probes 1 and 2 are high-speed digital inputs (DIs). If the external input signals suffer from spike interference, these parameters can be used to filter it.
200A-14h: Filter time constant for touch probe 1 (Unit: 0.01 us, Default: 200).
200A-15h: Filter time constant for touch probe 2 (Unit: 0.01 us, Default: 200).
Note: The oscilloscope in the software tool displays the unfiltered signals. Signals with a width less than 0.25 ms will not be displayed by the oscilloscope.
How is the STO (Safe Torque Off) function status displayed or reported (200A-16h)?
Parameter 200A-16h defines the behavior after the STO function is triggered.
0 (Default): Displays STO status. The keypad shows “sto_”. No fault is reported, and the fault DO does not activate.
1: Displays STO failure. The keypad shows “E150.0”. The servo drive reports fault E150.0, and the fault DO activates.
How is Motor Stall protection configured (200A-21h, 200A-22h)?
200A-21h (Motor stall over-temperature protection time window): Defines the duration (ms) the over-temperature condition must persist before the E630.0 (Motor stall) fault is detected. Adjusting this changes the sensitivity.
200A-22h (Motor stall over-temperature protection): Enables or disables the detection mechanism for the E630.0 fault. (0: Disable, 1: Enable – Default).
What do the STO filter time parameters (200A-4Ah, 4Bh, 4Ch) define?
These parameters define filter times related to the STO function activation and reporting:
200A-4Ah (STO disconnection filter time): The time (ms) from when STO1 and STO2 are disconnected from the 24V supply until the STO status is displayed (“sto_”) or fault E150.0 is reported (depending on 200A-16h).
200A-4Bh (STO fault tolerance filter time): The time (ms) from when STO1 and STO2 inputs have different voltages until the fault E150.1 (STO wiring error) is reported.
200A-4Ch (STO servo off filter time): The time (ms) from when the STO status (“sto_”) or fault (E150.0/E150.1) is reported until the servo drive is actually turned off (servo off state).
What are Monitoring Parameters (Group 200Bh)?
Group 200Bh parameters are used to monitor the status and real-time values of the servo drive.
Parameters include (mostly Read Only):
00h: Number of entries (Default 65)
01h: Motor speed actual value (RPM, accurate to 1 RPM)
02h: Speed reference (RPM, accurate to 1 RPM)
03h: Internal torque reference (%, accurate to 0.1%)
04h: Monitored DI status (DI1-DI5)
06h: Monitored DO status (DO1-DO3)
08h: Absolute position counter (32-bit decimal, reference unit)
0Ah: Mechanical angle (degrees)
0Bh: Electrical angle (degrees, accurate to 0.1°)
0Dh: Average load rate (%, accurate to 0.1%)
10h: Position following deviation (32-bit decimal, encoder unit)
12h: Feedback pulse counter (32-bit decimal, encoder unit)
14h: Total power-on time (32-bit decimal, seconds)
19h: RMS value of phase current (A, accurate to 0.1 A)
1Bh: Bus voltage (V, accurate to 0.1 V)
1Ch: Power module temperature (°C)
22h: Fault log (Selects 1 of 10 latest faults, RW)
23h: Fault code of the selected fault
24h: Time stamp of the selected fault (seconds)
26h: Motor speed upon occurrence of the selected fault (RPM)
27h: Motor phase U current upon occurrence of the selected fault (A)
28h: Motor phase V current upon occurrence of the selected fault (A)
29h: Bus voltage upon occurrence of the selected fault (V)
2Ah: DI status upon occurrence of the selected fault
2Bh: DO status upon occurrence of the selected fault
36h: Position deviation counter (32-bit decimal, reference unit, not divided/multiplied by gear ratio)
38h: Motor speed actual value (32-bit decimal, RPM, accurate to 0.1 RPM)
3Ah: Control circuit bus voltage (V)
3Bh: Mechanical absolute position (low 32 bits, encoder unit)
3Dh: Mechanical absolute position (high 32 bits, encoder unit)
40h: Notrdy (Not ready) state (Displays code 0-4)
43h: Encoder temperature
44h: Load rate of regenerative resistor (%)
47h: Number of revolutions of the absolute encoder
48h: Single-turn position feedback of the absolute encoder (encoder unit)
4Eh: Absolute position (low 32 bits) of absolute encoder (encoder unit)
50h: Absolute position (high 32 bits) of absolute encoder (encoder unit)
52h: Single-turn position (low 32 bits) of the rotating load (encoder unit, rotation mode)
54h: Single-turn position (high 32 bits) of the rotating load (encoder unit, rotation mode)
56h: Single-turn position of the rotating load (reference unit, rotation mode)
5Bh: Group number of the abnormal parameter (for E101)
5Ch: Offset of abnormal parameter within the group (for E101)
How are Monitored DI (200B-04h) and DO (200B-06h) statuses displayed?
These parameters display the electrical status of Digital Inputs (DI1-DI5) and Digital Outputs (DO1-DO3) without filtering.
Display Logic (Keypad Segments):
Upper LED segment ON: Not active (Binary “1”)
Lower LED segment ON: Active (Binary “0”)
Example DI (200B-04h): If DI1 is active (Low) and DI2-DI5 are inactive (High), the binary value is 11110. The value read via software is 30.
Example DO (200B-06h): If DO1 is active (Low) and DO2-DO3 are inactive (High), the binary value is 110. The value read via software is 6.
How is the Not Ready state (200B-40h) indicated?
Parameter 200B-40h displays a code indicating the reason the servo drive is in the “Not Ready” state.
| Display value | Meaning |
|---|---|
| 0 | None |
| 1 | Control circuit power supply error (H0B-57) |
| 2 | Phase loss detection error |
| 3 | Main circuit power supply error (including short-to-ground error) |
| 4 | Other servo drive faults |
What are Auxiliary Function Parameters (Group 200Dh)?
Group 200Dh parameters control auxiliary functions like software reset, fault reset, auto-tuning activation, jog, and forced I/O.
Parameters include:
00h: Number of entries (Read Only, Default 21)
01h: Software reset (0: No operation, 1: Enable, Default 0)
02h: Fault reset (0: No operation, 1: Enable, Default 0)
03h: Offline inertia auto-tuning selection (0: Disable, 1: Enable, Default 0)
06h: Emergency stop (0: No operation, 1: Enable, Default 0)
0Ch: Jog function (0: Disable, 1: Enable, Default -)
12h: Forced DI/DO selection (0: Disable, 1: Force DI, 2: Force DO, 3: Force DI&DO, Default 0)
13h: Forced DI setting (Hexadecimal value 0 to 0x1F, Default 0x1F)
14h: Forced DO setting (Hexadecimal value 0 to 7, Default 0)
15h: Absolute encoder reset selection (0: No op, 1: Reset fault, 2: Reset fault & multi-turn, Default 0)
How does Software Reset (200D-01h) work?
Enabling this function (setting to 1) resets the programs in the servo drive automatically, similar to a power cycle reset, without needing an actual power cycle.
Availability Conditions:
The servo must be in the S-OFF state.
No No. 1 non-resettable fault must be present.
No EEPROM operation must be in progress.
Note: This function is invalid if 200A-04h (Safety function parameter – likely typo, should check) is set to 1.
How does Fault Reset (200D-02h) work?
Enabling this function (setting to 1) allows resetting certain faults and warnings.
For No. 1 or No. 2 resettable faults: Enable the function in the non-operational state after rectifying the fault cause to stop the keypad displaying the fault.
For No. 3 warnings: Enable the function directly, regardless of the operating state.
Notes:
Refer to “10 Troubleshooting” for fault classifications.
This function only stops the fault display; it does not activate parameter modifications.
It is not applicable to non-resettable faults.
Use with caution if the fault cause is not rectified.
How are Offline Inertia Auto-tuning (200D-03h), Emergency Stop (200D-06h), and Jog (200D-0Ch) enabled via keypad?
Offline Inertia Auto-tuning (200D-03h): Set to 1 to enable. In the parameter display mode, navigate to 200D-03h and press the SET key. (See “6.2 Inertia Auto-tuning”).
Emergency Stop (200D-06h): Set to 1 to enable. When enabled, the drive stops immediately as defined by 2002-05h (Stop mode at S-OFF), regardless of the current state.
Jog Function (200D-0Ch): Set to 1 to enable jog operations via the keypad. (See “4.5.1 Jog”). This is not related to the servo control mode.
How do Forced DI (200D-13h) and Forced DO (200D-14h) work?
Forced I/O allows manually setting the state of Digital Inputs (DIs) and Digital Outputs (DOs) via parameters, overriding their physical state or logic control. First, enable forced I/O using 200D-12h (1=Force DI, 2=Force DO, 3=Force Both).
Forced DI Setting (200D-13h): Defines the forced state of DI functions (set in group 2003h).
Value is hexadecimal (0 to 0x1F).
Convert to binary: bit(n)=1 means high level, bit(n)=0 means low level.
Example: 0x1E = Binary 11110 -> DI1 low, DI2-DI5 high.
Actual function activation depends on the DI logic settings in group 2003h.
Forced DO Setting (200D-14h): Defines the forced state of DO functions (set in group 2004h).
Value is hexadecimal (0 to 7).
Convert to binary: bit(n)=1 means DO function active, bit(n)=0 means DO function inactive.
Example: 6 = Binary 110 -> DO1 inactive, DO2 active, DO3 active (assuming active low logic).
How is the Absolute Encoder Reset (200D-15h) used?
This parameter allows resetting faults or multi-turn data for the absolute encoder.
| Setpoint | Description |
|---|---|
| 0 (Default) | No operation |
| 1 | Reset encoder fault |
| 2 | Reset encoder fault and multi-turn data |
Note: Resetting multi-turn data causes the absolute position to change abruptly. Perform mechanical homing afterward.
What are Communication Parameters (Group 200Eh)?
Group 200Eh parameters configure settings related to serial (RS232/Modbus) and EtherCAT communication.
Parameters include:
00h: Number of entries (Read Only, Default 97)
01h: Node address (RS232) (Range 1 to 127, Default 1)
02h: Update parameter values written through communication to EEPROM (Range 0 to 3, Default 3)
15h: EtherCAT slave name (Read Only, Range 0-65535)
16h: EtherCAT slave alias (Range 0 to 65535, Default 0)
17h: Number of SYNC interrupts allowed by EtherCAT (Range 1 to 20, Default 8)
19h: SYNC loss counter (Read Only, Range 0-65535)
1Ah: Port 0 invalid frame counter (Read Only, Range 0 to 65535)
1Bh: Port 1 invalid frame counter (Read Only, Range 0 to 65535)
1Ch: Port 0/1 transfer error counter (Read Only, Range 0 to 65535)
1Dh: Process unit and PDI error counter (Read Only, Range 0 to 65535)
1Eh: Port 0/1 lost counter (Read Only, Range 0 to 65535)
20h: SYNC mode setting (Range 0 to 2, Default 1)
21h: SYNC error window (Range 100 to 4000 ns, Default 3000)
22h: EtherCAT network state and link state (Read Only, Range 0 to 65535)
23h: Excessive position reference increment counter in CSP mode (Read Only, Range 0 to 65535)
25h: EtherCAT enhanced link selection (Read Only, Range 0 to 1)
26h: EtherCAT XML reset selection (Read Only, Range 0 to 1)
51h: Serial port baud rate (Range 0 to 9, Default 9)
52h: Modbus data format (Range 0 to 3, Default 0)
61h: XML version (Range 0 to 655.35, Default 0)
How is the Node Address (200E-01h) used for RS232 communication?
This parameter defines the servo drive’s address for RS232 communication.
0: Broadcast address. The host controller can write to all drives simultaneously. Drives act on the command but do not respond.
1 to 127 (Default 1): Unique address. Each networked servo drive must have a unique address in this range. Communication errors or failures will occur if addresses are duplicated.
How does parameter saving to EEPROM via communication work (200E-02h)?
Parameter 200E-02h defines whether parameters written via RS232 or EtherCAT (SDO write only) are saved to non-volatile EEPROM memory.
Note:
The value of 200E-02h itself is always updated and saved to EEPROM immediately.
If modified parameters do not need to be saved after power off (e.g., temporary changes), set 200E-02h to 0. This prevents frequent EEPROM writes, which can damage the EEPROM and lead to E108.0 (Parameter write error).
The range is 0 to 3, with default 3 (likely enabling saving). Check specific documentation for the meaning of each value 0-3.
How is the EtherCAT Slave Alias (200E-16h) used?
This parameter allows assigning a station number (alias) to the EtherCAT slave drive if the master controller is unable to assign one automatically.
0 (Default): The master assigns the station number automatically.
≠ 0: The value set in this parameter is used as the station number, overriding any assignment from the master.
What do the EtherCAT error counters (200E-1Ah, 1Bh, 1Ch, 1Dh, 1Eh) indicate?
1Ah/1Bh (Port 0/1 invalid frame counter): Counts frames received with CRC errors on Port 0/1. Indicates damaged frames, possibly due to cable or PHY issues.
1Ch (Port 0/1 transfer error counter): Counts received frames that are incorrect and end with an extra error flag. Indicates data being processed by other stations.
1Dh (Process unit and PDI error counter): Counts data exchange errors between the EtherCAT slave controller (ESC) and the internal MCU. An increasing count indicates internal board interference issues.
1Eh (Port 0/1 lost counter): Counts data link loss events detected by the ESC port. May be caused by poor contact or damaged cables.
These counters are Read Only and help diagnose EtherCAT communication problems.
How is the SYNC Mode (200E-20h) configured for EtherCAT?
Parameter 200E-20h defines the EtherCAT synchronization mode.
| Value | Operation mode | Description |
|---|---|---|
| 0 | Manufacturer function | Manufacturer function |
| 1 (Default) | Synchronization 1 | Applicable to host controllers with a jitter of 1 us in synchronization. |
| 2 | Synchronization 2 | Applicable to host controllers with a jitter of 1 us in synchronization. |
Note: In synchronization mode (1 or 2), the synchronization cycle must be an integer multiple of 125 µs. Otherwise, the drive reports EE13.0 (Synchronization cycle setting error).
How is the Serial Port Baud Rate (200E-51h) set?
This parameter defines the communication rate for the serial port (RS232/Modbus).
| Value | Baud rate (bps) |
|---|---|
| 0 | 300 |
| 1 | 600 |
| 2 | 1200 |
| 3 | 2400 |
| 4 | 4800 |
| 5 | 9600 |
| 6 | 19200 |
| 7 | 38400 |
| 8 | 57600 |
| 9 (Default) | 115200 |
Note: The baud rate set in the servo drive must match the setting in the host controller for communication to succeed.
What is the Manufacturer Fault Code (203Fh)?
Parameter 203Fh displays the manufacturer-specific fault code of the highest level active fault. It is a 32-bit unsigned integer displayed as hexadecimal.
High 16 bits: Indicate the manufacturer internal fault code.
Low 16 bits: Indicate the manufacturer external fault code.
What is the CiA402 Error Code (603Fh)?
When a standard error defined in the CiA402 profile occurs, parameter 603Fh displays the corresponding CiA402 error code. For details on specific codes, refer to “10.2 Communication Faults and Warning Codes”.
Note: The value is hexadecimal. The related manufacturer-specific code can be found in 203Fh.
How is the CiA402 Control Word (6040h) used?
The Control Word (6040h) is sent by the master to control the CiA402 state machine of the servo drive.
| Bit | Name | Description |
|---|---|---|
| 0 | Switch on | 1: Valid; 0: Invalid |
| 1 | Enable voltage | 1: Valid; 0: Invalid |
| 2 | Quick stop | 0: Valid; 1: Invalid |
| 3 | Enable operation | 1: Valid; 0: Invalid |
| 4 to 6 | Operation mode specific | Related to the servo drive modes. |
| 7 | Fault reset | 0: Invalid; 0->1: Reset faults/warnings; 1: Other commands invalid; 1->0: Invalid |
| 8 | Halt | 1: Valid; 0: Invalid |
| 9 | Operation mode specific | Related to the servo drive modes. (Note: PDF states bit9 is not defined) |
| 10 | Reserved | Not defined |
| 11 to 15 | Manufacturer-specific | Defined by the manufacturer. |
Notes:
Bits 0-3 and 7 have the same meaning in each servo mode.
Commands must be sent in the correct sequence to transition through the CiA402 state machine.
Bits 4-6 are related to specific servo modes.
Bit 9 is not defined.
How is the CiA402 Status Word (6041h) interpreted?
The Status Word (6041h) is sent by the servo drive to indicate its current CiA402 state and other status information.
Bit Layout:
MSB: 15(ms) 14(oms) 13(ila) 12(ila) 11(tr) 10(rm) 9(ms) 8(w) 7(sod) 6(qs) 5(ve) 4(f) 3(oe) 2(so) 1(rtso) 0 LSB
Bit Definitions:
| Bit | Name | Description |
|---|---|---|
| 0 | Ready to switch on (rtso) | 1: Valid; 0: Invalid |
| 1 | Switch on (so) | 1: Valid; 0: Invalid |
| 2 | Operation enabled (oe) | 1: Valid; 0: Invalid |
| 3 | Fault (f) | 1: Valid; 0: Invalid |
| 4 | Voltage enabled (ve) | 1: Valid; 0: Invalid |
| 5 | Quick stop (qs) | 0: Valid; 1: Invalid |
| 6 | Switch on disabled (sod) | 1: Valid; 0: Invalid |
| 7 | Warning (w) | 1: Valid; 0: Invalid |
| 8 | Manufacturer-specific (ms) | Not defined |
| 9 | Remote (rm) | 1: Valid (control word active); 0: Invalid |
| 10 | Target reached (tr) | 1: Valid; 0: Invalid |
| 11 | Internal limit active (ila) | 1: Valid; 0: Invalid |
| 12 to 13 | Operation mode specific (oms) | Related to the servo drive modes. |
| 14 | Manufacturer-specific (ms) | Not defined |
| 15 | Home found | 1: Valid; 0: Invalid |
Common State Examples:
| Binary Value (Lower Byte) | Description |
|---|---|
| XXXX XXXX x0xx 0000 | Not ready to switch on |
| XXXX XXXX x1xx 0000 | Switch on disabled |
| XXXX Xxxx x01x 0001 | Ready to switch on |
| XXXX XXXX x01x 0011 | Switched on |
| XXXX XXXX x01x 0111 | Operation enabled |
| XXXX xxxx x00x 0111 | Quick stop active |
| XXXX Xxxx x0xx 1111 | Fault reaction active |
| XXXX XXXX x0xx 1000 | Fault |
Notes:
Bits 0-9 have the same meaning in each mode.
Bits 12-13 vary with the servo drive mode.
Bits 10, 11, and 15 have the same meaning in each mode and indicate status after a control mode is implemented.
What are the Quick Stop Option Codes (605Ah)?
Parameter 605Ah defines the deceleration method used when a Quick Stop command is issued.
| Value | Stop Mode |
|---|---|
| 0 | Coast to stop, keeping de-energized status |
| 1 | Ramp to stop as defined by 6084h/609Ah (HM), keeping de-energized status |
| 2 (Default) | Ramp to stop as defined by 6085h, keeping de-energized status |
| 3 | Stop at emergency-stop torque, keeping de-energized status |
| 4 | N/A |
| 5 | Ramp to stop as defined by 6084h/609Ah (HM), keeping position lock status |
| 6 | Ramp to stop as defined by 6085h, keeping position lock status |
| 7 | Stop at emergency-stop torque, keeping position lock status |
Note: If the brake function is enabled and the value is less than 4, the mode is forcibly set to “Ramp to stop as defined by 6085h, keeping de-energized state” (Value 2).
What are the Stop Modes at S-OFF (605Ch)?
Parameter 605Ch defines the deceleration method used when the drive transitions to the S-OFF (Servo Off / Switched On Disabled) state.
| Setpoint | Stop Mode |
|---|---|
| -4 | Ramp to stop as defined by 6085h, keeping dynamic braking status |
| -3 | Stop at zero speed, keeping dynamic braking status |
| -2 | Ramp to stop under all modes, keeping dynamic braking status |
| -1 | Dynamic braking stop, keeping dynamic braking status |
| 0 (Default) | Coast to stop, keeping de-energized status |
| 1 | Ramp to stop under all modes, keeping de-energized status |
Note: Set a proper mode based on mechanical and operating requirements. If the brake output function is enabled, the stop mode is forcibly set to “Ramp to stop as defined by 6085h, keeping dynamic braking status” (Setpoint -4).
What are the Halt Stop Option Codes (605Dh)?
Parameter 605Dh defines the deceleration method used when a Halt command is issued (via Control Word bit 8).
PP/PV/HM mode:
| Value | Stop Mode |
|---|---|
| 1 (Default) | Ramp to stop as defined by 6084h/609Ah (HM), keeping position lock status |
| 2 | Ramp to stop as defined by 6085h, keeping position lock status |
| 3 | Stop at emergency-stop torque, keeping position lock status |
PT mode:
| Setpoint | Stop Mode |
|---|---|
| 1/2/3 | Ramp to stop as defined by 6087h, keeping position lock status |
What are the Stop Modes for No. 2 Faults (605Eh)?
Parameter 605Eh defines the deceleration method used when a No. 2 fault occurs.
| Value | Stop Mode |
|---|---|
| -5 | Stop at zero speed, keeping dynamic braking status |
| -4 | Stop at the emergency-stop torque, keeping dynamic braking status |
| -3 | Ramp to stop as defined by 6085h, keeping dynamic braking status |
| -2 | Ramp to stop as defined by 6084h/609Ah (HM), keeping dynamic braking status |
| -1 | Dynamic braking stop, keeping dynamic braking status |
| 0 | Coast to stop, keeping de-energized status |
| 1 | Ramp to stop as defined by 6084h/609Ah (HM), keeping de-energized status |
| 2 (Default) | Ramp to stop as defined by 6085h, keeping de-energized status |
| 3 | Stop at emergency-stop torque, keeping de-energized status |
Note: If the brake output function is enabled, the stop mode is forcibly set to “Ramp to stop as defined by 6085h, keeping dynamic braking status” (Value -3).
What are the supported Modes of Operation (6060h / 6061h)?
Parameter 6060h sets the desired operation mode, and 6061h displays the current operation mode.
| Value | Modes of Operation | Details / Reference |
|---|---|---|
| 0 | N/A | Reserved |
| 1 | Profile position (PP) mode | See “7.6 Profile Position (PP) Mode” |
| 2 | N/A | Reserved |
| 3 | Profile velocity (PV) mode | See “7.7 Profile Velocity (PV) Mode” |
| 4 | Profile torque (PT) mode | See “7.8 Profile Torque (PT) Mode” |
| 5 | N/A | Reserved |
| 6 | Homing (HM) mode | See “7.9 Homing Mode (HM)” |
| 7 | Interpolated position (IP) mode | Not supported |
| 8 | Cyclic synchronous position (CSP) mode | See “7.3 Cyclic Synchronous Position (CSP) Mode” |
| 9 | Cyclic synchronous velocity (CSV) mode | See “7.4 Cyclic Synchronous Velocity (CSV) Mode” |
| 10 | Cyclic synchronous torque (CST) mode | See “7.5 Cyclic Synchronous Torque (CST) Mode” |
Notes:
Setting an unsupported mode via SDO returns an SDO error (see “SDO Abort Transfer Code”).
Setting an unsupported mode via PDO makes the operation mode invalid.
What position values are available (6062h, 6063h, 6064h)?
6062h (Position demand value): Indicates the input position reference (in reference unit) when the servo is in the S-ON state.
6063h (Position actual value*): Indicates the absolute motor position in encoder units. (*Note: PDF labels this table row ‘Position actual value’ but object name is Position actual value*)
6064h (Position actual value): Indicates the user absolute position feedback in real-time (reference unit). Relation: Position actual value (6064h) x Gear ratio (6091h) = Position actual value* (6063h).
How do Following Error Window (6065h) and Time Out (6066h) work?
6065h (Following error window): Defines the threshold for excessive position deviation (in reference units). If the actual position deviation exceeds this value, a following error condition exists. Default values depend on encoder resolution (e.g., 3145728 for 20-bit, 25165824 for 23-bit). Setting too large a value treats the alarm threshold as 2147483647 units.
6066h (Following error time out): Defines the time (ms) the position deviation must exceed the 6065h threshold before the fault EB00.0 (Excessive position deviation) is triggered.
How do Position Window (6067h) and Position Window Time (6068h) indicate target reached?
6067h (Position window): Defines the threshold (in reference units) for position reach detection.
6068h (Position window time): Defines the time (ms) the position deviation must remain within the ±6067h window.
When the position deviation is within ±6067h for the duration defined by 6068h, the position is considered reached, and bit 10 (Target reached) of the Status Word (6041h) is set to 1. This flag is only valid when the S-ON signal is active in PP mode.
How do Velocity Window (606Dh) and Velocity Window Time (606Eh) indicate speed reached?
606Dh (Velocity window): Defines the threshold (RPM) for speed reach detection.
606Eh (Velocity window time): Defines the time (ms) the difference between target speed (60FFh) and actual speed must remain within ±606Dh.
When the speed difference is within ±606Dh for the duration defined by 606Eh, the speed is considered reached, and bit 10 (Target reached) of the Status Word (6041h) is set to 1. This flag is meaningful only when the servo drive is enabled in PV mode.
How do Velocity Threshold (606Fh) and Velocity Threshold Time (6070h) indicate zero speed?
606Fh (Velocity threshold): Defines the threshold (RPM) for zero speed detection.
6070h (Velocity threshold time): Defines the time (ms) the speed feedback must remain within ±606Fh.
When the speed feedback is within ±606Fh for the duration defined by 6070h, the motor speed is considered zero, and bit 12 (Operation mode specific, often indicates zero speed) of the Status Word (6041h) is set to 1. This flag is valid only in PV mode.
What do Target Torque (6071h), Max Torque (6072h), Torque Demand (6074h), and Torque Actual (6077h) represent?
6071h (Target torque): Defines the target torque reference value (Unit: 0.1%) used in PT mode and CST mode. 100.0% corresponds to the motor’s rated torque.
6072h (Max torque): Defines the maximum torque limit (Unit: 0.1%) allowed in both forward and reverse directions. 100.0% corresponds to the motor’s rated torque.
6074h (Torque demand value): Shows the torque reference output value (Unit: 0.1%) from the control loop during operation. 100.0% corresponds to the motor’s rated torque.
6077h (Torque actual value): Indicates the internal torque feedback value (Unit: 0.1%). 100.0% corresponds to the motor’s rated torque.
How is Target Position (607Ah) used in PP and CSP modes?
Parameter 607Ah defines the target position (in reference units).
CSP mode: Indicates the absolute target position.
PP mode: Indicates either the incremental position or the absolute position, as defined by the PP mode control word settings.
What is Home Offset (607Ch) and when does it take effect?
Home Offset (607Ch) defines the physical distance (in reference units) between the mechanical zero position and the motor’s home position found during the homing procedure.
It takes effect under the following conditions:
The device is powered on.
The homing operation (HM mode) is successfully completed.
Bit 15 (Home found) of the Status Word (6041h) is set to 1.
Effect:
It determines the present position value after homing, based on the homing method used (defined in 6098h).
Note: If the value of 607Ch is outside the range defined by 607Dh (Software position limit), error EE09.1 (Home setting error) will occur.
How does the Software Position Limit (607Dh) work?
Parameter 607Dh defines the minimum and maximum software position limits relative to the mechanical zero.
Sub-index 1h: Minimum software position limit.
Sub-index 2h: Maximum software position limit (Default: 2^31 – 1).
Activation:
The condition for activating the limit is set by parameter 200A-02h (Absolute position limit).
0: No limit.
1: Limit enabled.
2: Limit enabled after homing (requires homing completion and bit 15 of 6041h = 1).
Behavior when active:
If the position reference or feedback reaches the limit, the drive takes the limit as the target in position control mode, stops, and reports an overtravel fault.
A reverse displacement command clears the overtravel state.
If external DI limit switches are also active, the overtravel status is determined by the DI limit switch.
Note: If the minimum limit (1h) is set larger than the maximum limit (2h), error EE09.0 (Software position limit setting error) will occur.
How is the Polarity (607Eh) parameter used?
Parameter 607Eh defines the polarity (direction/sign) for position, speed, and torque references and offsets in various modes.
| Bit | Function | Details (0: Multiply by 1, 1: Multiply by -1 / Invert) |
|---|---|---|
| 0 to 4 | Not defined | – |
| 5 | Torque reference polarity | PT: Inverts Target torque (6071h) CSP/CSV: Inverts Torque offset (60B2h) CST: Inverts Torque reference (6071h + 60B2h) |
| 6 | Speed reference polarity | PT: Inverts Target torque (6071h) – (Typo in PDF, should relate to speed) CSP: Inverts Velocity offset (60B1h) CSV: Inverts Speed reference (60FFh + 60B1h) |
| 7 | Position reference polarity | PP: Inverts Target position (607Ah) CSP: Inverts Position reference (607Ah + 60B0h) |
What do Maximum Profile Velocity (607Fh) and Profile Velocity (6081h) define?
607Fh (Maximum profile velocity): Defines the maximum permissible speed (in reference unit/s) used as a speed limit in PP, PV, PT, CST, and HM modes.
6081h (Profile velocity): Defines the constant operating speed (in reference unit/s) used for the target position movement in PP mode.
What do Profile Acceleration (6083h), Profile Deceleration (6084h), and Quick Stop Deceleration (6085h) define?
These parameters define rates of change in speed (in reference unit/s²).
6083h (Profile acceleration): Defines the acceleration rate used in PP and PV modes. If it exceeds 60C5h in PP mode, 60C5h is used. Setpoint 0 is forcibly changed to 1.
6084h (Profile deceleration): Defines the deceleration rate used in PP and PV modes. If it exceeds 60C6h in PP mode, 60C6h is used. Setpoint 0 is forcibly changed to 1.
6085h (Quick stop deceleration): Defines the deceleration rate used for ramp-to-stop when triggered by specific Quick Stop Option Codes (605Ah=2/6 or 605Dh=2). Setpoint 0 is forcibly changed to 1.
What is Torque Slope (6087h)?
Parameter 6087h defines the acceleration rate of the torque reference (torque increment per second) in PT mode (Unit: 0.1%/s).
It is also used as the deceleration rate to stop in PT and CST modes if specific Quick Stop (605A) or Stop (605D) option codes are selected.
Notes:
If the value exceeds the torque reference limit, the limit value is used.
Setpoint 0 is forcibly changed to 1.
How is the Electronic Gear Ratio (6091h) defined and used?
The electronic gear ratio defines the proportional relationship between the load shaft displacement (user units) and the motor shaft displacement (encoder units).
It is defined by two sub-indexes:
6091-1h (Motor revolutions): Defines the resolution of the motor (encoder counts per revolution).
6091-2h (Shaft revolutions): Defines the resolution of the load shaft (user units per revolution).
Gear Ratio = Motor Revolutions (1h) / Shaft Revolutions (2h)
Range Limit: The calculated gear ratio must be within [0.001 x Encoder resolution/10000] and [4000 x Encoder resolution/10000]. If outside this range, error EE09.2 (Gear ratio beyond the limit) occurs.
Usage Formulas:
Motor position feedback (encoder units) = Load shaft position feedback (reference units) x Gear ratio
Motor speed (RPM) = [Load shaft speed (ref unit/s) x Gear ratio / Encoder resolution] x 60
Motor acceleration (RPM/ms) = [Load shaft acceleration (ref unit/s²) x Gear ratio / Encoder resolution] x (1000/60)
What Homing Methods (6098h) are available?
Parameter 6098h defines the procedure used to find the home position in Homing (HM) mode.
| Value | Description |
|---|---|
| -2 | Forward homing, positive mechanical limit as deceleration point, motor Z signal as home |
| -1 | Reverse homing, negative mechanical limit as deceleration point, motor Z signal as home |
| 1 | Reverse homing, negative limit switch (N-OT) as deceleration point, Z signal as home (falling edge of N-OT before Z) |
| 2 | Forward homing, positive limit switch (P-OT) as deceleration point, Z signal as home (falling edge of P-OT before Z) |
| 3 | Forward homing, home switch as deceleration point, Z signal as home (falling edge on same side before Z) |
| 4 | Reverse homing, home switch as deceleration point, Z signal as home (rising edge on same side before Z) |
| 5 | Reverse homing, home switch as deceleration point, Z signal as home (falling edge on same side before Z) |
| 6 | Forward homing, home switch as deceleration point, Z signal as home (rising edge on same side before Z) |
| 7 | Forward homing, home switch as deceleration point, Z signal as home (falling edge on same side before Z) |
| 8 | Forward homing, home switch as deceleration point, Z signal as home (rising edge on same side before Z) |
| 9 | Forward homing, home switch as deceleration point, Z signal as home (rising edge on other side before Z) |
| 10 | Forward homing, home switch as deceleration point, Z signal as home (falling edge on other side before Z) |
| 11 | Reverse homing, home switch as deceleration point, Z signal as home (falling edge on same side before Z) |
| 12 | Reverse homing, home switch as deceleration point, Z signal as home (rising edge on same side before Z) |
| 13 | Reverse homing, home switch as deceleration point, Z signal on other side as home (rising edge on other side before Z) |
| 14 | Reverse homing, home switch as deceleration point, Z signal on other side as home (falling edge on other side before Z) |
| 15 to 16 | N/A |
| 17 to 32 | Similar to 1 to 14, except deceleration point coincides with the home switch/limit switch edge. |
| 33 | Reverse homing, motor Z signal as the home |
| 34 | Forward homing, motor Z signal as the home |
| 35 | Current position as the home |
How are Homing Speeds (6099h) and Homing Acceleration (609Ah) configured?
These parameters define the motion profile used during the Homing (HM) procedure.
6099h (Homing speeds): Defines the speeds used during homing.
Sub-index 1h: Speed during search for switch (limit or home switch). Unit: reference unit/s. A large setpoint helps prevent E601.0 (Homing timeout). Note: Ensure sufficient deceleration distance or increase acceleration.
Sub-index 2h: Speed during search for zero (Z signal or home signal edge). Unit: reference unit/s. Set to a small value to avoid overshoot and ensure accuracy.
609Ah (Homing acceleration): Defines the acceleration/deceleration rate (reference unit/s²) used in homing mode. Takes effect after homing starts. Also used for deceleration if 605Dh (Stop option code) is 2. Setpoint 0 is forcibly changed to 1.
What are Position Offset (60B0h), Velocity Offset (60B1h), and Torque Offset (60B2h)?
60B0h (Position offset): Defines the position reference offset (reference units) used in CSP mode. The target position sent to the servo drive is the sum of the main target position (607Ah) and this offset (60B0h).
60B1h (Velocity offset):
In CSP mode: Defines the external speed feedforward signal (reference unit/s), activated when 2005-14h=2. Used to reduce position deviation during positioning. Set to 0 after positioning is done to avoid deviation.
In CSV mode: Defines the speed reference offset. The total speed reference is (60FFh + 60B1h).
60B2h (Torque offset):
In CSP and CSV modes: Defines the external torque feedforward signal (0.1%), activated when 2006-0Ch=2.
In CST mode: Defines the torque reference offset. The target torque is the sum of the main target torque (6071h) and this offset (60B2h).
How are the touch probe functions configured using Index 60B8h?
Index 60B8h defines the functions of touch probe 1 and touch probe 2. The configuration is done by setting individual bits within this 16-bit object (Uint16). Bits 0 to 5 are related to touch probe 1, and bits 8 to 13 are related to touch probe 2. For absolute encoders, the Z signal refers to the zero position of each revolution.
The specific bit definitions are as follows:
| Bit | Description | Remarks |
|---|---|---|
| 0 | Touch probe 1 function selection: 0: Switch off touch probe 1 1: Enable touch probe 1 |
Bit0 to Bit5: settings related to the touch probe 1 When a DI is used to trigger the touch probe function, the DI source is non-modifiable once the touch probe function is enabled. For an absolute encoder, Z signal refers to the zero point of the single-turn position feedback. |
| 1 | Touch probe 1 trigger mode 0: Single trigger mode (Latches the position at the first trigger event.) 1: Continuous trigger mode |
|
| 2 | Touch probe 1 trigger signal selection 0: DI signal 1: Z signal |
|
| 3 | N/A | |
| 4 | Touch probe 1 positive edge 0: Switch off latching at positive edge 1: Enable latching at positive edge |
|
| 5 | Touch probe 1 negative edge 0: Switch off latching at negative edge 1: Enable latching at negative edge |
|
| 6 to 7 | N/A | |
| 8 | Touch probe 2 function selection 0: Switch off touch probe 2 1: Enable touch probe 2 |
Bit8 to Bit13: settings related to the touch probe 2 |
| 9 | Touch probe 2 trigger mode 0: Single trigger mode (Latches the position at the first trigger event.) 1: Continuous trigger mode |
|
| 10 | Touch probe 2 trigger signal selection 0: DI signal 1: Z signal |
|
| 11 | N/A | |
| 12 | Touch probe 2 positive edge 0: Switch off latching at positive edge 1: Enable latching at positive edge |
|
| 13 | Touch probe 2 negative edge 0: Switch off latching at negative edge 1: Enable latching at negative edge |
|
| 14 to 15 | N/A |
How is the status of the touch probes indicated by Index 60B9h?
Index 60B9h indicates the status of touch probe 1 and touch probe 2 using individual bits within this 16-bit object (Uint16). Bits 0 to 7 reflect the status of touch probe 1, and bits 8 to 15 reflect the status of touch probe 2.
The specific bit definitions are as follows:
| Bit | Description | Remarks |
|---|---|---|
| 0 | Touch probe 1 function selection 0: Switch off touch probe 1 1: Enable touch probe 1 |
Bit0 to Bit7: status of touch probe 1 |
| 1 | Touch probe 1 positive edge value 0: No positive edge value latched 1: Positive edge value latched |
|
| 2 | Touch probe 1 negative edge value 0: No negative edge value latched 1: Negative edge value latched |
|
| 3 to 7 | N/A | |
| 8 | Touch probe 2 function selection 0: Switch off Touch probe 2 1: Enable touch probe 2 |
Bit8 to Bit15: status of touch probe 2 |
| 9 | Touch probe 2 positive edge value 0: No positive edge value latched 1: Positive edge value latched |
|
| 10 | Touch probe 2 negative edge value 0: No negative edge value latched 1: Negative edge value latched |
|
| 11 to 15 | N/A |
How can I read the latched position value for Touch Probe 1’s positive edge?
Index 60BAh (Touch probe 1 positive edge) indicates the position value of touch probe 1 latched at the positive edge trigger event. This value is read-only (RO), mapped to TPDO, and is of data type Int32. The value is given in reference units.
| Index | Name | Data Type | Access | Mapping |
| 60BAh | Touch probe 1 positive edge | Int32 | RO | TPDO |
How can I read the latched position value for Touch Probe 1’s negative edge?
Index 60BBh (Touch probe 1 negative edge) indicates the position value of touch probe 1 latched at the negative edge trigger event. This value is read-only (RO), mapped to TPDO, and is of data type Int32. The value is given in reference units.
| Index | Name | Data Type | Access | Mapping |
| 60BBh | Touch probe 1 negative edge | Int32 | RO | TPDO |
How can I read the latched position value for Touch Probe 2’s positive edge?
Index 60BCh (Touch probe 2 positive edge) indicates the position value of touch probe 2 latched at the positive edge trigger event. This value is read-only (RO), mapped to TPDO, and is of data type Int32. The value is given in reference units.
| Index | Name | Data Type | Access | Mapping |
| 60BCh | Touch probe 2 positive edge | Int32 | RO | TPDO |
How can I read the latched position value for Touch Probe 2’s negative edge?
Index 60BDh (Touch probe 2 negative edge) indicates the position value of touch probe 2 latched at the negative edge trigger event. This value is read-only (RO), mapped to TPDO, and is of data type Int32. The value is given in reference units.
| Index | Name | Data Type | Access | Mapping |
| 60BDh | Touch probe 2 negative edge | Int32 | RO | TPDO |
How are the maximum torque limits defined?
The maximum torque limits are defined by two parameters:
1. Index 60E0h (Positive torque limit value): Defines the maximum torque limit of the servo drive in the forward direction. It is read/write (RW), mapped to RPDO, data type Uint16, with a range of 0 to 3000 (unit: 0.1%) and a default of 3000.
2. Index 60E1h (Negative torque limit value): Defines the maximum torque limit of the servo drive in the reverse direction. It is read/write (RW), mapped to RPDO, data type Uint16, with a range of 0 to 3000 (unit: 0.1%) and a default of 3000.
These values are effective during running and at stop, in all related modes.
How can I find out the supported homing methods?
Index 60E3h (Supported homing methods) indicates the supported homing methods. This is an array (ARR) of data type Uint16, read-only (RO), and related to the Homing Mode (HM).
Sub-index 00h (Number of homing mode sub-indexes) indicates the total number of supported homing method entries available in the subsequent sub-indices. It is of data type Uint8 and defaults to 31.
Sub-indices 01h through 1Fh list the individual supported homing methods. Each sub-index (e.g., 01h, 02h, …, 1Fh) is of data type Uint16 and read-only. The low 8 bits of each sub-index value indicate the specific supported homing method number (e.g., sub-index 01h defaults to 0301h, meaning homing method 1 (01h) is supported with additional flags potentially in higher bits).
How are the details of supported homing methods defined in Index 60E3h?
Index 60E3h uses multiple sub-indices to detail the supported homing methods.
Sub-index 00h indicates the number of available homing method entries (default 31).
Sub-indices 01h through 1Fh represent individual supported homing methods (methods 1 through 31 respectively).
For each sub-index from 01h to 1Fh:
The low 8 bits (bit0 to bit7) indicate the specific homing method number supported. You should set Index 6098h (Homing method) to one of these supported values to select a homing method.
For sub-index 01h specifically:
Bit 8 indicates if relative homing is supported (0: No, 1: Yes).
Bit 9 indicates if absolute homing is supported (0: No, 1: Yes).
Bits 10 to 15 are N/A.
Sub-indices 02h through 1Fh primarily use the low 8 bits to indicate the method number, with higher bits potentially reserved or N/A according to the standard CiA402 profile or manufacturer specifics (not detailed further in the provided text).
How is the actual position calculated after homing based on Index 60E6h?
Index 60E6h (Actual position calculation method) defines the mode for processing the position offset after homing is done. It is a Uint8 value, read/write (RW), not mapped, effective during running & at stop in Homing Mode (HM). Any change is blocked after homing is triggered.
The calculation depends on the setpoint:
Setpoint 0 (Absolute homing):
After homing is done, the following formula applies:
6064h (Position actual value) = 607Ch (Home offset)
Setpoint 1 (Relative homing):
After homing is done, the following formula applies:
6064h (Position actual value) = Present position feedback value + 607Ch (Home offset)
How is the following error (position deviation) indicated?
The following error actual value, which indicates the position deviation, is provided by Index 60F4h. This value is read-only (RO), mapped to TPDO, and is of data type Int32. It is relevant in PP (Profile Position), HM (Homing), and CSP (Cyclic Synchronous Position) modes. The value is given in reference units.
| Index | Name | Data Type | Access | Mapping | Related Mode |
| 60F4h | Following error actual value | Int32 | RO | TPDO | PP/HM/CSP |
How is the position demand value represented, and what is its relationship to the reference unit?
The position demand value is indicated by Index 60FCh. It represents the position reference in encoder units. This value is read-only (RO), mapped to TPDO, and is of data type Int32. It is relevant in PP (Profile Position), HM (Homing), and CSP (Cyclic Synchronous Position) modes.
If no warning is detected when the S-ON signal is active, the relationship between the position reference in reference units (Index 6062h) and the position demand value in encoder units (Index 60FCh) is given by:
60FCh (in encoder unit) = 6062h (reference unit) x 6091h
Note: 6091h typically relates to gear ratio or feed constant factors.
| Index | Name | Data Type | Access | Mapping | Related Mode |
| 60FCh | Position demand value* | Int32 | RO | TPDO | PP/HM/CSP |
How can the status of digital inputs be read using Index 60FDh, and what do the specific bits represent?
The status of digital inputs (DI) is indicated by Index 60FDh (Digital input). This is a 32-bit value (Int32), read-only (RO), and mapped to TPDO. A value of 0 indicates inactive, and 1 indicates active for the respective DI signal function.
The DI signal associated with each bit is described as follows:
| Bit | Signal (when bit is 1) |
|---|---|
| 0 | Reverse overtravel active |
| 1 | Forward overtravel active |
| 2 | Home signal active |
| 3 to 15 | N/A |
| 16 | DI1 function active |
| 17 | DI2 function active |
| 18 | DI3 function active |
| 19 | DI4 function active |
| 20 | DI5 function active |
| 21 to 26 | N/A |
| 27 | STO1 signal input |
| 28 | STO2 signal input |
| 29 | EDM output active |
| 30 to 31 | N/A |
How is the status of digital outputs indicated?
The status (current logic) of the servo drive’s digital outputs (DO) is indicated by Index 60FEh (Digital output). This object is structured as an array (ARR) with sub-indices. It is generally read-only (except for specific control bits in sub-indices), mapped (‘Yes’ indicates mappable), and the base object is data type Uint32.
Sub-index 0h (Number of digital output sub-indexes) indicates how many sub-indices are used for digital output information. It is read-only (RO), not mapped, data type Uint32, and defaults to x02 (meaning there are likely 2 relevant sub-indices, 1h and 2h).
The specific logic for physical outputs and control is detailed in sub-index 1h and the corresponding enable mask in sub-index 2h.
How are physical outputs controlled via Index 60FEh sub-index 1h, especially forced outputs?
Index 60FEh, sub-index 1h (Physical output) indicates and controls the state of the physical digital outputs (DO). It is read/write (RW), mapped to RPDO, data type Uint32, effective during running & at stop.
The state of individual DOs can be forced ON or OFF under specific conditions. The signal indicated by each relevant bit is described as follows:
| Bit | Related Signal | Description |
|---|---|---|
| 0 to 15 | N/A | |
| 16 | DO1 | Forced output (0: OFF; 1: ON), only when HOD-17 is set to 4 and bit 16 of 60FE-02h is set to 1 |
| 17 | DO2 | Forced output (0: OFF; 1: ON), only when HOD-17 is set to 4 and bit 17 of 60FE-02h is set to 1 |
| 18 | DO3 | Forced output (0: OFF; 1: ON), only when HOD-17 is set to 4 and bit 18 of 60FE-02h is set to 1 |
| 19 to 25 | N/A | |
| 26 | Gain switchover | Switched between P and PI, only when bit 26 of 60FE-02h is set to 1 |
| 27 to 31 | N/A |
Note: HOD-17 likely refers to a manufacturer-specific parameter that needs to be set to ‘4’ to enable the forced output mode via EtherCAT for DO1, DO2, and DO3.
How is the forced DO function enabled using the bit mask in Index 60FEh sub-index 2h?
Index 60FEh, sub-index 2h (Bit mask) defines whether the forced Digital Output (DO) function is enabled for specific outputs. This object is read/write (RW), not mapped, data type Uint32, effective during running & at stop.
Setting a bit to 1 in this mask enables the corresponding forced function, provided other conditions are met (like HOD-17=4 for DO1-3). The relevant bits are:
| Bit | Related DO/Function | Description when bit is 1 |
|---|---|---|
| 0 to 15 | N/A | |
| 16 | DO1 | If HOD-17 = 4, forced output is enabled for DO1 (controlled by bit 16 of 60FEh-01h). |
| 17 | DO2 | If HOD-17 = 4, forced output is enabled for DO2 (controlled by bit 17 of 60FEh-01h). |
| 18 | DO3 | If HOD-17 = 4, forced output is enabled for DO3 (controlled by bit 18 of 60FEh-01h). |
| 19 to 25 | N/A | |
| 26 | Gain switchover | Switchover between P and PI is enabled (controlled by bit 26 of 60FEh-01h). |
| 27 to 31 | N/A |
How is the target velocity defined for PV and CSV modes?
The target velocity in Profile Velocity (PV) and Cyclic Synchronous Velocity (CSV) modes is defined by Index 60FFh (Target velocity). This value is read/write (RW), mappable (‘Yes’), data type Int32, and effective during running & at stop in PV/CSV modes.
The value range is from -2^31 to +(2^31 – 1), and the unit is reference unit/s. The default value is 0.
The maximum operating speed of the motor in CSV mode is determined by the maximum rotational speed of the motor itself.
| Index | Name | Data Type | Access | Mapping | Related Mode | Data Range | Default |
| 60FFh | Target velocity | Int32 | RW | Yes | PV/CSV | -2^31 to +(2^31 – 1) (reference unit/s) | 0 |
How can I determine the supported drive modes of the servo drive?
The supported servo drive modes can be determined by reading Index 6502h (Supported drive modes). This object is read-only (RO), not mapped, data type Uint32, and its default value is 0x000003ADh.
The individual bits indicate support for specific modes (0: No, 1: Yes):
| Bit | Description | Supported or Not (0: No 1: Yes) |
|---|---|---|
| 0 | Profile position (PP) mode | 1 |
| 1 | Variable frequency velocity (VL) mode | 0 |
| 2 | Profile velocity (PV) mode | 1 |
| 3 | Profile torque mode (PT) | 1 |
| 4 | N/A | 0 |
| 5 | Homing (HM) mode | 1 |
| 6 | Interpolated position (IP) mode | 0 |
| 7 | Cyclic synchronous position (CSP) mode | 1 |
| 8 | Cyclic synchronous velocity (CSV) mode | 1 |
| 9 | Cyclic synchronous torque (CST) mode | 1 |
| 10 to 31 | Defined by the manufacturer. | Reserved |
If the device supports 6502h, you can get the supported servo drive modes through 6502h.
What are the key features and performance metrics of EtherCAT?
EtherCAT features high-performance, low cost, easy use, and flexible topology, suitable for industrial applications requiring ultra-high speed I/O.
Key features and performance metrics include:
System Coverage: One system covers all devices, including I/O, sensors, actuators, drives, and displays.
Transmission Rate: 2 x 100 Mbit/s (high-speed Ethernet, full duplex mode).
Synchronization: Synchronization jitter < 1 µs (for up to 300 nodes, cable length within 120 m).
Refresh Time Examples:
256 DI/DOs: 11 µs
1000 DI/DOs distributed in 100 nodes: 30 µs = 0.03 ms
200 AI/AOs (16-bit): 50 µs (sampling rate: 20 kHz)
100 servo axes (8 bytes IN + 8 bytes OUT for each): 100 µs = 0.1 ms
12000 DI/DOs: 350 µs
What is the general procedure for setting up communication?
The general procedure involves the following steps:
1. Start
2. Import XML: Refer to the user guide of the host controller.
3. Set system parameters: Refer to the “System parameters” section.
4. Configure communication parameters: Refer to the “EtherCAT communication basis” section.
5. Configure the PDO: Refer to the “EtherCAT communication basis” section.
6. Start the remote node.
7. Observe the communication state: Refer to the “Status Indication” section.
8. End
What application protocols are supported over EtherCAT?
The following EtherCAT-based application protocols have been established to support various devices and applications:
CANopen over EtherCAT (CoE)
Safety over EtherCAT (SoE, servo drive safety compliant with IEC 61800-7-204)
Ethernet over EtherCAT (EoE)
File over EtherCAT (FoE)
The slave device only needs to support the most suitable application protocol for its needs. The SV660N servo drive specifically uses the IEC 61800-7 (CiA 402)-CANopen motion control profile (CoE).
How is the parameter address space structured?
Parameter access is done using Index + Subindex, both represented as hexadecimal data.
The CiA402 protocol imposes the following structure on the parameter address space (Index ranges):
| Index (Hex) | Description |
|---|---|
| 0000-0FFF | Data type description |
| 1000-1FFF | CoE communication object |
| 2000-5FFF | Manufacturer-specific object |
| 6000-9FFF | Sub-protocol object (e.g., CiA402 objects) |
| A000-FFFF | Reserved |
What are the essential system parameter settings for EtherCAT communication?
Necessary parameter settings are required for the SV660N servo drive to connect to an EtherCAT fieldbus network:
| Index | Sub-index | Name | Value Range | Default | Required Setting |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 2002 | 01h | Control mode | 0: Speed control mode 1: Position control mode 2: Torque control mode 9: EtherCAT mode 255: This axis is not used. |
9 | Must be set to 9 for EtherCAT operation. |
| 200E | 02h | Save objects written through communication to EEPROM | 0: Not save 1: Save parameters only 2: Save object dictionaries only 3: Save both parameters and object dictionaries |
3 | Set to a proper value (1, 2, or 3) *before* saving parameters to EEPROM to avoid parameters reverting to default on next power-on. Setting to 0 prevents saving. |
| 200E | 16 | EtherCAT slave alias | 0 to 65535 | 0 | Can be set to assign a unique alias address to the slave on the network. |
What is the purpose of Index 200E-02h, and what caution should be observed?
Index 200E, Sub-index 02h controls how objects (parameters and/or object dictionary entries) written via communication are saved to the non-volatile EEPROM memory.
Value meanings:
0: Do not save changes to EEPROM.
1: Save only parameter value changes to EEPROM.
2: Save only object dictionary structure/attribute changes to EEPROM.
3: Save both parameter values and object dictionary changes to EEPROM.
CAUTION: Before initiating a command or process to save parameters to EEPROM, ensure that Index 200E-02h is set to the desired value (1, 2, or 3). If it is left at 0 or an incorrect value when saving is attempted, the parameters might not be saved correctly and could be restored to their default values at the next power-on cycle.
What are the EtherCAT communication specifications for this servo drive?
| Item | Specifications | |
|---|---|---|
| Communication protocol | IEC 61158 Type 12, IEC 61800-7 CiA 402 Drive Profile | |
| SDO | SDO request, SDO response | |
| Mapping | Variable PDO mapping | |
| Application layer | CiA402 Modes | Profile position mode (PP) |
| Profile velocity mode (PV) | ||
| Profile torque mode (PT) | ||
| Homing mode (HM) | ||
| Cyclic synchronous position mode (CSP) | ||
| Cyclic synchronous velocity mode (CSV) | ||
| Cyclic synchronous torque mode (CST) | ||
| Transmission protocol | 100BASE-TX (IEEE802.3) | |
| Physical layer | Maximum distance | 100 m |
| Interface | RJ45 x 2 (IN, OUT) | |
Can you explain the EtherCAT communication structure used?
The EtherCAT communication structure in this device uses the CANopen application layer (CoE).
Key components include:
Physical layer: Handles the electrical signaling (e.g., 100BASE-TX).
Link layer: Manages data framing and transmission.
ESC DPRAM (EtherCAT Slave Controller Dual-Port RAM): Memory within the slave controller used for communication.
Mailbox: Interface for non-cyclic data exchange (SDO).
Process data: Interface for cyclic data exchange (PDO).
Register: Configuration registers of the ESC.
Application layer (CoE):
EtherCAT state machine: Manages the operational state of the slave (Init, Pre-Op, Safe-Op, Op).
SDO (Service Data Object): Used for non-cyclic access to the Object Dictionary (parameter configuration).
PDO (Process Data Object): Used for cyclic, real-time exchange of process data (e.g., control word, status word, target position, actual position).
Object dictionary: Contains all communication parameters, application process data definitions, and PDO mapping information.
Real-time data (PDO) is exchanged cyclically, while configuration data (SDO) is exchanged non-cyclically via the mailbox interface.
What are the different states in the EtherCAT state machine, and what happens in the Init state?
The EtherCAT state machine coordinates the initialization and operation between the master and slave. The four main states are:
1. Init (I)
2. Pre-Operational (P)
3. Safe-Operational (S)
4. Operational (O)
Transition from Init to Operational must follow the sequence: Init -> Pre-Operational -> Safe-Operational -> Operational.
In the Init (I) state:
Description: Communication initialization.
SDO Communication: No
RPDO Communication: No
TPDO Communication: No
Details: No communication is available in the application layer. The master can only read and write the EtherCAT slave controller (ESC) registers directly. Basic hardware initialization occurs.
What communication capabilities are available in the Pre-Operational, Safe-Operational, and Operational EtherCAT states?
| State | SDO | RPDO | TPDO | Description |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| Pre-Operational (P) | Yes | No | No | Mailbox data communication (SDO) in the application layer is possible. The master uses SDOs for initialization, including process data mapping setup, SM channel configuration, and FMMU configuration. Transition IP (Init to Pre-Op) involves master configuring slave address, mailbox, DC. Transition PI (Pre-Op to Init). |
| Safe-Operational (S) | Yes | No | Yes | SDO communication is possible. TPDOs (inputs to the master) are transmitted and valid. RPDOs (outputs from the master) are not processed. Distributed clock (DC) mode can be used. Transition PS (Pre-Op to Safe-Op) involves master configuring SM channels and FMMU. Transition SP (Safe-Op to Pre-Op). Transition SI (Safe-Op to Init). |
| Operational (O) | Yes | Yes | Yes | Full communication: SDO, RPDO, and TPDO are active. Both inputs and outputs are valid. Normal operating state. Mailbox communication (SDO) can still be used. Transition SO (Safe-Op to Op) involves master sending valid output data. Transition OS (Op to Safe-Op). Transition OP (Op to Pre-Op). Transition OI (Op to Init). |
What are RPDOs and TPDOs in EtherCAT?
PDO stands for Process Data Object, used for real-time data transmission in EtherCAT.
RPDO (Receive PDO): Transmits data from the EtherCAT Master *to* the Slave device. Contains control information like control word, target position, target velocity, etc.
TPDO (Transmit PDO): Transmits data *from* the Slave device back *to* the EtherCAT Master. Contains status information like status word, actual position, actual velocity, error codes, etc.
What are the address ranges for variable and fixed PDO mapping?
PDO mapping establishes the relationship between the object dictionary entries and the data transmitted in PDOs. The SV660N servo drive provides six RPDOs and five TPDOs within specific index ranges:
| PDO Type | Index Range | Mapping Type |
|---|---|---|
| RPDO (Six total) | 1600h | Variable mapping |
| 1701h to 1705h | Fixed mapping | |
| TPDO (Five total) | 1A00h | Variable mapping |
| 1B01h to 0x1B04h | Fixed mapping |
Can you provide examples of fixed PDO mappings (RPDO/TPDO) for different control modes?
The SV660N provides several fixed RPDOs (1701h-1705h) and TPDOs (1B01h-1B04h). Here are the mappings for some common combinations:
Mapping 1: (RPDO 1701h / TPDO 1B01h) – For PP, CSP modes
- 1701h (Outputs/RPDO – 4 objects, 12 bytes):
- 6040h (Control word)
- 607Ah (Target position)
- 60B8h (Touch probe function)
- 60FEh sub-index 1 (Physical outputs)
- 1B01h (Inputs/TPDO – 9 objects, 28 bytes):
- 603Fh (Error code)
- 6041h (Status word)
- 6064h (Position actual value)
- 6077h (Torque actual value)
- 60F4h (Following error actual value)
- 60B9h (Touch probe status)
- 60BAh (Touch probe 1 positive edge)
- 60BCh (Touch probe 2 positive edge)
- 60FDh (Digital inputs)
Mapping 2: (RPDO 1702h / TPDO 1B02h) – For PP/PV/PT/CSP/CSV/CST modes
- 1702h (Outputs/RPDO – 7 objects, 19 bytes):
- 6040h (Control word)
- 607Ah (Target position)
- 60FFh (Target velocity)
- 6071h (Target torque)
- 6060h (Modes of operation)
- 60B8h (Touch probe function)
- 607Fh (Max. profile velocity)
- 1B02h (Inputs/TPDO – 9 objects, 25 bytes):
- 603Fh (Error code)
- 6041h (Status word)
- 6064h (Position actual value)
- 6077h (Torque actual value)
- 6061h (Modes of operation display)
- 60B9h (Touch probe status)
- 60BAh (Touch probe 1 positive edge)
- 60BCh (Touch probe 2 positive edge)
- 60FDh (Digital inputs)
Mapping 3: (RPDO 1703h / TPDO 1B03h) – For PP/PV/CSP/CSV modes
- 1703h (Outputs/RPDO – 7 objects, 17 bytes):
- 6040h (Control word)
- 607Ah (Target position)
- 60FFh (Target velocity)
- 6060h (Modes of operation)
- 60B8h (Touch probe function)
- 60E0h (Positive torque limit value)
- 60E1h (Negative torque limit value)
- 1B03h (Inputs/TPDO – 10 objects, 29 bytes):
- 603Fh (Error code)
- 6041h (Status word)
- 6064h (Position actual value)
- 6077h (Torque actual value)
- 60F4h (Following error actual value)
- 6061h (Modes of operation display)
- 60B9h (Touch probe status)
- 60BAh (Touch probe 1 positive edge)
- 60BCh (Touch probe 2 positive edge)
- 60FDh (Digital inputs)
Mapping 4: (RPDO 1704h / TPDO 1B02h – Note: Uses TPDO from Mapping 2) – For PP/PV/PT/CSP/CSV/CST modes
- 1704h (Outputs/RPDO – 9 objects, 23 bytes):
- 6040h (Control word)
- 607Ah (Target position)
- 60FFh (Target velocity)
- 6071h (Target torque)
- 6060h (Modes of operation)
- 60B8h (Touch probe function)
- 607Fh (Max profile velocity)
- 60E0h (Positive torque limit value)
- 60E1h (Negative torque limit value)
- 1B02h (Inputs/TPDO – 9 objects, 25 bytes): (Same as TPDO in Mapping 2)
- 603Fh (Error code)
- 6041h (Status word)
- 6064h (Position actual value)
- 6077h (Torque actual value)
- 6061h (Modes of operation display)
- 60B9h (Touch probe status)
- 60BAh (Touch probe 1 positive edge)
- 60BCh (Touch probe 2 positive edge)
- 60FDh (Digital inputs)
Mapping 5: (RPDO 1705h / TPDO 1B04h) – For PP/PV/CSP/CSV modes
- 1705h (Outputs/RPDO – 8 objects, 19 bytes):
- 6040h (Control word)
- 607Ah (Target position)
- 60FFh (Target velocity)
- 6060h (Modes of operation)
- 60B8h (Touch probe function)
- 60E0h (Positive torque limit value)
- 60E1h (Negative torque limit value)
- 60B2h (Torque offset)
- 1B04h (Inputs/TPDO – 10 objects, 29 bytes):
- 603Fh (Error code)
- 6041h (Status word)
- 6064h (Position actual value)
- 6077h (Torque actual value)
- 6061h (Modes of operation display)
- 60F4h (Following error actual value)
- 60B9h (Touch probe status)
- 60BAh (Touch probe 1 positive edge)
- 60BCh (Touch probe 2 positive edge)
- 606Ch (Velocity actual value)
What is the default mapping for the variable RPDO (1600h) and variable TPDO (1A00h)?
The SV660N provides one variable RPDO (Index 1600h) and one variable TPDO (Index 1A00h), each capable of mapping up to 10 objects with a maximum total length of 40 bytes.
Default Mapping Objects:
RPDO1 (Index 1600h):
- 6040h (Control word)
- 607Ah (Target position)
- 60B8h (Touch probe function)
TPDO1 (Index 1A00h):
- 603Fh (Error code)
- 6041h (Status word)
- 6064h (Position actual value)
- 60BC (Touch probe 2 positive edge)
- 60B9 (Touch probe status)
- 60BA (Touch probe 1 positive edge)
- 60FD (Digital inputs)
Note: The default TPDO mapping listed seems incomplete compared to the max object count and byte length. The actual default may vary or include more objects up to the limit.
How are the actual RPDO and TPDO selected or assigned using Sync Manager objects?
The selection of which defined RPDO and TPDO mapping (variable or fixed) will be used for cyclic data communication is done through the Sync Manager (SM) PDO Assignment objects.
The SV660N series servo drive supports assignment of one RPDO and one TPDO as follows:
| Sync Manager Index | Sub-index | Description |
|---|---|---|
| 0x1C12 | 01h | Specifies which PDO mapping Index (from 0x1600 or 0x1701…0x1705) will be used as the actual RPDO for cyclic output data from the master. |
| 0x1C13 | 01h | Specifies which PDO mapping Index (from 0x1A00 or 0x1B01…0x1B04) will be used as the actual TPDO for cyclic input data to the master. |
To use a specific mapping (e.g., the variable RPDO 0x1600), the master writes the value ‘0x1600’ into object 0x1C12, sub-index 01h. Similarly, to use TPDO 0x1A00, ‘0x1A00’ is written into 0x1C13, sub-index 01h.
How is the mapping content for a PDO configured?
PDO mapping parameters define which objects from the object dictionary are included in a variable PDO (like 1600h or 1A00h). These parameters are stored within the PDO mapping object itself (e.g., within Index 1600h for RPDO1).
Structure:
Sub-index 00h: Contains the number (N) of actual objects mapped in this PDO. Writing 0 to this sub-index effectively disables the PDO and clears its mapping content.
Sub-indexes 01h to N: Each sub-index defines one mapped object using a 32-bit value structured as follows:
- Bits 31-16: Index of the object to be mapped.
- Bits 15-8: Sub-index of the object to be mapped.
- Bits 7-0: Object length (bit length of the mapped object in hexadecimal).
Object Length Codes:
- 08h: 8-bit
- 10h: 16-bit
- 20h: 32-bit
Example: To map the 16-bit Control Word (Index 6040h, Sub-index 00h), the mapping parameter entry would be 60400010h.
The maximum total length of all mapped objects in a variable PDO is 4 x N bytes (where N is the number of mapped objects, max 10), with a total max byte length of 40 bytes.
What is the procedure for configuring PDO mapping?
Observe the following procedure for configuring variable PDO mapping (e.g., for Index 1600h or 1A00h):
1. Invalidate PDO: Write 0 to sub-index 00h of the corresponding Sync Manager Assignment object (0x1C12h for RPDO, 0x1C13h for TPDO). This step is crucial before modifying the mapping.
2. Clear Original Mapping Content: Write 0 to sub-index 00h of the PDO mapping object itself (e.g., 1600h or 1A00h). This clears all existing mapping entries.
3. Write New PDO Mapping Content: Write the 32-bit mapping parameter entries (structured as Index-Subindex-Length) into sub-indexes 1 to N of the PDO mapping object (e.g., 1600h or 1A00h) according to the desired mapping.
4. Write Total Number of PDO Mapping Objects: Write the total number (N) of objects you just mapped (in step 3) into sub-index 00h of the PDO mapping object (e.g., 1600h or 1A00h).
5. Validate PDO: Write 1 (or the number of PDOs assigned, usually 1) back to sub-index 00h of the corresponding Sync Manager Assignment object (0x1C12h or 0x1C13h) to activate the new mapping.
Important: PDO configuration must be done only when the EtherCAT state machine is in the Pre-Operation state (“2” displayed on the keypad). Modifying PDO parameters in other states will result in an SDO fault.
Do not save PDO configuration parameters (mapping objects like 1600h, 1A00h and assignment objects 1C12h, 1C13h) to EEPROM. They should be configured by the master every time upon power-on or transition to Pre-Operation.
When must PDO configuration be performed?
PDO configuration (defining the mapping content of variable PDOs like 1600h/1A00h and assigning the active PDO via 1C12h/1C13h) must only be performed when the EtherCAT state machine is in the Pre-Operation state. This state is typically indicated by “2” displayed on the servo drive’s keypad.
What conditions can cause an SDO fault during PDO configuration?
An SDO (Service Data Object) fault code will be returned during the following operations related to PDO configuration:
Attempting to modify PDO parameters (like the mapping content in 1600h/1A00h or the assignment in 1C12h/1C13h) when the EtherCAT state machine is in a state *other than* Pre-Operational.
Writing a value to the Sync Manager PDO Assignment object 0x1C12h (RPDO assignment) that is outside the valid range of RPDO mapping indices (1600h or 1701h…1705h).
Writing a value to the Sync Manager PDO Assignment object 0x1C13h (TPDO assignment) that is outside the valid range of TPDO mapping indices (1A00h or 1B01h…1B04h).
What CoE (CANopen over EtherCAT) service types are supported?
EtherCAT SDO (Service Data Object) is used for non-cyclic data transfer, such as parameter configuration. The supported CoE service types include:
Emergency message
SDO request
SDO response
TxPDO (Transmit Process Data Object)
RxPDO (Receive Process Data Object)
Remote TxPDO transmission request
Remote RxPDO transmission request
SDO message
The SV660N series servo drives specifically support SDO request and SDO response for parameter access.
What is the purpose of the Distributed Clock (DC)?
The Distributed Clock (DC) feature enables all EtherCAT devices on the network to use the same synchronized system time. This allows for synchronous execution of tasks across multiple slaves. A slave device can generate synchronous signals based on this synchronized system time. The SV660N servo drive supports the DC synchronization mode only. The synchronization cycle, controlled by the SYNCO signal from the master, varies depending on the motion modes being used.
How is the communication connection status indicated on the keypad?
The physical connection status of the two RJ45 network ports (PORT1/IN and PORTO/OUT) is indicated by segment “-” on the upper and lower parts of the first LED digit on the keypad.
Upper “-“: Corresponds to PORT1 (IN port).
Lower “-“: Corresponds to PORTO (OUT port).
Segment “-” Solid OFF: No communication (link) is detected in the physical layer for that port.
Segment “-” Solid ON: Communication (link) is detected in the physical layer for that port.
How is the EtherCAT communication state indicated on the keypad?
The 2nd LED digit on the keypad indicates the current state of the EtherCAT state machine of the slave, as described below:
| Status | SDO | RPDO | TPDO | Description | Keypad Display (2nd LED) |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Init | No | No | No | Communication initialization | “1”: solid ON |
| Pre-Operational | Yes | No | No | Network configuration initialized, SDO available | “2”: blinking at an interval of 400 ms |
| Safe-Operational | Yes | No | Yes | SDO and TPDO available, distributed clock mode available | “4”: blinking at an interval of 1200 ms (ON for 200 ms and OFF for 1000 ms) |
| Operational | Yes | Yes | Yes | Normal operational state | “8”: solid ON |
How is the current control mode (from 6060h) displayed on the keypad?
The 3rd LED digit on the keypad indicates the present control mode of the servo drive, corresponding to the value set in object 6060h (Modes of operation).
| Modes of operation (6060h Value) | Keypad Display (3rd LED) |
|---|---|
| 1: Profile position mode | 1 |
| 3: Profile velocity mode | 3 |
| 4: Profile torque mode | 4 |
| 6: Homing mode | 6 |
| 8: Cyclic synchronous position mode | 8 |
| 9: Cyclic synchronous velocity mode | 9 |
| 10: Cyclic synchronous torque mode | A |
| 0: (No mode / No meaning) [1] | 0 |
[1] If the value 0 is displayed, it indicates no value or the value 0 is written to 0x6060h.
How is the servo status (Reset, Not ready, Ready, Run) displayed on the 4th and 5th LEDs, including blinking behavior?
The 4th and 5th LEDs on the keypad indicate the servo (slave) status:
| Status | Description | Keypad Display (4th & 5th LEDs) | Blinking Behavior |
|---|---|---|---|
| Reset | Init | “Reset” | Static display |
| Not ready | Initialization is done. Control circuit ON, main circuit OFF. Not ready. | “nr” | Static display |
| Ready | Main circuit ON, S-ON signal inactive. Ready. | “ry” | Character “y” blinks if motor speed is not 0 RPM. Blinking frequency depends on communication state: – Pre-Op/Safe-Op: Matches state “2” or “4” blink rate. – Init/Operational: 2 Hz. |
| Run | S-ON signal active, motor energized. Run. | “rn” | Character “n” blinks if motor speed is not 0 RPM. Blinking frequency depends on communication state: – Pre-Op/Safe-Op: Matches state “2” or “4” blink rate. – Init/Operational: 2 Hz. |
Can you describe the different states in the CiA402 state machine (Initialization, Servo Ready, Servo Running, etc.) and what occurs in each?
The SV660N servo drive follows the standard CiA402 state machine for motion control devices. The states are:
| State | Description | Parameter Access |
|---|---|---|
| Initialization | Initialization of the servo drive and internal self-check are done. | Parameters cannot be set. Functions cannot be executed. |
| No fault | No fault exists in the servo drive or a fault has been cleared. | Parameters can be set. |
| Servo ready | The servo drive is ready (control power on, main power may be off or S-ON is inactive). | Parameters can be set. |
| Wait for the S-ON signal | The servo drive is waiting to be switched on (enabled). Main power is typically on. | Parameters can be set. |
| Servo running | The servo drive is running properly, the motor is powered on, and a specific operation mode (e.g., position, velocity control) is enabled. The motor runs if the reference is not 0. | Parameters with the setting condition of “During running” can be set. |
| Quick stop | The quick stop function is activated, and the servo drive is decelerating according to the quick stop configuration. | Parameters with the setting condition of “During running” can be set. |
| Stop at fault | A fault has occurred, and the servo drive is in the process of stopping according to the fault reaction. | Parameters with the setting condition of “During running” can be set. |
| Fault | The stop process after a fault is complete. All functions are prohibited. | Parameters can be modified for troubleshooting convenience. |
The drive can only run in a specified state when commanded according to the state machine transitions.
What is the pinout for the EtherCAT network ports (IN/OUT)?
The EtherCAT network ports (IN and OUT) are RJ45 connectors compliant with IEEE 802.3 and ISO 8877 standards. The pinout is as follows:
| Pin | Definition | Description |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | TX+ | Data transmitting (+) |
| 2 | TX- | Data transmitting (-) |
| 3 | RX+ | Data receiving (+) |
| 4 | NULL | Not connected |
| 5 | NULL | Not connected |
| 6 | RX- | Data receiving (-) |
| 7 | NULL | Not connected |
| 8 | NULL | Not connected |
What network topologies are supported?
EtherCAT features flexible communication topological structure without any limit. The SV660N series servo drive carries IN and OUT ports, enabling common topologies such as:
Linear connection (Daisy chain): The OUT port of one drive connects to the IN port of the next drive.
Redundancy ring connection: The OUT port of the last device in a line connects back to a second port on the master or a dedicated redundancy port, forming a ring for cable redundancy.
Other topologies like star or tree can also be implemented using EtherCAT infrastructure components (not shown in the provided diagrams).
What are the requirements for the EtherCAT communication cable?
The EtherCAT communication cable must meet the following requirements:
Type: Ethernet Category 5 (Cat 5) or higher (specifically for 100BASE-TX).
Shielding: Must be a high-strength shielded network cable.
Length: Cable length must not exceed 100 meters between devices (or between device and master/switch).
Using shielded network cable enhances the anti-interference capacity of the system.
What EMC standards does the servo drive comply with?
The servo drive complies with the following EMC standards:
IEC 61800-3:2004/A1:2011 (Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems—part 3: EMC requirements and specific test methods)
GB/T12688.3 (Chinese standard corresponding to IEC 61800-3)
How are faults and warnings classified by severity?
Faults and warnings are divided into three levels based on severity:
No. 1 > No. 2 > No. 3
Specifically:
No. 1 non-resettable fault (Most severe, usually requires power cycle)
No. 1 resettable fault
No. 2 resettable fault
No. 3 resettable warning (Least severe, often auto-clears)
How can resettable faults and warnings be cleared?
“Resettable” means the keypad stops displaying the fault/warning once receiving a reset signal.
To reset a resettable fault (No. 1 or No. 2) or warning (No. 3), use one of the following methods:
Method 1: Set parameter 200D-02h (Fault reset) to 1. (This parameter automatically restores to 0 immediately after the reset).
Method 2: Set the rising edge of bit 7 of the Control Word (Index 0x6040) through the host controller (EtherCAT master).
Additional steps for No. 1 or No. 2 faults: Before sending the fault reset signal, turn off the S-ON signal (disable the drive).
For No. 3 warnings: The servo drive typically resets warnings automatically after the warning source is cleared.
What should be checked if the LED does not light up or display “ry” upon startup?
If the LED neither lights up nor displays “ry” (Ready state) upon switching on control power (L1C, L2C) and main power (L1, L2, L3), check the following:
| Possible Cause | Confirming Method |
|---|---|
| 1. The voltage of the control circuit power supply is abnormal. | Check whether the value of H0B-63 is 1. Measure the AC voltage between L1C and L2C. |
| 2. Phase loss occurs on the input power supply. | Check whether the value of HOB-63 is 2. Voltage must be present in all the phases of a three-phase 380 V power supply. |
| 3. The voltage of the main circuit power supply is abnormal. | Check whether the value of H0B-63 is 3. For single-phase 220 V models, measure the AC voltage between L1 and L2. The keypad displays “nr” when the DC bus voltage amplitude (between terminals P and N) of the main circuit power supply is lower than 235 V. For three-phase 220 V/380 V models, measure the AC voltage among L1, L2, and L3. The keypad displays “nr” when the DC bus voltage amplitude (between terminals P and N) of the main circuit power supply is lower than 235 V/451 V respectively. |
| 4. The servo drive is faulty. | If the above checks pass but the issue persists, the drive may be faulty. |
What should be done if the keypad displays “Exxx.x” upon startup?
If the keypad displays an error code in the format “Exxx.x” (e.g., E101.0, E420.0) upon startup, it indicates a specific fault or warning condition.
Refer to the detailed fault and warning code lists and their corresponding troubleshooting solutions provided in the documentation (Sections “10.2 Communication Faults and Warning Codes”, “10.3 Solutions to Faults”, and “10.4 Solutions to Warnings”) to identify the cause and the corrective actions required for the specific code displayed.
After resolving the underlying issue and clearing any preceding faults, the keypad should display “ry” (Ready state).
How do I troubleshoot fault E101.0 (System parameter error)?
Direct Cause: The total number of parameters changes, or parameter values in groups 2002h and above exceed the limit. This generally occurs after a software update.
| Root Cause | Confirming Method | Solution |
|---|---|---|
| 1. The control power voltage drops instantaneously. | Check whether the voltage drops during control power (L1C, L2C) cutoff or whether instantaneous power failure occurs. Measure whether the voltage input to the control circuit cable during operation is within the specified range (e.g., 198-264V for 220V drive, 342-484V for 380V drive). |
Restore system parameters to default values (set 2002-20h = 1), and write parameters again. Increase the power capacity or replace with a power supply of larger capacity. Restore system parameters to default values (2002-20h = 1), and write parameters again. |
| 2. Instantaneous power failure occurs during parameter saving. | Check whether instantaneous power failure occurs during parameter saving. | Power on the system again, restore system parameters to default values (2002-20h = 1), and write parameters again. |
| 3. The number of write operations exceeds the limit. | Check whether parameters are updated frequently through the host controller. | Change the write mode and write parameters again. If the servo drive is faulty, replace it. |
| 4. The software has been updated. | Check whether the software has been updated. | Reset the servo drive model and the servo motor model, and restore system parameters to default values (2002-20h = 1). |
| 5. The servo drive is faulty. | If the fault persists after several times of restart and parameter initialization, the servo drive is faulty. | Replace the servo drive. |
How do I troubleshoot fault E101.1 (2000h/2001h parameter error)?
Direct Cause: The total number of parameters changes, or parameter values in group 2000h or 2001h exceed the limit. This generally occurs after a software update.
| Root Cause | Confirming Method | Solution |
|---|---|---|
| 1. Instantaneous power failure occurs during parameter saving. | Check whether instantaneous power failure occurs during parameter saving. | Set the servo drive model (2001-0Bh) to a wrong value first and perform a power cycle, and then set the servo drive model to a correct value and perform a power cycle. |
| 2. Instantaneous power failure occurs during the write operation. | Check whether instantaneous power failure occurs during writing motor parameters. | Write motor parameters using the software tool. |
| 3. The software has been updated. | Check whether the software has been updated. | Set the servo drive model (2001-0Bh) to a wrong value first and perform a power cycle, and then set the servo drive model to a correct value and perform a power cycle. |
| 4. The servo drive is faulty. | If the fault persists after repeated execution of steps 1 and 2 and multiple times of restart, the servo drive is faulty. | Replace the servo drive. |
How do I troubleshoot fault E102.0 (FPGA communication initialization error)?
Direct Cause: The FPGA- or MCU-related hardware is damaged, resulting in communication failure between the MCU and FPGA.
| Root Cause | Confirming Method | Solution |
|---|---|---|
| 1. The FPGA is faulty. | The fault persists after the servo drive is powered off and on several times. | 1. Confirm whether the FPGA has been upgraded. Ensure the programming is successful. 2. Replace the servo drive. |
| 2. The MCU cannot communicate with the FPGA. |
How do I troubleshoot fault E102.8 (Software version mismatch)?
| Cause | Confirming Method | Solution |
|---|---|---|
| The software version of MCU or FPGA is wrong. | Check whether the MCU version (H01-00) is 9xx.x (the fourth digit displayed on the keypad is 9). Check whether the FPGA version (H01-01) is 9xx.x (the fourth digit displayed on the keypad is 9). |
Contact Inovance for technical support and update to mutually-matching FPGA or MCU software. |
How do I troubleshoot fault E104.1 (MCU operation timeout)?
Direct Cause: The access to MCU times out.
| Root Cause | Confirming Method | Solution |
|---|---|---|
| 1. The FPGA is faulty. | The fault persists after the servo drive is powered off and on several times. | Replace the servo drive. |
| 2. The communication handshake between FPGA and HOST is abnormal. | ||
| 3. Access timeout occurs between HOST and the coprocessor. |
How do I troubleshoot fault E104.2 (Current loop operation timeout)?
Direct Cause: The operating time of the current loop exceeds the scheduling time. This fault is reported only in the commissioning stage.
| Root Cause | Confirming Method | Solution |
|---|---|---|
| The time interval of MCU torque interrupt scheduling is abnormal. | The fault persists after the servo drive is powered off and on several times. | Replace the servo drive. |
How do I troubleshoot fault E104.4 (Command update timeout)?
Direct Cause: Take the moment when entering the interrupt as the starting time, if the duration of the command-write operation in MCU is longer than the FPGA position and speed regulators start time, a warning will be reported.
| Root Cause | Confirming Method | Solution |
|---|---|---|
| The interrupt time of the current loop is too long. | Check whether the interrupt time of the torque loop is too long through the software tool. | Hide unnecessary functions. |
How do I troubleshoot fault E108.0 (Parameter write error)?
Direct Cause: Parameter values cannot be written to EEPROM.
| Root Cause | Confirming Method | Solution |
|---|---|---|
| An error occurs when writing parameters to EEPROM. | Modify a certain parameter value, power off and on the servo drive again, and check whether the modified value is saved. | If the modified value is not saved and the fault persists after the servo drive is powered off and on again, replace the servo drive. |
How do I troubleshoot fault E108.1 (Parameter read error)?
Direct Cause: Parameter values cannot be read in EEPROM.
| Root Cause | Confirming Method | Solution |
|---|---|---|
| An error occurs when reading parameter values in EEPROM. | Modify a certain parameter value, power on the servo drive again, and check whether the modified value is saved. | If the modified value is not saved and the fault persists after the servo drive is powered off and on again, replace the servo drive. |
How do I troubleshoot fault E108.2 (Invalid check on data written in EEPROM)?
| Root Cause | Confirming Method | Solution |
|---|---|---|
| The check on the data written in EEPROM fails. | Modify a certain parameter value, power off and on the servo drive again, and check whether the modified value is saved. | If the modified value is not saved and the fault persists after the servo drive is powered off and on again, replace the servo drive. |
How do I troubleshoot fault E108.3 (Invalid check on data read in EEPROM)?
| Root Cause | Confirming Method | Solution |
|---|---|---|
| The check on the data read in EEPROM fails. | Modify a certain parameter value, power off and on the servo drive again, and check whether the modified value is saved. | If the modified value is not saved and the fault persists after the servo drive is powered off and on several times, replace the servo drive. |
How do I troubleshoot fault E120.0 (Unknown encoder type)?
Direct Cause: The servo drive detects the encoder model during initialization upon power-on. If the encoder type does not comply with the requirements, the servo drive reports E120.0.
| Root Cause | Confirming Method | Solution |
|---|---|---|
| The encoder model does not match the servo drive. | Check whether the encoder model is correct. | Replace the encoder. |
How do I troubleshoot fault E120.1 (Unknown motor model)?
Direct Cause: The servo drive detects the motor model (H00-00) during initialization upon power-on. If the motor model does not exist, the servo drive reports E120.1.
| Root Cause | Confirming Method | Solution |
|---|---|---|
| The motor model is set improperly. | Check whether H00-00 (Motor code) is set properly. | Set H00-00 to a proper value that matches the motor model. |
How do I troubleshoot fault E120.2 (Unknown drive model)?
Direct Cause: The servo drive detects the servo drive model (H01-10) during initialization upon power-on. If the servo drive model does not exist, the servo drive reports E120.2.
| Root Cause | Confirming Method | Solution |
|---|---|---|
| The servo drive model is set improperly. | Check whether H01-10 (Servo drive series number) is set properly. | Set H01-10 to a proper value that matches the servo drive model. |
How do I troubleshoot fault E120.5 (Motor current and drive current mismatch)?
Direct Cause: The rated output current of the servo drive is higher than the rated current of the motor.
| Root Cause | Confirming Method | Solution |
|---|---|---|
| The internal scaling value is abnormal. | Check whether the servo drive model is correct. If the rated current of the set servo drive model is larger than the rated current of the motor, calculation overflow will occur. | Replace with a servo drive of lower rated output current or a motor with higher rated current. |
How do I troubleshoot fault E120.6 (FPGA and motor model mismatch)?
Direct Cause: 1. The motor model is set improperly, causing mismatch and malfunction. 2. The motor model is set properly, but the motor encoder is not supported by the servo drive.
| Root Cause | Confirming Method | Solution |
|---|---|---|
| The FPGA does not support the motor encoder. | Check whether the motor encoder is supported by the FPGA version (H01-01). | Update FPGA software or replace the motor encoder. |
How do I troubleshoot fault E122.0 (Multi-turn absolute encoder setting error)?
| Root Cause | Confirming Method | Solution |
|---|---|---|
| The motor does not match the absolute position mode or the motor code is set improperly. | Check the motor nameplate to see whether the motor is equipped with an absolute encoder. Check whether 200D-01h (Motor code) is set properly. |
Set 200D-01h (Motor code) correctly according to the motor nameplate or replace with a matching motor. |
How do I troubleshoot fault E122.1 (Different DIs assigned with the same function)?
| Root Cause | Confirming Method | Solution |
|---|---|---|
| 1. The same function is assigned to different DIs. | View 2003-03h, 2003-05h…2003-15h, 2017-01h, and 2017-03h…2017-1Fh to check whether they are assigned with the same DI function No.. | Assign different DI functions to parameters that have been assigned with the same DI function. To enable such assignments, restart the control circuit or switch off the S-ON signal and send a “RESET” signal. |
| 2. The DI function No. exceeds maximum setting number allowed for DI functions. | Check whether the MCU software has been updated. | Restore system parameters to default values (2002-20h = 1) and power off and on the servo drive again. |
How do I troubleshoot fault E122.3 (Upper limit invalid)?
| Root Cause | Confirming Method | Solution |
|---|---|---|
| The upper limit value of the mechanical single-turn position exceeds 2^31 in the absolute position rotation mode. | Check the mechanical gear ratio setpoint, the upper limit of the mechanical single-turn position and the electronic gear ratio in the absolute position rotation mode (H02-01 = 2). | Reset the mechanical gear ratio, the upper limit of mechanical single-turn position and the electronic gear ratio to ensure the upper limit of the mechanical single-turn position (reference range) does not exceed 2^31. |
How do I troubleshoot fault E136.0 (Encoder parameter error)?
Direct Cause: When the servo drive reads parameters in the encoder ROM, no parameters are saved there or parameter values are inconsistent with the expected values.
| Root Cause | Confirming Method | Solution |
|---|---|---|
| 1. The servo drive model does not match with the servo motor model. | View the servo drive and servo motor nameplates to check whether the devices used are Inovance SV660N series servo drive and servo motor. | Replace with the mutually-matching servo drive and servo motor. |
| 2. A parameter check error occurs or no parameter is stored in the serial incremental encoder ROM. | Check whether the encoder cable provided by Inovance is used. For cable specifications, see “1.4 Cable Models”. Ensure the cable is intact and in good contact at both ends. Measure signals PS+, PS-, +5V and GND at both ends of the encoder cable and observe whether signals at both ends are consistent. For signal definitions, see “3 Wiring”. |
Use the encoder cable provided by Inovance. Ensure the cable is connected to the motor securely and tighten the screws on the servo drive side. Use a new encoder cable if necessary. Do not bundle encoder cables together with power cables (RST, UVW). Lay encoder cables and power cables through different routes. |
| 3. The servo drive is faulty. | The fault persists after servo drive is powered off and on again. | Replace the servo drive. |
How do I troubleshoot fault E136.1 (Encoder communication error)?
Direct Cause: 1. The encoder cable is disconnected. 2. The encoder communication suffers from interference.
| Root Cause | Confirming Method | Solution |
|---|---|---|
| A fault occurs on the communication between FPGA and the motor encoder during initialization upon power-on. | Observe the value of HOB-28 to see whether it is not 0. | Check whether the encoder cable is connected properly. Check whether the motor model is set properly. Check whether H01-00 (MCU software version) and H01-01 (FPGA software version) are the correct ones. |
How do I troubleshoot fault E140.0 (Encryption chip check error)?
Direct Cause: The check on the encryption chip fails.
| Rout Cause | Confirming Method | Solution |
|---|---|---|
| The encryption software is not programmed. | Power off and on again to check whether the fault persists. | Contact Inovance to program the encryption software again. |
How do I troubleshoot fault E140.1 (Encryption chip check failure)?
Direct Cause: The check on the encryption chip fails.
| Rout Cause | Confirming Method | Solution |
|---|---|---|
| The key of the encryption chip is incorrect, causing failure in decrypting the Renesas chip. | 1. Check the softwrae version. Check whether the encryption program is programmed in the servo drive. 2. Check whether the encryption chip is abnormal. |
Power off and on the servo drive again, if the fault persists, contact Inovance for maintenance. |
How do I troubleshoot fault E150.0 (STO signal input protection activated)?
Direct Cause: The STO input protection applies (safety state).
| Root Cause | Confirming Method | Solution |
|---|---|---|
| 1. The STO is activated. | Check whether the STO function is activated. | There is no need to take any actions. Clear the fault through the fault reset function after the STO terminal is restored. |
| 2. The STO power supply is abnormal. | Check whether the 24 V power supply of the STO works normally. | Measure the 24 V power supply of the STO to check whether it is stable. Tighten the cables that are loose or disconnected. |
| 3. The STO is inactive. | The fault persists after preceding actions are taken. | Replace the servo drive. |
NOTE: When HOA-21 is set to 0, STO displays the STO state. When HOA-21 is set to 1, STO displays E150.0.
How do I troubleshoot fault E150.1 (STO signal input error)?
Direct Cause: The single-channel input of STO is invalid.
| Root Cause | Confirming Method | Solution |
|---|---|---|
| 1. The STO power supply is abnormal. | Check whether the 24 V power supply of the STO works normally. | Measure the 24 V power supply of the STO to check whether it is stable. Tighten the cables that are loose or disconnected. |
| 2. The STO input resistor is abnormal. | After STO is triggered, only one STO signal is sent to MCU after the 24 V power supply is cut off due to input resistor drift. | Replace the servo drive. |
| 3. The STO is inactive. | The fault persists after preceding actions are taken. | Replace the servo drive. |
How do I troubleshoot fault E150.2 (Abnormal voltage detected)?
Direct Cause: The MCU monitors the 5 V power supply provided to the PWM Buffer to detect whether overvoltage and undervoltage occurs. If the voltage is abnormal, E150.2 will be displayed.
| Root Cause | Confirming Method | Solution |
|---|---|---|
| The 5 V power supply provided to the Buffer is abnormal. | Check the 5 V power supply. | Replace the servo drive. |
How do I troubleshoot fault E150.3 (STO upstream optocoupler detection failure)?
Direct Cause: Short circuit occurs on the optocoupler of the upstream hardware circuit of STO.
| Root Cause | Confirming Method | Solution |
|---|---|---|
| Short circuit occurs on the upstream optocoupler of STO1 or STO2. | The servo drive does not display E150.0 when the 24 V power supply is powered off and on again. | Replace the servo drive. |
How do I troubleshoot fault E150.4 (PWM Buffer detection failure)?
Direct Cause: An error occurs on the PWM Buffer integrated circuit during initialization detection upon power-on (the PWM signal cannot be blocked).
| Root Cause | Confirming Method | Solution |
|---|---|---|
| The Buffer fails to block the PWM signals. | The fault persists after the servo drive is powered off and on several times. | Replace the servo drive. |
How do I troubleshoot fault E201.0 (Phase-P overcurrent)?
Direct Cause: An excessively high current flows through the positive pole of the DC-AC circuit.
| Root Cause | Confirming Method | Solution |
|---|---|---|
| 1. Gains are set improperly, leading to motor oscillation. | Check whether vibration or sharp noise occurs during start and operation of the motor, or view the “Current feedback” in the software tool. | Adjust the gains. |
| 2. The encoder is wired improperly, aging, or connected loosely. | Check whether encoder cables provided by Inovance are used. Check whether the encoder cable is aging, corroded, or connected loosely. Switch off the S-ON signal and rotate the motor shaft manually, observing whether the value of 200B-12h changes when the shaft rotates. |
Re-solder, tighten or replace encoder cables. |
| 3. The servo drive is faulty. | Unplug the motor cable but the fault persists after the servo drive is powered off and on again. | Replace the servo drive. |
| 4. Overcurrent occurs on the regenerative resistor. | Check whether the resistance of the external regenerative resistor is too small or the regenerative resistor is short-circuited (between terminals P and C). | Select the resistance and model of the regenerative resistor again. Perform wiring again. |
How do I troubleshoot fault E201.1 (Phase-U overcurrent)?
Direct Cause: A large current exceeding the threshold is detected in phase U.
| Cause | Confirming Method | Solution |
|---|---|---|
| 1. Motor cables are in poor contact. | Check whether both ends of servo drive power cables and motor cables on servo drive UVW sides are loose and fall off. | Tighten the cables that are loose or fall off. |
| 2. Motor cables are grounded. | After confirming the servo drive power cables and motor cables are connected properly, measure whether the insulation resistance between the servo drive UVW ends and the PE cable is at MΩ level. | Replace the motor in case of poor insulation. |
| 3. UVW cables of the motor are short-circuited. | Unplug the motor cables and check whether short circuit occurs among UVW cables and whether burrs exist in the wiring. | Connect the motor cables properly. |
| 4. The motor is damaged due to over-temperature. | Unplug the motor cables and measure whether the resistance among UVW cables of the motor are balanced. | Replace the motor if the resistance among UVW cables of the motor is unbalanced. |
How do I troubleshoot fault E201.2 (Phase-V overcurrent)?
Direct Cause: A large current exceeding the threshold is detected in phase V.
| Root Cause | Confirming Method | Solution |
|---|---|---|
| 1. Motor cables are in poor contact. | Check whether both ends of servo drive power cables and motor cables on servo drive UVW sides are loose and fall off. | Tighten the cables that are loose or fall off. |
| 2. Motor cables are grounded. | After confirming the servo drive power cables and motor cables are connected properly, measure whether the insulation resistance between the servo drive UVW ends and the PE cable is at MΩ level. | Replace the motor in case of poor insulation. |
| 3. UVW cables of the motor are short-circuited. | Unplug the motor cables and check whether short circuit occurs among UVW cables and whether burrs exist in the wiring. | Connect the motor cables properly. |
| 4. The motor is damaged due to over-temperature. | Unplug the motor cables and measure whether the resistance among UVW cables of the motor are balanced. | Replace the motor if the resistance among UVW cables of the motor is unbalanced. |
How do I troubleshoot fault E201.4 (Phase-N overcurrent)?
Direct Cause: A large current exceeding the threshold is detected in phase N (neutral, applicable in some drive topologies or fault conditions).
| Root Cause | Confirming Method | Solution |
|---|---|---|
| 1. Motor cables are in poor contact. | Check whether both ends of servo drive power cables and motor cables on servo drive UVW sides are loose and fall off. | Tighten the cables that are loose or fall off. |
| 2. Motor cables are grounded. | After confirming the servo drive power cables and motor cables are connected properly, measure whether the insulation resistance between the servo drive UVW ends and the PE cable is at MΩ level. | Replace the motor in case of poor insulation. |
| 3. UVW cables of the motor are short-circuited. | Unplug the motor cables and check whether short circuit occurs among UVW cables and whether burrs exist in the wiring. | Connect the motor cables properly. |
| 4. The motor is damaged due to over-temperature. | Unplug the motor cables and measure whether the resistance among UVW cables of the motor are balanced. | Replace the motor if the resistance among UVW cables of the motor is unbalanced. Perform wiring again. |
How do I troubleshoot fault E208.0 (MCU position reference updated frequently)?
Find the fault cause through the internal fault code (200B-2Eh).
| Root Cause (Based on 200B-2Eh value) | Confirming Method | Solution |
|---|---|---|
| 1. MCU communication times out. (200B-2Eh = 1208) | The internal integrated circuit is damaged. | Replace the servo drive. |
| 2. FPGA operation times out. (200B-2Eh = 0208) | Figure out the cause according to cause 1 (MCU communication timeout implies damaged internal circuit). |
How do I troubleshoot fault E208.2 (Encoder communication timeout)?
| Root Cause | Confirming Method | Solution |
|---|---|---|
| The servo drive fails to receive the data fed back by the encoder in three consecutive cycles. | Check bit12 of H0B-30. | Check whether the motor model is correct. |
| The encoder cable is connected improperly. | Check whether encoder cable is in proper condition. |
|
| The encoder cable is loose. | ||
| The encoder cable is too long. | ||
| The encoder communication suffers from interference. | ||
| The encoder is faulty. | If servo drive operates improperly, replace it. |
How do I troubleshoot fault E208.3 (Current sampling fault)?
| Root Cause | Confirming Method | Solution |
|---|---|---|
| Phase-U and phase-V current samplings are abnormal. | Check whether there is large equipment generating interferences on site and whether there are multiple interference sources in the cabinet. | Check whether the servo drive and motor are grounded and shielded properly. Install magnetic ring on the motor power cables and encoder cables. |
| The internal current sampling integrated circuit is damaged. | Replace the servo drive. |
How do I troubleshoot fault E208.4 (FPGA current loop operation timeout)?
Cause: The operation time of the current loop exceeds the interval threshold.
| Root Cause | Confirming Method | Solution |
|---|---|---|
| The FPGA operation times out. | 200B-2Eh (Internal fault code) = 4208: The current loop operation times out. | Turn off some unnecessary functions to reduce the operating time of the current loop. |
How do I troubleshoot fault E210.0 (Output short-circuited to ground)?
Direct Cause: The servo drive detects abnormal motor phase current or bus voltage during self-check upon power-on.
| Root Cause | Confirming Method | Solution |
|---|---|---|
| 1. Power cables (UVW) of the servo drive are short-circuited to ground. | Unplug motor cables and check whether the servo drive power cables (UVW) are short circuited to ground (PE). | Re-connect or replace the servo drive power cables. |
| 2. The motor is short-circuited to ground. | After confirming servo drive power cables and motor cables are connected securely, check whether the insulation resistance between servo drive UVW terminals and the grounding cable (PE) is at MΩ-level. | Replace the servo motor. |
| 3. The servo drive is faulty. | Disconnect servo drive power cables from the servo drive. The fault persists after the servo drive is powered off and on several times. | Replace the servo drive. |
How do I troubleshoot fault E234.0 (Runaway Protection)?
Direct Cause: The torque reference direction is opposite to the speed feedback direction in torque control mode, OR the speed feedback direction is opposite to the speed reference direction in position or speed control mode.
| Root Cause | Confirming Method | Solution |
|---|---|---|
| 1. The UVW cables are connected in the wrong phase sequence. | Check whether UVW phase sequence on the servo drive side is consistent with that on the motor side. | Connect UVW cables according to the correct phase sequence. |
| 2. An error occurs on the initial phase detection of the motor rotor due to interference signals upon power-on. | The UVW phase sequence is correct, but E234.0 occurs when the servo drive is enabled. | Power off and on the servo drive again. |
| 3. The encoder model is wrong or the wiring is incorrect. | Check the servo drive and servo motor nameplates to check whether the devices used are Inovance SV660N series servo drive and servo motor. | Replace with the mutually-matching servo drive and servo motor. If you use Inovance SV660N series servo drive and servo motor, ensure that 2000-01h is set to 14000. Check the motor model, encoder model, and encoder cable connections again. |
| 4. The encoder cable is connected improperly, corroded or loose. | Check whether the encoder cable provided by Inovance is used. Check whether the cable is aging, corroded or loose. Switch off the S-ON signal, rotate the motor shaft manually, and check whether the value of 200B-0Bh (Electrical angle) changes when the motor shaft rotates. |
Re-solder, tighten or replace the encoder cable. |
| 5. The gravity load is too heavy in vertical axis applications. | Check whether the vertical axis load is too heavy. Adjust brake parameters 2002-0Ah…2002-0Dh and check whether the fault can be cleared. | Reduce the load of the vertical axis, improve the stiffness level or hide this fault without affecting the safety performance or normal use. |
| 6. Improper parameter settings cause excessive vibration. | The stiffness level is too high, leading to excessive vibration. | Set a proper stiffness level to avoid excessive vibration. |
How do I troubleshoot fault E400.0 (Main circuit overvoltage)?
Direct Cause: The DC bus voltage between terminals P and N exceeds the overvoltage threshold.
Thresholds:
220 V servo drive: Normal 310 V, Overvoltage > 420 V
380 V servo drive: Normal 540 V, Overvoltage > 760 V
| Root Cause | Confirming Method | Solution |
|---|---|---|
| 1. The voltage input to the main circuit is too high. | Check the power input specifications and measure the input voltage (RST) within the allowed range: 220 V drive: 198 V to 264 V AC 380 V drive: 342 V to 484 V AC |
Replace or adjust the power supply according to the specified ranges. |
| 2. The power supply is unstable or affected by lightning strike. | Check whether the power input to the servo drive is unstable, affected by lightning strike or is within the preceding range. | Connect a surge protection device and then switch on the control circuit and main circuit. If the fault persists, replace the servo drive. |
| 3. The regenerative resistor fails. | If internal resistor (2002-1Ah = 0): check P-D jumper, measure C-D resistance. If external resistor (2002-1Ah = 1, 2): measure P-C resistance. Check resistor specs (“1.1.4 Specifications of the Regenerative Resistor”). |
If resistance is infinite, resistor is disconnected. If internal used, replace with external (remove P-D jumper). Select appropriate external resistor. If external used, replace with new one between P and C. Set 2002-1Bh/1Ch according to used resistor specs. |
| 4. The resistance of the external regenerative resistor is too large, and energy absorption during braking is insufficient. | Measure the resistance of the external regenerative resistor between terminals P and C, and compare the measured value with the recommended value. | Connect a new external regenerative resistor of the recommended resistance between terminals P and C. Set 2002-1Bh/1Ch according to used resistor specs. |
| 5. The motor is in abrupt acceleration/deceleration status and the maximum braking energy exceeds the energy absorption value. | Confirm the acceleration/deceleration time during operation and measure whether the DC bus voltage between terminals P and N exceeds the fault threshold during deceleration. | Ensure the voltage input to the main circuit is within the specified range, and then increase the acceleration/deceleration time if allowed. |
| 6. The bus voltage sampling value deviates greatly from the measured value. | Check whether the bus voltage (200B-1Bh) detected is within the range: 220 V drive: 200B-1Bh > 420 V 380 V drive: 200B-1Bh > 760 V Measure whether the DC bus voltage detected between terminals P and N is close to the value displayed in 200B-1Bh. |
Contact Inovance for technical support. |
| 7. The servo drive is faulty. | The fault persists after main circuit is powered off and on several times. | Replace the servo drive. |
How do I troubleshoot fault E410.0 (Main circuit undervoltage)?
Direct Cause: The DC bus voltage between terminals P and N is lower than the undervoltage threshold.
Thresholds:
220 V servo drive: Normal 310 V, Undervoltage < 200 V (or < 180 V for 7.5W drives)
380 V servo drive: Normal 540 V, Undervoltage < 380 V
| Root Cause | Confirming Method | Solution |
|---|---|---|
| 1. The main circuit power supply is unstable or fails. | Check power input specs and measure voltage (RST) within range: 220 V drive: 198-264V AC 380 V drive: 342-484V AC (All three phases must be measured). |
Increase the power capacity. |
| 2. Instantaneous power failure occurs. | Check for instantaneous power failure. | |
| 3. Voltage drop occurs on the power supply during operation. | Monitor the input voltage to check if the same supply powers other devices causing drops. | |
| 4. Phase loss: A single-phase power supply is used for a three-phase servo drive. | Check whether main circuit cables are connected properly and whether phase loss detection (200A-01h) is hidden. | Replace the cables and connect the main circuit cables properly. Three-phase: R, S, T |
| 5. The servo drive is faulty. | Check bus voltage (200B-1Bh) is below threshold: 220V drive: < 200V (or < 180V for 750W) 380V drive: < 380V The fault persists after the main circuit is powered off and on several times. |
Replace the servo drive. |
How do I troubleshoot fault E420.0 (Phase loss fault)?
Direct Cause: Phase loss occurs on a three-phase servo drive.
| Root Cause | Confirming Method | Solution |
|---|---|---|
| 1. The three-phase input cables are connected improperly. | Check whether cables between the power supply side and main circuit input terminals (R/S/T) are in good condition and connected properly. | Replace the cables and connect the main circuit cables properly. |
| 2. A single-phase power supply is applied to a three-phase servo drive. | Check power input specs and measure voltage within range: 220V drive: 198-264V AC 380V drive: 342-484V AC (All three phases must be measured). |
A three-phase servo drive of 0.75 kW (2001-03h = 5) is allowed to run under a single-phase power supply. If input voltage complies, set 200A-01h to 2 (Inhibit warning/fault). If input voltage does not comply, replace or adjust power supply. |
| 3. The three-phase power supply is unbalanced or the voltage of all three phases is too low. | Check input voltage (as above). | If input voltage does not comply with specifications, replace or adjust the power supply. |
| 4. The servo drive is faulty. | The fault persists after the main circuit (L1, L2, L3) is powered off and on several times. | Replace the servo drive. |
How do I troubleshoot fault E430.0 (Control circuit undervoltage)?
Direct Cause: The control circuit power supply is lower than the undervoltage threshold.
Thresholds:
220 V servo drive: Normal 310 V, Undervoltage < 190 V
380 V servo drive: Normal 540 V, Undervoltage < 350 V
| Root Cause | Confirming Method | Solution |
|---|---|---|
| 1. The power supply of the control circuit is unstable or the voltage of the power supply drops. | Check whether the fault occurs during control circuit power supply (L1C, L2C) cutoff or during instantaneous power failure. | Restore system parameters to default values (2002-20h = 1), and write parameters again. |
| Measure whether the voltage input to the control circuit cable is within the range: 220 V drive: 198 V to 264 V AC 380 V drive: 342 V to 484 V AC |
Increase the power capacity. | |
| 2. The control circuit cables are in poor contact | Check whether control circuit cables are connected properly and measure whether the voltage of the control circuit cable on the servo drive side is within the preceding range. | Re-connect or replace the cables. |
How do I troubleshoot fault E500.0 (Motor overspeed)?
Direct Cause: The actual speed of the servo motor exceeds the overspeed threshold.
| Root Cause | Confirming Method | Solution |
|---|---|---|
| 1. The UVW phase sequence of motor cables is incorrect. | Check whether UVW phase sequence on the servo drive side is consistent with that on the motor side. | Connect UVW cables according to the correct phase sequence. |
| 2. 200A-09h is set improperly. | Check whether the overspeed threshold is lower than the maximum motor speed required in actual applications. Overspeed threshold = 1.2 x Max motor speed (if 200A-09h = 0) Overspeed threshold = 200A-09h (if setpoint > 0 and < 1.2 x Max motor speed) |
Reset the overspeed threshold (200A-09h) according to actual mechanical requirements. |
| 3. The input reference is higher than the overspeed threshold. | Check motor speed corresponding to input reference exceeds threshold. In CSP: Check 6091h, position reference increment. In PP: Check 6091h, 6081h (Profile velocity). In HM: Check 6091h, 6099-01h, 6099-02h. In Speed Control: Check 6091h, 60FFh, 2006-09h/0Ah, 607Fh. In Torque Control: Check speed limits 2007-14h/15h. |
Position mode: Decrease reference increment (CSP) or profile velocity (PP), increase ramps (PP). Adjust HM speeds/ramp. Reduce gear ratio. Speed mode: Decrease target velocity, speed limit, gear ratio. Increase ramps (PV). Torque mode: Set speed limit lower than overspeed threshold. |
| 4. The motor speed overshoots. | Check whether the speed feedback exceeds the overspeed threshold using the software tool. | Adjust the gains or operating conditions of the machine. |
| 5. The servo drive is faulty. | The fault persists after servo drive is powered off and on again. | Replace the servo drive. |
How do I troubleshoot fault E500.1 (Speed feedback overflow)?
Direct Cause: The FPGA speed measurement overflows.
| Root Cause | Confirming Method | Solution |
|---|---|---|
| The FPGA speed measurement is abnormal. | Check whether bit9 of HOB-30 is 1. | The speed feedback is abnormal, check whether the encoder version (H00-04) is proper. |
Replace the encoder cables. |
||
The encoder cables suffer from interference. Re-connect the grounding cable and the shielded cable or install a magnetic ring on the encoder cable. |
How do I troubleshoot fault E500.2 (FPGA position feedback pulse overspeed)?
Direct Cause: Overspeed occurs on the FPGA position feedback pulse.
| Root Cause | Confirming Method | Solution |
|---|---|---|
| The MCU detects excessive pulse increment fed back by the FPGA. | 1. Check whether the value of H0B-17 changes abruptly. | Modify the value of H0A-70 (Overspeed threshold). The default value is 0. Use the maximum motor speed as the threshold for excessive pulse increment. |
| 2. Check whether the communication between the servo drive and the encoder suffers from interference. |
How do I troubleshoot fault E602.0 (Angle auto-tuning error)?
Direct Cause: Abnormal jitter occurs on the encoder feedback during angle auto-tuning.
| Root Cause | Confirming Method | Solution |
|---|---|---|
| An encoder feedback error occurs. | Check whether the encoder communication suffers from interference. | Check the wiring of the encoder. |
How do I troubleshoot fault E602.2 (Wrong UVW phase sequence detected during angle auto-tuning)?
Direct Cause: A wrong UVW phase sequence is detected during angle auto-tuning.
| Root Cause | Confirming Method | Solution |
|---|---|---|
| The UVW cables are connected reversely, which is detected during angle auto-tuning. | – | Exchange the cables of any two phases of UVW and perform auto-tuning again. |
How do I troubleshoot fault E605.0 (Speed upon S-ON too high)?
| Root Cause | Confirming Method | Solution |
|---|---|---|
| Speeds of servo drives in sizes A and B exceed the rated speed upon servo ON. | Check whether the motor is in the power generating state. | Reduce the speed and switch on the S-ON signal again. |
How do I troubleshoot fault E620.0 (Motor overload)?
Direct Cause: The accumulative heat of the servo motor reaches the fault threshold.
| Root Cause | Confirming Method | Solution |
|---|---|---|
| 1. The motor and encoder cable is connected improperly. | Check the wiring among the servo drive, servo motor and encoder according to the correct wiring diagram. | Connect cables according to the correct wiring diagram. It is recommended to use the cables provided by Inovance. If you use customized cables, ensure such cables are made and connected based on the wiring instructions. |
| 2. The load is too heavy. The motor keeps outputting an effective torque higher than the rated value. | Check the overload characteristics of the servo drive or servo motor. Check whether the average load ratio (200B-0DH) keeps exceeding 100.0%. | Replace with a servo drive of large capacity and a matching servo motor, or reduce the load and increase the acceleration/deceleration time. |
| 3. Acceleration/Deceleration is too frequent or the load inertia is too large. | Calculate the mechanical inertia ratio or perform inertia auto-tuning, and view the value of 2008-10h (Load inertia ratio). Confirm the individual operation cycle for cyclic operation. | Increase the acceleration/deceleration time of an individual operation cycle. |
| 4. Gains are improper or the stiffness level is too high. | Observe whether the motor vibrates and generates abnormal noise during operation. | Adjust the gains. |
| 5. The servo drive or motor models are set improperly. | Check the motor model in 2000-06h and servo drive model in 2001-0Bh. | Read the servo drive nameplate and set the servo drive model and motor model properly. |
| 6. The motor is stalled due to mechanical factors, resulting in overload during operation. | Check the reference and motor speed (200B-01h) through the software tool or the keypad: Ref in position mode: 200B-0Eh Ref in speed mode: 200B-02h Ref in torque mode: 200B-03h Check whether the reference value is not 0 but the motor speed is 0. |
Eliminate mechanical factors. |
| 7. The servo drive is faulty. | The fault persists after servo drive is powered off and on again. | Replace the servo drive. |
NOTE: When E620.0 occurs, stop the servo drive for at least 30s before further operations.
How do I troubleshoot fault E630.0 (Motor stall)?
Direct Cause: The motor speed actual value is lower than 10 RPM but the torque reference reaches the limit, and such status persists for the time defined by 200A-21h.
| Root Cause | Confirming Method | Solution |
|---|---|---|
| 1. Power output phase (UVW) loss or incorrect phase sequence occurs on the servo drive. | Perform motor trial run without load and check cable connections and the phase sequence. | Re-connect the cables according to the correct wiring diagram or replace the cables. |
| 2. The motor parameters (especially the pole pairs) are set improperly and motor angle auto-tuning is not performed. | Read parameters in group H00 to check whether the pole pairs are set properly. Perform angle auto-tuning on the motor several times and check whether the value of H00-28 remains unchanged. |
Modify motor parameter values. |
| 3. The communication commands suffer from interference. | Check whether jitter occurs on the commands sent from the host controller and whether EtherCAT communication suffers from interference. | Check whether the communication circuit between the host controller and the servo drive suffers from interference. |
| 4. The motor is stalled due to mechanical factors. | Check the reference and motor speed (H0B-00) through the software tool or the keypad: Ref in position mode: H0B-13 Ref in speed control mode: H0B-01 Ref in torque control mode: H0B-02 Check whether the reference value is not 0 but the motor speed is 0. Check the current feedback (torque reference) waveform. |
Check whether any mechanical part gets stuck or eccentric. |
How do I troubleshoot fault E640.0 (IGBT over-temperature)?
Direct Cause: The IGBT temperature reaches the fault threshold defined by H0A-18.
| Root Cause | Confirming Method | Solution |
|---|---|---|
| 1. The ambient temperature is too high. | Measure the ambient temperature. | Improve cooling conditions to lower down the ambient temperature. |
| 2. The servo drive is powered off frequently to reset the overload fault. | View the fault log (set 200B-22h and check 200B-23h) to see whether an overload fault or warning (E620.0, E630.0, E650.0, E909.0, E920.0, and E922.0) is reported. | Change the fault reset mode and perform reset 30s after overload. Increase the capacities of the servo drive and servo motor. Increase the acceleration/deceleration time and reduce the load. |
| 3. The fan is damaged. | Check whether the fan rotates during operation. | Replace the servo drive. |
| 4. The installation direction and clearance of the servo drive are improper. | Check whether the servo drive is installed properly. | Install the servo drive according to the installation requirements. |
| 5. The servo drive is faulty. | The servo drive is restarted 5 min after power-off, but the fault persists. | Replace the servo drive. |
NOTE: When E640.0 occurs, stop the servo drive for at least 30s before further operations.
How do I troubleshoot fault E640.1 (Flywheel diode over-temperature)?
Direct Cause: The temperature of the flywheel diode reaches the fault threshold defined by H0A-18.
| Root Cause | Confirming Method | Solution |
|---|---|---|
| 1. The ambient temperature is too high. | Measure the ambient temperature. | Improve cooling conditions to lower down the ambient temperature. |
| 2. The servo drive is powered off frequently to reset the overload fault. | View the fault log (set 200B-22h and check 200B-23h) to see whether an overload fault or warning (E620.0, E630.0, E650.0, E909.0, E920.0, and E922.0) is reported. | Change the fault reset mode and perform reset 30s after overload. Increase the capacities of the servo drive and servo motor. Increase the acceleration/deceleration time and reduce the load. |
| 3. The fan is damaged. | Check whether the fan rotates during operation. | Replace the servo drive. |
| 4. The installation direction and clearance of the servo drive are improper. | Check whether the servo drive is installed properly. | Install the servo drive according to the installation requirements. |
| 5. The servo drive is faulty. | The servo drive is restarted 5 min after power-off, but the fault persists. | Replace the servo drive. |
NOTE: When E640.1 occurs, stop the servo drive for at least 30s before further operations.
How do I troubleshoot fault E650.0 (Heatsink over-temperature)?
Direct Cause: The power module temperature of the servo drive is higher than the over-temperature protection threshold.
| Root Cause | Confirming Method | Solution |
|---|---|---|
| 1. The ambient temperature is too high. | Measure the ambient temperature. | Improve cooling conditions to lower down the ambient temperature. |
| 2. The servo drive is powered off frequently to reset the overload fault. | View the fault records: Check whether overload fault (set 200B-22h and view 200B-23h) or warning (E620.0, E630.0, E650.0, E909.0, E920.0, and E922.0) is reported. | Change the fault reset mode and perform reset 30s after overload. Increase the capacity of the servo drive and servo motor. Increase the acceleration/deceleration time and reduce the load. |
| 3. The fan is damaged. | Check whether the fan rotates during operation. | Replace the servo drive. |
| 4. The installation direction and clearance of the servo drive are improper. | Check whether the servo drive is installed properly. | Install the servo drive according to the installation requirements. |
| 5. The servo drive is faulty. | The servo drive is restarted 5 min after power-off, but the fault persists. | Replace the servo drive. |
NOTE: When E650.0 occurs, stop the servo drive for at least 30s before further operations.
How do I troubleshoot fault E660.0 (Air-cooled motor over-temperature)?
Direct Cause: The temperature of the air-cooled motor is too high.
| Root Cause | Confirming Method | Solution |
|---|---|---|
| The temperature of the air-cooled motor is too high. | Measure whether the temperature of the air-cooled motor is too high. | Cool the motor down. |
How do I troubleshoot fault E661.0 (Auto-tuned gains too low)?
| Root Cause | Confirming Method | Solution |
|---|---|---|
| 1. Gains obtained from STune or ETune are wrong. | – | 1. Set the notch manually if vibration cannot be suppressed. 2. Check whether the positioning threshold is too small. Increase the reference acceleration/deceleration time. 3. Modify the electronic gear ratio to improve the reference resolution, or increase the reference filter time in the parameter configuration interface and check whether cyclic vibration occurs on the machine. |
| 2. Vibration cannot be suppressed and the internal gains reach the lower limit. |
How do I troubleshoot fault E731.0 (Encoder battery failure)?
Direct Cause: The battery voltage of the absolute encoder is lower than 2.8 V.
| Root Cause | Confirming Method | Solution |
|---|---|---|
| The battery is not connected during power-off. | Check whether the battery is connected during power-off. | Set 200D-15h to 1 to clear the fault. |
| The battery voltage of the encoder is too low. | Measure the battery voltage. | Replace with a new battery of the matching voltage. |
How do I troubleshoot fault E733.0 (Encoder multi-turn counting error)?
Direct Cause: The encoder multi-turn counting is wrong.
| Root Cause | Confirming Method | Solution |
|---|---|---|
| The encoder is faulty. | Set 200D-15h to 2 to clear the fault. E733.0 persists after the servo drive is powered off and on again. |
Replace the servo motor. |
How do I troubleshoot fault E735.0 (Encoder multi-turn counting overflow)?
Direct Cause: Multi-turn counting overflow occurs on the absolute encoder.
| Root Cause | Confirming Method | Solution |
|---|---|---|
| The number of forward revolutions exceeds 32767 or the number of reverse revolutions exceeds 32768. | Check whether the value of H0B-70 (Number of absolute encoder revolutions) is 32767 or 32768 when the servo drive works in the absolute position linear mode (H02-01 = 1). | Set HOD-20 (Absolute encoder reset selection) to 2 (Reset the encoder fault and multi-turn data) and power on the servo drive again. Perform homing if necessary. |
How do I troubleshoot fault E740.2 (Absolute encoder error)?
Direct Cause: Communication timeout occurs on the absolute encoder.
| Root Cause | Confirming Method | Solution |
|---|---|---|
| The communication between the servo drive and the encoder is abnormal. | Check whether the value of H0B-28 (Absolute encoder fault information given by FPGA) is not 0. | Check whether H00-00 (Motor code) is set properly. |
Check whether the encoder cable is connected properly. |
||
Check whether the servo drive and servo motor are grounded properly. You can install a magnetic ring on the encoder cable to reduce interference. |
How do I troubleshoot fault E740.3 (Absolute encoder single-turn calculation error)?
| Root Cause | Confirming Method | Solution |
|---|---|---|
| An internal fault occurs on the encoder. | Check whether bit7 of H0B-28 is 1. | Check whether the encoder version (H00-04) is proper. |
Check whether the encoder cable is in proper condition. |
||
Replace the servo motor. |
How do I troubleshoot fault E740.6 (Encoder write error)?
Direct Cause: A write error occurs on the encoder.
| Root Cause | Confirming Method | Solution |
|---|---|---|
| An error occurs during writing the position offset after angle auto-tuning. | – | Check whether the encoder cable shield and the grounding cable are connected properly. |
How do I troubleshoot fault E755.0 (Nikon encoder communication failure)?
Direct Cause: Nikon encoder communication fails.
| Root Cause | Confirming Method | Solution |
|---|---|---|
| 1. An encoder communication error or encoder fault is detected after servo drive initialization is done upon power-on. | Check whether the encoder is wired correctly. | Ensure the encoder cable is connected properly. |
| 2. E755.0 will be reported when a multi-turn Nikon encoder that carries no battery for a long time is powered on again. | Check whether there is large equipment generating interferences on site and whether connectors are loose or cables are broken. | Take proper shielding measures if the interference source does exist. |
How do I troubleshoot fault E760.0 (Encoder over-temperature)?
| Root Cause | Confirming Method | Solution |
|---|---|---|
| The temperature of the absolute encoder is too high. | Measure the encoder or motor temperature. | Switch off the S-ON signal to cool the encoder down. |
How do I troubleshoot fault E765.0 (Nikon encoder beyond the limit)?
| Root Cause | Confirming Method | Solution |
|---|---|---|
| Over-temperature, overspeed, or EEPROM access error is detected in the encoder. | The fault is detected by the Nikon encoder, and the servo drive only displays the fault. | Set H0D-21 to 1 to clear the fault. |
How do I troubleshoot fault EB00.0 (Position deviation too large)?
Direct Cause: The position deviation is larger than the value defined by 6065h in the position control mode.
| Root Cause | Confirming Method | Solution |
|---|---|---|
| 1. Power output (UVW) phase loss or incorrect phase sequence occurs on the servo drive. | Perform motor trial run without load and check the cable connections. | Re-connect the cables according to the correct wiring diagram or replace the cables. |
| 2. The servo drive UVW cables or the encoder cable is disconnected. | Check the wiring. | Re-connect the cables. The UVW phase sequence on the servo drive side must be consistent with that on the motor side. Replace with new cables if necessary and ensure the cables are connected properly. |
| 3. The motor is stalled due to mechanical factors. | Check the reference and motor speed (200B-01h) through the software tool or the keypad: Ref in position control mode: 200B-0Eh Ref in speed control mode: 200B-02h Ref in torque control mode: 200B-03h Check whether the reference value is not 0 but the motor speed is 0. |
Eliminate mechanical factors. |
| 4. The servo drive gains are too low. | Check the position loop gain and speed loop gain of the servo drive. 1st gain set: 2008-01h to 2008-03h 2nd gain set: 2008-04h to 2008-06h |
Adjust the gains manually or perform gain auto-tuning. |
What should I do if the position deviation is too large (EB00.1)?
The direct cause is that the position deviation is too large. Here are the common root causes and solutions:
1. Power output (UVW) phase loss or incorrect phase sequence occurs on the servo drive.
- Confirming Method: Perform motor trial running without load and check the cable connections.
- Solution: Re-connect the cables according to the correct wiring diagram or replace the cables.
2. The servo drive UVW cables or the encoder cable is disconnected.
- Confirming Method: Check the wiring.
- Solution: Re-connect the cables. The UVW phase sequence on the servo drive side must be consistent with that on the motor side. Replace with new cables if necessary and ensure the cables are connected properly.
3. The motor is stalled due to mechanical factors.
- Confirming Method: Check the reference and motor speed (200B-01h) through the software tool or the keypad. Check references in position control mode (200B-0Eh), speed control mode (200B-02h), and torque control mode (200B-03h). Check whether the reference value is not 0 but the motor speed is 0.
- Solution: Eliminate mechanical factors.
4. The servo drive gains are too low.
- Confirming Method: Check the position loop gain and speed loop gain of the servo drive (1st gain set: 2008-01h to 2008-03h; 2nd gain set: 2008-04h to 2008-06h).
- Solution: Adjust the gains manually or perform gain auto-tuning.
5. The position reference increment is too large.
- Confirming Method:
Position control mode:
In CSP mode, view the gear ratio 6091-01h/6091-02h to check the position reference increment per synchronization cycle and convert it to the corresponding speed value.
In PP mode, view the gear ratio 6091-01h/6091-02h and determine the value of 6081h (Profile velocity).
In HM mode, view the gear ratio 6091-01h/6091-02h, and determine the values of 6099-01h and 6099-02h.
- Solution:
In CSP mode, decrease the position reference increment per synchronization cycle. The host controller should handle the position ramp when generating references.
In PP mode, decrease the value of 6081h or increase the acceleration/deceleration ramp (6083h/6084h).
In HM mode, decrease the values of 6099-01h and 6099-02h, or increase the acceleration/deceleration ramp (609Ah).
Decrease the gear ratio according to actual conditions.
6. The value of 6065h (Following error window) is too small relative to the operating condition.
- Confirming Method: Check whether the value of 6065h is too small.
- Solution: Increase the value of 6065h.
7. The servo drive or servo motor is faulty.
- Confirming Method: Monitor the operating curves through the oscilloscope function of the software tool: position reference, position feedback, speed reference, and torque reference.
- Solution: If the position reference is not 0 but the position feedback is always 0, replace the servo drive or the servo motor.
What causes an Encoder read/write check error (EA33.0)?
The direct cause is that internal parameters of the encoder are abnormal.
1. The serial incremental encoder cable is disconnected or loose.
- Confirming Method: Check the encoder cable connection.
- Solution: Check for wrong connection, disconnection and poor contact of the encoder cable. Route the motor cable and encoder cable through different routes.
2. An error occurs when reading/writing the RS485 encoder parameters.
- Confirming Method: If the fault persists after the servo drive is powered off and on several times, the encoder is faulty.
- Solution: Replace the servo motor.
What does “Position reference increment too large for once” (EB01.1) mean?
This error occurs when the target position increment is too large for a single instance.
- Confirming Method: Check the variation value between two adjacent target positions using the software tool.
- Solution:
1. Check whether the maximum motor speed fulfills the application requirements. If yes, reduce the target position reference increment, in order to lower the profile reference speed. If not, replace the servo motor.
2. Before switching the mode or enabling the servo drive, check whether the target position is aligned with current position feedback.
3. The communication time sequence of the host controller is abnormal, leading to slave data reception error. Check the communication time sequence of the host controller.
What does “Position reference increment too large continuously” (EB01.2) mean?
The direct cause is that the target position increment exceeds the limit value N times consecutively.
- Confirming Method: Check the variation value between two adjacent target positions by using the software tool.
- Solution:
1. Check whether the maximum motor speed fulfills the application requirements. If yes, reduce the target position reference increment, in order to lower the profiled reference speed. If not, replace the servo motor.
2. Before switching the mode or enabling the servo drive, check whether the target position is aligned with current position feedback.
3. The communication time sequence of the host controller is abnormal, leading to slave data reception error. Check the communication time sequence of the host controller.
What causes a Command overflow (EB01.3)?
This occurs when the target position is still in the process of transmission when the servo limit or software limit signal is activated and the 32-bit upper/low limit is reached.
- Confirming Method: Check whether the host controller continues sending commands after the overtravel warning occurs.
- Solution:
1. Check the servo limit signal (bit0 and bit1 of 60FD recommended) through the host controller.
2. Stop sending limit direction references when the servo limit signal is detected to be active by the host controller.
What should I do if the Target position is beyond the upper/lower limit (EB01.4)?
This occurs when the target position exceeds the upper/lower limit of the position in the single-turn absolute mode.
- Confirming Method: Check whether the target position setpoint is within the single-turn upper/lower limit.
- Solution: Set the target position to a value within the upper/lower limit.
What does “Software position limit setting error” (EE09.0) mean?
This error means the lower limit of the software is larger than or equal to the upper limit.
- Confirming Method: Check the values of 607D-01 and 607D-02.
- Solution: Reset the values of 607D-01 and 607D-02 and ensure the former is lower than the latter.
What causes a Home setting error (EE09.1)?
The direct cause is that the home offset exceeds the upper/lower limit.
1. The home offset is beyond the software limit.
- Confirming Method: The home offset is beyond the software limit when the encoder works in the incremental mode, absolute linear mode, or single-turn absolute mode.
- Solution: Set the home offset to a value within the software limit.
2. The home offset is beyond the upper/lower limit in the rotation mode.
- Confirming Method: The home offset is beyond the mechanical single-turn upper/lower limit when the encoder works in the rotation mode.
- Solution: Set the home offset to a value within the mechanical single-turn upper/low limit.
What does “Gear ratio beyond the limit” (EE09.2) mean?
The direct cause is that the electronic gear ratio exceeds the limit: (0.001, 4000 x Encoder resolution/10000).
- Confirming Method: Check whether the ratio of 6091-01h to 6091-02h exceeds the preceding range.
- Solution: Set the gear ratio to a value within the preceding range.
What causes the “No synchronization signal” error (EE09.3)?
The direct cause is that the MCU does not receive the synchronization signal when the servo communication is switched to OP status.
1. The communication synchronization clock is configured improperly.
- Confirming Method: Replace with another master (such as Beckhoff or Omron PLCs) and perform tests to compare between different masters.
- Solution: Rectify improper configurations.
2. The IN/OUT port of EtherCAT communication is connected reversely.
- Confirming Method: Check whether the IN/OUT port is connected reversely.
- Solution: Connect the IN and OUT ports according to the correct sequence.
3. The slave controller integrated circuit is damaged.
- Confirming Method: If the problem persists after the master is replaced, measure the synchronization signal generated from the slave controller integrated circuit with an oscilloscope. If there is no signal, the slave controller integrated circuit is damaged.
- Solution: Contact Inovance for replacing the slave controller integrated circuit.
4. The MCU pins are damaged.
- Confirming Method: Test the synchronization signal generated from the slave controller integrated circuit with an oscilloscope. If there is a signal, the pin of the MCU integrated circuit is damaged.
- Solution: Contact Inovance for replacing the MCU integrated circuit.
What does “PDO mapping beyond the limit” (EE09.5) mean?
This error means the number of mapping objects in TPDO or RPDO exceeds 10.
- Confirming Method: Check the number of self-indexes configured in 1600h or 1A00h.
- Solution: The number of the mapping objects in TPDO or RPDO cannot exceed 10.
What causes an “Invalid S-ON command” warning (E121.0)?
The direct cause is that the S-ON signal is set repeatedly.
1. The servo drive is enabled internally at the same time when the S-ON signal is activated through communication.
- Confirming Method: Check whether the S-ON signal is sent from the host controller when auxiliary functions (200D-03h, 200D-04h, 200D-0Ch) are used.
- Solution: Switch off the S-ON signal sent from the host controller.
2. The S-ON signal is sent from the DI and the software tool simultaneously.
- Confirming Method: Check whether the S-ON signal is sent from the DI terminal and the software tool simultaneously.
- Solution: Switch off the redundant S-ON signal.
What causes an “Inertia auto-tuning failure” warning (E600.0)?
Direct causes and solutions:
1. The vibration cannot be suppressed. Enable vibration suppression manually (H09-12 to H09-23) to eliminate the vibration.
2. The auto-tuned values fluctuate dramatically. Increase the maximum operating speed and reduce the acceleration/deceleration time during ETune operation. For screw mechanisms, shorten the stroke.
3. Mechanical connections of the load are loose or eccentric. Rectify the mechanical fault.
4. A warning occurs during auto-tuning and causes interruption. Clear the fault and perform inertia auto-tuning again.
5. The vibration cannot be suppressed if the load carries large inertia. In this case, increase the acceleration/deceleration time to ensure the motor current is not saturated.
What causes a “Homing timeout” warning (E601.0)?
The direct cause is that the home is not found within the time defined by 2005-24h.
1. The home switch fails.
- Confirming Method: There is only high-speed search but no low-speed search during homing. Or, after high-speed searching for the home, the servo drive keeps low-speed searching in the reverse direction.
- Solution:
1. If the home switch is used as the home signal, a hardware DI is used as the deceleration point. Check whether FunIN.31 (HomeSwitch) is assigned to a certain DI in group 2003h and then check the wiring of the DI. Manually change the DI logic and observe the value of 200B-04h to see whether the servo drive receives the corresponding DI level changes. If not, the DI is wired improperly. If yes, a fault occurs during homing. Perform the homing operation correctly.
2. If Z signal is used as the home signal, a hardware DI is used as the deceleration point. Check whether DI functions (FunIN.14 for positive position limit; FunIN.15 for negative position limit; FunIN.31 for home switch) are set properly and then check the wiring of the DI. Manually change the DI logic and observe the value of 200B-04h to see whether the servo drive receives the corresponding DI level changes. If not, the DI is wired improperly. If yes, a fault occurs during homing. Perform the homing operation correctly.
2. The set homing duration is too short.
- Confirming Method: Check whether the value of 2005-24h (Homing time limit) is too small.
- Solution: Increase the value of 2005-24h.
3. The speed in high-speed searching for the home switch signal is too low.
- Confirming Method: Check the distance between the initial position of homing and the home switch. Then check whether the value of 6099-01h is too small, resulting in a prolonged homing process.
- Solution: Increase the value of 6099-01h.
What does the “Homing switch error” warning (E601.1) mean?
This means the home switch is set improperly.
- Confirming Method: Check whether the limit signals at both sides are activated simultaneously. Check whether the limit signal and the deceleration point signal/home signal are both activated.
- Solution: Set the position of the hardware switch properly.
What causes the “Homing mode setting error” warning (E601.2)?
The homing method (0x6098) is set to an incorrect value based on the absolute position single-turn mode setting.
- Case 1: The homing method (0x6098) is set to a value outside the range of [-2 to 14] in the absolute position single-turn mode (H02-01 = 4).
- Confirming Method: Check the setpoint of 0x6098.
- Solution: Set 0x6098 to a value within the range.
- Case 2: The homing method (0x6098) is set to a value outside the ranges of [-2, 14], [17, 30], and [33,35] when the absolute position single-turn mode is not used.
- Confirming Method: Check the setpoint of 0x6098.
- Solution: Set 0x6098 to a value within the range.
What does the “Encoder battery warning” (E730.0) indicate?
This warning indicates the encoder battery voltage is lower than 3.0 V.
- Confirming Method: Measure the battery voltage.
- Solution: Replace with a new battery of matching voltage.
What happens during an Emergency stop (E900)?
The direct cause is that the logic of the DI (including hardware DI and virtual DI) assigned with FunIN.34 (EmergencyStop) is active.
- Confirming Method: Check whether the logic of the DI assigned with FunIN.34 is valid.
- Solution: Check the operating mode and clear the DI signal without affecting the safety performance.
What does “Invalid DI setting” (E902.0) mean?
The direct cause is that the DI function is set to an invalid value.
- Confirming Method: Check whether 2003-03h, 2003-05h, 2003-07h…2003-09h, and 2003-0Bh are set to invalid values.
- Solution: Set the DI function to a valid value.
What does “Invalid DO setting” (E902.1) mean?
The direct cause is that the DO function is set to an invalid value.
- Confirming Method: Check whether 2004-01h, 2004-03h, and 2004-05h are set to invalid values.
- Solution: Set the DO function to a valid value.
What causes a “Model identification check failure” (E908.0)?
The direct cause is that the first two check bytes of model identification are incorrect, indicating the attempt to read model identification parameters fails.
1. The model identification parameters are not written.
2. The check bytes of model identification are incorrect.
- Confirming Method: The warning persists after the servo drive is powered off and on again.
- Solution:
1. Write the model identification parameters again.
2. Set H01-72 to 1 to hide the model identification function.
What causes a “Motor overload warning” (E909.0)?
The direct cause is that the accumulative heat of the motor reaches the warning threshold (90% of the maximum allowable heat). NOTE: When E909.0 occurs, stop the servo drive for at least 30s before further operations.
1. The motor and encoder cables are connected improperly or in poor contact.
- Confirming Method: Check the wiring among the servo drive, servo motor and encoder according to the correct wiring diagram.
- Solution: Connect cables based on the correct wiring diagram. It is recommended to use the cables provided by Inovance. If you use customized cables, ensure such cables are made and connected based on the wiring instructions.
2. The load is too heavy. The motor keeps outputting an effective torque higher than the rated value.
- Confirming Method: Check the overload characteristics of the servo drive or servo motor. Check whether the average load ratio (200B-0Dh) keeps exceeding 100.0%.
- Solution: Replace with a servo drive of large capacity and a matching servo motor, or reduce the load and increase the acceleration/deceleration time.
3. The acceleration/deceleration is too frequent or the load inertia is too large.
- Confirming Method: Check the mechanical inertia ratio or perform inertia auto-tuning. Then view the value of 2008-10h (Load inertia ratio). Confirm the individual operation cycle when the servo motor operates cyclically.
- Solution: Increase the acceleration/deceleration time.
4. The gains are improper or the stiffness level is too high.
- Confirming Method: Observe whether the motor vibrates and generates abnormal noise during operation.
- Solution: Adjust the gains.
5. The servo drive or motor models are set improperly.
- Confirming Method: Check the motor model in 2000-06h and the servo drive model in 2001-0Bh.
- Solution: Read the servo drive nameplate and set the servo drive model and motor model properly.
6. The motor is stalled due to mechanical factors, resulting in overload during operation.
- Confirming Method: Check the reference and motor speed (200B-01h) through the software tool or the keypad (Reference in position control mode: 200B-0Eh; Reference in speed control mode: 200B-02h; Reference in torque control mode: 200B-03h). Check whether the reference value is not 0 but the motor speed is 0.
- Solution: Rectify mechanical factors.
7. The servo drive is faulty.
- Confirming Method: Power off and on the servo drive again.
- Solution: If the fault persists after restart, replace the servo drive.
What causes a “Regenerative resistor overload” warning (E920.0)?
The direct cause is that the accumulative heat of the regenerative resistor reaches the warning threshold (90% of the maximum allowable heat).
1. The external regenerative resistor is connected improperly, disconnected or loose.
- Confirming Method: Remove the external regenerative resistor and measure whether the resistance of the resistor is “∞” (infinite). Measure whether the resistance between terminals P and C is “∞” (infinite).
- Solution: Replace with a new external regenerative resistor and measure its resistance. If its resistance is consistent with the nominal value, connect it between terminals P and C. Prepare a new cable and connect the external regenerative resistor between terminals P and C.
2. The cable between terminals P and D is shorted or disconnected when an internal regenerative resistor is used.
- Confirming Method: Measure whether the resistance between terminals P and D is “∞” (infinite).
- Solution: Prepare a new cable to short terminals P and D.
3. The setting of 2002-1Ah is incorrect when an external regenerative resistor is used.
- Confirming Method: Check the setpoint of 2002-1Ah.
- Solution: Set 2002-1Ah to a proper value according to “5.4.3 Regenerative Resistor Settings”: 2002-1Ah = 1 (External, naturally ventilated), 2002-1Ah = 2 (External, forcible cooling).
4. The resistance of the external regenerative resistor used is too large.
- Confirming Method: Measure the resistance of the external regenerative resistor connected between terminals P and C. Check whether the resistance is too large by comparing it with value listed in “Table 5-3 Specifications of the regenerative resistor”.
- Solution: Select a proper regenerative resistor according to Table 5-3.
5. The value of 2002-1Ch (Resistance of external regenerative resistor) is larger than the resistance of the external regenerative resistor used.
- Confirming Method: Check whether the value of 2002-1Ch is larger than the resistance of the external regenerative resistor connected between terminals P and C.
- Solution: Set 2002-1Ch according to the resistance of the external regenerative resistor used.
6. The voltage input to the main circuit exceeds the specified range.
- Confirming Method: Check whether the voltage input to the main circuit cable on the servo drive side is within the following range:
220 V servo drive: Effective value: 220 V to 240 V, Allowable deviation: -10% to +10% (198 V to 264 V)
380 V servo drive: Effective value: 380 V to 440 V, Allowable deviation: -10% to +10% (342 V to 484 V)
- Solution: Adjust or replace the power supply according to the specified range.
7. The load moment of inertia ratio is too large.
- Confirming Method: Perform inertia auto-tuning according to “6.2 Inertia Auto-tuning”, or calculate the total mechanical inertia according to mechanical parameters. Check whether the actual load inertia ratio exceeds 30.
- Solution: Select an external regenerative resistor of large capacity and set 2002-1Bh (Power of external regenerative resistor) according to the actual value. Select a servo drive of larger capacity. Reduce the load if allowed.
8. The motor speed is too high, and deceleration is not done within the required time. The motor is in continuous deceleration status during cyclic motion.
- Confirming Method: View the motor speed curve during cyclic motion and check whether the motor is in the deceleration status for a long time.
- Solution: Increase the acceleration/deceleration time if allowed. Increase the cyclic deceleration interval of the servo drive if allowed.
9. The capacity of the servo drive or regenerative resistor is insufficient.
- Confirming Method: View the single-cycle speed curve of the motor and calculate whether the maximum braking energy can be absorbed completely.
- Solution: Select an external regenerative resistor of large capacity and set 2002-1Bh according to the actual value. Select a servo drive of larger capacity.
10. The servo drive is faulty.
- Confirming Method: – (Implied: fault persists after checking other causes)
- Solution: Replace the servo drive.
What causes the warning “Resistance of the external regenerative resistor too small” (E922.0)?
The direct cause is that the value of 2002-1Ch (Resistance of external regenerative resistor) is smaller than the value of 2002-16h (Minimum permissible resistance of regenerative resistor).
- Confirming Method: When an external regenerative resistor is used (2002-1Ah = 1, 2), measure the resistance of the external regenerative resistor connected between terminals P and C and check whether it is smaller than the value of 2002-16h.
- Solution: If yes, replace with an external regenerative resistor that matches the servo drive and set 2002-1Ch according to the resistance of the external regenerative resistor used. If not, set 2002-1Ch according to the resistance of the external regenerative resistor used.
What causes the “Braking transistor over-temperature” warning (E924.0)?
The estimated temperature of the braking transistor is higher than H0A-38 (Maximum protection threshold).
Why are parameter modifications not effective (E941.0)?
This occurs because the parameters modified are those whose “Effective time” is “Next power-on”.
- Confirming Method: Check whether modifications of these parameters can be effective at next power-on.
- Solution: Power on the servo drive again.
What does “Parameter saved frequently” (E942.0) mean?
The direct cause is that the total number of parameters modified simultaneously exceeds 200, and they are saved frequently to EEPROM.
- Confirming Method: Check whether parameters are modified quickly and frequently through the host controller and saved frequently to EEPROM (200E-02h = 1, 3).
- Solution: Check the operation mode. For parameters that need not be saved in EEPROM, set 200E-02h to 0.
What causes a “Forward overtravel warning” (E950.0)?
1. The logic of the DI assigned with FunIN.14 is valid (Forward driving inhibited).
- Confirming Method: Check whether a DI in group 2003h is assigned with FunIN.14 and check whether the DI logic of the corresponding bit of 200B-04h (Monitored DI status) is valid.
- Solution: Check the operation mode and on the prerequisite of ensuring safety, send a reverse run command or rotate the motor to deactivate the logic of the DI assigned with FunIN.14.
2. The servo drive position feedback reaches the positive software position limit.
- Confirming Method: Check whether the position feedback (0x6064) is close to the value of 0x607D-02.
- Solution: Ensure the travel distance of the load is within the software position limit.
What causes a “Reverse overtravel warning” (E952.0)?
1. The logic of the DI assigned with FunIN.15 (Reverse driving inhibited) is valid.
- Confirming Method: Check whether a DI in group 2003h is assigned with FunIN.15 and check whether the DI logic of the corresponding bit of 200B-04h (Monitored DI status) is valid.
- Solution: Check the operation mode and on the prerequisite of ensuring safety, send a forward run command or rotate the motor to deactivate the logic of the DI assigned with FunIN.15.
2. The servo drive position feedback reaches the negative software position limit.
- Confirming Method: Check whether the position feedback (0x6064) is close to the value of 0x607D-02.
- Solution: Ensure the travel distance of the load is within the software position limit.
What causes “Torque ripple compensation failure” (EA41.0)?
The attempt to write torque ripple compensation parameters to the encoder fails. An encoder data read/write error occurs.
- Confirming Method: Check the wiring of the encoder.
- Solution: If the fault persists after several attempts, contact Inovance for technical support.
How do I troubleshoot communication faults?
This section describes solutions to various communication faults:
EE08.0: SYNC signal loss
- Direct Cause: The SYNC signal is turned off when the EtherCAT network is in the OP state due to hardware errors.
- Confirming Method: Check whether the SYNC signal cycle is 0 through the oscilloscope in the software tool.
- Solution: Replace the servo drive. Contact Inovance for maintenance.
EE08.1: Network status switchover error
- Direct Cause: The EtherCAT network status switches from OP to other status when the servo drive is enabled, caused by mal-operation of the master or operator.
- Confirming Method: Check whether the master switches the network status when the servo drive is enabled.
- Solution: Check the network status switchover program of the host controller.
EE08.2: IRQ loss
- For servo drives with H01-00 (MCU software version) = 902.0 or earlier, the fault causes include all the causes for EE08.0, EE08.01, and EE08.3…EE08.6, without differentiation.
- For servo drives with H01-00 (MCU software version) = 902.1 or later, fault causes are further differentiated, which means EE08.2 will not be reported.
EE08.3: LAN cable connected improperly
- Direct Cause: The LAN cable is connected to the servo drive network port improperly. The physical connection is unstable or process data is lost. (Low 16 bits of H0E-29 = IN port loss events, High 16 bits = OUT port loss events).
- Confirming Method: Check: 1) if the LAN cable is connected securely, 2) if violent vibration occurs, 3) if the LAN cable is plugged in or out, 4) if the LAN cable provided by Inovance is used.
- Solution: Check the connection condition of the network port through the value change of H0E-29 and replace with a new LAN cable.
EE08.4: Data frame loss protection error
- Direct Cause: The PDO data is corrupted due to EMC interference or inferior LAN cable. Data is lost.
- Confirming Method: Check whether the high 16 bits of H0E-25 have values that are increasing.
- Solution: Check if the servo drive is grounded properly and rectify EMC interference. Check if the LAN cable used is the one designated by Inovance. Check if the LAN cable is connected properly.
EE08.5: Data frame transfer error
- Direct Cause: Error data frames are generated from the upstream slave, and the downstream device receives invalid data frames. The upstream station detects corrupted/marked frames.
- Confirming Method: Check whether a process unit error occurs due to transfer error (H0E-27) or invalid frame (H0E-28). Check if no counting is performed in RX-ERR of Port0.
- Solution: Check the upstream station to locate the fault cause.
EE08.6: Data update timeout
- Direct Cause: The slave is in the OP status and does not receive the data frame in a long time. The data frame is lost or aborted in the upstream station, or master performance is poor.
- Confirming Method: Check through the software tool whether the phase difference between SYNC and IRQ exceeds the value of H0E-22 multiplied by the communication cycle.
- Solution: Check whether the operation load of the master CPU is too large. Increase the communication time or set H0E-22 to a large value. Check whether link loss occurs on the upstream station.
EE11.0: ESI check error
- Direct Cause: The attempt to upload the XML file during EtherCAT communication fails. Either the XML file is not programmed or it was modified unexpectedly.
- Confirming Method: Check whether the XML version displayed in H0E-96 is normal.
- Solution: Program the XML file.
EE11.1: EEPROM read failure
- Direct Cause: The EEPROM communication of external EtherCAT devices fails. The EtherCAT data in the EEPROM cannot be read.
- Confirming Method: This fault persists after the servo drive is powered off and on several times.
- Solution: Replace the servo drive.
EE11.2: EEPROM update failure
- Direct Cause: The communication is normal but the message in the EEPROM is wrong or lost. The EtherCAT data in the EEPROM cannot be updated.
- Confirming Method: This fault persists after the servo drive is powered off and on several times.
- Solution: Replace the servo drive.
EE12.0: External devices of EtherCAT being abnormal
- Direct Cause: The EtherCAT network cannot be initialized.
- Root Cause 1: The FPGA firmware is not programmed.
- Confirming Method: Check whether the value of 2001-02h is 09xx.Y.
- Solution: Program the FPGA firmware.
- Root Cause 2: The servo drive is faulty.
- Confirming Method: Check whether the servo drive is faulty.
- Solution: Replace the faulty servo drive.
EE13.0: Synchronization cycle setting error
- Cause: The synchronization cycle is not an integer multiple of 125 μs or 250 μs.
- Confirming Method: Check the setpoint of the synchronization cycle in the controller.
- Solution: Set the value of synchronization cycle to an integer multiple of 125 μs or 250 μs.
EE15.0: Number of synchronization cycle errors too large
- Direct Cause: The number of synchronization cycle errors exceed the threshold. Excessive errors occur on the controller.
- Confirming Method: Measure the synchronization cycle of the controller using a digital oscilloscope or the oscilloscope function in the software tool.
- Solution: Increase the value of 200E-21h.
How do I configure the SV660N servo drive with an AM600 Series Controller?
Follow these steps:
1) Create an AM600 project:
- Open the InoProShop software.
- Create a New Project.
- Select “Standard project” template under Projects category.
- Name the project (e.g., SV660NTEST).
- Choose a location.
- In the Standard Project wizard, select Device: AM600-CPU1608TP/TN.
- Select the desired language for PLC_PRG (e.g., Ladder Logic Diagram (LD)).
- Click OK.
2) Add SV660N servo drive as a slave:
- Open the Network Configuration view.
- Click “Import ECT File”.
- Browse to and select the ECT file for SV660N (e.g., SV660_1Axis_V0.04). Click Open.
- Drag the imported SV660N device from the Network Devices List onto the EtherCAT Master line in the Network Configuration view.
3) PDO mapping:
- In the device tree, double-click the added SV660N device (e.g., InoSV660N).
- Go to the EtherCAT I/O Mapping tab.
- Select “Enable Expert Settings” under Additional options.
- Perform PDO mapping according to control needs. For CSP mode (Case 1 example), the default values of 1600 and 1A00 can be used. View and modify the PDO assignments (e.g., 0x1600 for outputs, 0x1A00 for inputs) and their content as needed. Right-click in the PDO Content area to Insert, Delete, or Edit PDO entries.
4) Configure axis parameters:
- In the device tree, double-click “Axis” under the SV660N device.
- In the Axis settings (e.g., Axis X), go to the General Setting tab.
- Set Software limits (Activate, Negative, Positive) if needed.
- Set the Unit in application (e.g., mm).
- Enter the Command pulse count per motor rotation (e.g., 16#800000 for 23-bit encoder, 16#100000 for 20-bit encoder).
- Enter the Work travel distance per motor rotation (e.g., 60 mm/rev).
- Go to the Homing Setting tab.
- Select the desired Homing method and Position methods. Configure Homing Vel, Acceleration, Crawl Vel, etc.
5) Add a program:
- Right-click on “Application” in the device tree.
- Select Add Object -> POU…
- Name the POU (e.g., POU).
- Select Type: Program.
- Select Implementation language: (e.g., Ladder Logic Diagram (LD)). Click Add.
- Implement the control logic using function blocks (e.g., MC_Power, MC_Home, MC_Reset, MC_MoveAbsolute, MC_MoveRelative, MC_Halt, MC_Stop) from the library.
- Define necessary variables, potentially in a Global Variable List (GVL).
6) Download and commission the program:
- Compile the program (Build -> Build). Check for errors.
- Connect to the PLC (Online -> Login or click the Login icon). You may need to scan for the device first if connecting via Ethernet.
- Download the program to the PLC (Online -> Download or click the Download icon). Confirm the download.
- Start the program (Debug -> Start or click the Start icon).
- Ensure the servo drive and axis are in a normal state. Monitor critical parameters using the monitoring function.
- Perform basic tests (homing, positioning) using the implemented program logic.
How do I configure the SV660N servo drive with an Omron NX1P2 Controller?
Follow these steps using Sysmac Studio:
1) Install Sysmac Studio: Install V1.10 or later.
2) Import device description file:
- Use the ESI file “SV660_1Axis_V0.04-0506.xml” or later (V2.5 or later recommended).
- Copy the file to: OMRON\Sysmac Studio\IODeviceProfiles\EsiFiles\UserEsiFiles
- Restart Sysmac Studio if this is the first time importing.
3) Set network connection (Ethernet only): If connecting via Ethernet (not USB), set the computer’s TCP/IP settings (e.g., IP: 192.168.250.2, Subnet: 255.255.255.0).
4) Configure the servo drive:
- Recommended versions: MCU H0100 = 0900.1 or higher, FPGA H0100 = 0902.1 or higher.
- Set parameter H0E-21 (EtherCAT slave alias) on the servo drive. Set it to a non-zero value corresponding to the physical connection sequence (e.g., 1 for the first slave, 2 for the second, etc.). This must be done while the drive is stopped.
5) Create a project:
- In Sysmac Studio, create a New Project.
- Select the correct Device (e.g., NX1P2-xxxxxx) and Version (e.g., V1.13 or later for NX1P2-1140DT).
- Click Create.
6) Set communication settings:
- Go to Controller -> Connection type.
- Select “Remote connection via USB” or “Ethernet connection via a hub”.
- If USB, perform “USB Communication Test”.
- If Ethernet, set the IP to 192.168.250.1 (default NX IP) and perform “Ethernet Communication Test”.
- Proceed if the test succeeds.
7) Scan the device:
- Go Online with the controller (Controller -> Online or click the Online icon).
- Observe the Controller Status in the lower right (should be online, running).
- If it’s a new controller project, confirm the project name when prompted.
- Go to Configurations and Setup -> EtherCAT.
- Right-click Master and select “Compare and Merge with Actual Network Configuration”.
- The controller will scan the network. Ensure H0E-21 was set correctly on the slaves.
- In the “Compare and Merge” window, verify the found slaves (e.g., SV660N).
- Click “Apply actual network configuration”. The slaves will be added to the configuration.
8) Set parameters (Offline):
- Go Offline (Controller -> Offline or click the Offline icon).
- 8-1) PDO Mapping:
- Double-click the added SV660N slave under EtherCAT Master.
- Go to the “PDO Map Settings” section.
- Click “Edit PDO Map Settings”.
- Select the desired editable RPDO (Output) and TPDO (Input) mappings (e.g., 259th receive PDO, 258th transmit PDO).
- Modify the PDO entries using “Add PDO Entry” and “Delete PDO Entry”. Ensure common parameters like Controlword (0x6040), Target position (0x607A), Statusword (0x6041), Position actual value (0x6064), etc., are mapped correctly.
- Click OK.
- 8-2) Axis Parameters:
- Go to Configurations and Setup -> Motion Control Setup -> Axis Settings.
- Right-click Axis Settings and select Add -> Motion Control Axis.
- Rename the axis if desired (e.g., Rewind_axis). Double-click the axis.
- In Axis Basic Settings:
- Set Axis number (should match H0E-21 set on the drive).
- Set Axis use to “Used axis”.
- Set Axis type to “Servo axis”.
- Under Output device 1, select the corresponding SV660N node (e.g., Node: 1 InoSV660N(E001)).
- Click “Detailed Settings”. Map the PDO objects selected in step 8-1 to the corresponding Function Names (e.g., map 6040h to Controlword, 607Ah to Target position, 6041h to Statusword, 60FDh to Digital inputs, etc.). Ensure bit-level mapping for 60FDh is consistent.
- 8-3) Unit Conversion:
- In Axis Settings -> Unit Conversion Settings.
- Set Command pulse count per motor rotation based on encoder resolution (e.g., 8388608 for 23-bit).
- Set Work travel distance per motor rotation based on mechanics (e.g., 60 mm).
- Select the desired Unit of display (e.g., mm).
- 8-4) Operation Settings:
- In Axis Settings -> Operation Settings.
- Set Maximum velocity, acceleration, deceleration based on application requirements.
- Set Torque limits if needed.
- Set Monitor parameters (In-position range, Zero position range) appropriately.
- 8-5) Software Limits:
- In Axis Settings -> Limit Settings.
- Enable and set Positive/Negative software limits if needed. These activate after homing.
- 8-6) Homing:
- In Axis Settings -> Homing Settings.
- Select the Homing method (e.g., Zero position preset, Use Z-phase input as home).
- Configure parameters like Homing start direction, Home input detection direction, speeds, etc.
- Ensure the correct servo drive functions (P-OT, N-OT, Home switch) are mapped to the corresponding Digital Inputs (e.g., DI1, DI2) in the PLC program/hardware and referenced correctly in detailed PDO mapping (60FDh).
- 8-7) DC Clock:
- Go to Configurations and Setup -> EtherCAT -> Master.
- In the Master settings, find the “DC Synchronous Control Settings”.
- Ensure “Enable Distributed Clock” is checked.
- The Task Settings (under Configurations and Setup) determine the primary cycle task (e.g., PrimaryTask, default 1ms). This acts as the PDO communication cycle. Modify if needed. Changes apply after next online synchronization.
9) Program control:
- Create a PLC program (under Programming -> POUs).
- Use Motion Control function blocks (e.g., MC_Power, MC_Home, MC_MoveAbsolute, MC_Jog) to control the configured axis.
- It’s recommended to check the axis status bit (e.g., MC_Axis000.DrvStatus.Ready) before enabling power (MC_Power) to ensure communication is established.
10) Online running:
- Go Online.
- Synchronize/Download the project (Controller -> Synchronization).
- Switch the controller to RUN mode.
- Monitor variables and use the Data Trace function if needed for debugging.
What are the different Homing modes available in the Omron NX controller for the SV660N?
The MC_Home and MC_HomeWithParameter function blocks support several homing modes, including:
- Home proximity input OFF (Mode 4): The controller searches for the home signal (e.g., Z-phase) after reaching the falling edge of the home proximity switch.
- Home proximity input ON (Mode 5): The controller searches for the home signal after reaching the rising edge of the home proximity switch.
- Proximity reverse turn/home proximity input OFF (Mode 0): If the home proximity signal is ON when homing starts, the controller reverses direction immediately after reaching the falling edge, then searches for the home signal.
- Proximity reverse turn/home proximity input ON (Mode 1): Similar to Mode 0, but uses the rising edge.
- Limit input OFF (Mode 8): Uses limit switches for homing.
- Proximity reverse turn/home input mask distance (Mode 9): Masks the home signal for a set distance after detecting the proximity signal edge.
- Limit inputs only (Mode 11): Uses only limit switches.
- Proximity reverse turn/holding time (Mode 12): Masks the home signal for a set time after detecting the proximity signal edge.
- No home proximity input/holding home input (Mode 13): Homing based on holding time without a proximity switch.
- Zero position preset (Mode 14): Uses the current position as the home position; the motor does not move. The home offset is written.
CAUTION: The home signal is searched at low speed in all modes. If the motor runs at high speed, the home signal might be masked during deceleration.
How do I configure the SV660N servo drive with Beckhoff TwinCAT3?
Follow these steps:
1) Install TwinCAT3 software: Download and install TwinCAT3 (supports Win7 32/64-bit or later). Ensure your Ethernet adapter is a 100M adapter with an Intel chip for reliable EtherCAT operation.
2) Copy configuration file: Copy the SV660N EtherCAT configuration file (e.g., SV660_1Axis_V0.04-0506.xml) to the TwinCAT installation directory: `TwinCAT\3.1\Config\Io\EtherCAT\`.
3) Create TwinCAT3 project: Open TwinCAT XAE (Visual Studio) and create a New Twincat3 Project (File -> New -> Project -> TwinCAT Projects -> TwinCAT XAE Project).
4) Install network adapter drive:
- In the Solution Explorer, go to TwinCAT Project -> I/O -> Devices.
- Right-click Devices and select “Scan”.
- Alternatively, go to TWINCAT -> Show Realtime Ethernet Compatible Devices…
- Select your local network adapter under “Incompatible devices”.
- Click “Install”. The adapter should move to “Installed and ready to use devices”.
5) Search for devices:
- Right-click Devices and select “Scan”.
- Confirm the found EtherCAT adapter (e.g., Device 1 (EtherCAT Automation Protocol)). Click OK.
- Click “Yes” to scan for boxes (slaves).
- The SV660N drive(s) connected should be found.
6) Add drive and link axis:
- The found drive (e.g., Drive 1 (InoSV660N)) will appear under the EtherCAT device.
- A prompt “EtherCAT drive(s) added” will appear. Select “NC – Configuration” and click OK. This automatically creates an NC axis linked to the drive.
- Click “No” when asked to “Activate Free Run”.
7) Configure servo drive parameters (SDO):
- Double-click the Drive under the EtherCAT device (e.g., Drive 1 (InoSV660N)).
- Go to the “CoE – Online” tab (requires configuration to be active, see step 9).
- Modify parameters as needed. For example, to set CSP mode, find index 6060h (Modes of operation), click “Set Value”, enter 8 (for CSP), and click OK.
- NOTE: Parameter saving via SDO requires H02-00 (Control mode) on the drive to be set to 9 (EtherCAT mode) and 200E-01h to be set to 3 (Save parameters upon power failure).
8) Configure PDO mapping:
- Go to the “Process Data” tab for the drive.
- Select the desired PDO assignments (e.g., 0x1600 for RxPDO/Outputs, 0x1A00 for TxPDO/Inputs).
- Right-click within the “PDO Content” area to Insert, Delete, or Edit entries to match your application needs (e.g., ensure Controlword, Target position, Statusword, Position actual value are mapped).
9) Activate configuration: Click the “Activate Configuration” icon (gear with blue arrow) on the toolbar. Confirm activation by clicking OK.
10) Control via NC controller or PLC program:
- NC Controller (CSP Mode Example):
- Go to MOTION -> NC-Task 1 SVB -> Axes -> Axis 1.
- On the “General” tab, set the Unit (e.g., mm).
- On the “Encoder” tab, under “Scaling”, set the “Scaling Factor Numerator” based on your mechanics and encoder resolution (e.g., 60 / 8388608 = 0.000007152557373 mm/Inc for 60mm travel per 23-bit revolution). Leave Denominator as 1.0.
- Under “Other Settings”, ensure “Encoder Mode” is set appropriately (e.g., ‘POSVELO’ if NC calculates position and speed).
- Activate the configuration again.
- Go to the “Online” tab for the axis. Click “Set” and then “All” to enable the drive.
- Use the F1-F4 keys for jogging. Adjust jog parameters on the “Parameter” tab if needed.
- PLC Program:
- Add a PLC project (Right-click PLC -> Add New Item… -> Standard PLC Project).
- Add the Motion library (Tc2_MC2): Right-click References -> Add Library… -> search for and add Tc2_MC2.
- Create a POU (Program Organization Unit): Right-click the POU node -> Add -> POU… Name it, select Type: Program, Language: (e.g., Ladder Logic Diagram).
- Implement control logic using MC function blocks (MC_Power, MC_Home, MC_MoveAbsolute, etc.).
- Link the NC axis to a PLC variable: Go to the PLC project instance under the PLC node -> expand it -> right-click the axis variable name -> Change Link… -> select the corresponding NC axis.
- Compile the PLC project (Build -> Build Solution).
- Activate configuration and Login (Click the Login icon). Download the code.
- Start the PLC (Click the Start icon).
11) Add HMI (Optional): Right-click VISU -> Add -> Visualization… to create an HMI interface linked to PLC variables.
12) Use Scope View (Optional): Add a Measurement project (File -> Add -> New Project… -> TwinCAT Measurement -> Scope YT Project). Add variables from the PLC or NC axis (e.g., .ActPos, .ActVelo) to monitor signals.
What are the encoder modes in Beckhoff TwinCAT NC?
There are three main encoder modes available under Axis -> Encoder -> Other Settings:
- POS: The encoder only calculates the position. This mode is typically used when the position loop is closed within the servo drive itself.
- POSVELO: The encoder calculates both position and speed. This is commonly used when the position loop is handled by the TwinCAT NC controller.
- POSVELOACC: The TwinCAT NC uses the encoder feedback to determine the position, speed, and acceleration.
How do I configure the SV660N servo drive with a KEYENCE KV7500 Controller?
Follow these steps using KV STUDIO (9.45 or above recommended):
1) Prerequisites:
- Use servo drive device description file “SV660N-Ecat_v0.09.xml” or later.
- Use servo drive MCU software version 901.4 or later.
- Familiarize yourself with 60FDh object definitions for digital inputs (bit0: neg limit, bit1: pos limit, bit2: home switch, bit16-20: DI1-DI5).
- Use KV STUDIO 9.45 or above (required for KV-XH16EC EtherCAT module).
2) Unit configuration setting:
- Create a new project in KV STUDIO.
- A “Confirm unit setting information” dialog appears.
- Click “Yes” to open the Unit Editor immediately.
- Click “No” to configure later (Tool -> Unit editor or double-click [0] KV7500).
- Click “Read unit setting” if the PLC is connected to read the current hardware configuration.
- In the Unit Editor, drag and drop or double-click the KV-XH16EC EtherCAT motion module onto the virtual rack.
3) Axis configuration setting:
- Double-click the added KV-XH16EC module in the project tree or Unit Editor. This opens the “Axis configuration setting” window.
- Click “[Register ESI file]”.
- Browse to and open the SV660N .xml file.
- Drag the “SV660_1Axis_V0.11” (or similar) device from the “Servo Drives” list onto the axis list area (Axis1, Axis2, etc.).
- Select the added axis (e.g., Axis1).
- Configure the basic settings:
- Verify Axis No., Product name, Vendor.
- Set Encoder resolution (e.g., 20bit).
- Set Max. motor speed (e.g., 6000.00 min-1).
- Set Max. motor torque (e.g., 350.00 %).
- Click “Slave detailed setting(D)…”.
4) Slave detailed setting:
- Basic Tab: Review settings. Ensure “Check at the start of communication” options are appropriate (typically checking Vendor ID, Product code). Set “Extension setting” to Enable if needed for advanced features.
- PDO mapping Tab: Review the default PDO mapping. If modifications are needed, add or remove entries. For standard operation, automatic assignment (right-click -> Automatic assignment) is often sufficient for motion functions.
- Motion function setting Tab: Review the mapping between logical motion functions (Control word, Target position, Statusword, etc.) and the PDO entries. Use “Automatic assignment(A)” (right-click menu) if you used default/standard PDOs. Ensure all mandatory items are assigned.
- Communication command at initialization Tab: Use default settings unless specific SDO writes are required at startup.
- DC setting Tab: Use default settings for Distributed Clock configuration unless specific timing is required.
- Advanced settings Tab: Use default settings unless specific EtherCAT configurations are needed.
- Click OK in the Slave detailed setting window.
5) Finalize Axis Configuration: Click OK in the Axis configuration setting window.
6) Coordinate Transformation:
- A prompt “Setting data newed. Set up coordinate transformation?” appears. Click “Yes”.
- In the Coordinate transformation window, enter the mechanical parameters (e.g., ball screw pitch, gear ratios).
- Select the desired coordinate unit (e.g., mm, pulse, degree).
- Click “Execute calculation”. The software calculates the necessary scaling factors.
- Click OK. The parameters are automatically written to the Axis control setting section for that axis.
7) Transfer to PLC: Transfer the configuration and program to the KV7500 controller.
What are the supported Homing Methods?
| Sub-index (hex) | Name | Default |
|---|---|---|
| 00 | Highest sub-index supported | 0x1F |
| 01 | 1st supported homing method | 0x0301 |
| 02 | 2nd supported homing method | 0x0302 |
| 03 | 3rd supported homing method | 0x0303 |
| 04 | 4th supported homing method | 0x0304 |
| 05 | 5th supported homing method | 0x0305 |
| 06 | 6th supported homing method | 0x0306 |
| 07 | 7th supported homing method | 0x0307 |
| 08 | 8th supported homing method | 0x0308 |
| 09 | 9th supported homing method | 0x0309 |
| 0A | 10th supported homing method | 0x030A |
| 0B | 11th supported homing method | 0x030B |
| 0C | 12th supported homing method | 0x030C |
| 0D | 13th supported homing method | 0x030D |
| 0E | 14th supported homing method | 0x030E |
| 0F | 15th supported homing method | 0x030Fh |
| 10 | 16th supported homing method | 0x0310 |
| 11 | 17th supported homing method | 0x0311 |
| 12 | 18th supported homing method | 0x0312 |
| 13 | 19th supported homing method | 0x0313 |
| 14 | 20th supported homing method | 0x0314 |
| 15 | 21th supported homing method | 0x0315 |
| 16 | 22th supported homing method | 0x0316 |
| 17 | 23th supported homing method | 0x0317 |
| 18 | 24th supported homing method | 0x0318 |
| 19 | 25th supported homing method | 0x0319 |
| 1A | 26th supported homing method | 0x031A |
| 1B | 27th supported homing method | 0x031B |
| 1C | 28th supported homing method | 0x031C |
| 1D | 29th supported homing method | 0x031D |
| 1E | 30th supported homing method | 0x031E |
| 1F | 31th supported homing method | 0x031F |
Additional comparison of homing methods between IS620N and SV660N series servo drives:
| No. | Homing Method | IS620N | SV660N |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | DOG type (with phase Z) | OK | OK |
| 2 | DOG type (without phase Z) | OK | OK |
| 3 | DOG-type jogging (with phase Z) | No | No |
| 4 | DOG-type jogging (without phase Z) | No | No |
| 5 | DOG type (contact) | OK | Homing is available and the home (origin) can be determined after homing, but the reference coordinate is not 0. Updating to the xml coordinate of IS620N zeroes out the reference coordinate. |
| 6 | Origin sensor and phase Z | OK | OK |
| 7 | Rising edge of origin sensor | OK | OK |
| 8 | Middle point of origin sensor | No | No |
| 9 | Rising edge of limit switch | Homing is available, but the reference coordinate after homing is not 0. | Homing is available, but the reference coordinate after homing is not 0. |
| 10 | Immediate homing of phase Z | OK | OK |
Homing restriction parameters can be set in Axis control setting > Origin return.
| Setting Type | Parameter | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Default | DOG type (with phase Z) | Decelerates upon DOG signal input and executes homing through phase Z signal. |
| Setting Range | DOG type (without phase Z) | Decelerates upon DOG signal input and executes homing in the falling edge of DOG signal. |
| DOG-type jogging (with phase Z) | Pauses after moving based on Dog ON upon DOG signal input, then moves to the homing direction through position speed control and executes homing with phase Z signal. | |
| DOG-type jogging (without phase Z) | Moves based on Dog ON upon DOG signal input before executing homing. | |
| DOG type (contact) | Executes homing when the ON duration of the torque limit signal keeps longer than the compression torque time upon DOG signal input. | |
| Origin sensor and phase Z | Executes homing in the initial phase Z position after the origin sensor is ON. | |
| Setting Range (cont.) | Rising edge of origin sensor | Executes homing using the rising edge of the origin sensor. |
| Middle point of origin sensor (without phase Z) | Takes the middle point of the ON range of origin sensor as the origin and compares it with that in the homing method “Rising edge of origin sensor”. Even if the light-receptive performance of the origin sensor is deteriorated, the homing position can hardly change with the time. | |
| Rising edge of limit switch | Executes homing with negative limit switch as the origin sensor. | |
| Immediate homing of phase Z | Executes homing using phase Z signal. | |
| Data setting type | Takes current coordinate as the origin coordinate. |
What do the SDO Abort Transfer Codes mean?
| Abort Code | Function Description |
|---|---|
| 0503 0000 | Trigger bits are not alternated. |
| 0504 0000 | Timeout occurs in the SDO protocol. |
| 0504 0001 | The client/server command word is invalid or unknown. |
| 0504 0005 | Memory overflow occurs. |
| 0601 0000 | Access to objects is not supported. |
| 0601 0001 | Indicates an attempt to read a write-only object. |
| 0601 0002 | Indicates an attempt to write a read-only object. |
| 0602 0000 | The object does not exist in the object dictionary. |
| 0604 0041 | The object cannot be mapped to the PDO. |
| 0604 0042 | The number and length of mapped objects exceed the PDO length. |
| 0604 0043 | General parameters are incompatible. |
| 0604 0047 | General device content is incompatible. |
| 0606 0000 | Accessing objects fails due to an hardware error. |
| 0607 0010 | The data type does not match and the service parameter length does not match. |
| 0607 0012 | The data type does not match and the service parameter is too long. |
| 0607 0013 | The data type does not match and the service parameter is too short. |
| 0609 0011 | The sub-index does not exist. |
| 0609 0030 | The value exceeds the parameter value range. |
| 0609 0031 | The parameter value entered is too large. |
| 0609 0032 | The parameter value entered is too small. |
| 0609 0036 | The maximum value is smaller than the minimum value. |
| 0800 0000 | General error |
| 0800 0020 | Data cannot be transmitted or stored to the application. |
| 0800 0021 | Data cannot be transmitted or stored to the application due to local control. |
| 0800 0022 | Data cannot be transmitted or stored to the application due to current device status. |
| 0800 0023 | An error occurs in the object dictionary or the object dictionary does not exist. |
| 0800 0024 | The value does not exist. |
What are the technical terms related to Safe Torque Off (STO)?
| Terms/Abbreviations | Description |
|---|---|
| Cat. | Classification of the safety-related parts of a control system. The categories are: B, 1, 2, 3, 4 (EN 13849-1). |
| CCF | Common cause failure |
| DC | Diagnostic coverage (%) |
| DTI | Diagnostic test interval time |
| SFF | Safe failure fraction |
| HFT | Hardware fault tolerance |
| PFH | Average frequency of dangerous failures per hour |
| PL | Performance level |
| SC | Systematic capability |
| SIL | Safety integrity level |
| T1 | Proof test interval |
| T2 | Diagnostic test interval |
| DI | Digital input |
| DO | Digital output |
| PCB | Printed circuit board |
| MCU | Micro computer unit |
| FPGA | Center processor unit |
| Safe Torque Off (STO) | The STO function brings the machine safely into a no-torque state and prevents it from unexpected starting. If the motor is running when STO function is activated, it coasts to a stop. |
| Safe state | Used to disable the PWM gating signal of the drive. |
| System reset | Reset the servo system by shutting off the power or executing software reset. |
| Proof test | Used to detect the failure of the safety-related system, not applied to STO circuits. |
| Mission time | Refers to the specified cumulative operating time of the safety-related parts of the servo drive during its overall lifetime. |
What do the safety pictograms mean?
| Pictogram | Signal word | Meaning | Consequences In Case of Disregard |
|---|---|---|---|
| ! (Triangle with exclamation mark) | DANGER | Imminent danger | Severe or fatal injuries |
| ! (Triangle with exclamation mark – General danger) | WARNINGS | Possible dangerous situation | Severe or fatal injuries |
| ⚡ (Triangle with lightning bolt – Specific danger like electric shock) | CAUTION | Possible dangerous situation | Minor injuries |
| 🚫 (Circle with diagonal line over an object/action) | STOP! | Possible high dangerous | Damage to the drive system or its environment |
| 📝 (Note icon) | NOTE | A Note containing information or tip which helps ensure correct operation of the product | – |
What are the general safety warnings?
High attention is required for electrical installation and at the system design to avoid hazards either in normal operation or in the event of equipment malfunction.
System design, installation, commissioning and maintenance must be carried out by personnel who have the necessary training and experience. They must read the operating instruction and this safety information.
It is the responsibility of the machine builder/OEM/system integrator to make sure that the essential health and safety requirements specified in the Machinery Directive are met. Risk analysis and risk assessment is needed before using a product. Make sure that adequate measures are taken to eliminate/reduce the relating risks and components chosen must meet the safety requirements.
What are the requirements for STO commissioning, operation, and maintenance?
1 General Requirements:
Technicians must be trained to understand the requirements and principles of designing and commissioning safety-related systems.
Those performing the maintenance must be trained to understand the requirements and principles of designing and operating safety-related systems.
Operators must be trained to understand the requirements and principles of designing and operating safety-related systems.
If the safety-related circuits on the control board fail to operate, replace it with a new one because it is not repairable.
2 Commissioning Checklists:
Start-up test and validation: IEC 61508, EN/IEC 62061 and EN ISO 13849 require that the final assembler of the machine validates the operation of the safety function with an acceptance test. The acceptance test must be performed:
1) at initial start-up of the safety function
2) after any changes related to the safety function (including wiring, components, and settings)
3) after any maintenance work related to the safety function.
The acceptance test must be carried out by an authorized person with expertise and knowledge of the safety function. The test must be documented and signed by the authorized person.
Signed acceptance test reports must be stored in the logbook of the machine. The report shall include documentation of start-up activities and test results, references to failure reports and resolution of failures. Any new acceptance tests performed due to changes or maintenance need to be logged into the logbook.
How do I perform the STO Start-up Checklist?
| Step | Action | Result |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | Ensure that the servo drive can run and stop freely during the commissioning. | |
| 2 | Stop the servo drive (if running), switch the input power off and isolate the drive from the power line by a circuit breaker. | |
| 3 | Check the STO circuit connections against the circuit diagram. | |
| 4 | Check that the shield of the STO input cable is grounded to the drive frame. | |
| 5 | Close the circuit breaker and switch the power on. | |
| 5.1 | Test the STO signal #1 when the motor is stopped. Set STO1 and STO2 to “H”. Give a stop command for the drive (if running) and wait until the motor shaft is at standstill. Activate the STO function by disconnecting (low state or open-circuit) the STO input signal #1 and give a start command for the drive. Ensure that the motor stays at standstill and the LED display of the servo drive displays “E150.1”. |
|
| 5.2 | Set STO1 to “H”, disable the ON/RUN command of the drive, then automatically reset the drive, enable ON/RUN command of the drive and check that the motor runs normally. | |
| 5.3 | Test the STO signal #2 when the motor is stopped. Set STO1 and STO2 to “H”. Give a stop command for the drive (if running) and wait until the motor shaft is at standstill. Activate the STO function by disconnecting (low state or open-circuit) the STO input signal #2 and give a start command for the drive. Ensure that the motor stays at standstill and the LED display of the servo drive displays “E150.1”. |
|
| 5.4 | Set STO2 to “H”, disable the ON/RUN command of the drive, then automatically reset the drive, enable ON/RUN command of the drive and check that the motor runs normally. | |
| 6.1 | Test the STO channel #1 when the motor is running. Set STO1 and STO2 to “H”. Start the drive and ensure the motor is running. Activate the STO function by disconnecting (low state or open-circuit) the STO input signal #1. Ensure that the motor stops and the drive trips. Reset the fault and try to start the drive. Ensure that the motor stays at standstill and the LED display of the servo drive displays “E150.1”. |
|
| 6.2 | Set STO1 to “H”, disable the ON/RUN command of the drive, then automatically reset the drive, enable ON/RUN command of the drive and check that the motor runs normally. | |
| 6.3 | Test the STO channel #2 when the motor is running. Set STO1 and STO2 to “H”. Start the drive and ensure the motor is running. Activate the STO function by disconnecting (low state or open-circuit) the STO input signal #2. Ensure that the motor stops and the drive trips. Reset the fault and try to start the drive. Ensure that the motor stays at standstill and the LED display of the servo drive displays “E150.1”. |
|
| 6.4 | Set STO2 to “H”, disable the ON/RUN command of the drive, then automatically reset the drive, enable ON/RUN command of the drive and check that the motor runs normally. | |
| 7 | Document and sign the acceptance test report which verifies that the safety function is safe and accepted to operation. |
Are there any special requirements for the STO function?
What is the STO (Safe Torque Off) safety function?
Safe Torque Off (STO) is a safety function that complies with IEC 61800-5-2:2016. It is built into Inovance SV660N series servo drives.
The STO function prohibits the control signal of the power semiconductors of the drive output end, preventing the drive from generating torque at the motor shaft end.
The STO function prevents the movement of the motor by two redundant external hardware signals: STO1 and STO2 that block the PWM signals to be transmitted to the power layer of the drive. These two +24VDC signals must be active to enable the drive’s normal operations.
If either one or both signals are set low, the PWM signals are blocked within a time of 20 ms.
The STO function table is as follows:
| STO1 Input | STO2 Input | PWM Signal |
|---|---|---|
| H | H | Normal |
| L | H | Inhibited |
| H | L | Inhibited |
| L | L | Inhibited |
STO Definition: Cuts off the force-producing power to the motor.
Description: The STO function brings the machine safely into a no-torque state and prevents it from unexpected starting. If the motor is running when STO function is activated, it coasts to a stop.
Safe state: Used to disable the PWM gate signals of the drive.
Operating mode: High demand mode or continuous mode.
How is the safety function monitored?
The LED display of the servo drive displays the selected mode, the status, and the error information of the servo drive.
Error: Displays drive fault code.
You can select and modify the configuration through the keypad. Refer to “4 Keypad Display and Operations” in the PDF for the definition of the keypad.
What are the STO-related fault codes?
| Fault code | Status | Description |
|---|---|---|
| E150.0 | STO activated by external request | Both of STO1/STO2 in “Low” state |
| E150.1 | Status of STO1/STO2 not consistent | Only one of STO1/STO2 in “Low” state, status of STO1/STO2 inconsistent |
| E150.2 | STO activated by internal diagnosis | OV/UV of 5 V power supply detected |
| E150.3 | STO activated by internal diagnosis | Input circuits of STO working abnormally |
| E150.4 | STO activated by internal diagnosis | Buffer circuits of STO working abnormally |
How does STO behave during exceptional operations (power-on, initialization)?
1) The PWM buffer is disabled through pulling-up of the enable terminal during power-on, so the PWM signal is prohibited.
2) The PWM buffer is disabled through pulling-up of the enable terminal during initialization of MCU, so the PWM signal is prohibited. This condition is relieved once the initialization phase is finished and servo drive works normally.
3) When servo system enters safe state through the STO function, the safe state can be cleared to return to normal operation after auto-reset of the drive when all of the following conditions are met:
The input state of the STO request must be “high”.
The S-ON or RUN command must be inactive.
No dangerous faults exist.
How do I troubleshoot STO faults?
| Fault Code | Cause | Action |
|---|---|---|
| E150.0 | STO1/STO2 not connected to the 24 V input voltage | Connect the STO1 and STO2 to the 24 V input voltage signal. |
| E150.1 | Input states of STO1/STO2 being inconsistent | 1) Ensure the requests for disconnecting the voltage of STO1 and STO2 are triggered simultaneously. 2) The input circuit is abnormal and a certain STO input signal is still in “High” status after the 24 V signal is disconnected. Contact Inovance for technical support. |
| E150.2 | OV/UV of 5 V power supply detected | Restore the 5 V power supply to normal state. Contact Inovance for technical support. |
| E150.3 | Input circuit of STO working abnormally | Fix the input circuit fault. Contact Inovance for technical support. |
| E150.4 | Buffer circuit of STO working abnormally | Fix the buffer circuit fault. Contact Inovance for technical support. |
What are the safety protective measures for using the STO function?
The STO function is not intended as a replacement for an Emergency Stop function (E-stop). In an emergency situation, the power supply cannot be cut off if no other measure is taken, and the electrical parts of the motor and drive are still energized, incurring the risk of electric shock or other risks. Therefore, maintenance work on electrical parts of the drive or motor can only be carried out after isolating the drive system from the main power supply.
Depending on the standards and requirements for a particular application, it may be possible to use STO as an integral part of an E-stop system. However, its main purpose is for use in a dedicated safety control arrangement whose purpose is to prevent any hazard from occurring, not for the use of an E-stop.
An E-stop is often provided in a machine to allow for unexpected situations where an operator sees a hazard and can take action to prevent an accident.
The design requirement for an E-stop differs from that of a safety interlock. Generally, the E-stop is required to be independent from any complex or intelligent control. It may use purely electromechanical devices to either disconnect the power or initiate a controlled quick stop through other means such as dynamic or regenerative braking.
NOTE: In the use of permanent-magnet motors, reluctance motors, and salient-pole induction motors, in spite of the activation of the STO function, a possible (although highly unlikely) failure mode may cause two power devices in the drive to conduct incorrectly. The drive system can produce an alignment torque which maximally rotates the motor shaft by 180° electrical angle for a permanent-magnet motor, or by 90° electrical angle for a salient pole induction motor or reluctance motor. This possible failure mode must be allowed for in the machine system design.
What are the warnings associated with STO and safety system design?
Max. rotating angle of the motor shaft = 360° electrical angle / Motor poles number
The design of safety-related systems requires specialist knowledge. To ensure that a complete control system is safe, the whole system needs to be designed according to recognized safety principles. The use of individual sub-systems such as drives with STO function, which are intended for safety-related applications, does not in itself ensure the safety of the complete system.
The STO function can be used for stopping the servo drive in emergency stop situations.
In normal operating mode, it is recommended not to stop the servo drive by using the STO function. If a drive running is stopped by using STO, the drive performs a coast to stop. If this is not acceptable, the system must be stopped using the correct mode instead of the STO function.
This publication is a guide to the application of Inovance STO function, and also on the design of safety-related systems for machinery control.
It is the responsibility of the designer of the end product or application to ensure that it is safe and in compliance with the relevant regulations.
What risk assessment considerations are needed for the STO function?
When using the safety function STO, be sure to perform risk assessment of the servo system in advance. Make sure that the safety integrity level of the standards is met.
The following residual risks can be present even when the safety functions operate. Therefore, safety must always be given consideration during risk assessment.
If external forces (such as gravitational force with a vertical axis) are applied when the safety functions are operating, the motor will rotate due to the action of these external forces. Use a separate mechanical brake to secure the motor.
If the servo drive fails, the motor may operate within a range of 180 electrical degrees. Make sure that safety is ensured even in hazardous situations.
The number of rotations and movement distance for each type of motor under potential failure conditions are listed below:
Rotational motor: 1/6 rotation max. (rotation angle at motor shaft conversion), depending on the number of motor pole pairs
Direct drive motor: 1/20 rotation max. (rotation angle at motor shaft conversion), depending on the number of motor pole pairs
Linear servo motor: 30 mm max., depending on the number of motor pole pairs
What is the Multi-Machine Recipe Management function?
In EtherCAT multi-axis applications, managing parameters for each axis individually can be time-consuming and error-prone. The Multi-Machine Recipe Management is a PC software feature designed for EtherCAT networking with Inovance servo drives (available in IS620N series servo drives only) to address this.
Functions:
Identification and scanning of axis drives: The PC software identifies Inovance EtherCAT devices based on the network card configuration.
Upload and download of all the cascaded axis drive parameters.
Storage and download of drive recipes.
Comparison and copy of axis drive parameters.
Comparison of device parameters and recipe parameters.
Operating Environment:
Hardware: PC
Software supported Operating system: WIN7 32/64-bit systems and WIN 10 32/64-bit systems
How do I use the Multi-Machine Recipe Management feature?
1) Start the feature: Click the “Multi-machine recipe” button under SV660N in the InoDriverShop software.
2) Scan for devices: Click the “Scan” button. All cascaded EtherCAT slaves will be scanned and displayed. Scanning time depends on the number of slaves. Non-Inovance slaves are displayed as “Non-Inovance device”.
3) Access Parameter Management: Click the appropriate icon (folder icon in the PDF example) to enter the parameter management interface.
4) Manage Recipes and Parameters:
Import recipe files: Import a saved machine recipe from the local computer to the current device(s).
Export to recipe files: Upload parameters from all slaves and save them as a recipe file. (Note: The recipe file does not contain parameters in groups H00 or H01).
Upload the parameters of the selected slave stations: Choose to upload parameters from all slaves, a subset of slaves, or a single slave.
Compare: Compare current parameter values between slaves, compare with default values, or compare with machine recipes.
Parameter copy: Copy parameters from one slave drive to other slave drives. (Note: Motor parameters cannot be copied).
How do I perform axis control setting using KV STUDIO?
To open axis control setting in KV STUDIO:
Click Tool > Axis configuration setting > KV-XH setting > Axis control setting.
OR
Click Axis control setting under Project in the project tree.
In axis control setting, you can configure:
Unit coordinate transformation
Software limit coordinates
Axis error settings
Axis control functions
Common settings for position control
Operation speed
JOG settings
How do I set up homing?
Before performing homing, assign the (+) limit switch, (-) limit switch, and Origin sensor in the Motion function setting under Axis configuration setting to each bit of object 60FD. The bit definitions for 60FD provided by Inovance are:
bit0: negative limit
bit1: positive limit
bit2: home switch
bit16 to bit 20: corresponding to DI1 to DI5 respectively.
In automatic assignment, you need to manually assign the (+) limit switch, (-) limit switch, and origin sensor to their corresponding bits in 60FD based on the wiring, or assign them to bits 16-20. If using bits 16-20, you must also assign them to the corresponding DIs of the servo drive.
Set the restriction parameters for homing in Axis control setting > Origin return. Refer to the Homing Method table for available methods and their descriptions.
How do I set up positioning operation?
1. Set the correct unit coordinate transformation before starting positioning. By default, it’s PLS (pulses), which doesn’t allow modification of numerator or denominator. If coordinate transformation calculation has been confirmed (e.g., using the Coordinate transformation calculation tool), the parameters will update automatically.
2. Set the motion profile (target coordinate and speed) for each required positioning segment in the Point parameter settings.
3. After setting, you can call the corresponding point number through your program to initiate the positioning operation.
4. You can preview the parameter trajectory by right-clicking on a point parameter (like No.1-Axis1) and selecting the appropriate option or using the shortcut shown in the PDF.
How do I monitor the unit (KV-XH16EC)?
The unit monitor allows you to observe the operating state and internal data of the KV-XH16EC unit.
To open the Unit Monitor:
Select the unit to be monitored.
Right-click and select “Unit monitor” from the shortcut menu.
OR
Double-click the unit with the left mouse button.
OR
Right-click the blank part in the main program view and select “Unit monitor” from the pop-up menu.
Within the Unit Monitor:
View the operating state of each axis.
Check if I/O signals (limit switches, origin sensor) are normal. A small black circle indicates a received message for the corresponding monitoring position.
View the error state of the unit.
Change the displayed monitor items by clicking “Monitor item setting” in the top right corner.
Clear axis errors using the “Error clear” button in the bottom right.
How do I use the Trial Run feature?
Trial run allows direct control actions without programming ladder diagrams. It’s accessed via the “Trial run” button in the unit monitor interface.
1. Select the control mode (Positioning control is recommended, warnings appear for speed or torque control).
2. Select the target axis.
3. OP enable/Servo ON (Button 1): Click “Cancel OP. Enable” / “Cancel servo ON” to enable operation and servo. Indicators “Operation ready” and “Servo ready” should turn green. Ensure the CPU unit is in PROG mode for safety.
4. Axis error/Error clear (Button 2): Check for axis errors. If present, rectify the cause and click “Error clear”.
5. JOG (Buttons 3): Click ‘<' or '>‘ to execute forward or reverse JOG. Adjust speed using the percentage slider (10% to 100%).
6. Inching (Buttons 4): Click ‘<' or '>‘ to execute forward or reverse inching based on settings in Axis control setting > JOG starting speed and Axis control setting > Inching movement.
7. Origin return (Button 5): Click the home icon to execute homing.
8. Teaching (Button 6): In online edit mode, select a point number, then click “Acquire” to save the current command coordinate to the designated point parameter’s target coordinate.
9. Trial run (Button 7):
– Designate a point number.
– Select “1 point operation” or “Cont. operation” (for up to 10 points).
– Select “Repeat” if needed (returns to the first row after the last).
– Set time intervals between points (0.1s to 20.0s) if using Cont. operation.
– Click “Start” to execute point positioning.
– Click “Decel Stop” to stop smoothly or “Force Stop” to stop immediately.
10. Changing current coordinate (Button 8): Click the coordinate display (“Command coordinate”). Enter the desired new coordinate in the dialog box and click “Change”. Click “Close” to exit.
What fuses are recommended for the servo drives?
| Servo Drive Series | Servo Drive Model | Rated Input Current | Recommended Fuse |
|---|---|---|---|
| Single-phase 220 V | SV660NS1R61 (Size A) | 2.3 A | FWP-15B |
| SV660NS2R81 (Size A) | 4 A | FWP-20B | |
| SV660NS5R51 (Size B) | 7.9 A | FWP-20B | |
| SV660NS7R61 (Size C) | 5.1 A | FWP-20B | |
| SV660NS0121 (Size D) | 8 A | FWP-35B | |
| Three-phase 220 V | SV660NS7R61 (Size C) | 5.1 A | FWP-20B |
| SV660NS0121 (Size D) | 8 A | FWP-35B | |
| Three-phase 380 V | SV660NT3R51 (Size C) | 2.4 A | FWP-15B |
| SV660NT5R41 (Size C) | 3.6 A | FWP-20B | |
| SV660NT8R41 (Size D) | 5.6 A | FWP-20B | |
| SV660NT0121 (Size D) | 8 A | FWP-35B | |
| SV660NT0171 (Size E) | 12 A | FWP-50B | |
| SV660NT0211 (Size E) | 16 A | FWP-70B | |
| SV660NT0261 (Size E) | 21 A | FWP-125B |
NOTE: When a fuse burns or a wiring breaker trips, do not switch on the power supply or operate the machine immediately. Identify the cause first. If the cause cannot be identified, contact Inovance. Each input cable must be connected to a fuse. Replace all fuses when one burns.
How do I ensure EMC Directive compliance?
To make SV660N series servo drives comply with the European EMC directive 2014/30/EU, EN 61800-3 C2, IEC 61800-3, and IEC 61800-5-2, follow these requirements:
1) Install the recommended external EMC filter (e.g., Schaffner FN3258 or FN2080 series) on the servo drive’s input end. Ensure the filter is reliably grounded. Use shielded cable (less than 30 cm) between the filter and the servo drive, connecting both to the same grounding reference surface.
2) Install the recommended AC reactor on the input end if needed (see section 12.1.5 of the PDF).
3) Use a shielded cable between the servo drive and the motor. Ground the shield 360 degrees with a cable gland.
4) Install and wire the servo drive according to the recommended wiring method (see “3 Wiring” in the PDF).
5) Install a common mode filter if necessary.
6) Install the servo drive in a cabinet with a fire-proof housing for electrical and mechanical protection, conforming to local laws and IEC requirements.
7) For 400 V class drives, connect the neutral point of the power supply to ground.
8) Use shielded cables for power (input/output) and control signals, routing them appropriately (see Cable Requirements and Routing section).
NOTE: When applied in the first environment (domestic premises), the drive might generate radio interference; additional measures may be needed. The system manufacturer is responsible for the final system’s compliance.
Recommended EMC input filters (Manufacturer: Schaffner):
| Series | Servo Drive Model | Rated Input Current (In) | Filter Model |
|---|---|---|---|
| Single-phase 220 V | SV660NS1R61 (Size A) | 2.3 | FN2090-3-06 |
| SV660NS2R81 (Size A) | 4 | FN2090-4-06 | |
| SV660NS5R51 (Size B) | 7.9 | FN2090-8-06 | |
| SV660NS7R61 (Size C) | 5.1 | FN 3258-7-44 | |
| SV660NS0121 (Size D) | 8 | FN 3258-16-44 | |
| Three-phase 220 V | SV660NS7R61 (Size C) | 5.1 | FN 3258-7-44 |
| SV660NS0121 (Size D) | 8 | FN 3258-16-44 | |
| Three-phase 380 V | SV660NT3R51 (Size C) | 2.4 | FN 3258-7-44 |
| SV660NT5R41 (Size C) | 3.6 | FN 3258-7-44 | |
| SV660NT8R41 (Size D) | 5.6 | FN 3258-7-44 | |
| SV660NT0121 (Size D) | 8 | FN 3258-16-44 | |
| SV660NT0171 (Size E) | 12 | FN 3258-16-44 | |
| SV660NT0211 (Size E) | 16 | FN 3258-16-44 | |
| SV660NT0261 (Size E) | 21 | FN 3258-30-33 |
What are the cable and routing requirements?
Power Cables:
Use shielded cables to fulfill EMC requirements.
If shield conductivity is insufficient, add a separate PE cable or use a four-conductor shielded cable with one conductor as PE.
Shields should be co-axial copper braids with >85% weaving density.
Wiring:
1) Keep motor cables and PE shielded cables (twisted) as short as possible. For motor cables >100m, install an output filter or dv/dt reactor.
2) Recommended to use shielded cables for control signals.
3) Recommended to use shielded cables for the motor brake.
4) Route motor cables away from other cables. Motor cables of several drives can be routed in parallel.
5) Recommended to route motor, power input, and control cables in different ducts. Avoid routing motor and other cables in parallel for long distances.
6) If control cables must cross power cables, ensure the angle is close to 90 degrees. Other cables cannot pass through the servo drive.
7) Lay power input/output and signal cables upright rather than in parallel if possible.
8) Ensure cable ducts are well-connected and grounded. Aluminum ducts can improve equal potential.
9) Connect grounding planes of different potentials properly using cables with a cross-sectional area > 16 mm².
10) Connect the filter, servo drive, and motor properly to the electrical system, ensuring full contact with conductive metal.
How can I solve issues with leakage current causing RCD tripping?
High-frequency leakage current generated by the servo drive can cause Residual Current Device (RCD) tripping. Recommendations:
Use an RCD with a tripping current not lower than 100 mA.
If multiple drives share an RCD, the tripping current must be not lower than 300 mA.
Factors affecting leakage current:
Distributed capacitance of the motor
Carrier frequency
Type and length of motor cables
EMI filter
Measures if RCD trips:
Increase the rated tripping current of the RCD.
Replace the original RCD with a time-delay type-B RCD.
Reduce the carrier frequency.
Shorten the length of the drive output cables.
Wind a magnetic ring around the power cables (PE cable excluded). Recommended RCD brands are Chint and Schneider.
How can I solve common EMC interference problems?
| Interference Type | Solution |
|---|---|
| RCD tripping | Reduce the carrier frequency without compromising performance. |
| Shorten the servo drive cable length. | |
| Wind the ferrite core around the power cables (PE cable excluded). | |
| For tripping at power-on: disconnect the grounding end of the external/internal filter and the grounding end of the input terminal’s grounding Y capacitor. For tripping during running/enabling: Install a leakage current filter, safety capacitor, and/or wind a magnetic ring. |
|
| Interference generated during running | Connect the motor housing to the PE terminal of the servo drive. |
| Connect the PE terminal of the servo drive to the PE terminal of the mains power supply. | |
| Route power cables (main circuit, power, regenerative resistor), control cables, and signal cables through different routes. | |
| Wind the ferrite core around the power cables (PE cable excluded). | |
| Install a capacitor to the interfered signal port or wind the ferrite core around this port. | |
| Install a matching resistor between the communication cable source and the load end. | |
| Add an auxiliary reference ground wire if differential cable pairs are used for communication. | |
| Adopt shielded cables as communication cables and apply additional common-ground connection between devices and cabinets. |
What are the requirements for UL Certification compliance?
This series of servo drives complies with UL standard 61800-5-1 and CSA C22.2 No. 274-17. To ensure compliance for machines integrating this drive:
Installation location: Install in a place with pollution degree 1 or 2 (UL standard).
Ambient temperature: Run the drive in an ambient temperature not higher than 50° C.
Wiring example: Follow wiring diagrams compliant with the Low Voltage Directive (see “3 Wiring” in the PDF).
Wiring of main circuit terminals:
Use UL-compliant crimping terminals and recommended tools.
Use crimping terminals with insulated cladding or sleeves.
Use UL-compliant insulated copper cables (75° C continuous max allowable temperature).
Select cable dimension and tightening torque according to “3 Wiring” in the PDF.
Fuse on the input side (primary side):
Connect a UL-compliant fuse on the input side to prevent short circuits (see “10 Troubleshooting” in the PDF for selection/recommendations).
Use Bussmann FWH series fuses for main circuits of 480 V (400 V class) and below (short-circuit current < 100,000 A).
NOTE: Handle fuse burning or breaker tripping carefully as described in the fuse recommendation section. Ensure each input cable is fused.
CLICK HERE TO DOWNLOAD INOVANCE SV660NT021I (01) PDF MANUAL